TABLE OF CONTENTS

1- ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

2- CCTV CASE STUDY AND GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
3- PUPLIC ADDRESS & MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS
4- SMATV SYSTEM
5- TELECOMMUNICATIONS
6- FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS
7- SPECIFICATION OF LIGHT FITTINGS
8- ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS
9- VENDORS AND MATERIALS
10- ELEVATORS SPECIFICATIONS
 1. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

1-CABLES

LOW VOLATGE CABLES, WIRES AND ACCESSORIES

The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect all cables and wires, commencing
from the Main
Distribution Board, The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect all cables and
wires, commencing from the Main Distribution Board, designated MDB, to sub-main
Distribution Boards, designated SMDBs; to Final MCB distribution Boards; to Feeder Pillars, to
Fire Fighting Pump set, and from SMDBs to respective final sub-circuit, MCB Distribution
boards, designated DBs; to isolators for water, booster pumps; isolators for AC split and
Package units; isolators for AC FCU etc., all in compliance with these Specifications and details
in power distribution schematic drawings and respective load schedules for various boards.

1. GENERAL.

1.1. Unless specified otherwise, copper conductors of 600/1000 V insulation

grade shall be used for all cables. All cables shall be adequately protected in
finishes.
1.2. No joints shall be permitted in cable runs between any two points unless
lengths involved are
longer than standard manufactured lengths. The joints, if any, and their positions
shall be approved by the Engineer.
1.3. Cable lugs, terminals and sweating sockets, all manufactured in strict
compliance with the requirements of BS 91:1998, including latest amendments,
shall be of correct bores appropriate to the sizes of cables to be connected. The
bore shall be of adequate diameter to accommodate all strands of cables core as
filling-in of surplus space with solder shall not be permitted. All soft solder used
in cable installation shall comply with the requirements of BS 219:1977 Grade E
or F for tinning and Grade H for wiped joints.
1.4. In general, routes of various cables shall be indicated in the cable routes
drawing for tendering purposes only. The final routing shall, however, be
approved by the Engineer before any installation is undertaken.
 1.5. All works associated with installation of cables shall include jointing
material, cable supports, cleats, brackets, perforated cable trays, ladders etc.
together with all necessary accessories.
1.6. L.V. cables from transformer/s to MDB/s shall be supplied and installed
by the Electricity and Water Authority.
1.7. Without prior approval of the Engineer, the Sub-Contractor shall neither
drill any steelworks nor weld any part, component or device to the steelworks to
provide support to the cables.

2. INSTALLATION OF CABLES.

2.1. In general, cables from MDB/s to SMDBs, and from SMDBs to Final MCB
distribution boards, isolators etc. shall be drawn in appropriate size uPVC
conduits, trunking or ducts cast in concrete floors, trenches, or run-on
perforated sheet steel cable trays/ladders along routes to be finalized on site.
2.2. All External cables to Water Pumps Panel, Compressor Panel, Final MCB
distribution boards, Feeder Pillar, Fire Fighting Pumps set, to SMDBs and other
such cables shall be laid direct in ground and shall be drawn in suitable and
appropriately sized uPVC conduits when crossing roads, footpaths, trenches etc.
The diameter of uPVC pipes shall generally be between 100 mm to 150 mm.
2.3. Final sub-circuit wiring shall be drawn in conduits or trunking. In general,
the installations shall be concealed within the building fabric. However, in
general service areas, workshop, plant rooms, main electrical room etc., the
installation may be surface mounted.
2.4. In all horizontal and vertical runs of cables along walls, beams, columns,
service ducts, air-wells etc., all cables shall be supported by “Claw” type cleats or
ladders in compliance with recommendations in BS 7671:2001.
For vertical runs, the spacing between adjacent cables shall be minimum twice
the diameter of the larger cable. The spacing between wall and cables shall be
minimum 25 mm.
2.5. Bends in cables shall be properly supported and shall be of the maximum
possible radius in the space available. The internal radius of every bend shall not
be less than the recommended value in BS 7671:2001.
2.6. Prior to commencing installation works, the Sub-Contractor shall submit
for engineer’s study and approval, the proposed method of installation of cables
in each area. The submission shall be complete with working drawings with all
details and dimensions for ducts, openings, chases, trenches etc. and supports
for cables.
2.7. The Sub-Contractor shall provide numbered brass or plastic discs at each
end of every cable run for easy identification of cables.

3. CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATED COPPER CABLES.

 3.1. All thermosetting cables specified shall be of 600/1000 V insulation grade
conforming to the requirements of BS 5467:1997, including latest amendments.
3.2. The Conductors shall be stranded and of plain annealed high-conductivity
electrical copper complying with the requirements of BS 6360:1991, IEC 228.
3.3. All 4-core cables specified shall have the conductors insulated by XLPE
compound, and the core insulation shall be colored Red, Yellow, Blue and Black
for identification. The bedding for the four cores shall be PVC compound over
which a single layer of galvanized steel wire shall be provided as armor. The final
serving over the armor shall be extruded PVC sheath of black color.
3.4. PVC compound used for bedding and sheath shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6746:1990.
3.5. XLPE insulated cables with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases
under fire conditions shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 6724:1997 for
armored cables and B.S. 721:1998 for non-armored cables.
3.6. XLPE insulated 300/500 V multicore cables with limited circuit integrity
under fire conditions shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 7629:1993.

4. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) INSULATED ARMOURED AND NONARMOURED COPPER

CABLES:

4.1. All PVC insulated, single wire armored/non-armored PVC sheathed

multicore cables with stranded copper conductors shall conform to the
requirements of BS 6346: 1997, including latest amendments.
4.2. Particulars related to specification of copper conductors, core color
codes, bedding, sheath etc. shall be the same as for those described for XLPE
cables under Item 3.6 above.
4.3. PVC compound used for insulation, bedding and sheath shall comply with
the requirements of BS 6746:1990.

5. PVC INSULATED PVC SHEATHED NON-ARMOURED COPPER CABLES.

5.1. All single and multicore PVC insulated PVC sheathed non-armored cables
of insulation grade 450/750 V with copper conductors shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6004: 2000.
5.2. Particulars relating to specifications of copper conductors, PVC
compound etc. shall be the same as for those described for XLPE cables under
Item 3.6 above.

6. FLEXIBLE CORDS AND CABLES

6.1. All insulated flexible cords and cables shall be of 300/500 V grade
complying with the requirements of BS 6500:2000.
 6.2. All insulated flexible cords and cables for use in high temperature zones
shall comply with requirements of B.S. 6141:1991.
6.3. Final connections to luminaires and pendants shall employ cables suitable
for continuous temperature of 150 deg.C. The cables shall have nickel-plated
conductors and shall be double fiber glass wrapped, braided and silicone
varnished.
6.4. Final connections to heating equipment, and where otherwise subjected
to heat, shall be silicone rubber insulated multicore cables suitable for
continuous temperature of 150 deg. C.

7. FIRE ALARM AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING CABLES.

Thermosetting insulated flexible cords and cables shall be of 300/500 V grade complying
with the requirements of BS 7629: 1993 and BS 6387:1994 Category CWZ. These cables
shall be designed for reduced flame propagation, for low smoke and corrosive gas
emission, and shall be surge, moisture, abrasion and damage resistant and as per latest
civil defense requirements.

8. RUBBER INSULATED CABLES

Rubber insulated cables for electrical power and lighting shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6007:2000.

9. CO-AXIAL CABLES.

Low-loss co-axial cables conforming to the requirements of BS: 5425:1986 shall be used
for Satellite/Terrestrial Master TV antennae system.

10. MINERAL INSULATED METAL SHEATHED COPPER CABLES.

10.1. Mineral insulated copper sheathed copper conductor cables with rated
voltage not exceeding 750V, with or without an overall high-grade PVC sheath,
shall conform to the requirements of BS 6207-1:1995.
10.2. All terminations for mineral insulated cables shall comply with the
requirements of BS 6207 -2:1995.
10.3. All works shall be carried out in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and in compliance with BS 6207-3:1995. The Sub-Contractor
shall ensure that all installation works shall be carried out by qualified and
specialist personnel who shall have received an approved course of
instructions in the termination and installations of mineral insulated cables.

11. CABLE TERMINATIONS.

 11.1. All cables shall terminate in glands recommended by the cable
manufacturer. An earth tag shall be provided to facilitate fitting of earth bonds
to the frames of equipment. A PVC shroud shall be fitted over each gland.
11.2. All terminations shall be carried out using a system of compression
jointing as recommended by the cable manufacturer.
11.3. Special protective bushes shall be used at points where cables pass
through metal surface such as distribution boards and trunking.

12. BINDING AND IDENTIFICATION SLEEVES

Binding and identification sleeves for use on electric cables and wires shall comply with
the requirements of BS 3858:1992.

2- CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS

CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS FOR WIRING AND CABLING

CONDUITS, TRUNKING, TRAYS, LADDERS, DUCTS AND UNDER

FLOOR TRUNKING

The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install a complete network of containment system
comprising conduits, underfloor trunking, cable trunking, trays, ladders and duct works in
various areas of the premises for satisfactory, correct, orderly and segregated distribution
of wiring and cabling for electrical power, voice, data and other ELV services.

1. GENERAL GUIDELINES

1.1. All conduits, trunking, trays etc. shall be arranged in a neat and inconspicuous manner,
and each system shall be completely assembled, inspected and tested prior to
cables/wiring being drawn in them.
1.2. All works shall be carried out in strict compliance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer and the Wiring Regulations in BS 7671:2001.
1.3. Notional routes of cables and other related instructions shall be indicated in the
drawings. However, prior to commencement of any parts of the works, the Sub-Contractor
shall be required to submit, for Engineer’s study and approval, two prints of
comprehensive working drawing indicating proposed routes of conduits, trays, trunking,
trays, ladders and ducts together with all relevant dimensional details.
1.4. All containment systems shall be supported and secured to the building fabric in a
manner to ensure these are fully protected and have no load or stresses other than the
loads of wiring and cabling they are designed to carry.
1.5. All accessories, fittings and components shall be of same manufacture as for respective
items of containment system.

2. INSTRUCTIONS AND GUIDELINES FOR CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS

2.1. No conduits of diameter smaller than 20 mm shall be used.

2.2. All conduits, throughout the installations, shall be of sufficiently large cross-sectional
area and shall be arranged, with sufficient number of strategically located draw-in boxes,
to allow easy drawing of any or all the cables. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the
number of wires drawn in a conduit, relative to its diameter, does not exceed the number
stipulated in the Wiring Regulations BS 7671:2001. Should these differ in any way with the
regulations of the Electricity Supply Authority, the requirements of the latter shall be
adhered to.
2.3. All conduits shall be run in a manner to facilitate self-draining to outlet boxes. Each
length of conduit shall be cleaned and dried with the help of a swab drawn through its
length, and all boxes shall be cleaned to remove moisture prior to installing cables.
2.4. Conduit bends shall be made with the bore of the tube remaining full and free
throughout and all conduits shall be perfectly smooth inside and outside, and free from
any burrs and sharp corners. Bends shall be made without heating the conduits and by
using approved type of bending machine or bending block to give results consistent with
the best grade of craftsmanship.
2.5. No more than two right angle bends shall be permitted between draw-in boxes. No
diagonal runs of conduits shall be allowed on the walls of structure. Conduits concealed in
the ceiling slab shall run parallel to walls and beams, and those concealed in walls shall be
run vertical and/or horizontal.
2.6. All conduits cast in concrete or laid in floor screeds shall be effectively secured,
positioned and protected against mechanical damage, ingress of concrete etc. Allowance
shall be made for thermal expansion and contraction of straight runs of conduits.
2.7. Where conduits run parallel to one another, the distance between adjacent conduits
shall not be less than 15 mm. At junction of multi-run of conduits, rectangular adaptor
boxes having internal dimensions not less than 150 x 100 x 50 mm, shall be used.
Maximum of 3 Nos. 20 mm diameter and a maximum of 2 nos. 20 mm diameter conduits
shall enter the longer and shorter sides of the boxes respectively. For more or larger sized
conduits, larger boxes of appropriate sizes shall be used.
2.8. All conduits embedded in walls shall be fully recessed to permit a minimum thickness of
15 mm plaster or other finish to be obtained. Ceiling boxes for lighting fixtures shall be
 brought flush with the ceiling plaster or finish. The mounting boxes for flush type switches,
socket outlets etc. shall be recessed squaring into the wall structure until the front edge is
level with the finished surface of the plaster or other finish.
2.9. Conduits shall be terminated in accessories, distribution boards etc. either by being
screwed into the tapped spouts or holes where such are provided, or by locking into
clearance holes by means of couplers and smooth bore hexagonal male bushes.
Connections between the conduits and box with clearance holes shall, in addition, be filled
with a brass compression washer between the box and the coupling with no exposed
thread.
2.10. Under no circumstances holes shall be drilled in any structural steel or
prestressed concrete without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
2.11. Adaptable switch and socket-outlet boxes in 1-gang and 2-gang configuration
shall be constructed of pre-coated galvanized steel complying with the requirements of BS
4662:1970. These shall be complete with adjustable lugs, brass earth terminals, oval
knock-outs, rubber grommets etc.
2.12. Separate and dedicated conduits shall be installed for lighting, small power,
telephone, structured cabling and other ELV systems.
2.13. The Sub-Contractor shall be required to submit calculations to justify the
proposed dimensions of the containment system in compliance with the space factors
recommended by IEE Wiring Regulations and by ETIHAD WE.
In general, space factor for conduits shall be 0.45 and space factor for trunking and
ladders shall BE 0.4.
2.14. Conduits installed on surface of walls and ceilings shall be supported along their
entire runs by saddlers that shall be spaced in compliance with the recommendations of
the manufacturer.
2.15. Conduits passing through water-proof membranes shall be equipped with 50
mm thick collars of appropriate thickness welded all around at membrane level, with the
membrane pressed over the collars. After installation of conduits, the sleeves shall be
filled with water tight sealant.

3. PVC CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

3.1.1. All PVC conduits shall be high-impact, rigid and heavy gauge complying with
the requirements of BS EN 50086-1:1994. Fittings and accessories shall be of
same manufacture as the conduits. Minimum thickness of walls
corresponding to respective outside diameter of conduits shall be as follows:

OUTSIDE DIAMETER (mm) WALL THICKNESS (mm)

20 1.8
25 1.9
32 2.5
38 2.5
3.2. All conduits shall be unthreaded, slip-fit and push-on type. Unless otherwise specified
only plain couplers shall be used. All joints shall be made with weather-proof adhesive as
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3. Terminations in metal equipment and accessories with a tapped entry shall employ
flanged couplings locked to the metal case with smooth bore brass/PVC bushes.
3.4. At all expansion joints in the structure, expansion couplers shall be installed.
3.5. Draw-in boxes and switch mounting boxes shall be made of PVC and shall be equipped
with earth terminals.
3.6. Wherever necessary, approved type of flexible conduits and adaptors maybe used.
3.7. Spacing of conduits runs from other services shall be the following minimum values:
i) Cold water: 50mm
ii) Hot water: 250MM
iii) Air Duct: : 20MM

4. GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES.

4.1. All metal conduits shall be heavy gauge welded screwed steel tubing complying with the
requirements of BS 4568:PART 1:1970, and shall be heavily galvanized both inside and
outside Throughout their entire lengths. All conduit fittings and accessories shall be
finished to the same classification of protection as for the conduits.
4.2. All conduits shall be fixed in approved manner by means of clamps, saddles, spacer bar
saddles, cast distance saddles, cadmium plated steel screws, bolts, nuts etc. all complying
with the requirements of BS 4568: PART 2:1970.
4.3. All conduits shall be threaded so that the ends of the conduits butt close together in
conduit coupling. Lock nuts shall be thoroughly coated with red lead after installation.
4.4. All conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous and shall be effectively
bonded and earthed. Earth connections and bonding to conduits shall be by means of
copper tape or copper earth wire and earthing clamps complying with BS 951:1999. Where
the conduit makes contact with structural steel, an efficient and permanent bond shall be
made between the conduit and metal work.
4.5. All conduit boxes shall be constructed of malleable iron or pressed steel and shall have
the same classification for protection as for the conduit. Where they do not serve as
outlets, they shall be fitted with lids secured with brass screws. Earthing terminals shall be
provided in all outlet boxes.
4.6. On completion of installations, the conduits shall be checked and all imperfections shall
be made good. Rust, minor damage and exposed threads in conduit runs installed on the
surfaces shall be painted with two coats of Zinc Chromate paint and finished with approved
air-drying metallic paint. Conduits concealed in the building structure shall be painted with
two coats of air-drying red lead paint. The paints shall be applied immediately after the
completion of conduit installation.
4.7. Wherever there is likely to be excessive condensation, boxes shall be filled with suitable
plastic compound approved by the Engineer.
4.8. At all expansion joints in the structure an approved type of flexible sliding connection
shall be provided in every run of conduit to take up any expansion or contraction of the
conduits under service conditions. Bonding across the joint shall be maintained by separate
circuit protective conductor.
4.9. All conduit runs shall have adequate clearances between them and all other service
lines.
4.10. To facilitate movement between cabling and isolators for equipment, flexible
conduit tubing and adaptors complying with the requirements of BS 731-1:1952 shall
generally be used for housing the cables. For such connections approved type of solid
bronze adaptors with standard thread for flexible conduits shall be used.

5. PVC TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS

5.1. Rigid heavy gauge PVC trunking of approved manufacture may be used in lieu of
multiple conduits runs. The trunking shall be rigidly supported along their entire lengths at
intervals not exceeding 1.25 m. All fixings shall be carried out with cadmium plated steel
screws.
5.2. All PVC trunking, lids, fittings and accessories shall comply with the requirements of BS
4678- 4:1982.
5.3. The installation of PVC trunking shall be carried out in strict compliance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
5.4. Allowances shall be made for expansion of the trunking by using washers at all fixing
points.
5.5. Separate circuit protective conductors shall be used throughout the system for earthing
purposes.
5.6. All jointing shall be carried out using vinyl cement glue in compliance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. GALVANIZED STEEL TRUNKING INSTALLATIONS

6.1. Heavy gauge galvanized sheet steel trunking of approved manufacture and of minimum
thickness 1.6 mm may be used in lieu of multiple conduits runs. The trunking shall be
rigidly supported along their entire lengths at intervals not exceeding 1 m. On horizontal
runs the lid or cover plates shall always face upwards.
6.2. All galvanized steel surface trunking, fittings, bends, tees, cable retainers, cable
separators, reducers, supports and other accessories shall comply with the requirements of
BS 4678-1:1971. These shall be rust-proof and shall be complete with external fixing lugs.
Site fabricated accessories shall not be allowed under any circumstances.
6.3. The lids or access plates shall be removable in easily-handled sections over the entire
length of straight runs of trunking. Overlapping collar sections or other similar approved
linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction of adjacent sections of the trunking.
6.4. All fittings and accessories shall be installed to ensure there are no sharp edges,
projecting screw threads or similar points within the trunking which may result in damage
to the cables.
6.5. All under-floor steel trunking shall comply with the requirements of BS 4678-2:1973.
These shall be rust-proof and shall be complete with external fixing lugs.
6.6. Thickness of steel sheets for different sizes shall be as follows:
i) Sizes up to and including 50 x 50 mm 20 SWG
ii) Sizes from 50 x 50 mm to 75 x 75 mm 18 SWG
iii) Sizes from 75 x 75 mm to 225 x 150 mm 16 SWG

6.7. Lengths of trunking shall be efficiently bonded to each other using strip copper links not
less than 12 mm x 2 mm and fixed with brass nuts and bolts and serrated washers. All
lengths shall be connected by “Fish plate” connectors. All trunking shall be supplied with
cable retaining straps at intervals of 1 m.
6.8. Trunking run horizontally shall be provided with cable separators with insulated pins at
1 m intervals. Trunking run vertically shall be provided with a cable support unit with
insulated pins at 3 m intervals.
6.9. Where trunking passes through floors and walls, fiber glass or an approved ceramic fiber
packing shall be fixed into trunking to form effective fire barrier.
6.10. Under no circumstances cutting and bending of trunking to form flanges and
attachments shall be permitted.

7. CABLE TRAYS

7.1. All cable trays shall be constructed of hot dip galvanized and perforated sheet steel
complying with the requirements of BS 1449:1.1:1991.
7.2. Cables trays shall be supplied in nominal 2.4 m lengths and shall be of the return flange
type.
7.3. Trays up to but not including 150 mm width shall be of thickness 20 SWG.
Tray of width 150 mm to 375 mm shall be of thickness 16 mm SWG.
Trays of width 400 mm to 600 mm shall be of thickness 14 SWG.
7.4. Sections of trays shall be jointed using 6 mm diameter mushroom-headed safety bolts
and nuts complying with the requirements of BS 1449.
7.5. Adequate copper earthing strips shall be fitted at every joint.
7.6. Holes cut in trays for passage of cables shall be suitably bushed.
7.7. Cables shall generally be fixed to and supported by perforated galvanized sheet steel
trays either wall mounted or suspended and supported from ceilings by sturdy galvanized
iron brackets. Cables shall be clipped to trays by nylon or plastic cable ties.
7.8. Plastic or stainless-steel trays shall be used in high corrosion areas.

8. CABLE LADDERS

8.1. All cable support ladders shall be manufactured from pre-galvanized steel sheet, of
minimum thickness 2 mm, complying with the requirements of BS 449-2:1969.
8.2. Ladders shall be hot-dip galvanized to comply with the requirements of BS 729:1971,
and shall be suitable for installation in humid conditions prevailing in the U.A.E.
8.3. The rungs of ladders shall be supported on either ends by hexagonal profiled steel sheet
Channels.
8.4. In both horizontal and vertical runs the ladders shall be firmly secured to walls or
suspended from ceilings by brackets to ensure they are able to withstand the weight of
cables.
8.5. Where ladders are mounted on walls, a minimum distance of 25 mm shall be
maintained between walls and cable surfaces.
8.6. Where ladders are run horizontally supported by cantilevers or other devices, the
spacing of the ladder shall be compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
8.7. The width of ladders shall be adequate to ensure that the minimum spacing between
surfaces of adjacent cables shall be minimum the diameter of the larger cable.
8.8. The ladders shall be connected to earth and electrical continuity shall be maintained
throughout their entire lengths.
8.9. The installation shall be complete with all accessories inclusive of necessary joints,
coupling, bends, support brackets, wall and ceiling plates, mounting rails, take off hooks
etc., all manufactured by the manufacturer of the ladders.
8.10. For aesthetic reasons, factory fabricated covers of suitable dimensions shall be
fixed below horizontally run ladders, with minimum 30 mm spacing between cable surfaces
and covers, throughout their routes, particularly in open areas like garages.

9. UNDERFLOOR TRUNKING SYSTEMS

Wherever required and indicated in drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall supply and install
one of the
following underfloor trunking/ducting cable distribution systems, which shall be complete
with all
essential components and accessories inclusive, but not limited to, service boxes, junction
boxes, vertical
access boxes, adaptor junction boxes, 13A twin socket outlets, voice, data and video
socket outlets etc.
a) Under floor trunking/ducting laid in screed.
b) Under floor trunking/ducting cast in-situ into the structural slab.
c) Flush floor cable trunking/ducting.
d) Raised floor trunking.
The selected system shall comprise:
i) High-quality corrosion-resistant trunking/ducting manufactured from hot-dipped zinc
coated low carbon sheet steel complying with the requirements of BS EN 10142:2000, or
UPVC trunking/ducting complying with the requirements of BS 4678-4: 1982.
ii) Robustly designed high-pressure, load-bearing, corrosion-resistant die-cast zinc alloy floor
service and junction boxes in compliance with the current EN Standards.
iii) Electrical power, voice, data and video socket outlets, complete with wiring, cabling and all
necessary accessories.
iv) To achieve high degree of flexibility, the layout of the trunking system shall be based on a
grid pattern.
v) Galvanized steel ducts may be of single compartment or of multiple compartment type
with metallic segregation between power and other ELV cables. Alternatively, single uPVC
ducts may be used for providing insulated enclosures for the different services.
vi) All installation works shall be carried out by skilled and experienced personnel in strict
compliance with manufacturers installation guidelines and recommendations, and in close
coordination with the main civil sub-contractor.
vii) Prior to placing order for equipment and materials and prior to commencing any
installation works, the Sub- contractor shall submit for engineer study and written
approval, manufacturer’s installation instructions, scheduled of materials and detailed
workshop drawings showing layout of trunking, floor service outlet and junction boxes.
viii) For In screed systems, the recommended dimensions of service outlet boxes and junction
boxes shall be 300 x 300 x 75-90 mm.

The boxes shall have provisions for access of ducting from all four sides, and all unused
entries shall be plugged with detachable side blanks.
The covers of boxes shall be designed with 6 mm recess to receive tiles, carpets etc.
The service boxes shall be equipped with suitable hinges designed to enable the trap
cover to open through 180 degrees and to give free access at all times to power, voice and
data outlets.
All boxes shall be adjustable in height independently of the ducting system to account for
the difference in floor thickness.
Adequate measures shall be provided to ensure protection of all emerging cables against
damage.
All boxes and covers shall be equipped with waterproof gaskets and circuit protective
conductors.

3-EARTHING SYSTEM
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect a complete earthing system
comprising necessary earthing electrodes, earth bars, earth electrode cables, earth
electrode inspection housing, protective conductors, connections and any other
components and accessories deemed necessary for a highly reliable, safe and satisfactory
earthing system to the approval of the Etihad WE Electricity and Water Authority,

1. GENERAL.

1.1. The installation of the earthing system shall comply with the requirements of BS
7671:2001 (IEE Wiring regulations) and BS-7430:1998 entitled “Code of Practice of
Earthing” should the regulations and recommendations detailed in the aforementioned
standards differ in any way with those of FEWA, the requirements and
recommendations of the latter shall be adhered to.
1.2. The main L.V earthing system shall comprise earth electrodes installed at
suitable locations near the sub-station / Main Electrical room. Appropriately sized
copper earthing conductor shall connect the earthing electrodes to main copper earth
bars, which shall be installed in the substation main electrical rooms. Frames of all items
of L.V. switchgear, all earthing conductors etc. shall in turn be connected to the main
earth bar.

2. EARTHING ELECTRODES.

2.1. Tests for soil resistivity shall be carried out in areas where earth electrodes are
to be installed.
2.2. In areas of high soil resistivity, it may be necessary to install more than one earth
electrode. In such cases the electrodes shall be at least 6 m apart with the necessary
couplers connecting them.
2.3. The number of earth electrodes and their types, diameter, length, setting depth
and the method of installation shall be in complete conformity with the aforementioned
standards and with the requirements of the local Electricity Supply Authority. The earth
electrode/s resistance shall not exceed 1.0 ohm or the value recommended by
Authority.
2.4. In general, the earth electrodes shall be driven to a minimum depth of 3 m or 0.3
m below permanent water level. The earth electrodes shall comprise minimum 16 mm
diameter hard drawn copper rods complete with hardened steel tip, driving cap and
phosphor bronze coupling suitable for the required size of copper earth conductor.
2.5. The copper earth conductor shall connect the earth electrodes to the main earth
bar via a test clamp to be located 0.6 m above F.F.L.

3. MAIN EARTH BAR.

In general, the main earth bar shall comprise a 65 x 10 mm high-conductivity copper bars.
25 x 4.75 mm copper strips shall connect all items of L.V. equipment in the sub-station/
Main Electrical room to the main earth bar.

4. EARTH ELECTRODE CABLES

The earth electrode cable shall be PVC sheathed standard copper conductor of appropriate
cross-sectional area. The cable shall connect the earth electrode/s to the main earth bar.
One end of the cable shall be sweated into a lug and connected to the main earth bar with
16 mm (minimum) diameter brass bolts with 3 brass washers and two brass lock nuts. The
other end shall be connected to the earthing electrode/s in compliance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of earth electrodes.

5. EARTH ELECTRODES INSPECTION HOUSING.

A concrete inspection housing with a heavy duty hinged cast iron cover and frame made in a
pit 300 x 300 x 300 mm shall be provided for each earth electrode connection. A permanent
label marked with the word “SAFTY ELECTRICAL EARTH-DO NOT REMOVE” shall be provided
at each connection.

6. ITEMS TO BE EARTHED.

6.1.1. All metal parts of every electrical equipment shall be connected to the earthing
system. Metal parts of items of electrical equipment to be earthed shall include, but
shall not be limited to, switchgear, metal armor of cables, metal conduits, trunking,
trays, accessories, outlet boxes, motor and pump casings, metal sinks, pipework,
plant accessories, lighting fixtures, switch plates, socket outlets etc. which are wholly
or partly encased in metal.
6.1.2. As described above, all items in the system shall be effectively earthed so that these
are continuously electrically conductive. The electrical resistance at any point in the
system to earth shall not exceed 1 ohm, or the value stipulated by the local
Electricity Supply Authority.
6.2. The neutral conductor shall not be earthed anywhere within the complex.
6.2.1. The earthing of water mains and other service lines shall be carried out in strict
compliance with the recommendations of BS 7671:2001.

7. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS.

Cross-sectional areas of protective conductors in relation to the cross-sectional area of

associated phase conductors shall be in compliance with Table 54G of BS7671:2001.

8. CONNECTIONS.

8.1. All joints in copper shall be carried out using a system of compression jointing.
8.2. Bolted connections shall be of the multiple bolt type. Bolts, washers and stop
nuts shall be of copper alloy, everdur, durium, duronze, or silicon bronze. Ferrous
hardware shall not be used. Where bare copper is joined by bolting, contact surfaces
shall be silver plated.

4-DIESEL GENERATOR (NOT INCLUDE)

5- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS

1. GENERAL.

1.1. These Specifications cover the supply, delivery, storage, installation,

 connection, testing and commissioning of all equipment and materials
required for the electrical installation works for the project, all in
compliance with the General and Particular Specifications and Drawings
1.2. Prior to bidding, the Sub-Contractor shall be required to visit the site to
ascertain limitations or constraints that may affect his works on site. In
addition, the Sub-Contractor shall study the Specifications and tender design
drawings in detail as no variations shall be allowed due to lack of knowledge
relating to site conditions and drawings implications.
1.3. The General and Particular Specifications shall be read in conjunction with the
Contracts Documents and Tender drawings. In the event of any discrepancies
between the drawings and the Specifications, the drawings shall be deemed
correct for tendering purposes. The Sub- Contractor shall, however, be
required to draw attention to such discrepancies at the time of submitting his
offer.
1.4. All electrical installation works shall be carried out in strict compliance with
details in drawings, load schedules for distribution boards, Schedules of
equipment and materials, technical Specifications of equipment and materials,
and any other instructions issued by the Engineer.
1.5. All electrical installation works shall conform to the best principles of modern
practice and shall be carried out by fully competent tradesmen of appropriate
grades to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.6. All equipment and materials shall be installed to guarantee satisfactory
operation at specified parameters.
1.7. To avoid delays and to facilitate smooth running of the works, the Sub-
Contractor shall ensure that after receipt of all necessary approvals from the
Engineer, prompt orders for all items of equipment and materials shall be
placed.
1.8. High-quality brand-new equipment and materials free from any flaws and
defects shall be used. Any equipment and material not accepted by the
Engineer shall be removed and replaced by the Sub-Contractor at his own
expense.
1.9. The Sub-Contractor shall ensure all equipment, accessories and components
are of appropriate protection grade for installation in various areas, taking
into account environmental considerations relating to dampness, sand, dust,
corrosion etc.
1.10. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all equipment,
materials, accessories and fittings proposed for installation in the project.

The Sub-Contractor shall submit Quality

1.11. All equipment shall be manufactured by reputable manufacturers of
international repute with ISO 9001 accreditation. The manufacturers should
have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of respective items for at
least ten years, and their products have been used satisfactorily in similar
projects.
1.12. The Sub-Contractor shall submit original documents of origin of country of all
respective equipment and materials proposed for the project. In addition, Bill
of Lading of all the said items of equipment shall also be submitted.
2. STANDARDS AND CODES

All electrical materials and equipment used in electrical installation works shall comply
with the of the latest edition of the relevant International Electro-Technical Commission
(IEC) publications and British Standards (BS).
All electrical installation works shall be carried out in strict compliance with current
rules, regulations, requirements and recommendations of the following institutes and
statutory authorities:
a) Electricity and Water Authority Wiring Regulations.
b) Wiring Regulations of the Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE), UK, now
published as BS 7671: 2001.
c) IEC Regulations for Electrical Installations in Buildings, publication IEC 364.
d) Local ETISALAT Office for all works related to Telephone and Structured Cabling
Systems.
e) Local Civil Defense Authority for all works related to Fire Detection and Alarm
System and Lightning Protection System.

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

All electrical equipment, materials, apparatus, accessories and fittings used in the
installations shall be suitable for use in the climatic conditions prevalent as detailed
below:

a) Maximum ambient temperature: 50 degrees C.

b) Relative humidity: 95%

4. ELECTRICITY SUPPLY AND SERVICE CONDITIONS

All electrical equipment, materials, apparatus, accessories and fittings used in the
installations shall be designed and manufactured to operate safely and continuously in
the electricity supply system provided by ADWEA with the following characteristics:

Voltage: 400V +10/- 6%, 3 phase, 4-wire

Frequency: 50 Hz +/-0 .1%
Neutral: solidly earthed, TNT system
Fault level: 30 KA, supplied from a 1000 kVA transformer 46 KA, supplied
from a 1500 Kva transformer
 Fault duration: 1 second.

5. STATUTORY APPROVALS, FEES AND INSPECTION

5.1. The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with ADWEA to obtain all relevant
information, data and instructions pertaining to his parts of the works.
5.2. The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with EihadWE to make all necessary
arrangements for the supply and installation of all high-voltage equipment for
connection of electricity supply for the project.
5.3. The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with ETISALAT to obtain all relevant
information, data and instructions pertaining to telephone, voice and data
system installation works.
5.4. The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with the local Civil Defense Authority to
obtain all relevant information, data and instructions pertaining to installation
works for Fire Detection and Alarm system and for Lightning Protection System
for the factory structure.
5.5. Prior to commencement of any installation works, the Sub-Contractor shall
submit specified number of copies of drawings to relevant authorities for
checking, comments and approval. Any modifications or additional
requirements by the relevant authority shall be brought forthwith to the
attention of the Engineer for further action and compliance.
5.6. To avoid unnecessary delays, the Sub-Contractor shall arrange for inspection
of works by the relevant authorities on an on-going basis during the course of
works.
5.7. On completion of works, final approval certificates from each statutory
authority shall be submitted to the Engineer for handing over to the Client.
5.8. The Sub-Contractor shall pay all attendance and other charges to the relevant
authorities.

6. CO-ORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES AND SUPPLIERS.

6.1. The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with the plumbing works sub-Sub-
Contractor to ascertain locations and routes of all water and drainage pipes to
ensure sufficient and safe clearances are maintained between these and
electrical services in all areas.
6.2. The ratings of isolators for water pumps, firefighting pumps, booster pumps,
A.C. Chillers, Air Handing Units, Fan Coil Units, Extract Fans and other
electrically operated equipment have been stipulated after coordination at the
design stage with the Plumbing and Mechanical Engineers. However, the Sub-
Contractor shall be required to coordinate with the concerned sub-Sub-
Contractors and manufacturers of proposed equipment and supply and install
suitable isolators of correct ratings to match requirements of equipment
finally selected for installation.
 6.3. The Sub-Contractor shall coordinate with the suppliers and installers of all
specialist equipment inclusive of false ceilings; A.C. equipment and duct work;
Fire Detection and Alarm System; Closed Circuit TV vigilance system;
Structured Cabling System for voice, data and TV Systems; Telephone System
installation etc. to facilitate, wherever applicable, correct and satisfactory
installation of containment network comprising conduits, trunking, trays etc.
for points associated with the respective systems.
6.4. Layout of A.C. grills, fire alarm detectors, sound system speakers, emergency
lighting luminaires, indoor and outdoor CCTV cameras, clearances above false
clings etc. shall be fully coordinated with other trades for proper and
satisfactory siting of lighting fixtures in the false ceilings.
6.5. Prior to commencement of any works, the Sub-Contractor shall liase with all
other sub-Sub- Contractors for all services and submit coordinated drawings to
the Engineer for his study, comments and final approval.
6.6. The Sub-Contractor shall include in his tender all necessary expenses, if any, or
providing services to other specialist sub-Sub-Contractors.

7. TENDER DRAWINGS AND POSITIONS OF FITTINGS.

7.1. Approximate locations of various items of electrical equipment inclusive of

wiring accessories, lighting luminaires, isolators, distribution boards, AC
Distribution Boards and Control Panels, Control Panels and components of Fire
Detection and Alarm system, Structured Cabling System, Telephone System,
etc. indicated in the drawings shall be assumed to be correct for tendering
purposes only, and are intended to indicate general requirements and
arrangement of aforementioned equipment and accessories. Locations of
items of electrical equipment may be changed on site to comply with furniture
layout and/or architectural requirements.
7.2. The electrical design drawings do not intend to show architectural, structural,
fabrication or installation details. For accurate dimensions refer to
architectural and structural drawings. Elevations for all services shall be
verified prior to commencement of any electrical installation works.

8. CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS

8.1. One sets of tender drawings for all electrical works shall be provided to the
Sub-Contractor. Any necessary design modifications shall be in the form of
design notes and / or sketches as directed by the Engineer.
8.2. To facilitate satisfactory execution of electrical installation works and to avoid
any conflict with other trades and services, the Sub-Contractor shall be
responsible for preparing all relevant coordinated construction drawings.
8.3. The sub-contractor shall submit, within thirty days of engineer’s instructions
for commencement of works, three copies of drawings indicating dimensioned
details of sleeves, openings, holes, chases etc. required in the structure; piping
 and equipment in shafts; piping and equipment in mechanical and plant rooms
and other critical areas; equipment foundations; trenches; anchors; inertia
slabs etc. to be provided by others to enable him to fulfill his part of the works.
8.4. Transparencies and four sets of printed copies of all coordinated construction
drawings approved and stamped by all other trades shall be submitted to the
Engineer.

9. WORKING AND “AS FITTED” DRAWINGS AND OPERATING MANUALS

9.1. During the course of the works the Sub-Contractor shall maintain a fully
detailed record of all changes to the Tender Drawings as true record of actual
installations.
9.2. The drawings shall show the complete electrical installation works of all
electrical systems within and external to the building, inclusive of the type,
cross- sectional areas and runs/lengths of all L.V. cables, the precise locations
of all cables which may be buried within the structure, and those sections of
any external cables which are buried directly in the ground.
9.3. The locations and depths of all underground cables and uPVC conduits for
incoming ETISALAT cables at the various entry points shall also be clearly
indicated.
9.4. The Sub-Contractor shall be fully responsible for the accuracy of dimensions of
all equipment with respect to space available, for accessibility of equipment
for maintenance and service, and for compliance with the rules, regulations,
requirements and recommendations of the statutory authorities.
9.5. Preparation and submission of drawings is subject to Contractual obligations
and any delay shall be subject to penalties and other remedies as determined
by the Engineer.
9.6. Within one month of completion of the installations, the Sub-Contractor shall
provide 3 No. complete sets of the following record drawings for all above
mentioned systems, as detailed below, for Engineers study, comments and
final approval:

i. General arrangement of all electrical services “AS FITTED”, to scale not less than
1:100 metric.
ii. Details of all items of plant and equipment including name and address of
respective manufacturer, type and model, serial number, duty, rating and any
other pertinent information.
iii. Single line schematic drawings to a scale not less than 1:100 metric, indicating
position of all distribution boards, isolators, switches, control panels etc. with
relevant notes describing their functions.

9.7. After obtaining approval in writing for the drawings, the Sub-Contractor shall
provide one negative and two prints of each drawing together with two bound
 sets of all manuals and operating instructions to the Engineer for issuing these
to the Client.

10. PERSONNEL TRAINING

10.1. Prior to acceptance of the works, the Sub-Contractor shall be required to train and
instruct Clint’s personnel in the correct use, operation and supervision of Fire
Detection and Alarm System, CCTV System and any other system installed in the
building.
10.2. Prior to acceptance of the works, the Sub-Contractor shall also be required to
demonstrate and explain to the clint personnel the correct operation of all items of
switchgear and the starting, running and stopping of all item of mechanical plant
installed in the building.
10.3. The cost of the training program shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price.
10.4. The supplier shall be required to provide operating manuals to supplement the training
courses.

11. ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

11.1. As a guide to the quality of workmanship required, names of three manufacturers

together with technical details and, wherever applicable, catalogue number shall
generally be specified for each item in the Schedule of Luminaires, Equipment and
Materials, drawing No. E-00.
11.2. Any alternative offered shall be equivalent or better in quality than those specified,
and shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to placing order or installing in
the project.

12. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

12.1. The Sub-Contractor shall provide necessary assistance and facilities to the Engineer to
inspect all materials and equipment at works on site during the progress of the works.
12.2. The Sub-Contractor shall provide, free of charge, all necessary labor, materials, testing
equipment and measuring instruments which may be required to carry out the various
tests on the installations in compliance with the recommendations of the relevant
statutory authorities and as directed by the Engineer.
12.3. The Sub-Contractor shall give fourteen days’ notice before the installation is ready for
inspection and testing. Subject to the Engineer’s agreement, the sub-contractor may
be proceeding with the test and forward three certified copies of the results obtained
to the Engineer. If the results are found satisfactory in every respect, the installation
shall be accepted, but such acceptance shall be without any prejudice to any claims in
respect of any defects which may develop during the guarantee period for
maintenance.
12.4. To facilitate progress of works it may be necessary to test sections of works separately.
12.5. Tests shall be repeated, within reasonable time and without extra charges, on any
sections of the installations which have failed the tests.
12.6. In case where sections of works are located above false ceilings, the Sub-Contractor
shall notify the Engineer that the works are ready for inspection and testing. No
enclosures shall be installed until inspection and testing have been completed.
12.7. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of electrical connections to
all equipment prior to switching on the supply for their operation.
12.8. After connection of electricity supply, the Sub-Contractor shall commission all sections
of the installations to demonstrate to the Engineer the satisfactory and correct
operation of all items of installations.

13. ELECTRICAL TESTS.

13.1. On completion of the installations and prior to its being made “alive” for services, the
sub-contractor shall carry out the recommended electrical tests, on all sections of the
works in the presence of Engineer and the representative of the EtihadWE.
13.2. All tests shall be carried out in strict compliance with the requirements and
recommendations of the 16th Edition of the IEE Wiring Regulations (BS7671:2001)
and the current Wiring Regulations of EtihadWE.
13.3. Electrical Tests shall include the following:
I. Insulation resistance tests between conductors, and between conductors and
earth.
II. Earth continuity tests.
III. Earth resistance measurements.
IV. Verification of polarity.
V. Ring circuit continuity tests.
VI. Operational tests on all Residual Current Circuit Breakers.

14. CONFIRMATION OF CABLE SIZES

Cable sizes indicated in the drawings and load schedules for respective distribution
boards are approximate. Sizes of each cable shall be recalculated to ensure that correct
cable sizes shall be installed to ensure that the voltage drop to the electrical circuit at
the final MCB distribution do not exceed 2.5% of ETIHADWE declared nominal voltage.

15. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING.

The Sub-Contractor shall provide maintenance, servicing and replacement of all

defective parts during the maintenance guarantee period from the date of handing over
the project.
16. SAMPLES.

The Sub-Contractor shall submit samples of all materials, fittings and fixtures to the
Engineer and obtain his written approval prior to placing order or using or installing
these in any part of the works.
17. SPARE PARTS.

In accordance with respective manufacturer’s recommendations, the sub-contractor

shall provide, as part of the contract, all special tools required for equipment
maintenance together with list of spare parts deemed essential for two years, together
with individual prices of all items of spares.

18. NOTICES.

In each electrical room the following Notices relating to important instructions and
information shall be
provided and hung in all electrical rooms:

i. The instructions for the treatment of electric shock, in Arabic and English languages,
mounted on a steel frame and screwed to the wall.
ii. A schematic diagram of the switchgear located in the room together with a complete
single line schematic drawing of the complete electrical distribution system, framed
and mounted on the wall.

19. LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION MARKS.

and shall also be identified by engraved labels to indicate the services

controlled or to identify individual apparatus or equipment. Labels shall be
securely fixed to the front cover of equipment in an approved manner.

20. NOTES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS.

20.1. Each Final MCB Distribution Board shall be sectionalized as indicated in respective
load schedules in compliance with EtihadWE’s requirements.
20.2. Multi Gang lighting control switches incorporating more than one phase shall be
equipped with phase barriers.
20.3. Lighting control switches shall be adequately rated to control respective inductive
loads.
20.4. Each hand dryer and water heater shall be supplied via a connection unit and shall
be controlled by a 20A DP switch with neon indicator.
20.5. Each A.C. FCU and A.H.U. shall be supplied via appropriately rated isolator.
20.6. Final locations of all wiring accessories shall be determined in coordination with
Architect’s instructions and in compliance with final furniture and equipment
layouts.
20.7. All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with details in load schedules of
respective final MCB distribution boards.
 20.8. Voltage drops to the farthest point of electrical supply shall not exceed 2.5% of
ETIHADWE’s declared nominal voltage.
20.9. All isolators shall be designed for heavy-duty service and shall comply with degree
of protection IP55 for internal and IP65 for external installations. All isolators
supplying motoring circuits shall conform with the requirements of type AC23.
20.10. Where cables, bus-ducts, cable trays, trunking, ladders, conduits etc. pass-
through fire rated floors, walk or roof, the Sub-Contractor shall provide internal and
external fire sealant. For non-fire rated locations, the silicon sealants shall be used.

6 – LIGHTING
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect complete lighting installations,
inclusive of luminaries, conduits, trunking, sub-circuit wiring, installation accessories etc., all in
strict compliance with these, Specifications, drawings, Load Schedules and Schedules for
Luminaries.

1. GENERAL

1.1. All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with cable sizes and circuit
details given in respective load schedules and drawings.
1.2. All wiring of multi-point sub-circuit shall be carried out as “loop-in “system. No
joint in any point in the wiring run shall be permitted.
1.3. Circuits supplied from different phases shall not be housed in the same conduit.
Care shall be exercised to ensure both the live and the neutral conductors of a circuit
shall in all cases be contained in the same conduit.
1.4. Every single pole switch and MCB in a two-wire circuit shall be connected to the
phase conductor. Every single-phase circuit shall have its own neutral and earth
connections taken from its respective final distribution board.
1.5. Wiring for each circuit run in trunking shall be taped and bound at intervals
throughout the entire length and shall be labelled at each junction and terminal point
for easy identification of circuits.
1.6. Prior to drawing wiring in conduits/trunking, the entire system inclusive of outlet
boxes, MCB distribution boards etc. shall be completed and inspected. Any
conduits/trunking not accepted by the Engineer shall be replaced without additional
charges.
1.7. Color code and identification of cable/wiring cores shall be in compliance with
electricity and water Authority’s final approval prior to placing orders for the same.
 1.8. Particulars of each luminary, together with respective number, type and rating of
lamps, shall be as described and specified in Schedule of Luminaries. Samples of each
type of lighting fixture and other related equipment together with photometric data
for each luminary shall be submitted for Engineer’s final prior to placing orders for
the same.

2. LIGHTING LUMINARIES AND CONTROL ACCESSORIES.

All luminaries shall be designed, manufactured and tested to comply with the relevant and
respective requirements of BS EN 60598-1:1993.
All luminaries shall be of high quality as specified in the Schedules. The type, size, number of
lamps, IP rating etc. for each luminary shall generally be specified in the Schedule of
Luminaries.

2.1. TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LUMINARIES.

2.1.1. Conventional tubular fluorescent luminaries complying with the requirements of BS

EN 60598 shall be equipped with spring-loaded bi-pin lamp holders and instant-start
control gear to give trouble free operation at an ambient temperature of 45 deg.C.
The control gear shall be of polyester resin filled type, noiseless in operation and
shall be contained within the body of the luminaries. All internal wiring shall be
silicon rubber flexible type of adequate cross-sectional area neatly clipped in
position.
2.1.2. The body of the luminaries shall be constructed of high-quality corrosion-resistant
sheet steel treated with a zinc-based primer and then stove-enameled.
2.1.3. All tubular fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS 1853: PART
1:1990, IEC81:1984. Unless specified otherwise, all lamps shall have daylight color
appearance and minimum color rendering index of 65.
2.1.4. Wherever specified, triphosphorous lamps shall be used to achieve high coloring
rendering index of minimum 80.
2.1.5. All ballasts shall conform to the requirements of BS EN 60920 :1991 and BS EN
60921:1991, and shall be electronic suitable for instant start operation.
2.1.6. All starters for fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS
3772:1990, IEC 155, 155a.
2.1.7. All lamp-holders shall comply with the requirements of BS 60400 :1992.
2.1.8. All luminaries shall be equipped with capacitors complying with the requirements of
BS 4017:1979, IEC 566:1972, to give a power factor in excess of 0.9 lagging.
2.1.9. Radio interference suppression capacitors shall be provided in each luminary.
2.2. ENERGY SAVING COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINARIES

2.2.1. Compact fluorescent lamp fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS EN
60598 shall be used wherever specified in compliance with descriptions detailed in
Schedule of Luminaries.
2.2.2. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be complete with integral control gear and other
components deemed essential for a high-quality lamp.
2.2.3. Wherever specified, triphosphorous lamps shall be used to achieve high coloring
rendering index.

2.3. INCANDESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES.

2.3.1. Lighting fixtures with tungsten filament lamps shall comply with the requirements of
BS EN 60598.
2.3.2. All tungsten filament lamps shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 6179:1982.
2.3.3. Edison screw lamp holders shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 60238:1992.
2.3.4. Bayonet lamp holders shall comply with the requirements of BS 5042: 1987, BS EN
61184: 1995.

2.4. LOW VOLTAGE HALOGEN LAMP LUMINARIES.

2.4.1. All low voltage halogen lamp luminaries shall comply with the requirements of BS
4533: PART 102: section 102.6:1990, BS EN 60598.
These shall generally be used as recessed down lighters and shall be complete with
separate or integral transformers and 50 W halogen lamps.
2.4.2. The body of the fixture shall be made of high-quality diecast aluminum with steel
hook springs and shall be complete with a 50 mm diameter dichroic reflector. A
terminal block mounting rod and the lamp’s steel hook fixing system shall facilitate
east installation.
2.4.3. Tungsten halogen lamps shall generally comply with the requirements of BS 1075:
1989, IEC 357: 1977.

2.5. EMERGENCY LIGHTING FIXTURES.

2.5.1. Emergency lighting fixtures shall be installed in approximate locations indicated in

the drawings. These shall be of the self-contained non-maintained type complete
with integral rechargeable battery, battery-charger, automatic mains failure change-
over switch etc., rated for three hours operating period.
2.5.2. Emergency lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS 5266, BS 4533:
PART 102: SECTION 102.22: 1990, BS EN 60598-2-22.
2.5.3. Automatic change-cover switches/contactors shall comply with the requirements of
BS 764:1990.

2.6. FLOOD LIGHT FIXTURES

2.6.1. Floodlight fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 60598 and shall be
designed for narrow beam or wide beam application suitable for metal halide, high
pressure sodium vapor or high-pressure mercury vapor lamps, as specified in the
Schedule of Luminaries.
2.6.2. The main frame and casing of the fixtures shall be constructed of die-cast aluminum.
2.6.3. Fixtures shall be complete with components and accessories deemed essential for
high-quality high-performance floodlight fixtures and shall be inclusive of, but not
limited to, mounting brackets, thermal fatigue resistant safety glasses, high class
mirror reflectors, integral ignitors, control gear etc.
2.6.4. Unless stated otherwise in Schedule of Luminaries, all fixtures shall be fitted with
silicon gaskets to give minimum degree of protection IP65.
2.6.5. Mounting bracket shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized steel and shall be
equipped with tilt scale with a range of 150 degrees.

2.7. BOLLARD LIGHTING FIXTURES

2.7.1. These fixtures shall generally be installed outdoors and shall comply with the general
requirements of BS 873: Part 3: 1980, BS EN 60958. These shall be of robust
construction and shall be designed to provide minimum degree of protection IP 65.
2.7.2. The body of these fixtures shall generally be constructed of high-quality die cast
aluminum and shall be complete with polycarbonate diffuser and fixing plate which
shall be buried in concrete.
2.7.3. These fixtures shall be of elegant design and shall be equipped with suitably rated
compact fluorescent, high pressure mercury vapor or metal-halide lamps complete
with all necessary control gear as specified in the Schedule of Luminaries.

2.8. POLE MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURES

2.8.1. These fixtures shall generally be installed outdoors in roads, car parking areas, green
areas etc. and shall comply with the general requirements of BS 4553: Part
102.6:1990, EN 60958. These shall be of robust construction and shall be designed to
provide minimum degree of protection IP 54.
2.8.2. The optical assembly shall generally comprise of aluminum gallery and a suitably
sized diameter clear glass diffuser complete with all necessary control gear for
metal-halide or high-pressure mercury vapor discharge lamps. Alternative and
superior assemblies shall also be acceptable.
2.8.3. Unless stated otherwise, the optical assembly shall be mounted on top of a
60mm/89mm diameter tapered pole/column complete with inspection lid, cable
terminal box, base plate, fixing bolts and all other necessary accessories. The heights
of poles and the material of pole, either hot galvanized steel or aluminum, shall be
indicated in the Schedule of Luminaries.
2.8.4. All poles and columns shall be designed and constructed to comply with
requirements of BS 5750: Part 2., BS 5649.

2.9. HIGH BAY LIGHTING FIXTURE

2.9.1. High bay fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 60598 and shall be
designed for medium beam or wide beam application suitable for metal halide, high
pressure sodium vapor or high-pressure mercury vapor lamps, as specified in the
Schedule of Luminaries.
2.9.2. Pendant mounted with polished aluminum reflector and glass protective cover. Gear
housing should be die cast aluminum.
2.9.3. Fixtures shall be complete with components and accessories deemed essential for
high quality high performance high bay fixtures.

3. ACCESSORIES FOR LUMINARIES

3.1. Lighting fixtures such as mirror light fixtures equipped with integral safety shaver
socket outlets shall incorporate safety isolating transformers used as integral parts of
lighting fixtures shall comply with the requirements of BS 3535: PART 1: 1990 and BS EN
60742: 1996.
3.2. Electrical track systems for luminaries shall comply with the requirements of BS
EN 60570: 1994.
3.3. All luminaries supporting couplers for domestic, light industrial and commercial
use shall comply with the requirements of BS 6972: 1988.
 7 - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
LOW VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR
CORRECTION PANEL/S

The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission, in the main
electrical room, automatic Power Factor Correction Panel, designated PFCPs, of KVAR
rating as called for and as indicated in the power distribution schematic drawings and in
the load schedules for respective Main Distribution Board MDB.
Unless stated otherwise, the PFCP shall not form an integral part of the respective Main
Distribution Board.
The PFCP shall comprise a robust enclosure equipped with, and complete with, main
incoming isolating switch, an electronic power factor regulator/controller, power factor
improvement capacitors, contactors, fuses and any other components and accessories
deemed necessary for a high quality, high-performance, reliable and safe power factor
correction equipment.
The components of PFCP shall be selected and designed to ensure that the power factor of
the system is
maintained at a minimum value of 0.9 lag, or a value stipulated by EtihadWE, for all loads
up to full load of the system. In addition, each PFCP shall be equipped with harmonic
suppression reactors.

1. GENERAL

In general, each PFCP shall conform to the following specifications and requirements:

1.1. The PFCP shall be factory built and shall be of modular cubicle pattern, floor
mounted, free standing, air-insulated, totally enclosed type, and shall, in addition, be
corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply with the requirements of BS 60439 - 1:1999.
Minimum degree of protection shall be IP 54.
1.2. The PFCP shall be constructed of highest-quality corrosion-resistant sheet steel
of adequate thickness, coated with an approved compound to provide excellent
resistance against scratches and corrosion.
1.3. The PFCP shall be designed for total front access, and provision shall be made for
bottom/top entry for the main incoming cable and shall be complete with cable box,
cable gland, lug, clamps etc. The PFCP shall be of suitable design to facilitate ease of
cabling, maintenance, inspection and testing, and shall ensure maximum safety to
operators, and to maintenance and testing personnel.
1.4. ON/OFF/AUTO switches shall be provided mounted flush on the panel.
2. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS.

2.1. Highly reliable low-loss (0.5 watts per KVAR) capacitors with self-healing
properties shall be used in the system.
2.2. The capacitors shall be environmentally acceptable using non-toxic
impregnations.
2.3. Each step shall be designed for 25/50 KVAR rating or as specified in the
distribution schematic drawing and load schedule/s for main distribution board/s.
2.4. All capacitors shall be derated to give design capacitance at 50 deg. C.
2.5. Each capacitor unit shall comprise requisite number of individual capacitor
elements. These elements shall be manufactured from impregnated metallized
polypropylene or metallized paper and plastic film and have self-healing property. Each
unit shall be fitted with a thermal protection device. The safety protection system shall
incorporate a fail-safe device for each capacitor element.
2.6. Suitable discharge resistors shall be provided to ensure capacitor terminal
voltage shall be reduced to 50 volts in one minute after switching off.
2.7. All capacitors used in the system shall be of 600/1000 V insulation grade and
shall comply with the requirements, including latest amendments, of BS 1650:1971, IEC
831.
2.8. All capacitors shall be designed to withstand the following overloads:
Overload tolerance : 6-7 % permanently.
: 15 % 8 hours per day

3. POWER FACTOR REGULATOR/CONTROL GEAR.

3.1. The function of the Regulator/Control gear shall be to monitor the network
reactive power and to achieve the required power factor by switching ON and OFF
capacitor steps. The Regulator/Control gear shall be microprocessor controlled, of
compact design and insensitive to harmonics.
3.2. The equipment shall incorporate a special fast acting soft switching contactor
arrangement to minimize the adverse effects of high inrush currents and system
disturbances caused by capacitor switching. Each KVAR step shall be controlled by two
contactors switching in cascade. These contactors shall incorporate a pre-connection
resistor system which reduces to a minimum the effect of current inrush. 100 A circuit
fuses shall be installed to protect each 50 KVAR capacitor step and its associated control
gear.
3.3. The Regulator/Control gear shall be designed and equipped with components to
provide the following features and facilities:
 Adjustment of power factor setting from 0.7 lag to 0.9 lead.
 No-volt release which instantly disconnects the automatic capacitor banks in the
event of mains supply failure. With the return of mains voltage, the capacitor banks
shall be switched ON after 90 seconds. This feature shall be available for both AUTO
and MANUAL operations.
 Facility for Automatic and Manual operation.
 Programming of different switching sequences.
 LED indication of capacitive and inductive load and the number of steps energized.
 Automatic adjustment to changes in network frequency.
 ON/OFF/AUTO switches with multistage switching facility
 The Regulator/ Control gear shall be equipped with the following:

i. 1 No. digital power factor meter covering a scale 0.7 lead-1-0.7 lagging.
ii. Fault indicator to give alarm when the selected power factor value is not reached
within a period of 5 minutes, and in the event of mains supply failure.

4. MAIN INCOMING ISOLATOR/LOAD BREAK-SWITCH.

4.1. These shall be complete with effective arc splitting plates and self-cleaning
contacts and shall be designed for positive opening and manual operation, all in
compliance with the requirements of BS EN 60947 - 3: 1999.
4.2. The main incoming isolator/load break switch shall be of 600/1000 V insulation
grade designed and rated for the required capacitive switching duty and rated impulse
withstand voltage of 12 kV.

5. CONTACTORS.

5.1. The Contactors shall be designed to withstand large transient current peaks at
high frequency of several kHz, which could occur during switching of capacitor banks.
The manufacturer shall submit calculations for the largest peak current the proposed
contactor will be able to make.
5.2. The Contactors shall have an electrical life time of 100,000 operations, and shall
be rated at 1.5 times normal rated current of capacitor banks.
5.3. The Contactors shall be designed and constructed to comply with the
requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 60947 - 4 - 1:2001.
6. HBC FUSES.
All low voltage fuses shall be current-limiting types of modern industrial design having
high breaking capacity to comply with the requirements of BS 88, BS EN 60269.
 8- DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.
LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR.
MAIN, SUB-MAIN AND FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.
ISOLATORS AND LOAD-BREAK SWITCHES

The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission all items of electrical
switchgear in
approximate locations indicated in the drawings, all in compliance with these Specifications and
details in single line distribution schematic drawings and in load schedule/s for respective
distribution boards. All busbars, active components and accessories shall be designed for
satisfactory operation in ambient temperature of 50C.

1. MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD (MDB)

1.1. GENERAL

1.1.1. The main L.V. Distribution Board, designated MDB, shall be of 600/1000V insulation
grade and shall be designed and constructed to comply with the requirements of BS EN
60439- 1:1999. The board/s shall be factory built and all busbar sections shall be
designed and certified to withstand short-circuit of 50 kA for 1 second.
1.1.2. The board/s shall be of modular cubicle pattern, floor mounted, air insulated, totally
enclosed, fully interlocked, and, unless specified otherwise, shall be segregated to
comply with the requirements of Form 4, Type 6 as specified in the aforementioned
Standards. The boards shall be vermin, corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply with
the degree of protection IP 43 as defined in BS EN 60439-2 -2000.
1.1.3. The boards shall be constructed of minimum 2 mm thick highest quality corrosion
resistant hot dipped electro-galvanized steel sheets, pretreated and coated with an
approved compound of minimum thickness 90 microns to provide excellent resistance
against corrosion and scratches. The boards shall be designed to facilitate extension at
either end, and shall allow for interchangeability of switchgear. Provision shall be made
for top or bottom entries for cables as appropriate. All necessary cable boxes, lugs,
glands, clamps etc. appropriate to cable sizes shall be provided. The boards shall be of
suitable design to facilitate ease of cabling, maintenance, inspection and testing, and
shall ensure maximum safety to operators, and to maintenance and testing personnel.
All panel doors shall be mechanically interlocked to prevent opening before the gear is
isolated.
1.1.4. The general arrangement of the boards shall be indicated in the appropriate drawing.
However, it shall be the responsibility of the Sub-Contractor to submit with his working
 drawings, for the engineer’s study and approval, the arrangement and physical layout of
the boards, together with manufacturer’s specifications and full technical details of the
switchgear and all ancillary equipment he proposes to use. The Sub-Contractor shall
ensure that his offer shall include all items, whether or not explicitly specified, but which
are deemed necessary for a complete, safe and satisfactory switchgear installation. The
Sub-Contractor shall also ensure that the board offered shall be of suitable dimensions
for the locations specified. A complete set of plans indicating details and fixing
dimensions together with necessary number of foundation bolts for the boards shall be
submitted.
1.1.5. If necessary, the boards shall be arranged for delivery to site in sections which can be
easily placed into positions and then bolted together. Lifting lugs shall be provided for
each section. The boards shall be installed complete in all respects and shall be tested
and commissioned to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer.
1.1.6. The manufacturer of the proposed boards shall submit, through the Sub-Contractor,
copies of Type Test Report from an independent, reputable and recognized testing
authority like KEMA or other members of LOVAG confirming that the short-circuit and
temperature-rise tests on the boards shall be satisfactory and in compliance with the
requirements of BS EN 60439.

Test Reports shall also be submitted to confirm that the dielectric properties,
effectiveness and short-circuit strength of protective circuits, clearances and creepage
distances and degree of protection of the board/s are satisfactory.
1.1.7. The manufacturer shall provide a mimic single line distribution schematic of the
distribution system applicable to each MDB, to the approval of the Engineer.
1.1.8. Each board shall be equipped with anti-condensation heater allowing relative humidity
settings between 50% to 100%.

1.2. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (A.C.B)

1.2.1. All A.C.B.s shall be designed to have a rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of not
less than 50 kA rms and shall conform to the requirements, including latest
amendments, of BS EN 60947-1:2004 and BS EN 60947-2:2003. Fault tests shall be
carried out on all the breakers appropriate to service rating of utilization category of the
aforementioned Standard. The thermal and short-circuit ratings of the circuit-breakers
shall be the enclosed ratings relating to the ambient temperature of 50 degrees C and
environment in which the circuit-breaker shall operate in service, and not the rating in
free air. Performance tests and certificates together with applicable de-rating curves of
the breakers shall be submitted.
1.2.2. All A.C.B.s shall be of the withdrawable type, and the operating mechanism shall be
hand operated spring assisted type to enable the closing speed to be independent of the
operator.
1.2.3. All A.C.B.s shall have main contacts of the multi finger type with individual self-aligning
springs for high contact pressure. Isolating contacts shall be of the removable,
silverplated, multi finger, spring-loaded cluster type to ensure perfect alignments at all
times.
1.2.4. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with effective and adequately designed arc chutes and arc
shields which shall enclose all current breaking contacts and shall be designed for
effective and fast arc chopping. The complete chute assembly shall be capable of being
easily removed for routine inspection of the chutes and contacts. The moving portion of
each circuit-breaker shall comprise a three-pole circuit-breaker with operating
mechanism, primary and secondary disconnection devices, auxiliary switches, position
indicators and necessary control wiring, all mounted on a robust steel framework. This
framework and all metal parts of the moving portion, apart from current carrying parts,
shall, when inserting the circuit-breaker into the cubicle, be solidly earthed before the
circuit-breaker reaches test position. The circuit-breaker shall then be effectively
earthed when it is in the cubicle.
1.2.5. All A.C.B.s shall have provision for earthing the outgoing terminals after withdrawals. A
complete set of earthing units for earthing purposes shall be provided. Provision shall be
made for padlocking the breaker in “OFF” and “EARTH” Positions. To prevent access to
live connections, all orifices shall be covered by lockable type safety shutters of
insulated material when the breaker is completely withdrawn or when it is in the
inspection position. Shutters shall be operated mechanically in the closed and open
positions when the breaker is racked in and out.
All A.C.B.s shall have three distinct positions as follows:

i. Fully inserted position.

ii. Test position.
iii. Isolated position.

1.2.6. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with high accuracy solid state microprocessor-based
protection devices to provide the following protection functions:
i. Protection against overload.
ii. Selective protection against short-circuits.
iii. Instantaneous protection against short-circuits.
iv. Protection against earth fault.
1.2.7. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with highly reliable mechanical and electrical interlocking
devices to prevent any maloperation.
1.2.8. All A.C.B.s shall be equipped with the following devices and indicators:
i. Charging lever for the closing spring.
ii. Spring charged/ spring released indicators.
iii. A.C.B. ON/OFF indicators.
iv. Padlocks for A.C.B. in the CONNECTED, TEST or ISOLATED positions.
v. Push button for releasing the moving part of draw out circuit breaker.

1.3. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B.)

1.3.1.All M.C.C.B.s protecting outgoing feeder circuits shall be of the instantaneous type and
shall be designed and constructed to have short-circuit breaking capacity of not less
than 30 kA for MDB fed from a 1000 kVA transformer, and not less than 35 kA for MDB
fed from a 1500 transformer. All M.C.C.B.s shall be fixed type and shall conform to the
requirements, including latest amendments, of BS EN 60947-2:2003.
1.3.2.All M.C.C.B.s shall be of thermal-magnetic, manually and automatically operated type,
and shall be designed to provide positive trip-free operation on abnormal overloads
with quick-break contacts for both manual and automatic operation. Adequate
protection for the stationary and movable contacts shall be provided with rapid and
effective arc interrupting devices. An inverse time-delay thermal overcurrent trip
element and a magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip element shall be provided on
each pole of the breaker for common tripping of all poles.
1.3.3.All M.C.C.B.s shall be designed for operating at ambient temperature of 50 degrees C.

1.4. BUSBARS

1.4.1. Busbars of adequate current-carrying capacity of highest conductivity hard drawn

electrolytic copper complying with the requirements of BS EN 60439-1:1999 shall be
rigidly fixed on insulating supports to withstand short-circuit mechanical and thermal
stresses. Reduced section neutral busbars shall not be allowed. All busbars shall be
designed for operation in 50 deg. C.
1.4.2. The busbars shall be air-insulated, air-spaced, fully shielded with barriers and seals
between adjacent cubicle compartments. All joints shall be carefully prepared, cleaned
and treated to prevent oxide formation. In addition, all connections and joints shall be
fully shrouded and insulated.
 1.4.3. The busbars system may comprise horizontal and vertical sections together with the
earth bar. Safe distances, based on air insulation, shall be maintained between
adjacent phase busbars.
1.4.4. The horizontal busbars shall be located in a separate screened compartment at the top
of the board to offer optimum ventilation requirements. The busbars shall be
supported, connected and protected to ensure they are able to withstand the severe
dynamic forces generated in the event of a short-circuit.
1.4.5. The vertical busbars shall be anchored to the horizontal busbars a manner to allow
them to expand and contract freely without generating mechanical stresses in the
structure.
1.4.6. Cross-sectional area of the neutral bar shall be the same as that for the phase busbars.
1.4.7. The earth bar shall be electrically and mechanically connected to the frame by clamps.

1.5. INSTRUMENTS AND METERS

1.5.1.Three number suitably scaled moving iron type ammeters conforming to the
requirements of BS 89-2:1990, BS EN 60051-2:1989, shall be flush mounted on the
panel.
1.5.2.number suitably scaled moving iron type voltmeter conforming to the requirements of
BS 89-2:1990, BS EN 60051-2:1989, together with an integral phase shift switch, shall
be mounted flush on the panel. The voltmeter shall be fused protected.
1.5.3.One number suitably scaled moving iron type power factor meter conforming to the
requirements of BS 89-5:1990, BS EN 60051-5: 1989 shall be flush mounted on the
panel.
1.5.4.One number kilo-watt-hour meter suitable for three phase integrated unbalanced
load, conforming to the requirements of BS 5685-1:1979, BS EN 60687:1993 shall be
flush mounted on the panel.
1.5.5.The Sub-Contractor shall ascertain from EtihadWE whether additional instruments,
other than those described above, would be required. The Sub-Contractor shall fulfill
all their requirements and place orders accordingly.

1.6. METERING AND PROTECTIVE TRANSFORMERS

1.6.1. All current transformers shall be insulated with the best available materials and shall
be capable of continuous and prolonged service without deterioration. The windings
shall be designed and constructed to withstand the severe effects of thermal and
mechanical stresses of short-circuit currents.
 1.6.2. Each C.T.s secondary wiring shall be earthed on one side through a removable link. In
the event C.T.s are connected in a star configuration, the star [point shall be earthed
via a removable link.
1.6.3. Each Current Transformer shall be equipped with a shorting link. Shorting links shall be
provided for each Current transformer.
1.6.4. Metering and protective current transformers shall conform to the requirements of BS
7626:1993 and shall be adequately rated to meet their respective burdens.

1.7. INTERNAL AND AUXILIARY WIRING

Internal and auxiliary fire-proof PVC-insulated cables complying with the requirements of
BS 6231:1998 shall be used for all switchgear and control gear wiring. All wiring shall be
protected against mechanical damage.

1.8. TOOLS AND SAFETY ACCESSORIES

1.8.1. To facilitate satisfactory and proper maintenance of board/s, the Sub-Contractor shall
supply a complete set of tools recommended by the manufacturer.
1.8.2. For safety, the Sub-Contractor shall provide full length rubber mattress in front of each
board.
1.8.3. The Sub-Contractor shall provide Warning Signs on L.V room doors and Access Panels.

1.9. LABELLING.

The incoming and every outgoing feeder cubicle shall be labelled both in Arabic and in
English languages, by means of approved name plates, screw fixed to the cubicle doors.

2. SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD/S (SMDBs)

2.1. GENERAL.

2.1.1. The sub-main distribution boards, designated SMDB, shall be of 600/1000 V

insulation grade and shall be designed and constructed to comply with the
requirements of BS EN 60439-1:1999. The boards shall be factory built and the
required busbar short-circuit level for each SMDB shall be indicated in the distribution
schematic drawing.
2.1.2. SMDBs shall generally be of the wall-mounted, air-insulated, totally enclosed and fully
interlocked type with internal separation and segregation to comply with the
 requirements of Form 2 as specified in the aforementioned Standards. The boards shall
be KEMA certified and shall be vermin, corrosion, dust and damp proof to comply with
the degree of protection IP 43.
2.1.3. All SMDBs shall be constructed of highest quality corrosion-resistant sheet steel of
minimum thickness 2.0 mm, with constructional details identical to those of MDB in
item 1.1.3 above, and shall provide excellent resistance against corrosion and
scratches. All necessary cable boxes, lugs, glands, clamps, etc. appropriate to the cable
sizes shall be provided. The panel doors shall be mechanically interlocked to prevent
opening before the gear is isolated.

2.2. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (M.C.C.B.)

2.2.1. All M.C.C.B.s protecting outgoing feeders on all SMDBs shall generally be of fixed type
and shall comply with the requirements with respect to type, construction and
operating characteristics detailed in Item 1.3. above.
2.2.2. All M.C.C.B.s shall conform to the requirements, including latest amendments, of BS
EN 60947-2:2003.
2.2.3. The short-circuit breaking capacity of each breaker shall be the busbar short-circuit
withstand level in kA for respective SMDBs as indicated in the distribution schematic
drawing.

2.3. BUSBARS.

Requirements of busbars shall generally comply with the details described under items
1.4.1, 1.4.2, 1.4.6 and 1.4.7.

3. FINAL MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

3.1 GENERAL.

3.1.1 The design of final MCB distribution boards shall strictly conform to the
requirements of Electricity Supply Authority, FEWA, with respect to busbar
sectionalization, number and respective sensitivities of RCCBs. Other details relating
to MCB ratings, phase and CPC wiring sizes, load phase distribution etc. for various
circuits shall be indicated in load schedules for respective distribution boards.
3.1.2 All boards shall be factory fabricated and shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant
sheet steel of minimum thickness 1.2 mm, coated with an approved compound, to
 provide excellent resistance against corrosion and scratches. All boards shall comply
with the requirements of BS EN 60439-1:1999. All busbars shall be tinned copper.
3.1.3 All boards shall be of totally enclosed, dust, damp and corrosion proof type. These
boards shall generally be flush mounted type unless otherwise indicated in the
drawings or instructed by the Engineer. Each board shall be equipped with a robust
cover, lock and key. The boards shall be labelled as previously described and a neatly
typed schedule, placed inside the board, shall indicate all the outgoing final
subcircuits, their ratings and the areas and points served.

3.2 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)

3.2.1. All MCBs shall be of high performance, rapid interrupting, current limiting type
designed and type tested to BS EN 60898:2001, including latest amendments.
3.2.2. All MCBs shall be thermal-magnetic, manually and automatically operated type to
provide positive trip-free operation on abnormal overloads with quick-break
contacts, the thermal element providing inverse time-delay tripping on abnormal
overloads, and the magnetic element providing instantaneous tripping on short-
circuits.
3.2.3. All MCCBs shall be suitable for mounting on rails inside the enclosure to facilitate
removal of one without disturbing the others.
3.2.4. MCBs shall be of type 2 characteristics for general lighting and small power circuits,
and of type 3 characteristics for circuit supplying pumps, AC units or other
equipment using induction motors. Category of duty shall be M6 or M9 depending
on the fault level at the point of installation.

3.3. RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCBs)

3.3.1 In addition to the overcurrent and short-circuit protection provided by MCBs, protection
against electric shocks and earth leakages shall be provided by residual current operated
circuit-breakers of appropriate sensitivities as indicated in load schedules of respective
distribution boards.
3.3.2 Residual current circuit breakers for household and similar uses shall be designed and
constructed to comply with the requirements of BS 4293:1983, BS EN 61008-1:1995, BS
EN 61008-2:1995, including latest amendment.
3.3.3 RCCBs with integral overcurrent (RCBOs) for household and similar uses shall comply
with the requirements of BS EN 61009-1:1995, BS EN 61009-2:1995, including latest
amendments.
3.3.4 Sections of the sectionalized busbars providing supply to general purpose 13A socket
outlet circuits and water heater circuits shall be protected by 4-pole 30 mA sensitivity
RCCBs.
3.3.5 Sectionalized busbars providing supply to washing machines, dish washing machines,
hand dryers and similar equipment circuits shall be protected by 4-pole 30 mA or
100mA sensitivity RCCBs as directed by the Electricity Supply Authority.
3.3.6 Appropriate sensitivity 2-pole/4-pole RCCBs shall be provided to protect circuits
supplying power to water pumps, firefighting pumps, lift machines and other similar
motoring circuits all in compliance with the current rules, regulations and requirements
of Electricity Supply Authority.

4. ISOLATORS, SWITCHES, DISCONNECTORS, SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS AND FUSE

COMBINATION UNITS

4.1. All isolators and similar units mentioned above shall be of totally enclosed pattern,
corrosion proof, cast Aluminium metal clad type, complete with ON/OFF indicators,
complying with the requirements of BS EN 60947-3:1999 and designed for AC 23 duty.

4.2. Unless otherwise indicated in drawings or load schedules, all isolators shall be heavy
duty type designed and constructed to provide minimum protection grade IP 65 as
defined in BS EN 60439 1:1999.

4.3. All Isolators shall have interlocking features to prevent opening with supply in the “ON”
Position.

4.4. The current rating and the number of poles for each isolator shall be indicated in the
drawings and load schedules.

5. CONTACTORS

e.1. All contactors shall be of 4-pole design for AC application and shall be type
tested for AC23 duty complying with the requirements of BS EN 60947-4:2001.
e.2. The contacts shall be of double-break butt-type with each moving contact
individually spring-loaded.
e.3. All contactors shall be continuously rated and their coils shall be wound on
molded formers.
e.4. All contactors shall be ambient temperature compensated, factory calibrated
and sealed.
 e.5. Each contactor shall be provided with required number of normally-open and
normally closed auxiliary switches.

6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

6.1. The Sub-Contractor shall submit characteristics of upstream and downstream

circuit breakers to establish satisfactory discrimination between them.
6.2. Prior to dispatching from the factory, all MDBs and SMDBs shall be subjected to
the following routine tests in the presence of the Engineer:
I. Primary injection test for all circuit breakers and meters.
II. Secondary injection tests for all protective relays.
III. Insulation tests.
IV. Functional tests.
All tests’ certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer.
6.3. To avoid setting up of eddy currents all single core cables shall enter or leave any
item of metal clad switchgear through the same aperture in the enclosure.
6.4. Special termination arrangements shall be provided for cables whose cross-
sectional area exceed the circuit breaker terminal size.
6.5. Each electrical room shall be provided with suitable size carbon-free insulating
rubber mat certified to withstand a voltage of 2 kV for one minute.

9- WIRING ACCESSORIES.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and connect complete small power wiring
accessories installations inclusive of lighting switches, contactor switches, flush socket outlets,
industrial type socket outlets and other wiring accessories etc., all in strict compliance with
these Specifications, drawings and Schedules for Wiring Accessories.

1. GENERAL.
1.1. All wiring shall be carried out in strict compliance with cable sizes and circuit
details given in respective load schedules and drawings.
1.2. All wiring of multi-point sub-circuits shall be carried out as a “loop in” system. No
joints in any point in the wiring run shall be permitted.
1.3. Wiring for small power circuits shall be run in separate dedicated
conduits/trunking back to their respective final MCB distribution boards. Circuits
supplied from different phases shall not be housed in the same conduit. Care shall be
exercised to ensure both the live and the neutral conductors of a circuit shall in all
cases be contained in the same conduit.
 1.4. Every single pole switch and MCB in a two-wire circuit shall be connected to the
phase conductor. Every single-phase circuit shall have its own neutral and earth
connections taken from its respective final distribution board.
1.5. Wiring for each circuit run in trunking shall be taped and bound at intervals
throughout the entire length and shall be labelled at each junction and terminal point
for easy identification of circuits.
1.6. Prior to drawing wiring in conduits/trunking, the entire system inclusive of outlet
boxes, isolators, MCB distribution boards etc. shall be completed and inspected. Any
conduits/trunking not accepted by the Engineer shall be replaced without additional
charges. The Sub-Contractor shall pay special attention to the segregation of L.V.
wiring system for Fire Detection and Alarm System, Telephone, SMATV and other E.L.V
system, to ensure no adverse interaction shall occur between the various systems. All
installation works shall strictly comply with the requirements of BS7671:2001 (I.E.E.
Wiring Regulations).
1.7. Color code and identification of cable/wiring cores shall be in compliance with
the local Electricity supply Authority’s Regulations.
1.8. All wiring accessories shall be as described and specified in the respective
schedules of equipment. Samples of each type of wiring accessory and other related
equipment shall be submitted for engineer’s final approval prior to placing order for
the same.

2. WIRING ACCESSORIES.

2.1. SWITCHES.

2.1.1 All lighting control switches complying with the requirements of BS 3676-1:2000, BS
EN 60669-1:2000 shall be of quick-make slow-break type suitable for operating AC
inductive loads. These shall be of 5A, 6A, 10A, 15A or 16A ratings and shall include
single-pole, double-pole, 1-way, 2-way and intermediate switches. These shall
generally be flush-mounted at a height of 1.2 m above FFL and shall be complete
with galvanized steel boxes of same manufacture. Earth terminals shall be provided
on each switch box.
2.1.2 All 20A DP switches for controlling water heaters, hair dryers, washing machines,
dryers, hand dryers and like equipment shall conform to the requirements of BS
3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000.
2.1.3 All electronic variable dimmer control switches for tungsten filament and low-
voltage lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS 5518:1977.
2.1.4 All grid modular switching system complying with the requirements of BS 5733:1995
shall be complete with 10A/20A SP/DP, 1-way/2-way etc. switch modules, indicator
units, dimmer switches, accessory modules, front plates, mounting frames and other
accessories in compliance with details in drawings.

3. PLUGS, SOCKET OUTLETS, CONNECTION UNITS, ADAPTORS, AND FLEX OUTLET PLATES

3.1. All rewireable and non-rewireable 13A fused plugs shall comply with the
requirements of BS 1363 1:1995.
3.2. All general purpose 13A switched and unswitched socket outlets shall be of 3-pin
shuttered type, with or without neon indicators as called for and described in Wiring
Accessories Schedule, all complying with the requirements of BS 1363-2:1995.
These shall generally be connected either in radial or in ring circuits as indicated in
the drawings and load schedules for final respective MCB distribution boards.
Connection to the phase and neutral conductors shall be carefully made in
compliance with the manufacturer’s marking and the earth pin shall be effectively
earthed.
These shall generally be mounted 0.45 m above FFL in general areas, and 0.3 m above
tables in working areas such as kitchens, laboratories, computer rooms etc.
Domestic flush type and industrial metal clad surface type shall be specified for
different areas as shown in the drawings and as indicated in the schedule of Wiring
Accessories and materials.
3.3. All adaptors shall comply with the requirements of BS 1363-3:1995.
3.4. All 13A switched and unswitched fused connection units shall comply with the
requirements of BS 1363-4:1995.
3.5. All industrial socket-outlets, plugs and connectors shall comply with the
requirements of BS 4343:1992, BS EN 60309-2:1992.
3.6. All flex outlet plates shall be equipped with three pairs of terminals and a cord
grip and shall comply with the requirements of BS 5733:1995.

4. 20A/32A GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROL UNITS

20A and 32A control units with or without neon indicators complying with the
requirements of BS 3676 1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000 shall be used to control hand
dryers, window type A/C units etc.

5. DP FUSED CONNECTION UNITS.

 All DP switched and unswitched connection units indicated in the drawings shall
comply with the requirements of BS 3676-1:2000, BS EN 60669-1:2000. These shall
generally be of flush type complete with 20A DP switches (where applicable), 13 A
fuse-links to BS 1362:1973, flex outlets to BS 5733:1995, neon indicators and mounting
boxes.

6. CEILING ROSES

All ceiling roses shall comply with the requirements of BS 67:1987.

7. JUNCTION BOXES.

All junction boxes shall comply with the requirements of BS 6220:1983. These shall
have either 4 or 3 terminal blocks, 10A/30A rating, accepting 4/6 6.0 sq. mm single
core cables.

8. TV/FM CO-OXIAL SOCKET OUTLETS.

Direct connection and isolated TV/FM co-axial socket-outlets shall comply with the
requirements of BS 5733:1995, BS 3041, IEC 60169.
These shall generally be suitable for use in multi-outlet aerial system, providing
necessary safety isolation rated 2000 V AC to BS EN 60065:1998. These outlets shall be
designed for UHF/VHF and VHF/FM radio signals reception.

9. LINE JACK TELEPHONE OUTLETS.

These shall be of the type approved by the local ETISALAT Office.

10. TELEPHONE, CABLE TV and SMATV SOCKET OUTLETS

These shall be of modular system design with a wide range of socket modules for
telephone, cable TV and SMATV use and shall be equipped with matching front plates
designed to accept combinations of interchangeable modules.

Telephone, Cable TV and SMATV socket outlets shall comply with the requirements of
BS 6312-2.1:1994, BS EN 6312-2.2:1997 and BS 5733:1995 or other relevant Standards.

11. MOUNTING HEIGHT OF ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT

 Lighting and other control switches 1250mm AFFL
Socket outlets, telephone line jacks,
450mm AFFL
TV socket outlets etc.
Socket outlets, isolators for FCU’s Adjacent to respective unit.
Connection units, flexible outlets etc. Adjacent to units being served
Fire Alarm break glass 1250 mm AFFL
Fire Alarm Control Panel,
1800 mm AFFL
MCB distribution boards
 2 - CCTV
Case Study and General Specifications
1. Introduction:
 The CCTV system must be IP based system designed on the bases of open architecture
designs and able to utilize universal protocols like ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface
Forum). The system shall be capable of operating under a true PSIM (Physical Security
Information System) environment to allow integration with Third Party systems,
Integration maybe done by a third-party company.
 The recording and processing part of the system shall software based, using no
proprietary hardware platform. The hardware use shall be enterprise level servers as.
 A Dedicated LAN shall be included in the offer; the LAN shall have a maximum of fifty
percent utilization. If a connection to the business network is required a hardware
firewall is to be utilized to govern traffic.
 The aesthetics of the building is to be considered, large bulky cameras are not to be
used internally, and recessed housing is to be used whenever possible.
 The requirement in this selection is compulsory and not meeting them shall result in
tender being Rejected.

2. Design guidelines:
 While placing Cameras on the architectural schematics of a project the designer must
comply with the following:
 Designer shall insure that all areas of the site are labeled in terms of the intended use of
that space; Plans will not be approved without such labeling.
 The Designer must have a completed copy of the building drawing to coordinate with
other systems and services.
 The designer must use plans that accurately indicate the dimensions of the buildings.
 Designer must have high light the resolution required for each camera by placing a
comment next to the camera displaying XXMP where the XX represents the resolution
of the camera, for example a 1.3-megapixel camera shall be labeled as 1.3 MP.
 The designer must clearly indicate the field of view of the camera The designer shall
show the angel of coverage and the distance.
 Designer shall show different symbols representing the different cameras based on their
intended use for example the designer shall not use the same symbol for internal and
external dome cameras.
 All internal cameras inside buildings must be dome cameras.
 The designer must add a legend to all building plans indicating what each CCTV
component is.
  In internal areas the designer must use recessed domes wherever possible. This includes
areas with false ceiling and other types of ceiling which allows a recessed camera
installation.
 The designer shall use a separate icon to clearly highlight the recessed cameras.
 The designer shall avoid placing more than two cameras in close proximity; whenever
possible the designer shall use higher resolution cameras to cover multiple targets.
Camera crowded areas will not be accepted as they tend to destroy the interior design
and aesthetics of the site.

3. Site Risk Factor:

The project site is classified as Class-1 (High security risk installations such as
prisons, police stations, drug and narcotic centers etc.) as per the local and
international classification standards. So that the designer should apply all
security terms and condition to achieve professional security strategy.

4. Observation Criteria:
The selection of camera and lens for any location will be based on set observation
criteria if attached to a Day \ Night camera the lens selected shall be infrared
corrected.
In low light condition the lens F Stop shall not exceed 1.6 In general the lens
used shall not exceed an F stop of 2.0.
The observation criteria are classified into four general categories which help
determine the approximate number of horizontal pixels which falls on the
target being observed. For ease of specification the measurement of
resolution with respect to the observed target shall be calculated in pixels
per meter p\m, where a p\m value shall identify the number of pixels that falls
on the horizontal meter on observed target. The below table (table 1.1)
shows those four criteria’s and the required pixels per meter to achieve
optimal coverage.

NAME DISCRIPTION REQUIREMENTS

Monitor & control Used for general scene observation. Maximum 30p\m
Detect Enables the operator to specify what the target is. Minimum 70p\m
Recognize Used to recognize a known person Minimum 130p\m
Identify Used to capture plate numbers or identify a person. Minimum of 240p\m
Facial
Used to capture a high-resolution image of a person Minimum of 350p\m
Identification
 Based on the above criterions a cameras resolution shall be matched to width
of scene observed. To simplify the calculation the reference table 1.2 below
shows a range of camera resolutions currently available on the market and the
width of scene recommended under different criterions.
Effective Detect
Camera Monitor & Recogn ize @ Identify @ Facial Identify
horiz. @ 70p\
Resolution Control @ 30p\m 130p\m 240p\m @ 350p\m
pixels m
4CIF Resolution 704 23.5 10.1 5.4 2,9 2.0
D1 Resolution 720 24.0 10.3 5.5 3.0 2.1
High
1280 42.7 18.3 9.8 5.3 3.7
Definition(720p)
Full HD (1080p) 1920 64.0 27.4 14.8 8.0 5.5
1.3 Megapixel 1280 42.7 18.3 9.8 5.3 3.7
2.0 Megapixel 1600 53.3 22.9 12.3 6.7 4.6
3.0 Megapixel 2048 68.3 29.3 15.8 8.5 5.9
4.0 Megapixel 2288 76.3 32.7 17.6 9.5 6.5
5.0 Megapixel 2560 85.3 36.6 19.7 10.7 7.3
Table 1.2 reference table outlining the width of scene (in meters) for the five
standard criterions at a 90-degree shot

5. Camera Selection:
Camera shall be installed at location that satisfies the observation criteria
defined for that with due Consideration to factors such as lighting condition,
seasonal foliage obstructions, temporary or Permanent man-made
obstruction. In areas with lighting condition of less than 5 Lux CCD only
day/night Cameras shall be use.
6. Minimum Specification for CCTV Components:
6.1. PTZ IP Cameras:
S. N Specification Details
1 The image sensor should be 1/3” or ½”, CCD or CMOS.
2 Shall be true Day/Night (not digital D/N) and automatically switches between color
and black/white and vice versa depending on the illumination.
3 Minimum of 36X optical zoom and 12X digital zoom in D1/4CIF resolution cameras,
Minimum of 20X optical zoom for HD+ cameras.
4 Optimal zoom control shall provide a scaling function that automatically adjust
the speed of the pan and tilt movement dependent upon the field of view of the
lens. When the zoom lens is set to wide angle range field of view. The mouse or
joy stick will allow the pan and tilt speed to operate faster than when the lens is
set to a narrow zoomed in field of view.
5 S/N ratio shall be greater than 50Db.
6 Shall be a true IP camera, with high level connection to the other component in
the system, camera shall be able to communicate internal errors and built-in
functions such a motion detection through TCP/IP. It shall not be made of an
analogue PTZ with an encoder.
7 Auto focus and iris wide manual override.
8 Shall support minimum illumination 1 lax for color and 0.0 for B/W mode, with
minimum % 80 scene reflections.
9 Shall have backlight compensation, multiple users, privacy zones masking, auto
and manual tour, remote setup and automatic image flip.
10 Grain control shall be automatic or off
11 Shall be capable of utilizing encrypted password transmission (HTTPS)
12 Shall be Wide Dynamic
13 Panning range shall be 360* continues and tilting range shall be 180*, Geared pan/
tilt construction is preferred.
14 Pan and tilt speed shall; be minimum of 0.5*/s to 400*/s
15 Minimum 100 presets in shall have accuracy of +/-0.1* with a least 15 characters
for leveling each preset position.
16 Operating temperature shall be 0* to 50*C. Relative humidity shall be 0_95% non-
condensing.
17 Shall have built in compression algorithms such as MPEG4, MJPEG, H.264.
18 Shall support multiple video streams at different settings. One of the streams shall
opposite at maximum resolution and at a minimum of 20 frames per seconds. For
VGA/4CIF resolution cameras least 25 FPS at max resolution
19 Support a minimum of 2 alarm inputs and 2 outputs
20 A choice of clear smoked dome to be provided on request
21 When use internally shall be recessed when possible. With a choice of clear/
smoke domes.
22 Shall support remote diagnostics for maintenance & installation settings.
23 Vandal and dust proof housing contractions with poly-carbonate dome and cast
aluminum body.
24 Shall support such protocols as TCT/IP, RTP/RTCP, Telnet, UDP, ARP, HTTP, IGMP,
FTP, NTP, etc.
25 Shall be ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface Forum) compliant.
26 Must support exact PTZ movement command (Not only relative). I.e., the operator
shall be ever to click on a location on the PTZ’s image and it would place the point
in the center of the image.
27 Built in 10/100 Base-T network card with RJ-45 port.
28 Outdoor cameras shall be in IP67 rated enclosure with sun shroud, supporting
operating temperature of absolute maximum 65*C, sustained maximum of 50*C
 and 0-95% humidity.

6.2. External Fixed IP Cameras:

S. N Specification Details
1 The image sensor shall be 1/3” or ½” / CCD OR CMOS, CCD chips are to be used in
areas with less than 0.5 lux of illumination.
2 Shall be day and night and automatically switch between color to black & white
mode and vice versa depending on the scene illumination.
3 Shall support minimum illumination for color 1 lux @F1.2 and for black & white
0.03 lux @F.12 with minimum %80 scene reflection.
4 Shall be a true IP camera, with high level connection to the other component in
the system, camera shall be able to communicate internal errors and built-in
functions such as motion detection/analytics through TSP/IP. It shall not be
made of an analogue camera with an encoder.
5 Auto focus and iris with automatic override.
6 Shall have backlight compensation, multiple users define privacy zones, remote
set ups and diagnostics.
7 Shall have automatic power phase synchronization
8 Automatic tracking white balance
9 Gain control shall be automatic /off.
10 Wide dynamic range shall be 150X.
11 Shall compression rate such as MPEG4, MIPEG, H,264
12 Shall a minimum dual video stream and at least one them shall support 25fps at
4CIF/D1 at maximum resolution for recording. please see section 2.16.
13 Operating temperature shall be 0*C to 50*C. relative humidity shall be 0-95% no
condensing,
14 Shall upgradable internal storage to be provided when specified.
15 Shall have a password for changing settings.
16 Shall support 12VDC.24VAC and PoE.
17 Shall support protocols such as TCP/IP, RTP/RTCP, Telnet, UDPARP, HTTP, IGMP,
FTP, NTP etc.
18 Shall be ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface Forum) compliant.
19 Built in 10/100 Base-T network card with RJ-45 port.
20 IP67 rated enclosure with a full sun shroud. Shall supporting operating
temperature of absolute maximum 65*C, sustained maximum of 50*C and 95%
humidity.

6.3. Domes:
S. N Specification Details
1 The image sensor shall be 1/3” or ½”, CCD or CMOS, CCD chips are to be used in
areas with less than 0.5 lux of illumination.
2 When requested the dome shall be day and night automatically switch between
color to black & white mode and vice versa depending on the scene illumination.
3 A day/night dome shall support minimum illumination for color 1 lux @ F1.2 and
for black @ white 0.03 lux with minimum %80 scene reflection.
4 When a vandal resistance dome is requested, it shall be die-cast aluminum body
with a poly carbonate mini dome. Full size external domes shall not be used
internally.
5 Shall have tri-axel
6 Shall be capable of recessed installation.
7 Shall be a true camera, with high level connection to the other component in
the system, camera shall be able to communicate internal errors and built-in
functions such as motion detection/ analytics through a TCP/IP. It shall not be
made of an analogue camera with and encoder.
8 Auto focus and iris with automatic override
9 Shall have backlight compensation, multiple users defined privacy zones, remote
setup and diagnostics.
10 Shall have automatic power phase synchronization.
11 Automatic tracking white balance with the option of manual.
12 Gain control shall be automatic/ off.
13 Wide dynamics range shall be 150X
14 Shall have compression rates such as MPEG4, MGPG, H.264
15 Shall have a minimum dual video stream at least one of them shall support min
15fps at maximum resolution for recording.
16 Operating temperature shall 0* C. To 50* C. Relative humidity shall be 0-95%
none condensing.
17 Shall have agreeable internal storage to be provided when specified.
18 Shall have password for changing settings
19 Shall support 12VDC, 24VAC and POE.
20 Shall support such protocols as http, https, TCP/IP, RTP/RTCP, Telnet, UDP, ARP,
HTTP, IGMP, FTP, NTP, etc.
21 Shall support ONVIF communication protocol (Open network Video Interface
Forum)
22 Built in 10/100 Base-T network card with RJ45 port
23 Shall have a minimum dual video stream and at least one of them shall support
25fps at for CIF/D1 at maximum resolution for recording. Please see
section2.16.
24 IP67 rated enclosure with a full sun shroud. Shall supporting operating
temperature of
absolute maximum 65* C, sustained maximum of 50* C and 0-95% humidity
6.4. Network Video Recorder:
S. N Specification Details
1 Shall provide minimum 31 days of continues recorded footage at 25 FPS with
native camera resolution (4CIF/1.3 mega pixel) with RAID 5 plus one hot standby
hard disk arrangement. The RAID 5 shall be hardware controlled.
2 Shall capable of full operation under PSIM systems.
3 Shall be client- server based NVR
4 Fault tolerant or redundancy servers shall be provided by contractor.
5 Shall support simultaneous recording, playback, exporting video searching.
6 Shall recording at 25fps with 4ICF/D1/1.3 resolution for each video channel
individually if required. And no less than 30 fps for mega pixel cameras.
7 Shall have 25% extra video inputs and capacity for future expansion.
8 Shall support H.264/MPEG4/MJPEG compression.
9 Shall twin gigabit Ethernet ports operating in team configuration.
10 Shall diagnostics, health monitoring and reporting via email and other means
available.
11 Shall have DVD-RW and 2 USB ports for backup and other uses.
12 Shall be based on Linux or Windows Server 2003 or 2008 standard (or above)
13 platform.
Operating temperature shall be 10o C to 25o C. Operating humidity shall be 20%-
80% non- condensing.
14 Operating vibration range shall be 0.25 G at 3Hz to 200 Hz at a sweep rate of 0.5
octave/min.
15 Shall support data authentication facilities and digital footage water marking for
security purposes.
16 Shall support a minimum of four individual workstation viewing simultaneously.
17 Shall dual redundant hot swappable power supplies and cooling fans.
18 The configuration & quantity of the servers shall be so that the CPU utilization for
each core shall not exceed 70% while performing any of each function such as
video analytics, recordings, playback and even handling.
19 Shall support plug and play configuration
20 Shall support software upgrades and periodic camera driver’s upgrades.
21 Shall have invaded firewall / antivirus software’s. Antivirus shall automatically
receive free virus definition upgrades periodically.
22
Shall have key board, mouse and a 17” branded LCD rack mounted with a built in
KVM if one more server is provided.
23 Shall support individual camera schedule with different frame rates and
resolution for each one of the cameras.
24 Shall support continuous, motion detection, trigger alarm, events and other
recording with individual settings per channel and as per the schedule, shall
support recording speed up when motion/ event is detected.
25 In case alarm/event/motion shall support recording of the trigger period with
pre and post alarm [programmable time and at a predefined frame rate and
resolution.
26 In high-risk sites shall support offsite dumping of the past four hours of events in
case of an emergency.
27 of ansupport
Shall emergency.
recording any stream IP cameras at a define frame rate from 1fps to the
maximum frames per second that the camera can produce.
 28 Shall receive errors generated from the camera and action to inform the operators
and point other PTZ cameras in range at the faulty camera, when possible, for
investigation.
29 The recorder hardware shall satisfy the client IT Department minimum requirements.
30 Shall support generic text event processing through the TCP/IP network.
31 Shall support ONVIF communication protocol (Open Network Video Interface Forum)

6.5. Physical Security Information Management (PSIM) DB Server:

The PSIM server shall serve as the overall security management tool onsite. It
shall assets in the data collection, verification, analysis, resolution and tracking
of even received from multiple third-party systems onsite. The PSIM system is
to be an open platform/open architecture allowing high level communication
between the two PSIM system and all the other security related components
on site.
The system shall meet the following minimum requirement:
1. Support high level of redundancy with switchover time between the main server and
the secondary server of less than 500ms with no less footage, information and
control. It shall not have a single point of failure.
2. Shall support multi-site operation.
3. Shall be a modular system.
4. As minimum shall integrate, gather store, process and output information from the
following system (where applicable):
I. All IP cameras on site
II. All Network Video Recorders (NVRs)
III. Access control systems
IV. Intruder detection systems
V. Fire systems
VI. Analytic and video Intelligence systems
VII. GIS mapping systems
VIII. Number Plate Recognition (NPS)
IX. Building management systems (BMS)
X. Third party stand-alone detection system (e.g.: gunshot, explosives
XI. RFID systems
XII. Emergency call systems
XIII. Emergency broadcast systems
XIV. Key tracking systems
5. Provide a built-in system for creating security cases, adding events, logs, footage and
comments to the case. And the capability of escalating cases g round level operators
to high level forces on the offside.
6. Shall support multisource event combination to produce a predefined output.
7. In high-risk sites and when required shall support mufti- system (access card,
biometric, visual confirmation) event validation before granting users before entry
to maximum security areas such as a control room.
8. Shall support live video footage transfer.
9. Shall have a video wall management system.
10. Shall support client interface programs (GUI) on computers, I-phones, blackberries
and such pocket type devices.
11. Shall support customizable operator rights.
12. Shall support Windows Active Directory authentication.
13. Shall log operator’s activities on the system.
14. Support for ONVIF and PSIA universal protocols.
15. Shall authenticate records and manage all connections to the system.
16. The PSIM shall include all security requirements to prevent unauthorized access to
the server by incorporating the following requirements as a minimum:
a. All network ports not in used shall be locked to prevent hacking.
b. Password protection to provide unauthorized administration access.
c. Individual IP/MAC filtering to restrict access.
d. Virus protection with automatic definition updates.
17. System shall be configured to promote accelerated guard reaction to enable on site
guards respond to the event as it unfolds.
18. In a security event the system shall display the following on a single screen:
a. The type of event detected.
b. All related raw data such as logs.
c. Footage and CCTV cameras in range of the event.
d. A list of procedures for the operator to carry out and tick when done.
e. An event “case” where the operator can record notes attach video and escalate the
event when required.
f. A method of forwarding the live video streams to other control centers on site, of
site, or to mobile devices.
19. Shall have minimal false alarms.
20. Shall allow for third party offsite monitoring and video verifications.
6.6. Video Management Server.
S. N Specification Details
1 Shall be an open IP based video management software which supports IP
cameras from different manufacturers including but not limited to Arecont,
Axis, Bosch, GE, Indigo Vision, JVC, Mobotix, Optelecom-NKF, Panasonic, Pelco,
Sanyo, VDG, Vicon, IQeye, Verint and can be integrated with different security
systems e.g., intruder alarm, access control & fire alarm. List of all other UP
camera brands supported shall be submitted.
2 Shall be client- server IP based video security solution providing seamless
management of digital video, audio and data across the IP network. IBM
servers shall be used when using third party servers.
3 Shall be able to display up to 16 cameras simultaneously for live viewing and
playback.
4 Shall be centrally managed, fully scalable and secure.
5 Shall have a built-in rules/ logic engine analysis event and policy information from
multiple sources to correlate events, make decisions based upon event variables
and initiate activities.
6 Arabic and English language shall be supported.
7 Shall be capable of utilizing edge analytics generated at the camera.
8 The system shall be capable of performing analytical analysis.
9 Shall support mapping of cameras, alarms and outputs connected to the system.
10 Shall support digital zoom on live and recorded images.
11 Shall be ONVIF (Open Network Video Interface Forum) compliant.
12 Shall have a complete display off all its connected cameras with the status and
bandwidth of each camera.
13 Shall support dual monitors for displaying maps and cameras.
14 Shall have GUI to allow live and archived images for multiple remote systems to
be viewed on the client workstation. The operator shall monitor and supervise
multiple locations simultaneously with complete flexibility in selecting and
viewing live and recorded images.
15 The GUI shall provide site/floor plans selection and allow the operator to navigate
among different plan via links or on a side tree.
16 The contractor shall customize the navigation and layouts as requested by the
end users.
17 The navigation tool shall support one or two step selections from site map to
floor plan, interconnecting maps to allow for tracking people shall be
implemented.
18 Shall support user friendly drag/drop facility to allow map/view configuration.
19 Shall support a minimum of 50 maps.
20 Latency of PTZ controller shall exceed 50ms.
21 Shall support simultaneous viewing of recorded video via a specific NIC from
multiple work client stations without effecting ongoing recording.
22 Shall support back up through DVD-RW, the network and USB 2.0 ports.
23 The DVD back up shall be viewed on standard windows media player for non-
encrypted use. For encrypted use it will be acceptable to have it played on
proprietary software loaded on the back up media.
24 Shall have automated system recovery after a power failure with automatic
recovery of any lost data.
25 Shall friendly user configuration for user comprehensive user right allocation to be
allocated by the contractor or end-user
26 Shall support dry relay or network-based alarms for video loss, camera issues or
NVR internal errors
27 Management & configuration tools shall be included to configure & manage all
system components.
28 Shall support displaying single to sixteen cameras each at 25fps @4CIF/D1,
otherwise maximum frame rate at maximum frame per second that the camera
can generate.
29 Shall support individual control of PTZ from any point in the system during single
or multiple view arrangement.
30 Shall support instantaneous play back through camera selection from the
standard client view or map of view.
31 Shall have playback controls such as play, pause, forward, backup, fast-forward,
fast rewind, event search, smart search. Along with local and third-party event
search of situation.
32 Shall support archived video retrieving search by the camera name/number, time,
date, selected location on the screen, intelligent motion detecting etc.
33 Shall support images export to jpeg and BMP for formats with date/ time stamps
and water marking.
34 Shall support alarm notification by email and SMS for all system faults/events.
35 Shall support audit trails for all users and system operations, activities,
interactions, events, scenarios and programming.
36 Shall show bandwidth consumption for single/multiple cameras.
37 Shall support text insertion and time/date stamping for any camera.
38 Shall support general and customized report generations.
39 Shall support graphical map creation and editing, shall support importing of
customize maps from JPEG files and attaching camera icons and map links to the
map.
40 Shall support auto and manual PTZ touring. Shall support tour stops in presets
when motion is detected.
41 Shall support generic, SDK, API, and other forms of integration of third-party
system.
42 Shall support dynamic software matrixes or video wall applications to allow
multiple cameras viewing on large screen when required, the system shall allow
the change of any camera on the wall with a user directive or an automated
situation handling set up, the video wall shall support up to 64 cameras display
simultaneously.
43 All software licenses that are required for live viewing, recording, analytics, video
walls and other required functions are to be discussed with end user and Secure
LLC security manager.
44 The final bid shall include all required software licenses.
45 Shall enable control and management of all control room video surveillance
monitors through a single CCTV keyboard or VMS Client GIU workstation to view
and control live or recorded video.
46 VMS shall support Arabic for reading and writing.
47 The VMS shall support CCTV keyboards from different manufactures, as a
minimum CCTV Keyboard from the following Manufacture shall be supported:
a. BOSCH
b. Pelco
c. Panasonic
d. VDG
e. Vicon
48 As a minimum the VMS shall support the following PTZ protocols:
a. BOSCH BILINX
b. Lomniscient
c. Object Video
d. Pelco
e. VDG
39 The VMS shall support operator-initiated recording of cameras on local client
stations irrespective of their location, etc.
50 The proposed VMS shall support seamless integration to server and edge-based
video analytics systems. As a minimum the video analytics provided by the
following vendor shall be supported:
a. Bosch
b. Lomniscint
c. Object Video
d. Pelco
e. VDG
51 Shall be capable of accepting Meta data engine plug-in, to enable interface to
other system such as Video Analytic system. Access control system, License plate
recognitions, Intrusion detection system (IDS), ETC.
52 Shall support the capability to arm and disarm IDS, PIDS and Video analytics based
on preprogrammed schedule or by operator initiation.
53 VMS shall support future integration to Perimeter and intrusion detection system
(PDIS). Provide a list of products to which the proposed VMS have integration to.
54 VMS shall support future integration to License Plate Recognition system. Provide
list of License Plate recognition systems supported and to be submitted with the
offer.
55 After Tender Submission, Contractors may be requested by the client to
demonstrate the proposed VMS by arranging a site visit to a location where the
proposed VMS is installed.
56 The audit trail reports shall be sorted by time, date, username, event description,
and
access level and memo field.
57 Shall support export of Audit Trail report to a commonly used word processing
format such as MS Word, etc.
58 As a minimum the following events shall be logged: Alarm Events, Application
Events, Video Recorder Events, Directory Events, Camera / Encoder / Decoder
 Events, Network Events, Recorder Storage Events including Hard dick failure,
Macro Events, Plug-in events, PTZ Events, User Events.
59 The VMS shall be capable of automatically executing schedule based, event driven
preprogrammed action which includes but not limited to the following:
1. Video Recorder Actions
2. Monitoring Actions
3. PTZ Actions
4. User Notification
5. Send a SMS or MMS
6. Send an email with video clip and or snap shot
7. Send Video Clip to PDA
8. Send Alarm to pre assigned or all client station
9. Executing a macro
10. Output Relay Actions
11. Device Control Actions
60 Alarm management shall include the ability to assign alarms and procedure to
specific users or user groups, the ability to escalate alarms to other users, if it is
not acknowledged after a configurable time, The system shall allow the
administrator to define auto-escalation levels and procedures, and those shall
include levels of escalation and allow the administrator to define escalation times.
61 Shall support individual and group alarm acknowledgement by operators, Group
acknowledgement shall be link to operator rights.
62 Shall support online notification of pre assigned alarms and events via SMS/MMS,
Email, Client stations etc. This includes,
- Video loss
- Camera out of focus
- Camera view blocked
- Video Recorder failure
- VMS Server failure
- Camera not recording
- Hard disk failure both internal and external storage
- System on UPS
- UPS Failure
- Network Failure including switches
- Unauthorized device connected to network switch
- OS Failure
- Unauthorized access attempt to server or work station
- Deletion of recording
63 Shall support alarm triggered automatic map pop up, send MMS/SMS, start
recording, still image pop up, move PTZ camera, etc. shall support assign priority
for alarms.
64 VMS shall support future integration to BARCO video walls.
65 The VMS shall integration with KabaExos 9300 Access control system, List of the
other access control systems supported shall be submitted with the offer.
66 VMS shall support integration to Face Capture and Recognition system, provide
 list is supported systems.
67 The operator shall be capable of quickly view, analyze and react to event as they
unfold. The operator shall the required information to make a decision and shall
be capable of all raw data if required. The operator shall be presented with the
required security procedures for the specific site. All of this must be accessible
from the same monitor without the operator requiring to switch monitors to get
to bits of data.

6.7. Operator Graphical User Interface (GUI) Workstation:

S. N Specification Details
1 The system shall be operated via a graphical user interface (GUI) controlled by a
touch monitor screen or mouse.
2 The user graphic interface layout, settings and access rights shall be
automatically assigned to the user on login.
3 The user graphic interface shall be customizable to individual user’s requirements
4 The contractor shall customize the navigation and layouts as per the client
requirements.
5 Client station shall support multiple monitors (Minimum Dual) for displaying the
maps and cameras. Vendor shall state the remark column the maximum number
of monitors the client station will support.
6 The station GUI shall include map, control buttons, camera icons, etc. required
for camera, monitor, map/site navigation, PTZ control, recording and playback
camera selection, etc.
7 Shall display pre-defined alarms (system and camera alarms) as popup windows for
fast attention & immediate reaction.
8 Shall have auto system recovery after power failure; auto re-booting, auto scan &
recovery of data.
9 The GUI shall support interactive graphical maps to locate cameras and alarms.
10 The Graphical presentation shall be in the form of Site/Floor Maps with camera
icons when required. The operator shall be capable of importing customized
maps, attach camera icons and configuring them.
11 The icons shall display alarms associated with the camera and shall enable camera
selection for live and playback control.
12 Setup termination of connections between IP camera, encoders, decoders, NVRs &
Workstation’s via drag and drop from either a system tree or icons on site plan
shall be supported either by clicking on the camera icon on the site map or on the
system tree.
13 Maps shall support hyperlinks to other digital maps for easier navigation
between sites or between different floors or areas within the same site.
Shall Support
- Map Hierarchies.
- Map in Maps.
- Display of multiple maps simultaneously.
- Display video on maps.
14 Shall support viewing of minimum 16 simultaneous video streams (live and/or
recorded) on a single monitor split into user configurable viewing panes of
single, quad, nine or sixteen.
15 Shall support simultaneous display of video streams (live and/or record), each at
 25fps
@ VGA, 4CIF @ mega pixel resolution on a single monitor split into user
configurable viewing panes of single, quad, nine or sixteen.
16 Single or quad camera sequence shall also be supported.
17 Shall support displaying alarms (Video analytic, Intrusion , Access control
system, etc.) on the maps as change in color of camera icons, door colors, etc.

18 The operator shall be able to instantly view live alarm events, retrieve stored
alarm video, and create customized reports- all from a single screen, without
interfering with alarm monitoring.
19 Shall support displaying a list of actions to be taken by the operators depending
on the type of the alarm.
20 Shall support PTZ capability for live & digital PTZ for live recorded videos.
21 Latency for PTZ control of cameras shall not exceed 150ms.
22 All user’s activities shall be logged and auditable.
23 Shall support export of recorded video to DVD-WR and through the USB 2.0
ports.
24 Shall support option of exporting recorded video in a format compatible of
viewing on standard Windows Media Player / Real Time.
25 Shall support export of watermarked video.
26 If special software is required for viewing the exported video, it shall be
exported automatically with the video file.
27 Shall support local recording of operator selected cameras on individual client
stations regardless of the original on-site recording.
28 Shall support search based on time, date, camera number, event/alarm for this
local recording.
29 The system shall allow the user to freeze live image with the option to save,
print or email the image. The user shall be able to export the video to monitor,
or to a file, which can be saved to a DVD/RW.
30 Shall support export of still images to JEPG and BMP format with date & time
format.
31 Shall support recorded video search by camera number, time, date, analytic
alarm based, etc.
32 All users and system activities and interactions shall be logged and shall be
auditable.
33 Shall the bandwidth consumption for single & multiple cameras.
34 Shall support bookmarking.
35 Shall support general & customized reports generation.
36 All license requirements for the proper functioning & management of the
system shall be defined. List all license requirements in the remark column, this
shall include cameras, recording, users, etc.
37 The contactor shall provide the client workstation as per the recommendations
of the manufacturer of the proposed systems.
As a minimum the client shall haves following minimum:
Shall have the latest quad core i7 processor.
Shall have 4 GB DDR2 RAM.
 Shall have Arabic / English keyboard and optical mouse.
Shall have dual VGA output with sufficient VGA memory for supporting dual
monitors having resolution of 1600x1200 pixels.
Shall have dual 21” LCD monitors having resolution of 1600*1200 and contrast
ration of 3000:1.
Shall have DVD writer and support DVD+32X-32X.
Shal have sound card and 2 speakers.
Shall have color LaserJet printer, printing 25 ppm for both color and B/W
&1200DPI.
Shall have 1000 GB hard disc.
38 Shall have automatic update of virus protection software.

6.8. General IT System Requirements:

S. N Specification Details
1 All delivered hardware shall be ‘branded’, professional hardware. “Local built” PCs
and servers will not be accepted.
2 All servers, storage, etc. shall be suitably robust and be mounted in standard 19”
rack’s, housed in lockable cabinets.
3 All user privileges and access to the applications and systems shall be through
the user of secure user and password authentication mechanisms that are based
on LDAP and use Microsoft Active Directory. All systems and servers, necessary,
should be provided to achieve this locally, but the local Active Directory.
4 All users shall be authenticated by the system via login name and password
5 All system and operator activities shall be logged and capable of conducting an
audit trail.
6 All logged events shall include the date & time, the user/operator’s name & ID and
the description of the event.
7 The audit trail shall not be able to be modified by anyone.
8 It shall be possible to examine the audit trail at any time.
9 All displays, reports and data to be able to be presented in English and Arabic
languages.
10 All applications are required to operate in the AD Police network and desktop
environment, Microsoft Windows applications shall operate under MS Windows
7 and be compatible with McAfee virus protection software and the LANDesk
desktop management system, AD Police will provide McAfee and LANDesk
software and license.
11 All user privileges and access to the applications and system shall be through the
use of secure users and password authentication mechanism that are based on
LDAP and use Microsoft Active Directory. All systems and servers, necessary,
should be provided to achieve this locally, but the Local Active Directory should be
integrated with AD Police enterprise Active Directory.
12 Arabic language shall be supported for reading and writing.

6.9. LCD Monitor 32”/42”

 S. N Specification Details
1 Viewing angles for both horizontal and vertical shall be more than 160*.
2 Native resolution shall be 1920x1080 pixels.
3 Contrast ratio shall be 5000:1 or more.
4 Aspect ratio shall be 16:9.
5 Shall have terminals; such as composite video BNC I/p with loop through o/p and
selected 75ohm termination, S-video, RCA, VGA, HDMI, DVI, and audio RCA.
6 Shall be branded, heavy duty and specially designed for 24hr operation.

6.10 Approved Brands:

The contractor must ONLY use products and accessories approved by the AD
Police. Any proposals using unlisted brands will be disregarded. The contractor
shall present a list of brands proposed. The approved brands are:
S.N Brand Name
1 Axis Communications
2 Arecont Vision
3 Bosch Systems
4 Pelco
5 IQeye
6 March Networks
7 GE-Security
8 Indigo Vision
9 Mobotix
10 Optelecom
11 Sony
12 Sanyo
13 Verint
14 Panasonic

The approved VMS/PSIM brands are:

S. N Brand Name
1 Genetec
2 Milestone
3 Bosch
4 GE- Security
5 March Networks

6.11 Video Analytics

The following requirement are to be met when the specification/section 1.3 calls of analytics.
S. N Specification Details
1 Shall support object filtering by size.
2 Shall support object filtering by speed.
3 Shall support object size variation based on the location on the screen and taking
into account the distance between the camera and the object.
4 Shall support object trajectory filtering.
5 Shall support independent multi-zone monitoring for any number of any required
analytical algorithm.
6 Shall support classification of determined object based on size classification for such
applications for counting.
7 Shall be able to recognize any abnormal activities such as a person falling
down/sleeping, jumping, running, etc.
8 Shall support drawing a tripwire or highlighting an area where if an object with a pre-
specified size crosses the lines an alarm is raised.
9 Shall be capable to delivering alarm information directly to the PSIM through high
level integration.
10 Shall be able to distinguish between actual targets and motion coming from the
movement of trees, change of light or water movement.
11 Shall support congestion detection for different types of objects, shall be able to give
a congestion percentage.
12 Shall detect abandoned objects.

13 Shall detect objects removed or environment vandalized.

14 Shall detect people or vehicles waiting in sensitive areas.

15 Shall give alarm in case a camera is covered, defocused, moved or removed.

16 Shall support running the analytics on live video stream or recoded one.

17 When possible, it’s preferred that the analytics is done at the camera end.
18 The bidder shall define all licenses required upfront.
19 Police may request for any or all of the video analytics as defined in the specs for any
number at cameras at no additional cost to the police.
20 Site entry camera shall support Number plate recognition (NPR).
21 Shall support loitering detection.

22 All analytics algorithms shall fully functional in crowded areas just as well as
otherwise.
23 Shall support facial detection if required.

24 Shall support parking for too long detection.

25 Shall support object tailgating.

 26 Shall support vehicle/persons travelling in the wrong direction’s detection.

27 Shall support reaching over the counter detection.

28 Shall have minimal false alarm rate.

29 Shall be tuned and tested by the contractor over a prolonged period and over
different weather condition until the right combination of sensitivity and false alarm
rate is reached.

6.12 Lighting
Adequate and preferably balanced lighting shall be available at all areas where
CCTV are operating. Change in image quality due to varied lighting conditions
shall be avoided.
At minimum all monitored areas should receive a minimum of 5 lux of light at any
time of the day/ night CCD cameras (540L+) are to be utilized.
To prepare for an event of power cut the contractor is to check whether the site is
equipped with backup generators to keep the lights operational. If not, the
contractor h provide infrared illuminators in all critical areas of site. The level of
illumination required is to an acceptable operational level by the user and the
analytical system on site.
Following lighting factors shall be considered:
1. Backlight.
2. Excessively bright light causing glaring.
3. Poor level of lighting or no lighting.
4. Excessive shadow.
5. CCD/CMOS chip direct exposure to the sun.
Remedial action such as selection of a proper camera, selection of camera
location and the provision of infrared lighting shall be considered to nullify the
effects of lighting conditions on image quality.
6.13 System Audit Requirements:
Minimum system and audit requirements are as follows:
1. All hardware shall be branded Tested “local built” PCs are not acceptable.
2. Administrators shall be authenticated on the system via username/
password.
3. All system events shall be logged in an audit trail including any system
start/stop, data imports, exports, backups and data modification etc.
4. All logged events shall include the data & time, the user/operator’s name,
ID and description of event.
5. The audit trail shall not have the possibility of modification or delete.
6. It shall be possible to examine the audit trail at any time.
6.14 Control and Equipment Room:
Minimum control and equipment requirement are as follows:
1. The control room shall be provided with a minimum of two large LCD
monitors as specified in section 2.7 above. One CCTV keyboard and one
operator GUI station.
2. The actual number and size of LCD monitors and operator work stations
shall be coordinated with relevant end user and the security manager at
Secure LLC.
3. All video displayed on the LCD monitors shall be at 25fps at 4CIF/D1/VGA
or the maximum frame rate and resolution provided by the camera.
4. The operator shall be able to push without any camera footage to any
monitor (on his workstation or on the wall) and shall have the capability to
view cameras as single to
5. Control room and main equipment room location and space requirement
to be coordinated with the end user and secure LLC.
6. Every floor of the building shall have security cabinet and riser for secure
cable management, installation of equipment’s, power supply distribution,
etc.
7. The contractor shall supply & install fire proof raised floor and rated to
support the weight of the equipment’s to be installed in the control room.
8. The contractor shall supply and install floor sockets for power, telephone
and network outlets or coordinate with the project manager to ensure the
job is done by the existing power/data contractors.
9. The contractor shall supply and install professional consoles such as
Winsted for the operators. The distance between the operator and the
LCD and the viewing angle should be considered for an easy, healthy and
convertible monitoring.
10. The contractor shall supply and install all required furniture for the control
room such as chairs, wallpapers, curtains, proper lighting etc.
11. Equipment’s for live monitoring and recording shall be installed in a
lockable 19” cabinet/rack located in a secured equipment room with
controlled access. The 19” rack shall be a minimum of 1.0 meter deep.
12. Equipment’s installed in outdoor environments, including outdoor
equipment cubicles, shall be suitable for continues operation under all
environments conditions experienced within the UAE. Whenever possible
cooling/sun shade shall be used to minimize exposure.
6.15 Power:
The minimum power requirements for the proposed CCTV system shall as follows:
1. All quoted equipment for the tender projects shall work on standard
supply of 240VAC/50Hz unless clearly specified.
2. The main power to all of the equipment for each project shall be through
properly isolation transformer.
3. POE power supply is preferred when possible.
 4. All CCTV equipment’s including cameras shall be on the essential supply
with UPS backup.
5. All online UPS with 50% spare load capacity and 30 minutes backup on full
load shall be supplied for location with generators, for locations with no
generators a UPS with 2 hours backup shall be provided.
6. An external maintenance bypass switch for each UPS system shall be
supplied and installed by the contractors.
7. All power distribution for the cameras shall from secured locations (secure
rises, equipment room, etc.). If power outlet and power supplies are
required near field device, it shall be mounted in fully enclosed, enclosure
is to be at height not accessible to general public. Externally mounted and
exposed power outlets are not acceptable. Power cables are to be
enclosed at all points from the interchange at the wall to the inside of the
camera enclosure. Exposed cable is not acceptable anywhere.
8. An individual breaker shall supply for each camera if not powered by POE.
9. 12VDC/24VAC power supply cables shall exceed camera manufactures
specification Cat5/Cat6 type of cable is not acceptable.
10. Proper copper ground (earth) wire (6 gauges with insulation) shall be
terminated to the cabinet requirement.
6.16 Cabling:
All cabling used for cameras shall be concealed and installed in trunking or
conduit, exposed cable of any kind is not acceptable. Trays can be for cables main
run if installed at height not accessible to people.
Minimum requirements include:
1. Dedicated containment shall be used for CCTV cabling.
2. All exposed conduits for cameras shall be GI. PVC conduit could be use if
cast in concrete
3. All signal cables shall be separated from high voltage cable.
4. All data cables to cameras shall be CAT6e rating or above. CAT5 is not
acceptable.

6.17 Network:
A dedicated TCP/IP network shall be provided for the CCTV system. The client has
standardized on Cisco networking equipment. All end points shall support CAT-6A
operation.
Minimum general equipment shall include the following:
1. All active devices shall be accessible from a network console or auxiliary
RS-232 port for configuration purposes.
2. All devices shall be capable of responding to SNMP, SNMP3 and/or RMON
network management program calla from the Network Management
System.
 3. Network equipment’s shall support the use of protocol independent
multicast (PIM), and Internet Group Management Interface.
4. Network equipment shall support a minimum of 10GB connectivity
between the distribution switch and all other edge switches.
5. Network equipment shall support port mirroring. This shall be done by
sending frames directly from specified port to another switch port or from
an external network analyzer.
6. Network equipment shall Quality of service enabling classification,
policing/metering and marking functions on a per-port basis at ingress and
the queuing/scheduling function at egress.
7. All network equipment shall be Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN)
compatible based on both port and MAC addresses.
8. Only CCTV equipment related to the project shall be able to access the
network.
9. All free ports on switch shall be disabled.
10. 25% of network switch ports shall be kept free for future use.

6.18 Redundancy:

Contractor shall submit the redundancy offered for system in details along with
the bid. The level of redundancy proposed by the contractor will be an important
factor during the evaluation of the bid.
Based on the risk factor of the site redundancy requirements shall include:
1. Dual redundant video management server.
2. A redundancy NVR shall provide; it is preferable that in the event of an
NVR failing that all cameras on the failed NVR are recorded by the
redundancy NVR. Otherwise, the proper authorities shall be contacted
immediately.
3. All NVRs shall have 1+1 redundant power supply and cooling fan unless a
solid-state type server is used.
4. Edge switches shall have dual fiber uplinks to connect to distribution
(core) switch (s).
5. Dual redundancy core switch design can be proposed.
6. All switches shall have 1+1 redundant power supply and cooling fans.

6.19 Recording Requirements:

The recording period shall be 31 days for low and medium risk level installations.
A high-risk installation shall have a three months live recording storage unless the
recording period is specified separately. An option is to be given for 12 months
archive using tape/other type of backup media.
All cameras shall record continuously at 5 frames per second, during an event as a
minimum all 4CIF/VGA cameras shall be recorded at 25 FPS. Higher resolution
cameras shall be recorded at 15 FPS or at the highest frame rate supported by the
camera’s highest resolution.
All recording using H.264 Compression levels shall not exceed 70%; no noticeable
degradation in the image quality shall be observable by the end user.

6.20 Factory Acceptance Testing:

Prior to the installation the contractor shall setup and demonstrate the proposed
CCTV system operations, features and functions for The Client officials and
security manager of Secure LLC to review and comment.
The FAT (Factory Acceptance Test) procedures shall show all test required to
demonstrate the features, functions and capability of the proposed CCTV
solution.
The GUI and site plan navigation shall also be demonstrated during the FAT
(Factory Acceptance Test).
6.21 Support Maintenance and warranty:

Full support/maintenance/warranty shall be provided by supplier for three years

from the date accepted (handover acceptance) by The Client. A letter confirming
the principal supplier support shall be provided.
During the support period the contractor shall;
1. Obtain all necessary from the principal supplier
2. Any labor, hardware or software necessary to correct a fault shall
be provided by supplier without any charges to The Client.
3. Fault shall be rectified on the following basis; respond shall be within
one hour with one with immediate replacement of faulty equipment of
faulty equipment & recertification within six hours.
4. On-site presence by UN authorizes support engineer within two hours of
fault being reported by The Client.
5. Support shall be to provide 24 hour a day, 365 days a year b bases. i.e.,
anytime it is required. A list of the technical respond team and their
contact details shall be provided
6. Supplier shall maintain necessary spare parts locally to satisfy
rectification requirements described above. A complete list of all
required shall be submitted.
7. All faults shall be documented and submitted to the head of CCTV
department.
 8. Supplier shall provide a regular prevented maintenance including
cleaning of field equipment’s and shall submit detailed schedule to be
followed for maintenance.
9. Software update and upgrade.
10. AD Police purchase department rules will apply any for a violation
of maintenance agreement by the contractor.
11. Supplier shall provide as an option, the support cost (as a percentage
of system price) for the years 4 to 8, in the BOQ.

6.22 Training:

All engineers working on/maintaining the system shall be qualified, trained and
certified by the manufacturer of the equipment’s. All certification shall be up to
date.
Professional certified technical training shall be provided to the client. Personnel
nominated by the principal supplier shall be considered qualified and authorized
to carry out the training for the Client.
Full training shall be provided for 5 systems administrators and to 12 operator’s
users. All training materials shall be providing in English and Arabic and all
training shall provide in English or Arabic required.
After the training the client staff shall be able to operate the system
independently.

6.23 Documentation

The contractor shall submit 3 set (hard & soft) copies of the following document:
1. As built drawing
2. Maintenance manual
3. Operation manual
4. Control room shall have laminated site plan with camera icon and identification
number.

6.24 Equipment Labeling:

1. All equipment Servers, dish arrays, Switches, IP camera shall have

unique alphanumeric names
2. The security contractor shall supply and install self-adhesive
equipment identification label to
3. All equipment supplied for the project. For equipment located
 external of building and exposed
4. To extreme environmental factors, labels shall be riveted or fixed
using a permanent clear adhesive compound
5. The equipment labeling scheme shall as a minimum, include;
warranty expiry date, Model/serial
6. Number of equipment, security contactor name, Equipment
identification tag, labeling scheme
7. Shall be approve by the client

6.25 Cable Labeling:

1. All cable shall be labeled with a unique alphanumeric identifier
2. labeling shall be approved by client
3. The labeling shall designate the cable origins and destination with
unique identifier for the cable within the system. Labeling shall
clearly identify the following building number, Riser/security Closet,
Rack, cable (Each cable shall be with numbering ferrules) patch panel,
port, equipment.

6.26 General conditions:

1. All products submitted in the bid, shall be locked in and can only be
replaced if the product fail The Mockup or Fat or a better product or
newer model is available. Replacement or substitution of any item
submitted in the bid requires a written permission from the client The
contractor shall submit detailed implementation plan/ project program
2. All the electrical, civil, carpentry works and any others access equipment
required for the project Shall be provided by the security contractor.
3. All entry/ exit points shall be monitored by mega pixel cameras.
4. All the supplied items shall be installed according to the
recommendations of their manufacturers.
5. The contractor shall provide testing & commissioning method statement
30 days prior to starting of testing & commissioning for the client to
review & comment.
6. The contractor shall provide to the client, representative to witness the
testing and commissioning a report clearly stating all the testing &
commissioning outcome shall be submitted to the client &
7. IT and Telecom Dept., the report shall give details of failures observe
during the commissioning phase.
8. As part of system acceptance testing the contactor shall invite the client,
& IT and Telecom Dept. and secure PM. Representative to witness the
inspection and testing of the video surveillance in compliance to the
tender specification. All operational features as detailed in the
specification shall be demonstrated.
9. The contactor shall provide to the client, prior to the system acceptance
 testing a draft of the as-Built drawing, point by point compliance and
completion of the functional requirement as detailed in the tender
specification/subsequent addendum /additional client requirements as
agreed during the project implementation phase client’s representative
shall witness the system acceptance tasting; the contactor shall
implement. Any changes or correct deficiencies noted during the
acceptance testing. After the client’s representative is satisfied with the
outcome of the acceptance testing, the complete solution
10. The fault has to be rectified and the system shall be further monitored
for 15 days. Such delays Shall not affect the overall project program or
cost. in the event of project delay penalties as per clients’ policies shall
be applied.
11. As part of final acceptance, the security contactor shall submit 3 sets of
hard and soft copies.
1. The final system acceptance shall base on:
2. Client sign off of the acceptance testing after 15 days of fault free
operation
3. Client acceptance of training provided to its staff
4. Submission of as built project submission folder.
 3-PUBLIC ADDRESS & MASS NOTIFICATION
SYSTEMS

1.1. PUBLIC ADDRESS / MUSIC SYSTEM

1. The contractor shall provide a public address / music system to
sonorous sound evenly in all areas of the building as per location of the
speakers indicated in the drawings.
2. The system shall be supplied and commissioned by a specialist company
which is the authorized representative for the equipment’s in the UAE
has a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the similar field. All cabling, civil
and carpentry works will be done by the contractor.
3. Microphone outlet to be provided in the outdoor court area.

1.2. System description

1. The system shall comprise of source units viz, AM / FM Tuner, Double
Cassette Deck and Multi Disk CD Player connected to the System Pre-
Amplifier. The system pre-amplifier shall have the provision for routing
calls (speech announcements) & music to the various zones, along with
the facility for an all-call announcement.
2. A call stations shall be provided and located in the Ground floor. One
call station shall be located in the ground floor kindergarten and the
other in the ground floor main school.
3. Speakers from each zone shall be looped & the cable shall be
terminated at the main system equipment rack. Details are furnished in
the single line diagram enclosed herewith.
4. Equipment specification as follows: -
I. System Pre-amplifier
Main’s supply: 230V AC, +/- 15%, 50Hz
Battery voltage: 24 V DC, + 20% / - 10%
Call station inputs: two
Mic / Line inputs: universal input with speech optimized tone control
BGM inputs: three inputs with music optimized tone control
Frequency response: 50 Hz to 20 kHz
Distortion :<0.5 %
LED VU indicator: yes
Operating temperature range: - 10 to +55 deg C
Relative humidity :< 95 %
Dimensions: 100 x 430 x 270 mm
Weight: approx. 5 Kg

II. Booster Amplifier 120 W & 150W

Main’s supply 230 / 240V AC, 50Hz
 Battery voltage 24 VDC, + 20 %, - 10 %
Line input balanced with loop-through output
Loudspeaker outputs 100V, 70V, 50V and 8 Ohms.
Headphone output yes
LED VU indicator yes
Frequency response 50 Hz to 20 kHz
Operating temp. range -10 to +55 deg C
Relative humidity < 95 %

III. Call Station 6 zones

Equipment types unidirectional condenser mic on flexible stem
Base stable metal base
Selection keys six zone, all-call and momentary PTT keys for calls
Voltage range 18 24 V Nominal sensitivity 85 dB SPL
Distortion < 0.6 % (maximum input) Frequency range 100 Hz to 16 kHz
Speech filter - 3 dB @ 315 Hz, high pass, 6 dB / oct Rated output
impedance 200 Ohms
Operating temperature -10 to +55 deg C Relative humidity < 95 %
Dimensions 40 x 100 x 235 mm (base) Weight approx. 1 Kg

IV. Surface Mount Ceiling Loudspeaker with Surface Mounting Box

Rated power (PHC) 6 W (6 - 3 - 1.5 W)
Sound pressure level at
6 W/1W (at 1kHz, 1m) 99 dB / 91 dB (SPL)
Effective frequency range
-10 dB) 70 Hz to 18 kHz
Opening angle
(At 1 kHz / 4 kHz -6dB) 160 deg / 55 deg
Rated voltage 100V
Rated impedance 1667 Ohms
Ambient temperature range -25 to +55 deg C
Dimensions (dia x max depth) 210 x 88 mm

Surface Mounting Box

Dimensions (dia x max depth) 210 x 93 mm
Color White (RAL 9010)
Weight 360 g
 4- SMATV SYSTEM

1.1. GENERAL

The contractor shall allow for the design, supply, installation, test and commissioning of a
SMATV IF system as herein specified and as shown in the drawings. The primary system
equipment shall be installed by a specialist sub-contractor to be approved by the Engineer
and in accordance with the following specifications.

The complete system shall be installed by the authorized representatives of the

manufacturers. All the processing equipment (terrestrial and satellite) installed in the system
shall be from the specified manufacturers; components from non-specified manufacturers
not be accepted except the manufactures does not have in their product range.

The contractor shall submit the material submittal strictly based on each and every clause of
the specification for strict quality assurance and performance of the system. Alternative
proposal will not be accepted in whatsoever the reason, unless the alternative manufacturer
comply the specification requirements of the system. Compliance statement shall be
submitted with supporting design calculation and product literature and schematic diagrams
for the engineer approval.

All the electronic equipment shall comply and confirm to the ISO 9001 series of quality
standards.

The distribution shall be of IF signals. IF signal shall be provided in all outlets as per drawing.
The IF signals shall also include Orbit / Show time / Pehla / ART / Star Select / TFC signal.
DiSEqC 2.0 switches shall be used for IF distribution.

The system shall provide for the reception and distribution of the following satellites with
Two Polarities each from Arab Sat, Nile Sat, Four Polarities from NSS 6, and Four
Polarities from Hot Bird, One Polarity each from Insat, ABSCBN and Asia Sat.
(Arab sat - Nile sat - Hot bird - Insat - Asia sat Dishes)
Parabolic dish antenna of diameter 2.3 mt. shall be provided for the reception from C-band
satellite channels.
 Material: Aluminum Mesh / Solid
Band: C Band
Diameter: 1.2/ 3 mt.
Gain: 38.7 dB
Polarization: Linear or Circular
Operating Temperature: Up to + 600 C
Wind survival: 90Mph.
F/D Ratio: 0.35

Dishes for the reception of Ku signals shall be of 1.1 mt. or larger diameter. It shall be single
panel construction with polyester powder coated steel.

Band: Ku Band
Diameter: 1.2mt.
Gain: 56 dB to 62dB
Material: Polyester powder coated steel
Polarization: Linear or Circular
Operating Temperature: Up to + 600 C
Mounting: Pole / Ground
Side Lobes: 20dB down
Surface Tolerance: +.03”

1.2. IF DISEQC MULTISWITCH

The switches shall use for IF distribution from Satellite. It shall be of Multi switches, cascadable
type using appropriate number of inputs and outputs.
Amplifier and power supply shall be used in the network for proper distribution of signals to
each apartment.
It shall have a dedicated feed for each apartment and shall be provided in the number of
sockets as per drawing.
It shall provide following features:
Digital proof and Subscriber isolation of 30 dB type.
Highest frequency response linearity
Zinc die-cast housing with high efficiency screening
Energy saving and low power standby
1 terrestrial, 16 satellite polarity inputs and 16 combined outputs. The system shall be
designed in such a way, that a maximum number of satellites channels can be distributed
through the distribution network with consideration for future expansion.

Input: 1 terrestrial and 16 satellite polarities

Subscriber outputs: 16 no
Frequency: 47-862 & 950-2400
Thru Loss: 2-6
Isolation: terr.>25 & sat. >30
Switching: DiSEqC2.0
Operating voltage: 13VDC
Amplifier: Adjustable amplification Integrated equalizer
Gain: terrestrial 17 with switch able tilt
SAT 18-24 (+/-2)
Attenuation: 0-10 adjustable

1.3. DISTRIBUTION NETWORK

The distribution network shall be designed to ensure an IF signal level in the range of 52-77
dBµV at any outlet in the building.

The system of outlets shall be flush-mounted, isolated, SAT, TV and Radio outlets. The output
plates shall be finished to match other electrical accessories within the area they are installed.
All outlets shall be supplied by correctly attenuated splitter or tap-off units and mounted within
an approved accessible location. The signal level shall be in the range of 52-77 dBµV for IF at
any outlet in the complex. Material submittals shall include schematic diagrams showing cables
losses, signal levels at various points etc. for approval of the Engineer.

All outlets shall be wired in radial system for each outlet, no looping between outlets being
allowed. The supply cable shall be an extra low loss double screened cable. Typical loss for the
coaxial cable shall be 18 dB /100 meters for internal wiring and 9 dB /100 meters for the main
feeder, measured at 800 MHz

Line amplifiers with built-in equalizers shall be used to achieve the specified signal levels. The
SMATV System installation shall be segregated from other electrical systems.

1.4. CABLES
Low Loss 75 ohms double shielded coaxial cable for indoor distribution with meter making and
uniform quality. All cables should meet European standard EN 500117, including standards for
effective RF Shielding to be used for trunk feeder and sub-distribution circuits.
The cable shall be of the double screened type to avoid strong local station pick up within the
cable distribution system. Typical loss for the coaxial cable shall be as follows, based on 100
meters at 800 MHz.

For the internal room wiring: 18 dB/100 mt.

For the trunk feeder and main line: 9 dB/100 mt.

Coaxial cables used shall be from reputed European cable manufacturers like Triax, Hirschmann
and WISI. All cables shall be properly identified using ferrules for easy maintenance.

1.5. COMMISSIONING

After completion of the installation and all testing, the Contractor shall demonstrate
satisfactory performance of the system, for the Engineer's approval. All equipment for such
testing the demonstration shall be furnished by the Contractor, which shall also include a color
field Strength meter to display the quality of the TV picture and the signal level, simultaneously.
There shall be no separate payment to the Contractor for such demonstration, which shall
include any minor modifications that may be required to meet the Engineer's approval.

The final test results giving signal levels recorded at each TV outlet for selected satellites
shall be included in the O&M manuals.

Commissioning

The system shall be tested and commissioned to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer and
necessary equipment for testing shall be provided by specialist. A conventional 19” color TV
receiver and a satellite receiver shall be provided by the specialist, in addition to the TV field
strength meter, to demonstrate the quality of the picture. All signal levels at the wall outlets
shall measure as above specified at 85 Ohms.

Warranty
Without prejudice to any other warrantees for which the contractor is liable the SMATV system
shall be maintained for a period of one year from the occupation of the building free of any
charge for both material and labor under the contract and the specialist shall provide a call out
service to ensure the continued full operation for that period.

5-TELECOMMUNICATIONS

1. Introduction

“Telecommunications’’ encompasses all of the services that a modern, forward thinking

communications service provider will provide within a building or campus of buildings,
the importance of the Telecommunications play a vital role in the profitable operation
to the business. The term infrastructure, which carries this vital information around a
building, or campus of buildings, cannot be over emphasized. The purpose of this
document is to explain in detail the design, installation requirements & considerations
for Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) serviced building and campuses, including the entry of
cables into the building and extension of Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) network into and
around the building or campus of buildings. Moreover, this document has listed all
needed drawings and documents than need to be submitted to Abu Dhabi Police GHQ.

2. Scope

This structured cabling system interconnects telecommunication equipment for

Voice / Data / Video (VDV) in a multi- vendor environment and is based on modular
sub systems that are independent yet complimentary. This approach facilities easy
growth, since changes in one sub-system does not affect others. The system uses
hierarchy of nodes laid out in a star topology, thus facilitating moves, changes and
additions without having had to lay outs the cables again. The given specification is
the General Policy OF Abu Dhabi Police in maintaining its structured cabling
standard. However, it will partially or fully applicable in accordance with the
requirement of individual site.

Drawings and documentations:

1. Before constructions (during design stage)

Architects / Consultants and Designers must liaise with Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ)
at the design stage and obtain Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) IT Department approval
on the final design drawings.
Two sets of SCS design drawings, two sets of MEP drawings related to SCS work,
and two sets of SCS Schematic drawings along with two sets of site plans
drawings must be submitted to Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) IT Department /
Telecomm for study and approval before tendering

2. During construction
Contractor must submit the construction drawing related to SCS work to Abu
Dhabi Police (GHQ), IT Department to get approval on their construction
drawing. Upon approval on construction drawing, contractor must submit the
SCS material submittal to Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) IT Department to review &
approval on SCS contractor & materials which will be installed in the same
project.

3. After constructed completed

It is mandatory to main contractor to obtain an approval of installed SCS cabling
system from Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) IT Department before closing the project.
Main contractor may request to Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) IT Department for
frequently visiting site (for containment, telecom room, work of SCS contractor
etc.,) to obtain approval.

Upon completion of the project, three sets of approval as- built drawings, final
containment drawing, external drawings for campus, Operations & Maintenance
Manual, Test reports with summary and the Building Structure cabling System
Completion Certificate must also be submitted to Abu Dhabi Police (GHQ) IT
Department.
 Related structured cabling systems (SCS) standards
The following standards or higher should be understood or followed up by
Structured cabling company before commencing any SCS work.
ANSI/TIA 942- Tier-3 Standard. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A,B,C.

3. Work area space

Definition: The work includes those spaces in a building where occupants
normally work and interact with their telecommunications equipment. The
following should be considered for work area.
1. Balanced twisted Pair cables to be used. Connectors may be UTP, ScTP,
F/UTP, or S/FTP with color coding or pin pairing T568A or T568B or
T568C in socket side. Permanent label should be installed in Face plate
and Horizontal cable before handling over the site as per ANSI/TIA/EIA-
606A/B/C standard.
2. Consider an area of 2mX2m (4m) as one work area unit.
3. For work areas a minimum of two telecommunications outlet box in
each location should be provided (one dual outlet box for data and
another outlet box for telephone and location of outlet to be as per
approved Drawings).
4. The work area telecommunications outlet box should be located near an
electrical outlet (e.g., within 0.6 m [2ft] and installed at the same height.
5. Please provide a minimum one dual power outlet for each work area.
6. Sufficient space must be provided in the telecommunications outlet box
or equivalent space so that the minimum cable bend radius
requirements are not exceeded.
7. The location, mounting, or strain relief of the communications
outlet/connector should allow pathway covers and trim to be removed
without disturbing the cable termination. Care should be exercised to
ensure that telecommunications outlet/connectors are mounted in such
a way that they do not significantly reduce the required pathway cabling
capacity.
8. Work area cables from the outlet box to the work area equipment like a
PC should be treated carefully and not ignored. Work area cables and
other equipment cables that connect to the horizontal cabling shall
meet or exceed the performance requirements of the horizontal cabling
to which connect.
9. Patch Cord shall be provided and calculation to be as follows:
1Meter Patch cord =50% number of Data outlet
3Meter Patch cord=40% number of Data & voice outlet
5Meter Patch cord=40% number of Data & voice outlet
10Meter Patch cord=20% number of Data & voice outlet
 10. Outlet should have DUST cover.

Horizontal distribution systems

The horizontal distribution system consists of two basic elements:

1. Horizontal pathways system

The following types of horizontal pathways may be used as per site condition
and requirements:
1. Conduit distribution.
2. Cable tray systems.
3. Access floors.
4. Ceiling distribution systems.
5. Sizing considerations.

Conduit distribution
A conduit system consists of conduits Installed from the Feeder duct (cable tray)
or telecom room the telecommunications outlet/connectors in the floor, walls,
or columns of a building for a small building, an under-floor conduit system can
be furnished can support and concealment if a sufficient number of
telecommunications outlet/connectors are installed. Electrical conduit bodies
(also called LBs) are not permitted.

Conduit body
The two most common styles are the C or straight in line fitting and conduit bodies
(also called LBs) or 90-degreebend with removable cover. Using a pull box or splice
box on lieu of a bend when developing telecommunications pathways are not
allowed.
NOTE: If flexible conduit must be used, its size should be increased by one trade size
relative to the size of a rigid conduit.

Acceptable conduit runs

The designer should design and install conduits runs to:
1. Achieve the best direct route (e.g., usually parallel to building
lines) with no bend greater than 90 degrees or an aggregate of bends in
 excess of 180 degrees between pull points or pull boxes.
2. Contain no continues section longer than 20 meters.
3. If metal conduit used than this conduit to be bonded to ground on
both ends.
4. Withstand the environment to which they will be exposed.
5. If the total conduit run is more than 20 meters in length then pull
points or pull boxes should be installed.
6. Minimum size of conduit is 25mm. conduit should run from each outlet
to the nearest cable tray in the corridors.

Prohibited conduit runs

Conduit should not be run:
On top of cellular floor cells.
Crosswise to cellular floor cells.
Through areas in which flammable material may be stored.

Over or adjacent to:

1. Boilers
2. Incinerators.
3. Hot-water lines.
4. Stream lines.
In initial installations, do not use conduit in lieu of feeder ducts between the distribution
ducts and the TR or to supplement the feeder capacity of the system.

NOTE;
 Aluminum or thin-walled plastic conduit should never be placed in
concrete floors. PVC conduit should be Clipsal or Decoduct or Higher
quality brand.
 Flexible conduit (e.g., metal flex conduit) is not recommended for use in
buildings.

Bend radii for conduits

 If the conduit has an Internal Diameter of 50 mm (2 in) or less, The
Bend Radius Must be at Least 6 times the internal conduit.
 If the conduit has an Internal Diameter more than 50 mm (2 in)
diameter. The bend radium must be able at least 10 times has internal
conduit.
 If a conduit needs more than two 90 bend than a pull box to be
 installed.

CABLE TRAY SYSTEM

Cable tray systems are commonly used as distribution system for cabling within a
building. Cable tray system:
 Are rigid, prefabricated support instructors that support
telecommunications cables and cabling.
 Must be installed to meet national and local codes.
 When a tray is used in the ceiling area, conduit should be provided from
the tray to the telecommunications outlet/connectors or zones.
 The size of cable tray should be 300-600mm X 50 mm as per site
condition and quantity of Cable.

The inside of cable tray must be free of burrs, sharp edges. Or projections that can
damage cable installation. Shared cable tray is not allowed.
All metallic cable trays must be grounded and all sections bonded in accordance with
applicable code, standards, and regulations.
All cable trays and grounding conductors should be clearly marked in accordance with
appropriate codes, standards, regulation.
40 % free space to be available while considering the tray for future use.

Access floors
An access floor is raised above an existing subfloor and provides accessible space under
the floor panels also called raised floors. All telecommunication room should have the
raised floor.

Access floor height

The minimum finished height of access flooring depends on its use and location .

1. Floor Telecommunication room, the finished floor should be 300 mm

(12”) high or higher.
2. Computer or control room environment where the plenum is used for
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC), The finished floor
height must be 450 mm (18”) or greater.
NOTE:
All metal parts of an access floor should be bonded to ground. For bonding and
grounding, follow the access floor manufacturer’s guidelines all applicable building and
electrical codes.

Floor panel coverings

It should be high pressure laminated, or Vinyl or another durable tile.

Load-bearing capacity
Uniform load capacity = 4.8 kPa (100lbf/ft2)
Concentrated Load Capacity= 808 KN (2000lbf)

Ceiling distribution systems Acceptable methods of distribution

The methods of ceiling cable distribution described in this section are generally
acceptable if the:
• Ceiling is adequate and suitable.
• Ceiling space is available for cabling pathways.
• Ceiling access is controlled by the building owner.
• Code requirements for design, installation, and pathways are met.
• Building owner is aware of their responsibility for any damage,
injury, or inconvenience to occupants that may result from technicians
working in the ceiling.
• Areas used cabling pathways are fully accessible from the floor below
(e.g., not obstructed by fixed ceiling tiles, dry walls, or plaster).
• Ceiling tiles are removable.

Considerations
Connecting hardware must be mounted in locations that are readily accessible.
Mounting of certain types of hardware (e.g., CP connectors) in a suspended ceiling
space maybe acceptable provided that the:
• Space is accessible.
• Building fixtures, equipment, or heavy furniture (e.g., file cabinets
weighing 45kg[100lb] or more) does not compromise the access.
• Access does not disturb occupants.
• Hardware is protected from physical abuses and foreign substances
IMPORTANT:
Connecting hardware or telecommunications equipment should not be
placed in the ceiling space. The only allowable exception is connecting
hardware as part of a CP or HCP.
General design guidelines
The area above a suspended ceiling should be carefully planned to allow room for
the different utilities and telecommunications services. Coordination between the
various trades that use the ceiling space is essential.

Determining adequate ceiling space

To determine how much ceiling space is adequate, the designer should allow for a
minimum of:
- 100 mm (4”) of clear vertical space above conduits and cables.
- 305 mm (12”) of clear vertical space above the tray or raceway for overhead ceiling
cable tray or raceway systems.
When designing the layout of horizontal pathways in ceiling spaces, the designer
should ensure that the other building components (e. g., lighting fixtures, structural
supports, air ducts) do not restrict access to cable trays or raceways.

Pathway and cable support

Every ceiling distribution system must provide proper support for cables from the TR
to the work areas it serves. The pathways must:
• Have adequate support to withstand pulling the cabinets.
• Be installed with at least 76mm (3”) of clear vertical space above the
ceiling tiles and support channels (T-bars) to ensure accessibility.

Horizontal pathways or cables should not support by:

• Ceiling panels.
• Support channels (T-bars).
• Vertical supports.
• Other components of the suspended ceiling.

When sufficient space is available above the pathway, up to 125 mm (6”) should be
provided between the suspended ceiling and the suspended pathways.

Termination space
The designer should allow maximum wall space in the TR for the horizontal cable
terminations.

Sizing considerations
The size requirements for horizontal pathways depend on the following
considerations:
• Usable floor space served by the pathway.
• Maximum occupant density (e.g., floor space required per
individual work area).
• BAS density (e.g., number, type, and coverage areas of systems
using SCS).
• Cable density (e.g., quantity of horizontal cables planned per
individual work area).
• Cable diameter.
• Pathway capacity (e.g., requires that fill factor be taken into
account).

Usable floor space

For planning purposes, this space should include hallways, but not other common
areas of the building (e.g., restrooms, utility closets).

Maximum Occupant Density

The standard floor space allocation used in an office environment is one individual
work area every 4 m2 of usable floor space.
Each work area requires four telecommunications outlet/connectors (two for Data &
two for Voice = one dual Data- using two 4 pair cable & one dual Voice- using one
pair cable).

Building Automation System (BAS) Density

The standard floor space coverage area estimated for each building automation
system (BAS) is a BAS outlet or device for every 23m2 (250 ft2) of floor space. BASs
serve both used and unused floor space and, therefore, the entire floor space should
be taken into account when sizing the pathway, it must be considered.

Cable Density
The designer should plan for a pathway capacity that accommodates a minimum of
three horizontal cable runs per individual work area. Pathway capacity for BASs
should include one cable for each system or coverage area.

Cable Diameter
Table list typical ranges of cable diameter for recognized horizontal cabling media.
These values are provided for planning purposes only. The designer should check the
actual diameter of the Typical diameter ranges.

Horizontal Cable Type Typical Range of Overall

Diameter
4-Pair 100-ohm UTP, ScTP, F/UTP, or S/FTP 5.5 mm to 8.0 mm
2-Fiber optical fiber cable 2.8 mm to 3.2 mm

Horizontal cabling systems

The horizontal cabling is the portion is the portions of a telecommunications cabling
system that extend from the work area telecommunications outlet/connector to the
HC (FD) in the TR or TE.

Design considerations
Horizontal cabling must be designed to accommodate diverse user’s applications,
Including

 Voice communications.
 Data communications.
 Video communications.
 automation system.
 Other building signaling systems.
To provide for a building’s future cabling needs, the horizontal cabling
must:
• Provide flexible cable distribution to work area locations.
• Facilitate ongoing maintenance and relocations.
 • Accommodate future changes in equipment and services.
Topology
• Horizontal cabling must be installed in a star topology, each
telecommunications outlet/connector must be cabled directly to an HC
(FD) in the TR or TE.
• Two exceptions to this practice are when a CP/HCP is required to
connect to open office cabling. Each CP shall be cabled directly to an HC
in the TR.
• Horizontal cabling should be terminated in a TR that is on the same
floor as the area being served.

Not
e
• Splices are not permitted for balanced twisted-pair horizontal cabling. Bridged
:
taps (i.e., multiple appearances of the same cable pairs at several distribution
points) are not generally permitted in horizontal cabling.
• Bridged taps, multipoint bus, loops, rings, and other topologies are permitted
on the secondary (BAS device) side of the cross-connect inside the HCP.

Consolidation and transition points

• Horizontal cabling systems may not contain more than one CP, HCP, or
TP in a horizontal cabling run.
• CP, HCP, and TP connectors must meet the appropriate performance
and reliability requirements specified in applicable standards.
• 24 runs of Cat6 cable + 1 x 25 Pair Cat3 cable shall be installed between
CP & HC or IC or MC.
• All the cable termination shall be on RJ45 patch panel. CP shall be closed
to avoid penetration of dust or water. Each 6 office must consider one
CP.
Horizontal cable

1. Cable lengths
Maximum lengths apply to all horizontal distribution cables and are shown in
Below Table
HORIZONTAL CABLES…
MUST BE NO MORE
THEN…
From the HC (FD) to the telecommunications
Outlet/connector.
90m (295ft) long

Used for patch cords and cross-connect

5 m (16ft) long.
Jumpers in the HC (FD)

2. Cable Types
The following two types of cables should use in horizontal cabling:
• 4-pair CAT-6A 100-ohm balanced twisted-pair.
• 2 or more strands of 50/125 micrometer (um) OM4 optical
fiber cable.

NOTE:
The wire gauge for conductors used for 100-ohm balanced twisted-pair cabling is
typically in the range of 23AWG up to 22AWG for horizontal cabling.

3. Cable Selection
-2X4-pair 100-ohm balanced 6A UTP , STP or FTP or higher category.

NOTE:
24XCAT-6A Cables (24AWG) cable might needed to install between CP or HCP &
HC or IC or MC.

4. Cable Slack
The following minimum of cable length to be left as a cable slack:
• At the HC or IC or MC is 3 m (10ft).
• Telecommunication outlet is 203 mm (8 in.).
• Slack should be included in all length calculations to ensure that the horizontal
 cable does not exceed 90 m (295ft).

NOTE:
Slack should not be stored in bundled loops. Cable slack should be stored in an
extended loop or in a figure-eight configuration to alleviate stress.

Crossover/Polarity
1. Copper
For 100 ohm balanced twisted-pair cabling links, all connections should be made
straight through with no crossovers between pairs or conductors.

2. Optical Fiber
For optical fiber cabling systems, explicit guidelines that govern the use of
crossovers are provided in applicable standards. These guidelines ensure that
each optical fiber cabling link is installed in a pair-wise crossover orientation in
which the optical fibers of a pair identified as Position A and Position B at one
end will be reversed and identified as Position B and Position A (respectively) at
the other end.

Horizontal Connecting Hardware

All connecting hardware used for horizontal cable connections must meet or
exceed the requirements of reliability, safety, and transmission performance
specified in the applicable codes, standards, and regulations.

Equipment connections at horizontal cross-connect (HC), (IC). Or (IMC)

Modular type Patch panels must install to terminate Cat6 cable for Data and
Telephone Patch Panel should be grounded.

Telecommunication outlets/connectors
• Telecommunications outlets/connectors should be mounted securely at
work area locations.
• Telecommunications outlets/connectors should be located as per furniture
layout.
So required to reach area equipment is no more than 3 m (10ft) long.
• Telecommunications outlets/connectors should be tools free, angled type
and must have the dust cover.

Consolidation Point (cp), Horizontal Connection Point 9HCP), and

Transition Point (TP)
-Patch panel to be installed for Cat6 cable and 25 pair Cat3 cable.
Cross-connect jumpers and patch cords
-Please see the Work area.

Backbone distribution systems

A backbone distribution system is the part of a premises distribution system that

provides connection between equipment rooms (ERs), telecommunications
rooms (TRs), telecommunications enclosures (TEs), and telecommunications
service entrance facilities (EFs).
A backbone system typically provides:
• Building connections between floors in multistory buildings.
• Campus connections in multi-building environments.

Backbone cross-connects
A backbone star topology should have no more than two levels of cross-
connections. Connections between any two HCs (FDs) should not pass through
more than three cross connections.

Campus backbone
• One-level hierarchical star campus backbone would link all the buildings to
the MC (CD).
• The cross-connect in each building would then become the IC (BD), linking
the ICs in each building to the MC (CD).
• Another level of star topology link for redundant using physically separated
cable path (redundant) to be installed between MC & IC.

NOTE:
Redundancy is for Data Network only.

Building backbones
The design of a building backbone should be Star topology where HC (FD) is
connected to the IC (BD) and another level of star topology for redundant using
redundant cable path.

NOTE:
Redundancy is for Data Network only.
Backbone Cable Lengths

• 1 X OM4 or Higher, 50/125 um multimode Fiber optic Cable to be used

within 500 meter on each cable route.
• 1X OS2 Single mode Fiber optic cable & 2X OM4 or Higher, 50/125 um multi
Fiber optic Cable to be used wherever length is exceed 500 meter on each
cable route.

Cable Specifications
Data
Indoor applications:
• 12 Core OM4 or Higher, 50/125 um multimode optical fiber Armored loose
tube indoor/outdoor type.
• 12 Core OS2 or Higher, 8-9 um Single mode optical fiber Armored loose
tube indoor/outdoor type.

Outdoor applications:
• 12Core OM4 or Higher, 50/125 um multimode optical fiber Armored loose
tube indoor/outdoor type.
• 12 Core OS2 or Higher, 8-9 um Single mode optical fiber Armored loose
tube indoor/outdoor type.

Voice
• Cat 3 UTP Cable for indoor application.
• Cat 3 jelly field armored cable for outdoor application.

Etisalat
12 Core armored Single mode Fiber optic Cable to be pulled from each IDT or
MDT to Etisalat MDF as per Etisalat specification.

Building Backbone Pathways

Vertically Aligned Telecommunications Rooms (TRs)

• Vertically aligned TRs should connect with cable tray.
• Vertically rising HDGI cable trays are required to link all Floor Telecom
Rooms and the Roof Telecom Room back to the Main Telecom Room.
• Two separate pathways to be installed (primary &secondary) between
Main Telecommunication Room & Building Telecommunication Room or
Floor Telecommunication Room.
• Whenever possible, cable trays should extend vertically from the Main
Telecom Room, however when this is not possible then horizontal cable
trays should be provided.
• Horizontal cable trays should be in readily accessible common areas to
facilitate future placement of additional cables.
• Cable trays should be appropriate size to accommodate the volume of
cables required. Abu Dhabi Police will advise the size of cable tray during
the Design stage. However recommended cable tray size is 600x50mm,
300x50 mm or more as per site condition.
• All cable trays are to be electrically bonded to the building grounding
system.
• All cable trays should be free from sharp edges and clearly labeled.
• Minimum electrical separation should adhere as per below table

Condition Minimum Separation Distance

Unshielded power lines or electrical
610 mm (24 in)
Equipment in proximity to open or
Nonmetal pathways
Unshielded power lines or electrical
Equipment in proximity to a
305 mm (12 in)
grounded
Metal conduit pathway.
Power lines enclosed in a grounded
metal Conduit (or equivalent
152 mm (6 in)
shielding) in Proximity to a
grounded pathway.
Electrical motors and transformers 1194 mm (47 in)

For safety purposes, power cables should be separated from telecommunications

cables. For branch circuits of 5 Kva or less, the designer should consider a
physical separation of 51 mm (2 in) between the telecommunications cabling and
power cabling. Do not locate backbone cable pathways in elevator shafts.

Civil Works
Excavation dimensions D x W, cm:
Normal soil-100x50.
Hard soil-80x40.
Rock soil-60x30
• The ducts should be completely sealed.
• The executed design should ensure the co-ordination of all other services
located along the route.
• Open or broken surfaces within the ducts route are prohibited.
• A bed of sand should be placed where rocky soil is present.
• At 600mm top of ducts an approved locating marker /warning tape
(nonmetallic) must be placed parallel to the duct runs.
• Minimum 4 No’s 100 mm duct to be installed with 6 mm Nylon pull cord.
• Maximum distance between two manholes 30 meters.
• Minimum size of manhole should not be less than 80cm X 80cm. Police
Telephone should be engraved on Manhole cover.
• Sharing conduit is not allowed.

Methods to Terminate Cable

1. Optical Fiber Cable

• If multimode loose tube fiber (250um fiber) is used for Field
connectorization then it is mandatory to use the 900 um buffer tube for
physical protection of bare fiber. Field connectorizing either epoxy type or
Unicam (non epoxy) type termination or pigtail splicing to be followed.
• Connector should be SC Type in IDF (HC) (FD) location and LC in MDF (MC)
(CD) or (IC) location.
• If single mode cable is used then Pigtail splicing method to be followed for
termination. Please note that splicing should be fusion type. Mechanical
splice is not allowed. SC-APC type connector shall be installed in both sides.
• Note Two no’s SC-LC duplex fiber patch cord to be provided for each
multimode link and One no. of SCAPC-SCPAC + one no. of SCAPC-LCAPC
patch cord to be provided for each single mode link.

2. Balance twisted pair cable

• Cat 6A or Higher should use for Balance twisted pair cable as a horizontal
cable.
• Cat3 multipair cable may be used for Voice backbone.
• All the balance Twisted pair Cat 6A cable should be terminated on RJ45
Patch panel in IDF, IC, MC or CD location for DATA & TELEPHONE
Application.
• 42U 800X800 cabinet to be installed as an IDT or IDF for Data or Telephone.
• 42U 800 X 800 Cabinet should use for all cable termination in
MDF/MDT/MC Location either for Voice or Data. Cabinet should be
grounded with 6 AWG wire to the Building Grounding System. All external
cable should be grounded and bonded from both side as per local code and
standard.
• All termination either in Patch panel or Outlet should be terminated as per
T568B/C standard.

NOTE:
Proper Fire stopping materials should be used in vertical opening/shaft in
order to prevent the spread of flame and smoke from floor to floor.

Main Telecommunication Room:

1. General
The computer room is an environmentally controlled space that serves the sole
purpose of housing equipment and cabling directly related to the computer
systems and other telecommunications systems. The computer room should
meet the NFPA 75 standard.
The floor layout should be consistent with equipment and facility providers
requirements, such as:
• floor loading requirements including equipment, cables, patch cords, and
media (static concentrated load, static uniform floor load, dynamic rolling
load);
• service clearance requirements (clearance requirements on each side of
the equipment
• required for adequate servicing of the equipment);
• air flow requirements;
• mounting requirements;
• DC power requirements and circuit length restrictions;
• equipment connectivity length requirements (for example, maximum
channel lengths to
• peripherals and consoles).
2. Location
When selecting the computer room site, avoid locations that are restricted by
building components that limit expansion such as elevators, core, outside walls,
or other fixed building walls. Accessibility for the delivery of large equipment to
the equipment room should be provided (see ANSI/TIA-569-B annex B.3).
The room shall be located away from sources of electromagnetic interference.
Examples of such
noise sources include electrical power supply transformers, motors and
generators, x- ray
equipment, radio or radar transmitters, and induction sealing devices.
The computer room should not have exterior windows, as exterior windows
increase heat load
and reduce security.

3. Access
Computer room doors should provide access to authorized personnel only.
Additionally, access to the room shall comply with the requirements of the AHJ.

4. Architectural design
2.1 Size
The computer room shall be sized to meet the known requirements of specific
equipment
including proper clearances; this information can be obtained from the
equipment provider(s).
Sizing should include projected future as well as present requirements. See
annex E regarding guidelines on sizing of computer rooms.

2.2 Guidelines for other equipment

Electrical control equipment, such as power distribution or conditioner systems,
and UPS up to
100 kVA shall be permitted in the computer room, with the exception of flooded-
cell batteries.
UPS larger than 100 kVA and any UPS containing flooded-cell batteries should be
located in a
separate room except as required by the AHJ.
Equipment not related to the support of the computer room (e.g., piping,
ductwork, pneumatic
tubing, etc.) shall not be installed in, pass through, or enter the computer room.

2.3 Ceiling height

The minimum height in the computer room shall be 2.6 m (8.5 ft) from the
finished floor to any
obstruction such as sprinklers, lighting fixtures, or cameras. Cooling requirements
or racks/cabinets taller than 2.13 m (7 ft) may dictate higher ceiling heights. A
minimum of 460 mm
(18 in) clearance shall be maintained from water sprinkler heads.

2.4 Treatment
Floors, walls, and ceiling shall be sealed, painted, or constructed of a material to
minimize dust.
Finishes should be light in color to enhance room lighting. Floors shall have anti-
static properties in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2.

2.5 Lighting
Lighting shall be a minimum of 500 lux (50 footcandles) in the horizontal plane
and 200 lux
(20 footcandles) in the vertical plane, measured 1 m (3 ft) above the finished
floor in the middle of all aisles between cabinets.
Lighting fixtures should not be powered from the same electrical distribution
panel as the
telecommunications equipment in the computer room. Dimmer switches should
not be used.
Emergency lighting and signs shall be properly placed per authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ) such that an absence of primary lighting will not hamper
emergency exit.

2.6 Doors
Doors shall be a minimum of 1 m (3 ft) wide and 2.13 m (7 ft) high, without
doorsills, hinged to
open outward (code permitting) or slide side-to-side, or be removable. Doors
shall be fitted with
locks and have either no center posts or removable center posts to facilitate
access for large
equipment. Exit requirements for the computer room shall meet the
requirements of the AHJ.
2.7 Floor loading
Floor loading capacity in the computer room shall be sufficient to bear both the
distributed and
concentrated load of the installed equipment with associated cabling and media.
The minimum
distributed floor loading capacity shall be 7.2 kPA (150 lbf/ ft2). The
recommended distributed
floor loading capacity is 12 kPA (250 lbf/ ft2).
The floor shall also have a minimum of 1.2 kPA (25 lbf/ ft2) hanging capacity for
supporting loads that are suspended from the bottom of the floor (for example,
cable ladders suspended from the ceiling of the floor below). The recommended
hanging capacity of the floor is 2.4 kPA (50 lbf/ ft2).
Refer to Telcordia specification GR-63-CORE regarding floor loading capacity
measurement and test methods.

2.8 Signage
Signage, if used, should be developed within the security plan of the building.
Proper exit signage shall be placed in accordance with the AHJ.

2.9 Seismic considerations

Specifications for related facilities shall accommodate the applicable seismic
zone requirements. Refer to Telcordia specification GR-63-CORE for more
information regarding seismic considerations.

5. Environmental design
5.1 Contaminants
The room shall be protected from contaminants in accordance with ANSI/TIA-
569-B.

5.2 HVAC
If the computer room does not have a dedicated HVAC system, the computer
room shall be
located with ready access to the main HVAC delivery system. A computer room is
typically not
recognized as such by the AHJ unless it has a dedicated HVAC, or utilizes the
main building
HVAC and has automatic dampers installed.

• Continuous operation
HVAC shall be provided on a 24 hours-per-day, 365 days-per-year basis. If the
building system
cannot assure continuous operation for large equipment applications, a stand-
alone unit shall be
provided for the computer room.

• Standby operation
The computer room HVAC system should be supported by the computer room
standby generator
system, if one is installed. If the computer room does not have a dedicated
standby generator
system, the computer room HVAC should be connected to the building standby
generator
system, if one is installed.

5.3 Operational parameters

The temperature and humidity shall be controlled to provide continuous
operating ranges for
temperature and humidity:
• dry Bulb Temperature: 20o C (68o F) to 25o C (77o F);
• relative Humidity: 40% to 55%;
• maximum Dew Point: 21o C (69.8o F);
• maximum Rate of Change: 5o C (9o F) per hour;
• humidification and dehumidification equipment may be required
depending upon local environmental conditions.
The ambient temperature and humidity shall be measured after the equipment is
in operation.
Measurements shall be done at a distance of 1.5 m (5 ft) above the floor level
every 3 to 6 m (10 to 30 ft) along the center line of the cold aisles and at any
location at the air intake of operating equipment. Temperature measurements
should be taken at several locations of the air intake of any equipment with
potential cooling problems. Refer to ASHRAE for more detailed guidelines for
measuring and evaluating computer room temperatures.
A positive pressure differential with respect to surrounding areas should be
provided.

5.4 Batteries
If batteries are used for backup, adequate ventilation and spill containment as
required shall be
provided. Refer to applicable electrical codes for requirements.

5.5 Vibration
Mechanical vibration coupled to equipment or the cabling infrastructure can lead
to service
failures over time. A common example of this type of failure would be loosened
connections.
Potential vibration problems should be considered in the design of the computer
room, since
vibration within the building will exist and will be conveyed to the computer
room via the building
structure. In these cases, the project structural engineer should be consulted to
design safeguards against excessive computer room vibration. Refer to Telcordia
specification GR-63-
CORE for more information regarding vibration testing.

6. Electrical design

5.6 Power
Separate supply circuits serving the computer room shall be provided and
terminated in their own electrical panel or panels.
The computer room shall have duplex convenience outlets (120V 20A) for power
tools, cleaning
equipment, and equipment not suitable to plug into equipment cabinet power
strips. The convenience outlets should not be on the same power distribution
units (PDUs) or electrical
panels as the electrical circuits used for the telecommunications and computer
equipment in the
room. The convenience outlets shall be spaced 3.65 m (12 ft) apart along the
computer room
walls, or closer if specified by local ordinances, and reachable by a 4.5m (15 ft)
cord (per NEC
Articles 210.7(A) and 645.5(B1)).

5.7 Standby power

The computer room electrical panels should be supported by the computer room
standby
generator system, if one is installed. Any generators used should be rated for
electronic loads.
Generators of this capability are often referred to as “Computer Grade”. If the
computer room
does not have a dedicated standby generator system, the computer room
electrical panels should be connected to the building standby generator system,
if one is installed. The power shutdown requirements for computer room
equipment are mandated by the AHJ and vary by jurisdiction.

5.8 Bonding and grounding (earthing)

Access shall be made available to the telecommunications grounding system
specified by
ANSI/TIA/EIA-J-STD-607-A. The computer room should have a common bonding
network (CBN) (see subclause G.5.1.6).

7. Fire protection
The fire protection systems and hand-held fire extinguishers shall comply with
NFPA- 75.
Sprinkler systems in computer rooms should be pre-action systems.

8. Water infiltration
Where risk of water ingress exists, a means of evacuating water from the space
shall be provided (e.g. a floor drain). Additionally, at least one drain or other
means for evacuating water for each 100 m2 (1000 ft2) area should be provided.
Any water and drain pipes that run through the room should be located away
from and not directly above equipment in the room.

Telecommunication Administration
All the cable should be labeled from both side either horizontal or vertical. An
alphanumeric labeling scheme may be use. Permanent label (e.g. ferrule) to be
inserted in to the all UTP cable and fiver core before termination socket side or
Patch panel side.
All the path ways should be labeled every 3 meter mention “Data and voice” on
below the containment which are installed above the falls ceiling.
All the telecommunication room, cabinet, patch panel, patch cord and outlet
should be labeled property.
The label face material could be paper, plastic or metal. Contractor should get
approval on labeling scheme from Abu Dhabi Police IT Department before
installing any label. This labeling scheme should be documented and submitted
in final Handing over.

Field Testing
Testing is crucial in assuring the overall integrity and satisfactory performance for
todays telecommunication cabling system. Cabling test requirement are specified
in Several national and international standards. Use the ISO/IEC or ANST/TAI/EIA
or CENELEC standard most applicable when conducting field test.

1. Balanced twisted pair.

The field-testing acceptance parameters for balanced twisted-pair
cabling are:
• Wire map (e.g. continuity and pairing).
• Length.
• Insertion loss.
• Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.
• Equal level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). Propagation delay and delay skew.
• Return loss.
• Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.
• Power sum equal level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). Attenuation Cross
Ratio (ACR).
• Test should be done on permanent Link not channel. A valid calibration
• certificate for the test Instrument with Test reports summary be added in O
& M Manual for final submittal during Handing over the project to the
client.

2. Optical Fiver Cabling Test

• Method B or Two Jumper Test method should be used to the Fiver Optic
Cable.
• Optical fiver links should be tested bidirectional and at their two
corresponding wavelengths (multimode at 850 nm & 1300 nm; & 1550 nm)
with OLTS (Power meter & laser/lights source) & OTDR.
• Note: Testing method statement for cupper & fiver should be submitted
before commencing
• Any test at site for the approval of Abu Dhabi Police IT department.

ACTIVE NETWORK EQUIPMENT

WAN connecting equipment
• Any wan connectivity equipment that is used in the project should be Cisco
brands.
• Cisco ICR (Integrated Services Routers) router will be used to connect the
site over
• The WAN. The model of ISR will vary depending on the site size and
required functionality.
• The Cisco ISR should be equipped with 2-port G703 Interface or IP MPLS
Ethernet
• Interface for WAN connectivity. All Supported soft ware upgrade/update
Hardware and spare part should be supplied by the connector in case o f
 required in warranty period.
• Any layer 3 network device should Support OSPF and BGP The above ISR
model suggested for the spoke sites. for HUB site the model will vary
depending on the number of spoke sites

LAN connectivity equipment

• Cisco 10/100/1000Base Auto negotiate and manageable 24/48 ports
switches are normally used. In case the data link cable to IDT is through
fiber media. The Cisco switch should be equipped with 100 base FX LC type
(with built in fiber Interface) switches should be used.
• Sometimes GBIC modules (LC type) or Gigabyte stack ability may be
required in case of special requirement Media Converters are prohibited to
use.
• The buildings which have multi IDFs will collapse all IDF switches into Hub
switch through Giga fiber uplinks useless there is a distance limitation.

Support Duration
3 years of support period we have to be included that covers software or
upgrade/update hardware and spare parts.

Final Handling Over

The following documents are needed in Final
Handling Over:
• Site plan
• As built floor drawing for telecommunication System
• As built Schematic Drawing for Telecommunication System
• As built containment/cable pathways drawing for Internal and external.
Operation and maintenance Manual (should include: Index, How to used
the manual,

Overall purposes. System Description Equipment schedule, parts identification

and recommended spare parts, commissioning data, operation maintenance,
modification, Disposal Item, name and address of manufacturer, manufacturer
literature, emergency Information, labeling scheme, Rack elevation, List of
drawings, Manufacturer warranty certificate, Calibration certificate and test
reports summary )
The contractor is expected to maintain our specification standards mentioned
above according to the requirements of each site. The technicians supplied by
the contractor or the sub-contractor must be trained from the product-vendor.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3

General

Cabling, racks, cabinets, & pathways meet TIAspecs. yes yes yes
Diversely routed access provider entrances and no yes yes
maintenance holes with minimum 20 m separation
Redundant access provider services multiple no no yes
access providers, central offices,
access provider right-of-ways

Secondary Entrance Room no no yes

Secondary Distribution Area no no no

Redundant Backbone Pathways no no yes

Redundant Horizontal Cabling no no no

Routers and switches have redundant power supplies no yes yes

and processors

Multiple routers and switches for redundancy no no yes

Patch panels, outlets, and cabling to be labeled per
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A and annex B of this Standard. Cabinets yes yes yes
and racks to be labeled on front
and rear.
Patch cords and jumpers to be labeled on both ends with no yes yes
the name of the connection at both ends of the cable
Patch panel and patch cable documentation no no yes
compliant with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A and annex
B of this Standard.
ARCHITECTURAL TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Site selection
Not within 100-
Proximity to flood hazard area as mapped
not within flood year flood hazard
on a federal Flood Hazard Boundary or no requirement
hazard area or less than
Flood Insurance Rate Map
area 91 m / 100 yards
from 50-year flood
hazard
Not less than
Proximity to coastal or inland waterways no requirement no requirement 91 m/ 100
yards
Not less than 91 m /
Proximity to major traffic arteries no requirement no requirement 100 yards
Not less than 1.6
Proximity to airports no requirement no requirement km / 1 mile or
greater than 30
miles
Not greater than 48
Proximity to major metropolitan area Parking no requirement no requirement km / 30
miles

yes (physically
Separate visitor and employee parking areas no requirement no requirement
separated by
fence or wall)
Separate from loading docks no requirement no requirement yes
Proximity of visitor parking to data center 9.1 m / 30 ft
no requirement no requirement
perimeter building walls minimum
separation
Allowed if all
Allowed only if
tenants are data
Multi-tenant occupancy within building no restriction occupancies are
centers or
non- hazardous
telecommunicatio
ns companies
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Roofing
Class no restrictions Class A Class A
Type no restrictions no restrictions non-combustible deck (no
mechanically attached
systems)
Wind uplift resistance Minimum FM I-90 FM I-90 minimum
Code
requireme
nts
Roof Slope Minimum Minimum 1:48 (1/4 in per foot)
Code Code minimum
requireme requireme
nts nts
Doors and windows
F Fire rating Minimum Minimum Minimum Code
Code Code requirements (not less than
requireme requireme 3/4 hour at computer
nts nts room)
Door size Minimum Code Minimum Code Minimum Code
requirements requirements and requirements (not less than
and not less not less than 1 m 1 m (3 ft) wide into
than 1 m (3 ft) computer, electrical, &
(3 ft) wide and wide and 2.13 m mechanical rooms) and not
2.13 m (7 ft in) (7 ft) high less than 2.13 m (7 ft ) high
high
Single person interlock, portal or other hardware designed to Minimum Code Minimum Code Minimum Code
prevent requirements requirements requirements
piggybacking or pass back preferably solid preferably solid wood with
wood with metal metal frame
frame
No exterior windows on perimeter of computer room no requirement no requirement yes
Construction provides protection against no requirement no requirement yes
electromagnetic radiation
Entry Lobby no requirement yes yes
Physically separate from other areas of data center no requirement yes yes
Fire separation from other areas of data center Minimum Minimum Minimum Code
Code Code requirements (not less than
requireme requireme 1 hour)
nts nts
Security counter no requirement no requirement yes
Single person interlock, portal or other hardware designed to no requirement no requirement yes
prevent piggybacking or pass back
Building construction TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Type of construction no restriction no restriction Type II-1hr, III-1hr, or
V-1hr
Fire resistive requirements
Exterior bearing walls Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Interior bearing walls Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Exterior nonbearing walls Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Structural frame Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Interior non-computer room partition walls Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Interior computer room partition walls Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Shaft enclosures Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Floors and floor-ceilings Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Roofs and roof-ceilings Code allowable Code allowable 1 Hour minimum
Meet requirements of NFPA 75 No requirements yes yes

Building components
Vapor barriers for walls and ceiling of computer room no requirement yes yes
Multiple building entrances with security no requirement no yes
requirement
checkpoints
Floor panel construction na no restrictions All steel
Understructure na no restrictions bolted stringer
Ceilings within computer room areas
Ceiling Construction no requirement no If provided, suspended
requirement with clean room tile
Ceiling Height 2.6 m (8.5 ft) 2.7 m (9.0 ft) 3 m (10 ft) minimum
minimum minimum (not
less than 460 m (18
in) above tallest piece
of equipment
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Administrative offices
Physically separate from other areas of data center no requirement yes yes
Fire separation from other areas of data center Minimum Code Minimum Code Minimum Code requirements
requirements requirements (not
less than 1 hour)
Security office no requirement no requirement yes
Physically separate from other areas of data center no requirement no requirement yes
Fire separation from other areas of data center Minimum Minimum Minimum Code requirements
Code Code (not less than 1 hour)
requirement requirement
s s
180-degree peepholes on security equipment and monitoring No requirement Yes Yes
rooms
Harden security equipment and monitoring rooms with 16 No requirement Recommended Recommended
mm (5/8 in) plywood (except where bullet resistance is
recommended or required)
Dedicated security room for security equipmentand monitoring No requirement No requirement Recommended
Operations Center no requirement no requirement yes
Physically separate from other areas of data center no requirement no requirement yes
Fire separation from other non-computer room areas of data no requirement no requirement 1 hour
center
Proximity to computer room no requirement no requirement indirectly accessible (maximum
of 1 adjoining room)
Restrooms and break room areas Minimum Minimum Minimum Code requirements
Code Code
requirement requirement
s s
Proximity to computer room and support areas no requirement no requirement If immediately adjacent,
provided with leak prevention
barrier
Fire separation from computer room and support areas Minimum Minimum Minimum Code requirements
Code Code (not less than 1 hour)
requirement requirement
s s
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
UPS and Battery Rooms
Aisle widths for maintenance, repair, or equipment no requirement no requirement Minimum Code requirements
removal (not
less than 1 m (3 ft) clear)
Proximity to computer room no requirement no requirement Immediately adjacent
Fire separation from computer room and other areas of data Minimum Code Minimum Code Minimum Code requirements
center requirements requirements (not
less than 1 hour)
Required Exit Corridors
Fire separation from computer room and support areas Minimum Minimum Minimum Code requirements
Code Code (not less than 1 hour)
requiremen requiremen
ts ts
Width Minimum Code Minimum Code Minimum Code requirements
requirements requirements and
not less than 1.2 m (4 ft) clear
Shipping and receiving area no requirement yes yes
Physically separate from other areas of data center no requirement yes yes
Fire separation from other areas of data center no requirement no requirement 1 hour
Physical protection of walls exposed to lifting equipment traffic no requirement no requirement yes (minimum 3/4 in plywood
wainscot)
Number of loading docks no requirement 1 per 2500 sq m 1 per 2500 sq m / 25,000 sqft
/ of Computer room (2
25,000 sqft
of Computer minimum)
room
Loading docks separate from parking areas no requirement no requirement yes
Security counter no requirement no requirement yes
Generator and fuel storage areas
Proximity to computer room and support areas no requirement no requirement If within Data Center building,
provided with minimum 2 hour
fire separation from all other
areas
Proximity to publicly accessible areas no requirement no requirement 9 m / 30 ft minimum separation
TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Security
System CPU UPS capacity na Building Building
Data Gathering Panels (Field Panels) UPS Capacity na Building + Building + Battery (8 hour min)
Battery (4 hour
min)
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Field Device UPS Capacity na Building + Building + Battery (8 hour min)
Battery
(4 hour min)
Security staffing per shift na 1 per 3,000 sq 1 per 2,000 sq m / 20,000 sqft
m/ (3 minimum)
30,000 sqft (2
minimum)
Security Access Control/Monitoring at:
Generators industrial grade intrusion intrusion detection
lock detection
UPS, Telephone & MEP Rooms industrial grade intrusion card access
lock detection
Fiber Vaults industrial grade intrusion intrusion detection
lock detection
Emergency Exit Doors industrial grade monitor delay egress per code
lock
Accessible Exterior Windows/opening off site intrusion intrusion detection
monitoring detection
Security Operations Center na na card access
Network Operations Center na na card access
Security Equipment Rooms na intrusion card access
detection
Doors into Computer Rooms industrial grade intrusion card or biometric access for
lock detection ingress and egress
Perimeter building doors off site intrusion card access if entrance
monitoring detection
Door from Lobby to Floor industrial grade card access Single person interlock,
lock portal or other hardware
designed to prevent
piggybacking or pass back of
access credential, preferably
with
biometrics.
Bullet resistant walls, windows & doors
Security Counter in Lobby na na Level 3 (min)
Security Counter in Shipping and Receiving na na na
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
CCTV Monitoring
Building perimeter and parking no requirement no requirement yes
Generators na na yes
Access Controlled Doors no requirement yes Yes
Computer Room Floors no requirement no requirement Yes
UPS, Telephone & MEP Rooms no requirement no requirement Yes
CCTV
CCTV Recording of all activity on all cameras no requirement no requirement Yes; digital
Recording rate (frames per second) na na 20 frames/secs (min)
Structural
Seismic zone -any zone acceptable although it no restriction no restriction no restriction
may dictate more costly support mechanisms
Facility designed to seismic zone requirements no restriction no restriction no restriction

Site Specific Response Spectra - Degree of local Seismic no no with Operation

accelerations Status after
10% in 50
year event
Importance factor - assists to ensure greater than code I=1 I=1.5 I=1.5
design
Telecommunications equipment racks/cabinets anchored no Base only Fully braced
to base or supported at top and base
Deflection limitation on telecommunications equipment no no yes
within limits acceptable by the electrical attachments
Bracing of electrical conduits runs and cable trays per code per code w/Importance per code w/
Importance
Bracing of mechanical system major duct runs per code per code per code w/
w/ Importance
Importance
Floor loading capacity superimposed live load 7.2 kPa (150 8.4 kPa (175 lbf/sqft) 12 kPa (250 lbf/sqft)
lbf/sqft).
Floor hanging capacity for ancillary loads suspended 1.2 kPa (25 1.2 kPa (25 lbf/sqft) 2.4 kPa (50
from below lbf/sqft) lbf/sqft)
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Concrete Slab Thickness at ground 127 mm (5 in) 127 mm (5 in) 127 mm (5 in)
Concrete topping over flutes for elevated floors affects size of 102 mm (4 in) 102 mm (4 in ) 102 mm (4 in)
anchor which can be installed
Building LFRS (Shearwall/Braced Steel/Conc MF Conc. Shearwall / Conc. Shearwall / Steel BF
Frame/Moment Frame) indicates displacement of Steel BF
structure
Building Energy Dissipation - Passive none none Passive Dampers
Dampers/Base Isolation (energy absorption)
Battery/UPS floor vs. building composition. Concrete PT concrete CIP Mild Steel Deck & Fill
floors more difficult to upgrade for intense loads. Steel Concrete
framing with metal deck
Steel Deck & Fill/ PT concrete/ CIP Mild - PT slabs much more PT concrete CIP Mild Steel Deck & Fill
difficult to install anchors Concrete
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
ELECTRICAL
General

Number of Delivery Paths 1 1 1 active and 1 passive

Singl Sin
Utility Entrance e gl Dual Feed (600 volts or higher)
Feed e Feed
System allows concurrent maintenance No No Yes

Single Cord Feed Dual Cord

Computer & Telecommunications Equipment Dual Cord Feed with 100%
with 100% Feed with
100%
capacity on
Power Cords capacity capacity on each cord
each
cord
All electrical system equipment labeled with certification
Yes Yes Yes
from 3rd party test laboratory
One or more
single points
One or more
of failure for
single points of No single points of failure for
distribution
failure for distribution systems serving
Single Points of Failure systems
distribution electrical equipment or
serving
systems serving mechanical systems
electrical
electrical
equipment
equipment or
or
mechanical
mechanical
systems
systems
Critical Load System Transfer Automatic Automatic Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS)
Transfer Transfer with maintenance bypass
Switch(ATS) Switch (ATS) feature for serving the switch
with with with interruption in power;
maintenance maintenance automatic changeover from
bypass feature bypass feature utility to generator when a
for serving the for serving the power outage occurs.
switch with switch with
interruption in interruption in
power; power;
automatic automatic
changeover changeover
from utility to from utility to
generator generator
when a power when a power
outage occurs. outage occurs.
 Fixed air circuit breakers or
fixed molded case breakers.
Mechanical interlocking of
Site Switchgear None None breakers. Any switchgear in
distribution system can be
shutdown for maintenance
with by-passes without
dropping the critical load
Generators correctly sized according to installed capacity of UPS Yes Yes Yes
8 hrs (no
generator
Generator Fuel Capacity (at full load) 24 hrs 72 hrs
required if UPS
has 8 minutes of
backup time)
 TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
UPS
UPS Redundancy N N+1 N+1
UPS Topology Parallel
Redund
Single Module Parallel Redundant Modules or
ant
or Parallel Non- Distributed Redundant
Module
Redundant Modules or Block Redundant
s or
Modules System
Distribu
ted
Redund
ant
Module
s
UPS Maintenance Bypass Arrangement By-pass By-pass power
power taken taken from By-pass power taken from
from same same utility same utility feeds and UPS
utility feeds feeds and modules
and UPS modules
UPS modules
UPS Power Distribution - voltage level Voltage Level Voltage Level
Voltage Level 120/208V up to
120/208V up to 120/208V up to
loads of 1440 loads of 1440
kVA and 480V kVA and 480V loads of 1440 kVA and 480V
for loads greater for loads for loads greater than 1440
than 1440 kVA greater than kVA
1440 kVA
UPS Power Distribution - panel boards Panelboard Panel board
incorporating incorporating Panelboard incorporating
standard
standard standard
thermal thermal thermal magnetic trip breakers
magnetic trip magnetic trip
breakers breakers
UPS on separate distribution panel from computer &
No No Yes
telecommunications equipment
K-Factor transformers installed in PDUs Yes, but not
Yes, but not
required if
required if
harmonic Yes, but not required if
harmonic
canceling harmonic canceling
canceling
transformers transformers are used
transformers
are
are used
used
Load Bus Synchronization (LBS) No No Yes
Redundant components (UPS) Static or Rotary
UPS Design. Static or Rotary UPS design.
Static UPS Design.
Rotating M-G Static Converters.
Set Converters.

UPS on separate distribution panel from computer &

No Yes Yes
telecommunications equipment
Grounding
Lighting protection system
Based on risk Based on risk
analysis as per analysis as per
NFPA 780 and NFPA 780 and Yes
insurance insurance
requirements. requirements.
Service entrance grounds and generator grounds fully
Yes Yes Yes
conform to NEC
Lighting fixtures (277v) neutral isolated from service
Yes Yes Yes
entrance derived
lighting transformer for ground fault
isolation
Data center grounding infrastructure in Not required Not required Yes
computer room
TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3
Computer Room Emergency Power Off (EPO) System
Activated by Emergency Power Off (EPO) at exits with
Yes Yes Yes
computer and telecommunications system shutdown only
Automatic fire suppressant release after
Yes Yes Yes
computer and telecommunications system
shutdown
Second zone fire alarm system activation with manual
No No No
Emergency Power Off (EPO) shutdown
Master control disconnects batteries and releases
No No No
suppressant from a 24/7 attended station
Battery Room Emergency Power Off (EPO) System
Activated by Emergency Power Off (EPO) buttons at exits
Yes Yes Yes
with manual suppressant release
Fire suppressant release for single zone system after
Yes Yes Yes
Emergency Power Off (EPO) shutdown
Second zone fire alarm system activation. Disconnects
No No Yes
batteries on first zone with suppressant release on the second
zone
Master control disconnects batteries and releases suppressant
No No Yes
from a 24/7 attended station
Emergency Power Off (EPO) Systems
Shutdown of UPS power receptacles in computer room Yes Yes Yes
area.
Shutdown of AC power for CRACs and chillers Yes Yes Yes
Compliance with local code (e.g. separate systems for
Yes Yes Yes
UPS and HVAC)

TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3

System Monitoring
Locally Displayed at UPS Yes Yes Yes
Central power and environmental monitoring and control
system (PEMCS) with remote engineering console and manual No No Yes
overrides for all automatic controls and set points
Interface with BMS No No Yes
Remote Control No No No

Automatic Text Messaging to Service Engineer's No No No

Pager
Battery Configuration
Common Battery String for All Modules Yes No No
One Battery String per Module No Yes Yes

Minimum Full Load Standby Time 5 minutes 10 Minutes 15 minutes

Valve
Valve Valve regulated lead acid
Battery type regulated
regulate (VRLA) or flooded
lead acid
d lead type
(VRLA) or
acid
flooded type
Flooded Type Batteries

Mounting Racks or cabinets Racks or Open racks

cabinets
Wrapped Plates No Yes Yes
Acid Spill Containment Installed Yes Yes Yes

Battery Full Load Testing/Inspection Schedule Every two years Every two years Every two years
Battery Room
Separate from UPS/Switchgear Equipment
No Yes Yes
Rooms
Individual Battery Strings Isolated from Each
No Yes Yes
Other
Shatterproof Viewing Glass in Battery Room
No No No
Door
Battery Disconnects Located Outside Battery
Yes Yes Yes
Room

UPS self
Battery Monitoring System UPS self- UPS self
monitoring
monitoring monitoring

Rotating UPS System Enclosures (WithDiesel Generators) TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3

Units Separately Enclosed by Fire Rated Walls No No Yes

Fuel Tanks on Exterior No No Yes

Fuel Tanks in Same Room as Units Yes Yes No

Standby Generating System

Sized for
Sized for computer & Sized for computer &
computer telecommunic telecommunications system
Generator Sizing
&telecommunic atio ns system electrical & mechanical only +
ation s system electrical & 1 spare
electrical & mechanical
mechanical only only
Generators on Single Bus Yes Yes Yes

Single Generator per System with (1) Spare Generator No Yes Yes

Individual 83 ft. Ground Fault Protection for Each No Yes Yes

Generator

Loadbank for Testing

Testing UPS modules only Yes Yes Yes

Testing of Generators only Yes Yes Yes

Testing of Both UPS modules and generators No No No

UPS Switchgear No No No

Permanently Installed No - Rental No - Rental No - Rental

Equipment Maintenance

Onsite Day Onsite Day Shift

Onsite 24 hrs M-F, on-call on
Maintenance Staff Shift only. only. On-call at
weekends
On-call at other times
other times

Limited preventative
Preventative Maintenance None None
maintenance program

Facility Training Programs None None Comprehensive training

program

TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3

MECHANICAL
General
Routing of water or drain piping not associatedwith the Permitted but Permitted but
Not permitted
data center equipment in data center spaces not not
recommended recommende
d
Positive pressure in computer room and associated
No Yes Yes
spaces relative to outdoors and non-data center spaces
requirement
Floor drains in computer room for condensate drain water,
Yes Yes Yes
humidifier flush water, and sprinkler discharge water
N
Mechanical systems on standby generator Yes Yes
o
requirem
ent
Water-Cooled System
Indoor Terminal Air Conditioning Units No redundant One Qty. of AC Units sufficient to
air conditioning redundan maintain critical area during
units t AC Unit loss of one source of
per electrical power
critical
area
Humidificati Humidific
Humidity Control for Computer Room Humidification provided
 on provided ati on
provided
Multiple paths of electrical
Single path of Single path of
power to AC equipment.
Electrical Service to Mechanical Equipment electrical electrical
Connected in checkerboard
power to AC power to AC
fashion for cooling redundancy
equipment equipment
Heat Rejection
One Qty. of dry coolers sufficient
No redundant
Dry-coolers (where applicable) redundant to maintain critical area
dry coolers
dry cooler per during loss of one source of
system electrical power
One Qty. of fluid coolers
No redundant
Closed-Circuit Fluid Coolers (where applicable) redundant sufficient to maintain critical
fluid
fluid cooler area during loss of one
coolers
per system source of electrical power
Qty. of condenser water
No One
pumps sufficient to maintain
Circulating Pumps redundant redundant
critical area
condenser condenser
during loss of one source of
water water pump electrical power
pumps per system
Single path Single path
Piping System condenser condenser Dual path condenser water
water water system
system system

TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3

Chilled Water System
Qty. of AC Units sufficient to
No One redundant AC
Indoor Terminal Air Conditioning Units maintain critical area during loss
redundant Unit per critical area
of one source of electrical power
air
conditionin
g units

Humidity Control for Computer Room Humidification provided Humidification Humidification provided
provided

Single path of Single path of Multiple paths of electrical

Electrical Service to Mechanical Equipment
electrical power to AC electrical power to AC power to AC equipment
equipment equipment
Heat Rejection
Single path chilled Single path chilled
Chilled Water Piping System Dual path chilled water system
water system water system

Qty. of chilled water pumps

No redundant chilled One redundant
Chilled Water Pumps sufficient to maintain critical
water pumps chilled water pump
area during loss of one source
per system
of electrical power

Qty. of chilled water pumps

One redundant chiller
Air-Cooled Chillers No redundant chiller sufficient to maintain critical
per system
area during loss of one source
 of electrical power
Qty. of chillers sufficient to
One redundant chiller
Water-cooled Chillers No redundant chiller maintain critical area during loss
per system
of one source of electrical power
Qty. of cooling towers sufficient
One redundant
Cooling Towers No redundant cooling to maintain critical area during
cooling tower per
tower loss of one source of electrical
system
power
Qty. of condenser water pumps
No redundant One redundant
Condenser Water Pumps sufficient to maintain critical
condenser water condenser water
area during loss of one source
pumps pump per system
of electrical power

Single path condenser Single path

Condenser Water Piping System Dual path condenser water
water system condenser water
system
system

TIER 1 TIER 2 TIER 3

Air-Cooled System
One Qty. of AC Units sufficient to
No
Indoor Terminal Air Conditioning Units/Outdoor Condensers redundant maintain critical area during
redundant
AC Unit per loss of one source of
air
critical electrical power
conditioning
area
units
Single path of
Single path of
electrical power Multiple paths of electrical
Electrical Service to Mechanical Equipment electrical
to HVAC control power to AC equipment
power to AC
system
equipment
Humidification Humidification
Humidity Control for Computer Room Humidification provided
provided provided
HVAC Control System
Control system Control system
failure will failure will not Control system failure will
HVAC Control System
interrupt interrupt not interrupt cooling to
cooling to critical cooling to critical areas
areas critical areas
Single path of
Redundant,
electrical power Redundant, UPS electrical
Power Source to HVAC Control System UPS electrical
to HVAC control power to AC equipment
power to AC
system
equipment
Plumbing (for water-cooled heat rejection)
Single water Dual sources
Dual sources of water, or
Dual Sources of Make-up Water supply, with no of water, or
one source + on-site storage
on-site one source +
back-up storage on-site

Single point of Single point of

Points of Connection to Condenser WaterSystem Two points of connection
connection connection
Fuel Oil System
Multiple
Bulk Storage Tanks Single storage Multiple storage tanks
storage
tank
tanks
Multiple
Single pump Multiple pumps, multiple
Storage Tank Pumps and Piping pumps,
and/or supply supply pipes
multiple
pipe
supply
pipes
Fire Suppression

Fire detection system no yes yes

Pre-action
Fire sprinkler system When required Pre-action (when required)
(when
required)
Gaseous suppression system no no clean agents listed in NFPA
2001
Early Warning Smoke Detection System no yes yes
Water Leak Detection System no yes yes

6-FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire alarm and smoke detection systems.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 15 - FM 200.

B. Division 15 - Sprinkler System and Smoke Dampers.

C. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 72A - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Local Protective Signaling System for Guard's
Tour, Fire Alarm, and Supervisory Service.

B. NFPA 72B - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Auxiliary Protective Signaling System for Fire
Alarm Service.

C. NFPA 72C - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Remote Station Protective Signaling System.

D. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors.

E. NFPA 72G - Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems.

F. NFPA 72H - Guide for Test Procedures for Protective Signaling Systems.

G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. System: All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with BS, NEMA and
ANSI Standards.

B. Conform to requirements of NFPA.

C. Conform to applicable latest Local Code and Building Authority Requirements, and Life Safety
Codes.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The system shall be analogue addressable concept with closed loop initiating device
circuits, individual zone supervision, individual indicating appliance circuit supervision,
incoming and standby power supervision. It shall include control panel, manual pull
stations, automatic fire detectors, sounders, annunciators, remote control devices, all
wiring connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary
materials for a complete operating system.

B. Actuation of any automatic device shall cause immediate and continuous operation of
the fire alarm signal and alarm indication at the control panel and remote annunciators
 until the actuated device is restored to normal and the control panel is manually reset.

C. Addressable input control modules shall provide relays with isolated contacts for
controlling mechanical equipment.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the manufacturer/supplier of the following systems
for the interfacing to the fire alarm system:

1. Security System
2. HVAC System
3. Fire Fighting / Sprinkler System/FM200
4. Elevator controls
5. BMS.
6. Lighting Control System.

E. The system shall be capable of accommodating peer to peer networking for innumerable
fire alarm control panels.

F. The system shall be configured to allow on-site programming to accommodate and

facilitate expansion, building parameter changes or changes as required by local codes.
All software operations are to be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within
the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the
instructions stored in memory.

G. The fire alarm and detection system shall be equipped with ‘Auto-dialer’ event of fire,
the system shall be capable of automatically sending off communication signal that will
be used to give necessary information to the Civil Defense Department about the fire
event.

1.6 POWER REQUIREMENTS

The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon
loss of normal 230VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 30
minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to
the stand-by batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall
be automatic. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24V DC and shall
be individually fused at the Control panel.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit data under provisions of Project requirement.

B. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures.

C. Include manufacturer representative's Testing and Commissioning report.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Project requirement.

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Project requirement.

2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

The control panel shall be Analogue Addressable type of adequate point capacity with 20 %
spare and the construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor- b a s e d
electronics. It shall display only those primary controls and display essential to operation
during a fire alarm condition.

A local audible device shall sound during alarm, trouble or supervisory conditions. The audible
device shall sound differently during each condition. The following primary controls shall be
visible through a front access panel:

 Eighty-character liquid crystal display.

 Individual red system alarm LED.
 Individual yellow supervisory service LED.
 Silent Walk test With History Logging.

The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing mode the alarm
activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged as an alarm condition in the
historical data file. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm.

A. LED Supervision

All slave module LEDs shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a problem
occur, the LCD shall display the module and LED location number to facilitate location of that
LED.

B. System Trouble Reminder

Should a trouble condition be present within the system and audible trouble signal silenced, the
trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed time intervals to act as reminder that the fire
alarm system is not 100% operational. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal
shall be programmable to suit the owner's application.

2.2 OUTPUT

Fire Alarm control panel shall be capable of operating remote printers. It shall be also possible
to have hard wire zones, LED modules to represent the zone in the Fire panel.

2.3 MULTIPLE ADDRESSABLE PERIPHERAL NETWORK

 The system must provide communication with initiating and control devices individually. All of
these devices will be individually annunciated at the control panel. Annunciation shall include
the following conditions for each point.

 Alarm
 Trouble
 Open
 Short
 Device missing/failed
 Automatic environmental compensation.
 Variable Sensitivity setting
 Day 7 Night mode of operation
 Automatic dirty sensor indication

All addressable devices shall have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually.

Each loop to have a minimum capacity of 250 devices with detector & control modules in any
combination. System that requires factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are
unacceptable. Each loop to have 25% spares available. Vendor to increase the no. of loops, if
required. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code interred on
each device at time of installation. The use of jumpers to set address will not be acceptable due
to the potential of vibration and poor contact. The system must verify that proper type device is
in place and matches the desired software configuration.

2.4 PRINTER

Provide and install a printer. Printer shall receive English language text from the fire alarm
control panel in an industry standard ASCll format via an EIA RS-232-C connection. All printed
information shall include time and date. Printer shall be quiet in operation, with automatic
paper take.

2.5 ADDRESSABLE DEVICE TYPES

A. General

The system control panel must be capable of communicating with the types of addressable
devices specified below. Addressable Devices will be located as shown on the drawings. The
system shall identify when a smoke sensor becomes too dirty to operate properly. It shall also
identify sensors which are almost dirty which need cleaning before they drift beyond their
selected sensitivity. In short, a review of the front panel display or the printed status report
quickly identify sensor that need cleaning. Sensitivity of the sensor shall a programmable,
photoelectric shall be variable from 0.2 to 37 percent and ionization sensitivity from 0.5 to
1.7 percent. It shall also be possible to programmed for timed, automatic sensitivity selection
such as less sensitive during working hours and more sensitive when quiet. The panel shall
provide the following features:
- Individual sensitivity selection for each sensor
- Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis for sensitivity selection
- Automatic, once per minute individual; sensor calibration checks to verify sensor integrity
- Display of sensitivity directly in per cent per foot
 - Multi-stage alarm operation
- Ability to display and print detailed sensor information

B. Addressable Sensor Bases

The addressable sensor bases shall contain integral addressable electronics that constantly
monitor the status of the detachable photoelectric, ionization or heat sensors.

Each sensors output shall be digitized and transmitted to the control panel every four seconds.

It shall be possible to use different sensor types with the same base. The base shall have
integral LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or trouble (steady on). The bases shall be available
with connections for remote LED alarm indicator or connections for supervised remote replay.
The sensor bases shall be size not more than 125mm diameter.

Address of the device shall be set in the base using dip switches so that removal or replacement
of the sensor head will not affect the operation of the system. Device addressed through
software or address set in the sensor head are not acceptable. Soft addressable sensors are also
will be acceptable subject to compliance with other requirements of the specifications.

C. Addressable Sensors

The addressable sensor shall plug in unit which mounts to a twist lock base.

D. Heat Sensor

The heat sensor shall be self-restoring and provide a combination of rate and fixed temperature
rate compensated sensing. It shall have low thermal mass to accurately and quickly measure the
local temperature at the fire alarm panel. It shall be possible to select the rate of rise
temperature detection for either 15 °F or 20 °F per minute. Fixed temperature sensing and shall
be programmable to operate at 135 °F or 155 °F. It shall be possible to programmed these
sensors as a utility device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32 °F to 120
°F.

E. Photoelectric Sensor

Photoelectric sensor shall use a stable, pulsed infra-red LED light source and a silicon
photodiode receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power smoke sensing. Seven levels
of sensitivity shall be available for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per foot of
smoke obscuration. It shall be possible to select and monitor the sensitivity at the control panel.

The head be designed to allow 360 deg. Smoke entry for optimum response to smoke from any
direction. A built-in screen shall keep insects from entering the smoke chamber. Sounders shall
be provided in the base as required and shown on drawings.

F. Beam Detectors
 Beam detectors shall be microprocessor based and shall have automatic gain control and
temperature compensation. The separate transmitter/receiver shall be capable of long-range
coverage up to 100 meters and have six sensitivity level settings. The detector shall include
normal, alarm and trouble LED indicators. A remote indicator and test unit shall be installed at
low level in the corridor to indicate the status of the beam detector and which will be used to
test the alarm function of the detector.

2.6 ADDRESSABLE PULL STATION

They shall be manufactured from high impact red Lexan. Station shall mechanically latch upon
operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks.
Pull stations shall be double action type requiring smashing glass and pulling a lever to initiate
an alarm. The device shall integral electronics for constantly monitoring the status of the device
and communicating the same to the control panel. Address of the device shall be set by dip
switches in the associated electronics.

2.7 CONTROL MODULES

Control modules shall be provided as shown in the drawings to supervise and operate 24 VCD
notification appliances, speakers and telephone circuits. Output capacity shall be up to @A @
24 VCD. All control modules shall be powered from the panel via 2 core cables. Local
powering of control modules shall not be acceptable.

2.8 MONITOR MODULES

Supervised individually Addressable Modules shall be installed in the addressable network for
monitoring the status of lifts, etc. These devices shall provide specific addressability to a
single initiating device or multiple devices by monitoring normally open dry contacts shall
cause an alarm. An open in the initiating circuit wing shall causes a trouble to be reported at the
panel.

2.9 LINE POWERED ISOLATORS

Line powered short circuit isolators shall be installed in the detection loop for every
addressable device or as indicated in general notes on drawings.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE DEVICE SUPERVISION

All devices shall be supervised or trouble conditions. The system control panel will be capable of
displaying the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing, failed). Should a device fail,
it will not hinder the operation of other system devices.

2.11 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

Notification appliances shall include visible, audible or Audible / visible as shown in the
drawing. Audible appliance shall be loudspeaker or dc vibrating bells and the visible appliance
shall be strobes.

2.12 AUDIO / VISUAL ALARM INDICATING APPLIANCE

 Audio/Visual units shall be provided on a common enclosure for the fire alarm audible and
visual alarm devices. The housing shall be designed to accommodate either horns, bells, chimes
or speakers. The unit shall be complete with a resistant, pyramidal shaped Lexan lens with
"Fire" lettering visible from a 180°. Field of view. The front panel or bezel which is
constructed of UL listed may be inverted so that the lens is below the audible device. The lamp
assembly shall incorporate a built-in reflector for more efficient light propagation and special
shock-mounding arrangement to resist bulb failure due to vibration. Lamp shall provide

4 wire connection to insure properly supervised in/out system connection. Unit shall be
complete with all mounting hardware including back box. Audiovisual unit shall be UL listed for
its intended purpose.

2.13 DC VIBRATING BELLS

DC vibrating bells shall be installed externally for indicating an alarm condition. Alarm Bells shall
be of red finish, 150 in diameter with a 24VDC heavy vibrating solenoid action. Sound output
shall be 90DB at 1 meter. Mounted hardware shall be available for surface, flush and
weatherproof fixings. The bells shall be installed in a weatherproof back box. As an alternative
multi-tone electronic sounders shall also be proposed (with similar specification).

2.14 WIRING
The system shall be wired using fireproof cable (FP 200) or approved equal. The cable size for the
initiating device circuit shall be 1.5mm2 and 2.5mm2 for the indicating device circuit.

2.15 BMS INTEGRATION

Fire Alarm system shall be integrated with BMS system for status monitoring

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with approved
manufacturers manuals and wiring diagrams. The Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring,
outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for complete installation.
All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the BS, NFPA, IEE, and UL, and approved by
local authorities having jurisdiction for the purpose.

B. Prior to placing order for any equipment, the contractor shall submit comprehensive documents
comprising working drawings, catalogues and descriptive literature of components,
maintenance manuals, etc. for engineer’s study and approval.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for all submittals of complete design information to Local
Authorities and for obtaining all necessary approval certificates prior to the commencement of
the installation and upon completion.

D. The fire alarm and smoke detection system shall be so designed to facilitate accurate
 identification of the source of heat, smoke or fire in their early stages to minimize occurrences
of false alarms due to faulty equipment, electrical transients, system faults, etc.

E. Facilities shall be provided to constantly monitor and check the following faults and circuit
conditions:
1. open circuit
2. short circuit
3. earth fault
4. any other fault condition in the loop wiring
5. power supply condition
6. communication failure
7. errors in cards and loops
8. faults in keyboard and printer circuits
9. status of devices every 1.3 minutes to create a table of each one analogue channel for event
analysis

F. Any event (i.e., fire, fault and warning) shall be recorded with time, date and place of
occurrence in the memory of the fire alarm control panel. This event can be either displayed
on VDU or printed as required. The fire alarm control panel shall make final decision on
whether a fire or fault exists by comparing the plotted patterns from a fire sensor against
known fire and fault patterns held in its memory.

G. Provision shall be done at the fire alarm control panel to silence the loop powered alarm
sounders/speaker circuits but the visual indication shall remain until the system is reset.

H. Facility to introduce or change delay periods in operating loop powered individual sounders,
group of sounders, speakers’ circuits shall be possible to program from the fire alarm control
panel without the need to change any hardware.

I. It shall be possible to change the sensitivity of analogue sensors from the fire alarm control
panel. The sensitivity shall be varied automatically, if required, by time zoning feature whereby
it allows sensors to be programmed to respond at different sensitivities relative to any time of
day and any day of the week.

J. Basic sequence of alarm operation.

1) If fire condition is reported from a sensor, this should cause a fire signal to be reported at the
control panel. The system should incorporate a delay for up to 3 minutes maximum and if the
alarm is not acknowledged in this time period, the evacuation message should be broadcasted
through the sounders
automatically to the affected floor with an alert message to the floors above and below.

2) If a manual break glass unit is activated or a sprinkler flow switch is operated, then the
evacuation shall be transmitted immediately to the affected floor/zone with an alert message to
the floors above and below.

3) In each of the above cases, upon initiation of an evacuation signal, all the electronic sounders in
areas such as plant rooms and emergency staircases shall operate immediately. The signals shall
 discriminate with floor/zone.

K. Activation of the fire alarm system shall directly initiate some or all of the following, as part of
the agreed overall engineering policy:

1) Signal to all elevator machine rooms indicating fire status (for control of lift)
2) Release of doors that are normally locked by magnetic devices
3) Release of doors that are normally held open by magnetic devices
4) Shutdown of mechanical equipment ventilation plants
5) Operation of fire dampers

L. Sprinkler valves, flow switches and other monitored valves shall be directly supervised by the fire
alarm system.

M. All penetration of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all local fire
codes.

N. Field Quality Control: The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of
trained manufacturer's representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all the
functions as specified, under provisions of Project requirement.
O. System supplied shall be total field programmable by customer.

P. Tests

1. Reports of any testing during installation shall be forwarded to the engineer, in accordance with
NFPA 72 and local authority having jurisdiction.

2. Each individual system operation on a point-by-point basis shall be tested for its complete
operation. Procedures for testing the entire fire alarm system shall be set forth with the
consent of local authority having jurisdiction, the Engineer, and the manufacturer. A hardcopy
of the analog value of each initiating input/device (Addressable point and traditional zone) shall
be given to the engineer. This copy shall be used as reference in future test to determine sensor
maintenance.
Q. Training

1. In addition to the requirements of the Closeout Submittals, and a manufacturer's

recommended spare parts list, the contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's
trained representative during normal business hours for a 2-day training the Owner's
designated personnel on the operation and routine maintenance of the system.

3.2 The contractor shall furnish and install all equipment wiring required to install a Fire Alarm
System and shall leave the same in good operating condition. Upon completion of the
installation of fire alarm equipment, the Electrical Contractor shall provide to the Construction
Manager a signed, written statement substantially in the form as follows:

"The undersigned having been engaged as the Electrical Contractor on the project confirms that
the Fire Alarm equipment was installed in accordance with the Specifications and also in
 accordance with wiring diagrams, instructions and directions provided to us by the
manufacturer."

3.3 Fire alarm wire and cable.

A. Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with color-coded insulation, or use color-coded tape at each
conductor termination and in each junction, box as follows:

1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.

2. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
3. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown.
4. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative).
5. Door Release: Gray, gray.
6. Trip Circuit: Orange, orange.
7. Fire Alarm Loop: Black, white.

B. All internal fire alarm cabling shall be with FP200 cables.

C. Wiring for the fire detection and alarm system shall be segregated from all lighting and power
systems.

D. Wiring within any control equipment shall be readily accessible without removing any
components or parts.

E. Wiring for 220V AC power to fire alarm control panel and alarm bell circuits shall be
2.5 sq mm minimum and 1.5 sq mm minimum for all signaling circuits.

F. Cables fixed to cable trays above ceilings shall be installed on a single layer to enable access to
all cables.

G. All cabling in conditioned areas shall be concealed in the building fabric.

3.4 LIST OF DEVICES

A. Fire Alarm Schedule.

End of this section

SPECIFICATIONS OF LIGHT FITTINGS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:

1. All color temperature of the fluorescent tube must be approved by engineers.

 2. All ballast shall be no noise, low loss ballast and power factor correction with
international agency approval.
3. All light fittings shall be brought to site with country of original certificate, in case
failure to submit the same goods will be rejected as well.
4. The contractor shall unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or bills of quantities,
supply, install and correct the lighting fixtures including but not limited to Lamps,
ballast, accessories, fixing hardware necessary for installation, as shown on the
drawings as required and as here in specified.
5. if any change occurs on the ceiling the contractor should fix the same type of the
specified light fixture matching with ceiling type.
6. Fixture shall comply with all applicable requirements as herein outlined unless
otherwise specified or shown on drawings.
7. The contractor shall be responsible to supply the specified lighting fixture as
indicated on the drawings. technically and architecturally equivalent lighting fixture
from the approved manufacturers may be accepted subject to the decision of
consultant electrical engineer if so photometric data and compliance statement shall
be submitted along with the offer.
8. The supplier should arrange a technical submittal as well as samples for consultant
electrical engineers for approval.
9. All items to be supplied from “Approved Manufacturer List” alternatives are not
accepted.
10. The supplier should mention in his company profile the supply of other similar
governmental projects. The supplier has to submit the certificate of origin with bill of
lading for all items.
11. All fluorescent light should be:
a. Hardwire0.75sq/mm cross section 1050 C.
b. All Fluorescent lamps shall be with color temperature approved by
consultant.
c. All ballasts for fluorescent tube and compact fluorescent shall be electronic
ballasts with approved type with international agency approval.
d. Voltage should be 230V, frequency 50Hz.
e. Power factor not less than 0.90.

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL
1.1. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATIONS
A. Nameplates and tape labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit color coding.
1.2. RELATED WORK
A. Civil Works - Painting.

1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Project requirements.
B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels.

2. PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on a white
background.
B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type.

3. EXECUTION

3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape labels.
B. Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure
nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.

I.1. WIRE IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet
and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder
number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on
schematic and interconnection diagrams for control wiring.

I.2. NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE

A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and
loads served. Letter Height: 3 mm for individual switches and loads served, 6mm for
distribution and control equipment identification.
B. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled following.
C. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 6 mm; identify equipment
designation. 3 mm identify voltage rating and source.
D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Panelboards,
Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 3 mm; identify circuit and load served,
including location.
 E. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 3 mm; identify
load served.
Transformers: 6 mm; identify equipment designation. 3 mm; identify primary and secondary
voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location.

ELEVATORS SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION # 01- MACHINE ROOM TYPE

NUMBER OF ELEVATOR: 2NO. PASSENGER ELEVATOR

EQUIPMENT TYPE: MACHINE ROOM TYPE
CAPACITY 750 KG (10 PERSON)
SPEED: 60Mtrs/Min (1 METRE/SEC)
CONTROL SYSTEM: VARIABLE VOLTAGE VARIABLEFREQUENCY DRIVE
(WVF)

OPERATION CONTROL: SIMPLEX FULL SELECTIVE COLLECTIVE

STOPS / OPENINGS: 2 STOPS / OPENINGS ALL IN SAME LINE (G&1) REFER
DRAWING

TRAVEL: REFER DRAWING

HOISTWAY SIZE AVALIABLE: Refer Drawing
PIT DEPTH: 1500mm
OVER HEAD HEIGHT: REFER DRAWING

ELEVATOR CABIN

CABIN INTERNAL DIMENSIONS: REFER DRAWING)

CABIN CEILING DESIGN: AS PER CONSULTANT /CLIENT APPROVAL

VENTILATION: BY elect blower

VENTILATION: Elect blower with slit vents
CABIN WALLS & DOOR: Finished in etched mirror stainless steel
Mirror: half back wall clear mirror
Hand rail: round type on rear side of the cabin finished in hairline
stainless
steel
Cabin sill flooring: Extruded hard aluminum 20mm recess for flooring by
other
CABIN OPRATING PANEL: CABIN OPRATING PANEL COMPRISING OF
 DIGITAL position indictor and micro stroke click
and tactile button in grey plastic which will
illuminate on registration of call (on side wall)
face plate finished in hairline stainless steel

ENTERANCEDESIGN:

Frames: Transom Panel and Full Wall jamb finished in

hairline stainless steel
at all floors.
Doors: 2 Panel center opening power operated automatic
doors finished
in mirror stainless steel at all floors.
Door opening size: 900 mm(W) x 2100 mm(H)
Door operation: Variable Voltage Variable Frequency Inverter
Control
DOOR SAFETY:

Multi-beam door sensor: System consists of a transmitter detector, a receiver

detector and a controller. Multi infrared-light beams or
a light curtain is achieved by infra red-light beams
travelling directly between the transmitter and receiver
detectors which cover the full width of the door as it
opens or closes to detect passengers or objects. The
system not only increases passenger safety between
the doors but also reduces damage to the lift doors.

HALL INDICATORS:
MACHINE ROOM ELEVATOR
SPECIAL FEATURES FOR BOTH ELEVATORS:

1. Data network system:

The controller includes the data network system the system allows for microprocessor at
each floor to be connected via a serial transmission for faster and efficient data
transmission.
2. Next landing facility:
If the hoist way doors become jammed by a pebble, debris etc., the passengers will not be
able to alight from the car. In order that the passengers don’t get stranded at the effected
floor, the elevator will press to the next floor for which call has been registered and doors
will open automatically.
3. Continuity of service:
A car experiencing trouble is automatically withdrawn from group operation to protect
overall group performance.
4. Car call cancelling:
When a car responds to the final car call in one direction, the system automatically checks
and clears the remaining calls in another direction from memory.
5. Overload protective device
The device will make the elevator improve with audible indication in the event the elevator
car
is over loaded beyond the rated capacity.
6. Backup operation for group control microprocessor:
The backup function insulted in the system prevent the loss of group control due the failure
of a
microprocessor or transmission line.
7. Automatic hall call registration:
If all passengers are not able to enter a car when it arrives at the floor because the car is
near
full- capacity, a hall call is automatically registered for the remaining passengers on that
floor.
8. In depended service:
A car can be isolated from group service and used without interruption using the button
combination or the override switch in the car operating panel.
9. Peak traffic control:
To alleviate traffic congestion at the main floor, cars are automatically assigned to the floor
where traffic is heaviest.
10. strategic overall assignment:
Combining all of the building traffic condition, the system forecasted where future service
will
be needed and assigns an elevator accordingly.
11. Door sensor self-diagnosis:

If a non-contact door sensor fails the system will automatically determine the timing of door
closing to
maintain the elevator service.
12. Automatic door speed control
The system monitors the actual door load conditions at each floor and automatically adjusts
the
door speed and torque accordingly.
13. Automatic door open time adjustment:
The system judges the situation whether the car stops responding to a car call or a hall call
and
controls the time the doors stay open accordingly the time spent waiting for the elevator is
shortened, and operating efficiency is increased.
14. Door nudging feature (without buzzer):
If the door remains open longer than the preset period temporary override automatically
close
the doors.
15. Door load detector
When an object is caught in opining / closing doors the doors will receive direction when an
excess load is detected for example when a pebble become lodged in the door track rather
than force itself open / close the reverse cycle is repeated until the problem is eliminated.
16. Door open / close buttons:
Door open / close buttons are provided on the car operating panel to expedite the door
opening
function or to keep the door open until the door open button is pressed or to expedite the
door
closing operation after the passengers have alighted from the car.
17. Repeated door-close:
Should an obstacle prevent the doors from closing the doors will repeatedly open and close
until the object is removed.
18. Hall & car call buttons:
All indicators above the elevator of door in all floors to be horizontal digital hall position
with
directional arrows mounted digital hall position with directional arrows mounted on
entrance
panel. And side board each floor with touch buttons.
19. Reopen with hall button
While the doors are closing, they can be reopened by pressing the hall button.
20. Car arrival chime:
An electronic chime (mounted on the car top and bottom) sounds to inform waiting
passengers
of the car arrival.
21. Emergency lighting:
Emergency lighting in the car with trickle charger unit.
22. Inter phone:
Tow way communication interphone system.
23. Position indicators:
Dot matrix display with alpha numeric indication for near perfect numbers orange in color
when illuminated for higher visibility under all light conditions.
24. Fireman emergency operation:
When the fireman switch located at the elevator lobby is activated during fire or any other
emergencies all hall a cabin calls are cancelled and the designated elevator in the group
returns immediately to the specified floor to facilitate the fireman’s elevator responds only
the car calls.
25. Emergency landing device:
This device will bring the elevator to nearest floor by bower supplied from standby batteries
allowing passengers to alight from the car in the event of power failure.
26. Alarm bell

DC alarm bell.
BUFFERS: Oil type
SAFETY: Gradual type
GUIDE RAILS: Steel Tee sections for cabin & formed sections for
counterweight
POWER SUPPLY: 415 V 3Phase 50Hz
LIGHTING SUPPLY: 240 V 1Phase 50Hz
REGULATIONS: “Japanese industrial standard” Codes
PUBLIC ADDRESS & MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS

1. PUBLIC ADDRESS & MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEMS

1.1. PUBLIC ADDRESS / MUSIC SYSTEM

A. The contractor shall provide a public address / music system to sonorous sound
evenly in all areas of the building as per location of the speakers indicated in the
drawings.
B. The system shall be supplied and commissioned by a specialist company which is the
authorized representative for the equipment’s in the UAE has a minimum of 5 years’
experience in the similar field. All cabling, civil and carpentry works will be done by
the contractor.
C. Microphone outlet to be provided in the outdoor court area.

1.2. System description

A. The system shall comprise of source units viz, AM / FM Tuner , Double Cassette Deck
and Multi Disk CD Player connected to the System Pre-Amplifier. The system pre-
amplifier shall have the provision for routing call’s (speech announcements) & music
to the various zones, along with the facility for an all-call announcement.
B. A call stations shall be provided and located in the Ground floor on the desk of
security guard.
C. Speakers from each zone shall be looped & the cable shall be terminated at the main
system equipment rack. Details are furnished in the single line diagram enclosed
herewith.
D. Equipment specification as follows: -
1. System Pre-amplifier
Main supply: 230VAC, +/- 15%, 50Hz
Battery voltage: 24 VDC, + 20% / - 10%
Call station inputs: two
Mic / Line inputs: universal input with speech optimized tone
control
BGM inputs: three inputs with music optimized tone control
Frequency response: 50 Hz to 20 kHz
Distortion: <0.5 %
LED VU indicator: yes
Operating temperature range: - 10 to +55 deg C
Relative humidity: < 95 %
Dimensions: 100 x 430 x 270 mm
Weight: approx. 5 Kg
2. Booster Amplifier 120 W & 150W
Main’s supply: 230 / 240VAC, 50Hz
Battery voltage: 24 VDC, + 20 %, - 10 %
Line input: balanced with loop-through output
Loudspeaker outputs: 100V, 70V, 50V and 8 Ohms.
Headphone output: yes
LED VU indicator: yes
Frequency response: 50 Hz to 20 kHz
Operating temp range: -10 to +55 deg C
Relative humidity: < 95 %

3. Call Station 6 zones

Equipment type: unidirectional condenser mic on flexible stem
Base: stable metal base
Selection keys: six zone, all-call and momentary PTT keys for
calls
Voltage range: 18 24 V
Nominal sensitivity: 85 dB SPL
Distortion: < 0.6 % (maximum input)
Frequency range: 100 Hz to 16 kHz
Speech filter: - 3 dB @ 315 Hz, high pass, 6 dB / oct
Rated output impedance: 200 Ohms
Operating temperature: -10 to +55 deg C
Relative humidity: < 95 %
Dimensions: 40 x 100 x 235 mm (base)
Weight: approx. 1 Kg

4. Surface Mount Ceiling Loudspeaker with Surface Mounting Box

Rated power (PHC): 6 W (6 - 3 - 1.5 W)
Sound pressure level: at 6 W/1W (at 1kHz, 1m) 99 dB / 91 dB (SPL)
Effective frequency range: -10 dB) 70 Hz to 18 kHz
Opening angle: (at 1 kHz / 4 kHz -6dB) 160 deg / 55 deg
Rated voltage: 100V
Rated impedance: 1667 Ohms
Ambient temperature range: -25 to +55 deg C
Dimensions: (dia x max depth) 210 x 88 mm

5. Surface Mounting Box

Dimensions: (dia x max depth) 210 x 93 mm
Color: White (RAL 9010)
Weight: 360 g
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Reference:
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of Division 15

2.0 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

Excavation in soil - Excavation shall-be carried down to correct inverts.

Excavation carried below the correct inverts shall be backfilled with 20 MPa concrete
to the underside of the pipe lines unless otherwise directed in writing.

2.1 Excavation in rock shall be 150 mm minimum below the pipe invert. Back fill to the
invert using 20 MPa concrete.

2.2 Backfill pipe trenches with granular fill to a depth 300 mm above the pipe. The fill
shall be thoroughly tamped around and over the pipes in 150 mm layers.

2.3 Compaction shall be to at least 95% Modified Proctor Density.

2.4 Contractor shall excavate the entire trench length before installing any piping or
services. The Contractor shall then verify any interference with existing services and
inform the consultant before any new piping or services installation can proceed.
The contractor shall be responsible for any modifications required as a result of not
complying with this requirement.

2.5 All piping under buildings and roads shall be encased in concrete with 150 mm cover
on all sides as required by local authorities. Provide thrust blocks at every change in
direction. Thrust blocks shall be of 20 MPa concrete poured against undisturbed soil.
Provide polyethylene bond breaker between concrete and pipe.

2.6 Unless indicated otherwise, all piping with less than 1 meter cover shall be encased
in concrete with 150 mm cover on all sides, as described above.

2.7 Install piping in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions and
recommendations.

2.8 Allow for expansion, contraction and movement of all piping as required. Provide
expansion joints in concrete encasement of pipes at all flexible pipe joints. Wrap all
piping to be encased in concrete with polyethylene sheets.

3.0 MATERIALS

3.1 Makes and materials for construction shall be subject to the CONSULTANT's review.
3.2 Materials and equipment supplied under each Division shall be new and free from
defects and shall be equivalent in physical characteristics and performance in all
respect to that specified by the manufacturer's name and catalogue reference.

3.3 Where two or more manufacturers are named for a specific item, the choice of
manufacturer shall rest with the bidder, unless indicated otherwise.

3.4 The products of the specified manufacturers, even when model numbers are
indicated, are acceptable only when the products comply with or are modified as
necessary to comply with the requirements of the contract documents.

3.5 A list of materials which this Division proposes to use in conformance, with this
Specification shall be submitted to the CONSULTANT at the time of signing the
contract. When no manufacturer's, name is submitted, material of the base named
manufacturer in the Specification shall be supplied.

3.6 All materials to be used shall be suitable for installation in a corrosive environment.
All screws, bolts, washers, etc., in non-conditioned areas shall be stainless steel.

4.0 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

4.1 Ensure that materials and equipment are delivered to the site at the proper time and
in such assemblies and sizes so as to enter into the building and to be moved into
the spaces where they are to be located without difficulty.

4.2 Be responsible for any cutting and patching involved in getting assemblies into the
place.

4.3 Protect the buildings and structures from damage due to carrying out of this work.

4.4 Protect all mechanical and electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry
and clean at all times.

4.5 Cover all openings in equipment and materials. Cover all temporary openings in
ducts and pipes with polyethylene sheets or caps until final connection is made.

4.6 Be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or indirectly to any
walls, floors, ceilings, woodwork, brickwork, finishes, services, roads and gardens,
etc.

5.0 CUTTING, PATCHING, SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS

5.1 The Contractor shall leave chases and openings in walls and floors as required for
piping and accessories. These chases and openings shall not be cut larger than
necessary to accommodate the equipment passing through.
5.2 Cutting and patching shall be performed by trades specializing in the materials to be
cut and patched.

5.3 The Contractor shall be advised in regard to this work before the concrete is poured
and the walls are built, and when required shall be given location for all holes, pipes,
and accessories. Holes not located in accordance with the above provisions shall be
made at the expense of the Contractor. Cutting of structural parts shall not be
permitted without specific written approval from the consultant.

5.4 All drilling for hangers, rod inserts and work of similar nature shall be done by the
Contractor.

5.5 Escutcheons shall be provided at all penetrations of piping into finished areas. For
insulated pipes the escutcheons shall be large enough to fit around the insulation.
Escutcheons shall be chrome plated polished cast brass with set screw and of size
sufficient to conceal openings in building construction.

5.6 Pipes, ducts and conduits shall have sleeves where they pass through walls, floors,
ceilings and partitions. Clearance shall be 12mm minimum. Sleeves shall be sized to
clear insulated pipes and ducts which have a vapor barrier.

5.7 Where pipes pass through exterior foundation wall allowance shall be made for
differential settlement between the pipe and the wall, A 6mm thick steel sleeve of
inside diameter not less than 75mm greater than the outside diameter of the pipe
shall be used. The annular space between sleeves and pipes shall be packed with
oakum and sealed with mastic to provide a waterproof seal. concrete bridge shall be
installed between the wall and the adjacent undisturbed soil. Any penetration
through a waterproofing membrane shall be coordinated with and approved by the
waterproofing manufacturer and the CONSULTANT to ensure a water tight
installation.

5.8 Galvanized steel sleeves not less than schedule 40 pipe or of 6mm thick steel shall be
provided for pipes passing through walls and floors. In kitchens, and similar rooms,
and in mechanical rooms and pipe spaces above basement floor, sleeves shall extend
100mm above the floor. In floors with a dampproof / water proof membrane,
sleeves shall have a 50 mm wide collar welded all around, at membrane level.
Sleeves passing through stud partitions shall be no. 22 U.S. ga. Steel. Where pipes
are to be insulated, sleeves shall be sized to accommodate the outside diameter of
the insulation.

5.9 The annular space between the sleeve and the pipe or pipe insulation shall be sealed
with mastic for cold pipes and glass wool for hot pipes whenever necessary to isolate
an air plenum or prevent sound transmission.

5.10 Where duct work passes through an opening other than where a fire damper is
required, pack the opening around the duct with glass fiber and seal with Mastic.
5.11 Where pipes or ducts pass through fire separations, pack space between duct or pipe
and sleeve with UL listed, non-corrosive, fire barrier penetration sealant. For PVC
and plastic piping use proprietary plastic pipe fire stop closure system recommended
by the pipe manufacturer. Provide UL listed fore dampers within the ducts passing
through fire walls. All pipe and duct penetrations shall have UL listed fire barrier
assemblies.

6.0 PIPINIG INSTALLATION

6.1 Before installing piping, check mechanical drawings with architectural, structural and
electrical drawings; make an accurate layout of piping. Where interference may
appear and departures from indicated arrangements are required due to changed
locations and elevations of piping, obtain written permission for proposed changes
from consultant.

6.2 Verify all invert elevations required for sewer and drain connections prior to
commencing installation and connections to ensure that these connections can be
made with sufficient slope for drainage.

6.3 Arrange and install piping to obtain maximum head room, avoiding structural
interference. Where piping is to be furred in, or concealed, the Contractor shall
coordinate the work to maintain his lines and levels.

6.4 Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated. Install piping parallel to
building walls. Cut all pipes accurately to measurements taken at the site and install
without springing or forcing. Make all changes in direction with fittings. Locate
groups of pipes parallel to each other, spacing them at such a distance so as to
permit the application of insulation. Pipes transporting hot fluids shall be installed at
least 6" (150 mm) away from pipes transporting cold fluids.

6.5 The inside of all pipe, fittings, traps, valves and other equipment shall be smooth,
clean and free from blisters, loose mill scale, sand and dirt when erected. Whenever
work is suspended during construction, or whenever there is danger of depositing
foreign matters in the pipes, protect the open ends by using temporary plugs or
caps.

6.6 The slope of the line shall be uniform between established elevations without
pockets.

6.7 All reductions in pipe size shall be made by using reducing fittings, installed to permit
easy drainage of pipe system and to avoid air pockets.

6.8 Where piping of dissimilar metals, including copper piping and ferrous materials, are
joined provide dielectric couplings.
6.9 Install piping serving all equipment in such a manner that only small sections need
be removed to permit removal, cleaning or inspection (as applicable) of the unit
itself, or coils, tube bundles or heat exchangers contained therein.

6.10 Provide flanged or union connection for ready disconnection of piping at equipment.
Victaulic couplings may be used in lieu (in the place of) of unions or flanges, where
permitted by the CONSULTANT. Do not place any union or flanged connection in a
location which Will be inaccessible after completion of the building. For piping up to
and including 2 inches (50 mm), and where indicated on the drawings install a union
on each side of each control valve regulator etc. on one side of each check wall and
at all pieces of equipment without flanged connections such as pumps, air coils,
tanks, etc., in order that such equipment may be readily disconnected. Use flanged
connections or piping over 2 inches (50 mm) and where indicated on the drawings.
Where flanged valves, regulators, etc., do not permit the removal of flange bolts,
separate two such devices by a spool. Always use a spool to separate equipment to
be isolated by a butterfly valve.

6.11 Where raised face flanges are to be mated with flat face equipment or valve flanges,
the raised face of line flanges shall be removed. Bolt holes shall straddle centerlines.
Steel flanges to be bolted to cast iron valves of equipment nozzles shall be flat faced,
with full gaskets. In piping material classes permitting use of both welding neck and
slip-on flanges, use of welding neck flanges shall be restricted to locations adjacent
to welding fittings and butterfly valves.

6.12 Locate all valves for easy access.

6.13 Piping and pipe sizes not indicated on the drawings shall be of size as specified or as
recommended by equipment manufacturers and in accordance with the
requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. Pipe runs shall be subject to the
approval of the consultant.

6.14 Use long radius type elbows where space permits.

6.15 Pipe all relief valves, backflow presenters and drain valves to nearest floor drain.

6.16 Steel piping installed in inaccessible locations shall have welded joints.

6.17 Apply two coats of asphalt paint to all pipe laid in concrete or passing through
concrete.

6.18 Provide drip pans below all new water, or drain piping located in electrical and
transformer rooms, Pans shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized or stainless
steel. Cross broken to prevent 'oil canning' Each pan shall have a one inch (25mm)
high lip and all corners shall be welded. brazed or soldered to be water tight. A pipe
nipple of material matching the pan itself, shall be provided at the pan low point and
piping shall direct the drainage to the nearest floor drain.
6.19 All pipes shall be concealed inside walls, and/or furred spaces unless specifically
indicated otherwise.

6.20 Carry out, without cost, all alterations necessary in the arrangement of work which
has been installed without proper study and approval in order to make such work
come within finished lines of walls, ceilings and floors or to allow the installation of
the work of others.

7.0 HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

7.1 Piping and equipment provided under the Mechanical Division shall be complete
with all the necessary supports and hangers required for a safe and workmanlike
installation. Auxiliary structural members shall be provided under the Mechanical
Section concerned where piping, ducts or equipment must be suspended between
beams or joists of the structure. Hangers for fire protection systems and their
supports shall conform to the Civil Defense and NFPA requirements.

7.2 Depending on type of structure, hangers shall be.

7.2.1 Clamped to steel beams or joists.

7.2.2 Attached to approved concrete inserts.

7.2.3 For pre-cast concrete construction hanger rods shall pass between slabs to be
supported above by a 100 x 100 x 3 mm steel plate welded to the hanger rod. A lock
nut threaded to the hanger rod together with a 50 mm minimum diameter, washer
shall be applied tight against the under surface of the deck to prevent rising of the
hanger.

7.3 Approved type expansion shields and bolts may be used for pipe up to 100 mm
diameter where the presenting of concrete inserts is not practical. Submit material
for review by the consultant.

7.4 Suspension from metal deck shall not be allowed unless specifically accepted by the
CONSULTANT. Drawings of the proposed method of suspension must be submitted
for approval.

7.5 Other means of support shall be as shown or as specified hereunder.

7.6 Suspended piping shall be supported by adjustable galvanized clevis type rod
hangers sized and spaced as recommended by the piping supplier but not less than
the following:

Pipe Size(mm) Hanger Rod Diameter(mm) Maximum Span(mm)

12 and under 10 1.8
20 to 32 10 1.8
40 to 50 10 2.4
 65 12 3.0
75 to100 16 3.6
150 20 4.9
200 to 300 25 5.5

In addition, provide a hanger within 600mm of each side of a valve, elbow or tee.
Where the building structure will not accept the weight of pipe, insulation and
contents at maximum space sown, the Contractor shall reduce the hanger spacing as
required by the load calculation.

7.7 Horizontal runs of cast iron pipe shall have at least one support between each two
joints and supports spacing shall not exceed 3m. for PVC and HDPE piping, supports
shall be spaced at no more than 1m apart.

7.8 Provide lock nut at clevis on all size hangers. For copper piping hangers shall be
plastic coated if hanger is in contact with the pipe.

7.9 Suspending one hanger from another shall not be permitted.

8.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND POWER SUPPLY.

8.1 All apparatus, material and wiring shall be suitable for use with a 3-phase, 4-wires,
415-volt 50 Hz earthed neutral power supply, or 1 phase, 240 V, 50Hz.

8.2 The Contractor shall provide and install all electrical equipment and wiring required
for the installation including control circuit wiring, power wiring from the points of
supply to the control gear for electric motors, heaters, etc. as specified under the
Electrical Installation Section Division 16. Multicore control wiring from remote
control panels to items, of plant is specified in the Electrical Installation Section. The
Contractor shall provide fully detailed wining diagrams of all connections.

8.3 All electrically operated equipment shall 'Comply in all aspects with the relevant
Government Ministry Standards including dimensional standards where these exist,
except where the specification or drawings show otherwise. All equipment not
visible from its isolator must have a separate and additional lock off stop button or
isolator either on the equipment or immediately adjacent to the equipment.

8.4 All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to
function without damage if the voltage and/or frequency vary within the following
tolerances:

Voltage plus or minus TEN per cent. (10%)

Frequency plus or minus SIX per cent (6%)

8.5 The maximum operating temperature of the standards specified shall be observed,
Allowance shall be made by reducing the permitted rises of temperature above
ambient.
8.6 All electrical equipment and control panels must be tropicalized, comply with
indicated Standards and shall be suitable for use in ambient temperature up to 60°C
(140 deg. F) and 90% R.H. Sun shades, or other means approved by the
CONSULTANT, shall be provided for electrical and control panels to prevent exposure
to direct sun light.

8.7 All starters provided by this Division must comply with electrical specifications.
Starters above 5 HP size shall be of reduced voltage type.

9.0 ELECTRIC MOTORS

For Electric motors refer to Electrical Specifications Division 16.

10.0 NAMEPLATES

10.1 Each piece of mechanical equipment shall be complete with a lamecoid nameplate
securely fastened in a clearly visible place on the equipment.

10.2 The nameplate shall be 2.5 mm thick laminated phenolic plastic 90 mm wide × 40
mm high with black face and white center, 5.5 high lettering shall be engraved
through to the white lamination with the following:
Equipment Type and No, e.g., Fan No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc.

10.3 Service and Area or zone of building served, e.g., South Zone, chilled water primary,
condenser water, etc.

11.0 ACCESS PANELS AND ACCESSIBILITY

11.1 All parts of the installations requiring periodic maintenance shall be accessible.
Wherever valves, dampers, etc., are concealed by building construction, access
doors or panels shall be furnished by this section and installed under the respective
trade sections (i.e., Masonry, Plaster, Gypsum Board Tile, etc.). The Contractor shall
be responsible for their proper location. Wall mounted plumbing fixtures with back
water connection shall have an adjacent access panel.

11.2 Access panels shall be with 12 U.S. ga. stainless steel panel, rust resistant concealed
hinges and positive locking and self-opening screwdriver operated lock. Fame shall
be suitable for wall in which it is being installed and shall have integral keys for
plaster walls.
Panels in tile wall shall suit tile pattern. Minimum size of panels shall be 300 x 450
mm. Where equipment is larger, the access panel shall be sized to suit.

11.3 Provide access to all fire dampers and common dampers

11.4 Submit each type of access panel to the CONSULTANT for their approval prior to
installation. Access panel surfaces must be of a compatible finish to the adjacent
finished surface, unless specified otherwise.

11.5 Each access panel shall be installed to provide complete access to equipment for
maintenance and servicing.

11.6 All access doors shall be shown on record drawings. Notations adjacent to each
access door shown on the drawings shall indicate the frequency of maintenance
required or item or items above or behind the door.

12.0 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

12.1 Clean thoroughly all fixtures and equipment from grease, dirt, plaster or any other
foreign material. Chrome plated fittings, piping and trimmings shall be polished upon
completion.

12.2 Any dirt, rubbish or grease on walls, floors or fixtures accumulated from the work
shall be removed promptly (immediately) from the premises.

12.3 Fixtures and equipment shall be safe properly from damage during the construction
period and shall be cleaned and polished in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Motors and equipment bearings shall be protected with plastic sheets,
tied or taped in place. Aluminium fin heating of cooling elements shall be protected
with cardboard covers.

12.4 Any unpainted steel surfaces, shall be prime coated under this Division.

12.5 All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before start up and again before
handover.

13. TAGS AND CHARTS

13.1 Valves shall be provided with brass tags, other than valves on fan coil units and
valves on plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 40mm diameter numbered with 12mm
high stamped letters and fastened securely with brass 'S' Hooks or chains. Provide a
chart or charts, indicating location, service and zone of each valve. Charts shall be set
in finished wood or metal picture frames with clear glass or Lucite front and fastened
securely where directed by the consultant. This work shall be coordinated between
the various Mechanical Sections to prevent overlapping of numbering systems.

14. PAINTING
14.1 All finish painting will be done under the Painting Section 09900, except where such
pieces of equipment or material are specified to be shop painted or finished by the
manufacturer. Clean and leave surfaces ready for Painting,

14.2 Where equipment is delivered with the final paint or finish applied by the
manufacturer, repair or refinish surfaces damaged during erection or Shipment, so
as to match the original surface and be unobtrusive. (Not to visible easily).

14.3 Repainted equipment by manufacturer shall be to colors selected by the consultant

from standard finishes. All fire protection piping shall be painted red to the approval
of Civil Defense Authorities.

14.4 Painting shall be applied to all pipe work and associated pipe work components,
valves, fittings, etc., equipment's, supports of any kind, insulation, plain mild steel,
copper, or cast-iron surfaces.

14.5 The following items do not require site painting:

a) Insulation having any of the following finishes:

I) Aluminum foil.
ii) Aluminum cladding.
iii) Polyisobutylene sheeting/bitumen coating.
iv) Vinyl glass/resin/aluminum foil laminate.

b) Equipment or plant of supports or frames delivered to site with any following

finishes:
I) Painted finish, other than pruned only provided that the finish is not
damaged in any way.
ii) Stainless steel or plastic coated.
iii) Staved enamel.

14.6 All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared by thoroughly cleaning and removing all
rust, grease, oil, dirt, and surface corrosion, using wire brush, energy paper and/or
degreasing medium as required. The paint shall be applied in accordance with the
maker's instructions and the type of paint to be used shall be in accordance with the
following:
Ferrous surface, one coat of Calcium Plumbate metal primer plus wash primers as
necessary, followed by 2 undercoats and one semi-gloss, acrylic enamel finishing
coat.
Nonferrous, one coat of zinc chromate primer plus wash primers as necessary,
followed by 2 under and one semi-gloss, acrylic enamel finishing coat.

All paint shall be procured from approved manufacturers.

14.7 All galvanized black iron/steel pipe work and steel fittings shall be delivered to site
undamaged and free from dirt and rust, and protected by factory applied varnish,
lacquer or shop factory applied prime paint.
14.8 Touch up all bolt heads, nuts, threads and previously unpainted connections. Touch
up all damaged and abraded (erosion) areas on pipework and steel after erection, and
wire brush all welds and cut ends. Apply one coat of an approved rust inhibiting
primer and leave ready to receive finish paint.

14.9 Treat all damaged and unprotected surfaces of galvanized steel, with a zinc rich paint
to a minimum of 3 mil thickness.

14.10 Equipment items, including pumps, air moving units, uninsulated pressure vessels,
unit ventilators and convectors shall have prime and final paint factory applied. Heat
resistant paint shall be used where the conditions require this.

15. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

15.1 Three (3) copies of complete operating and maintenance instructions for all
mechanical equipment and systems., bound in hard covered manuals, shall be
supplied

15.2 Operating instructions shall include:

A general description of the system, equipment included, and control operation.

Instructions on how to start and stop the plant, noting any safety and/or sequencing
arrangements.

A trouble shooting table, showing where to look for trouble under various conditions
of malfunctions.

Operating temperatures at critical points in the systems.

15.3 Maintenance schedule shall include:

 A list of all bearings with type and period of lubrication.

 Equipment manufacture's printed data on care and maintenance of
bearings.
 System wiring and control diagrams and detailed descriptions of the operation of
control systems.

15.4 The Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be handed to the consultant not
later than at the end of the commissioning period.

15.5 A list of spare parts and consumable as recommended by the equipment supplier to
cover an operation period of two years shall be submitted listing the following:
  Catalogue number, characteristics properties and price of each item, and validity
date.
 Source and alternative source of supply.
 Details of required maintenance with suggested frequency of actions.
 Details of all lubricating oils and greases required, and filter replacements.
 Details of each item of plant including the name and address of the manufacturer,
type and model, serial number, duty and rating.
 Indicate on list items that should be stocked by the consultant due to a long delivery
period.

16. PIPING AND DUCT WORK IDENTIFICATION

16.1 Internal

After completion of insulation and/or painting, all piping and ductwork shall be
marked in English to show the service and direction of flow.

Marking shall be placed at each side of any wall, partition or floor, at 10m intervals
on all exposed piping and ductwork and at each access panel or door. Marking shall
be located so as to be in full view.

Markings shall b stenciled. Use black stencils on light colored surfaces, yellow
stencils on dark colored surfaces except where fire lines which shall be stenciled in
red. Stencils shall have distinct edges. Blurred stencils are not acceptable. The name
of the service shall be stenciled fully or with abbreviations standard to the industry.
Non standard abbreviations are not acceptable. Letters shall be a minimum of 50
mm high for ducts and for pipes 75 mm or larger to outside of insulation. Letters for
smaller pipes shall be 20 mm high. All markings shall be clearly legible from 1.5m
above the adjacent floor or platform.

Access doors for fire dampers shall be clearly identified

16.2 External

Install continuous warning tape above all pipework's outside of building limits. The
tape shall be made of polyethylene film. Tape to be 150 mm wide and color coded as
per relevant BS. Tape to be printed with suitable label to identify the buried services.
The warning shall, be printed with suitable label to identify the buried services. The
warnings shall be printed in both Arabic and English. The tape shall run
approximately 300 mm below finish grade.
Submit tape designation for each buried service for approval.

17. COORDINATION WITH OTHER DIVISIONS

17.1 Particular attention must be paid to the proximity of electrical conduit and cable to
mechanical piping and equipment.
17.2 Pipes transporting hot fluids shall be installed at least 150 mm away from pipes
carrying cold fluids.

17.3 Electrical conduits shall not touch or be supported on pipe or duct walls.

17.4 Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this
division, and arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed
under all Divisions of the Contract.

17.5 Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent
information, commensurate with the progress of the work.

17.6 Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work
daily.

18. EXISING SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT

18.1 All changes and connections to existing services shall be made only in a manner and
at a time approved by-the consultant, so as to avoid any interruption of such services
during normal working hours. If necessary, changes and connections to existing
services shall be made outside of normal working hours, at no extra cost to this
contract.

18.2 Wherever existing services or equipment are to be removed, all piping for such
services or equipment shall be removed from any area where it is exposed, if no
longer required and securely capped or plugged in an approved manner. If
necessary, to facilitate installation of new work, any existing Services and equipment
shall be removed and then replaced by the Contractor, at no extra cost to this
contract.

18.3 Whenever it becomes necessary to relocate existing piping equipment to make

possible installation of the work under this contract, such relocation shall be done by
the Contractor at no extra cost to this contract.

18.4 Where connections are made to existing services, existing services within 1m (3ft.) of
the connection shall be made good under this contract.

18.5 The Contractor, shall be responsible to protect all the existing services from any
possible damage. Before the Contractor undertakes work in any area, he must
prepare a list of deficiencies in that area which affect his works, or which possible to
construed as being caused by himself if not noted. In the event that such deficiency
list is not prepared then he shall be deemed responsible for such deficiencies. Any
list shall be brought to the attention of the CONSULTANT forthwith.

19. TRAINING
 19.1 The Contractor shall be responsible to train adequate number of Operators or
Maintenance Staff deputed by the consultant. They shall be trained for correct
operation, safety devices, control and maintenance of all air conditioning and MEP
services provided under the contract before the works are handed over to the
CONSULTANT. The training shall be carried out by the qualified commissioning staff
of the Contractor, for each particular service and shall continue till the operators or
maintenance staff are fully conversant with all aspects of operations.

20.0 GUARANTEE

20.1 The contractor shall maintain the whole of the works for a period of twelve Calendar
Months from the date of Provision acceptance Certificate, and shall make good free
of cost any faults arising from defective goods or materials or from incorrect or
negligent workmanship on the part of his own Employees Suppliers or Sub
Contractors.

20.2 A Provisional Acceptance Certificate shall be issued by the consultant on satisfactory

completion of the commissioning tests. Final acceptance certificate will be issued at
the end of the maintenance period.

SECTION 13

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following:

Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to
building structure.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for hangers and supports.
Division 13 Sections on fire-suppression piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers.
Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation vapor barrier materials and thermal hanger
shield inserts.
 Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibration
isolation and seismic restraint devices.
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment suitable for seismic
zone of the project. Upon application of seismic forces of computed intensity, piping shall
remain fully connected into operable systems and shall not be displaced sufficiently to
damage adjacent or connecting equipment, or building members. Thermal expansion
flexibility shall not be impaired. Seismic rate shall be as follows:
Project seismic zone is 2A with a zone factor of 0.15
Building Importance Factor: 1.0.

Design and obtain approval from the Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and
supports for piping and equipment.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and
thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping
supports and trapeze hangers. Include seismic and design calculations justifying forces, sizes,
embedments,, and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13 for hangers and supports used as components of fire
protection system. Include listing and labeling by UL and FM approval.
Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support and trapeze by a qualified professional engineer.
Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional
engineer.

Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered

and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced
in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined
as those performed for installations of hangers, supports, and seismic restraints that
are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART – PRODUCTS

MANUFACTURED UNITS
Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer
to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and
support types.

Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.

Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690 kPa minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in

sheet metal shield.

Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate
with vapor barrier.
Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire
protection system shall include UL listing and FM approval.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and
exterior applications.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART - EXECUTION

HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Specification Sections.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 49 to 232 deg. C pipes, DN100 to
DN400 , requiring up to 100 mm of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, DN20
to DN600 , requiring clamp flexibility and up to 100 mm of insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, DN15 to DN600 , if little
or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, DN15 to DN100, to allow off-center
closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, DN20 to DN200.
Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,
DN15 to DN200.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes,
DN15 to DN200.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10):For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, DN15 to DN50.
Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, DN10 to DN200.
Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12):For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, DN10 to DN80.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, DN15 to DN750.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900 , with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, DN65
to DN900, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-
iron floor flange.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750, from two rods if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65 to DN500, from
single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050, if longitudinal
movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not
necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN600, if small
horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN750, if
vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion
and contraction.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to DN500.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to DN500,
if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 150 mm for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 49 to 232 deg. C piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building
attachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg. C piping installations.
Building Attachments:Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange
edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for
heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams
for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural
steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal
movement where head room is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360 degree insert of high-
density, 690 kPa minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate,
same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360 degree sheet
metal shield.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 32 mm.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in
piping systems.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to
25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze
support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from
one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary
stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include
the following types:
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld
steel according to AWS D-1.1.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion
joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight
concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
Supports exposed to external weather conditions shall be hot dipped galvanized with zinc
coated cut edges.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
Pipe insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers. Where pipe is supported by
insulation, provide galvanized steel shields and protection saddles. Where shields are used on
pipes 50 mm and larger, provide insulation inserts at points of hangers and supports.
Insulation inserts shall be of calcium silicate, cellular glass, minimum 128 kg/m3, molded glass
fiber, minimum 128 kg/m3, or other approved material of the same thickness as adjacent
insulation. Insulation inserts shall cover bottom half of pipe circumference and be not less in
length than the protection shield. Vapor-barrier facing of insert shall be of same material as
facing on adjacent insulation. Seal inserts into insulation with vapor barrier coating or
weatherproof coating as applicable. Where anchors are secured to chilled piping that is to be
insulated, insulate anchors same as piping for a distance not less than four times the
insulation thickness to prevent condensation. Vapor seal insulation around anchors.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with
clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated.
Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for
pipe DN100 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall
span arc of 180 degrees.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for
pipe DN100 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
DN8 to DN90 : 300 mm long and 1.22 mm thick.
DN100 : 300 mm long and 1.52 mm thick.
DN125 and DN150 : 450 mm long and 1.52 mm thick.
DN200 to DN350 : 600 mm long and 1.91 mm thick.
DN400 to DN600 : 600 mm long and 2.67 mm thick.

Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor.
Grouting: Grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

METAL FABRICATION
All fabricated channels and trapeze supports shall be hot dipped galvanized steel.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and
equipment supports.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop- welded because of shipping size limitations.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
All supports exposed to external weather condition shall be hot dipped galvanized with zinc
coated edges.

ADJUSTING
Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.

PAINTING
Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC- PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
 SECTION 03 MECHANICAL

IDENTIFICATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Reference
1.0.1 Conform to General Requirements for
Mechanical Services of Division Fifteen.
1.0.2 Reference Standards

C Specification for colors for identification, coding and special purposes.

Specification for Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles.

BS 1710:1980 Identification of pipelines and services.

BS 4652 Specification for

metallic zinc-rich priming paint. BS 4800 Paint colours for
building purposes.

378 Part 1 Safety Signs and Colours - Specification for Colour and Design

HVCA DW 144 Specification for sheet metal ductwork.

1.2 Submittals
a) All materials submittals shall include a detailed, clause-wise, compliance
statement.
b) All materials submittals shall include detailed catalogues, product literature
and descriptions of all equipment and fittings with selection charts,
capacities etc.
c) All material submittals shall
include copies of relevant standards.
d) Contractor shall submit samples of each type

of identification for CONSULTANT approval.

2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION
Standards - Colour code and label to BS 1710.

2.1.1 Primary Identification

Apply colour bands, 300mm wide, in accordance with BS 1710: 1980, to each pipe at
least once in every room or enclosed area; at intervals not exceeding fifteen metres; at
every junction; at every valve; and at every inspection and access position into
service shafts, false ceilings, bulkheads etc.

Colour bands shall not be provided on pipes which are to be painted to match
internal decorations.

Where two or more pipes run in parallel, then the colour banding for each pipe shall be
at the same locations.

At intervals as for colour banding, coloured arrows and wording shall be stenciled to
the insulation or pipework to indicate direction of flow, and to indicate the circuit or
system.

2.1.2 Secondary Identification

Apply colour bands, 50mm wide, in accordance with BS 1710: 1980, and superimpose a legend
identifying circuit, direction of fluid or gas flow, nominal pipe bore and, where appropriate, fluid
or gas pressure.

Colour bands shall not be provided on pipes which are to be painted to match
internal decorations.
2.2 Ductwork identification:
2.2.1 Standards
Generally colour code and label to HVCA Specification DW 144 (Appendix B).

2.2.2 Primary Identification

Apply colour bands, 300mm wide, to each duct at least once in every room or
enclosed area; at intervals not exceeding fifteen metres; at every junction; at every
damper; and at every inspection and access position into service shafts, false
ceilings, bulkheads etc.

2.2.3 Secondary Identification

For ducts with longest side or diameter up to and including 225mm. Paint colour bands
50mm wide and superimpose legends.

For ducts with longest side or diameter over 225mm. Paint or apply transfers to
identification triangles, or triangular plates. Superimpose or incorporate legends.
2.2.4 Triangular Plates
Attach to buckle bands or stool pieces and fix to ducting, with apex indicating
direction of airflow. Submit details of plates and fixings for approval before painting and
marking. Use equilateral triangle of side 150mm minimum.

2.2.5 Legends
Apply transfers of an approved type to colour bands or triangles or triangular plates.
Identify floor and space served, associated equipment reference and direction of
airflow.
2.3 Pipework and ductwork markings
In addition to the identification band coding all services shall be legibly and neatly
marked with black letters where a light background is used and white letters where a
dark background is used and appropriately coloured triangles to indicate the
direction of flow as follows:

Secondary Chilled Water flow and return S.CHW

Chilled Water flow and return CHW

Outside Air OA
Fresh Air FA
Exhaust Air EA
Supply Air SA
Return Air RA
Smoke Extract Duct SE
Staircase Pressurization Duct SPD
Corridor Pressurization Duct CPD
Lobby Pressurization Duct LPD
Mains Cold Water Service MCW
Cold Water Service CWS
Boosted Cold Water BCW
Hot Water Services HWS
Fire Water Services FWS
Irrigation Water Services IWS
Drainage Soil Pipe SP
Drainage Waste Pipe WP
Drainage Vent Pipe VP
Rain water Pipe RWP
A/C condensate drain Pipe CDP
Liquified Petrolium Gas LPG

2.4 Plant and equipment identification general

Each of the MEP plant units and equipment shall be factory painted in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations to a colour designated and approved by the
Design Consultant. Any damage to finishes which may have occurred during transit,
storage, installation or otherwise shall be made good in the manner recommended by
 the manufacturer and to the satisfaction of the CONSULTANT.

2.4.1 Specification plates

Each unit shall have a specification metal plate (the manufacturer's name plate) which
shall show full details as manufacturer's name, unit and unit motors serial numbers,
model numbers, date of manufacture and BS or other number for the internationally
approvable standard to which the item of plant conforms:

2.4.2 Pumps:
Pump size, rpm, amperes, impeller diameter, lubricants, pump characteristics, flows for
the duty specified, the K factor of the orifice plate if applicable, and any other pertinent
information as may be required by the CONSULTANT. This plate shall also be
securely fixed to the pump.

2.4.3 AHU-s, Fan Coils and Fans:

Air flows for the duty specified, fan size, rpm, amperes, impeller diameter, lubricants,
fan characteristics, coil type and characteristics air and water inlet/outlet
temperatures and any other pertinent information as may be required by the
CONSULTANT This plate shall also be securely fixed to the fan. An engraved label shall
be fixed to each filter stating the maximum permissible pressure drop.

The same as above is applicable to any other single piece of equipment or units
within the MEP systems.

2.4.4 Identification plates

In addition to the specification plates, each unit shall be provided with an
identification plate showing the code number for each unit as indicated on the
system schematics/unit schedule/plans. This plate shall be securely fixed to the
unit in a prominent position.

2.5 Plant and equipment identification, engraved plates:

2.5.1 Standards
Identify each item of equipment by name and, where appropriate, by agreed
reference characters. Provide colour identification as called for in work sections and,
in all cases, colour fire fighting equipment red.

2.5.2 Identification Colours

Use primary and secondary identification colours of associated system.
2.5.3 Plates
Use rectangular metal or laminated plastic,
securely fixed to each item of equipment.

2.5.4 Lettering
Engraved plates filled with paint.

2.5.5 Legends
Engrave plates with an approved text. Incorporate operating duty of equipment
where this is not incorporated in other labelling.
2.6 Plant and equipment identification, laminated plates:
2.6.1 Standards
Identify each item of equipment by name and, where appropriate, by agreed
reference characters. Provide colour identification as called for in work sections and,
in all cases, colour fire fighting equipment red.

2.6.2 Identification Colours

Use primary and secondary identification colours of associated
system.

2.6.3 Plates
Use rectangular metal or laminated plastic, securely fixed to each item of
equipment.

2.6.4 Lettering
Laminated plates, multi-coloured with outer
layer removed for lettering.

2.6.5 Legends
Engrave plates with an approved text. Incorporate operating duty of equipment
where this is not incorporated in other labelling.

2.7 Plant and equipment identification, back filled Perspex

2.7.1 Standards
Identify each item of equipment by name and, where appropriate, by agreed
reference characters. Provide colour identification as called for in work sections and,
in all cases, colour fire fighting equipment red.

2.7.2 Identification Colours

Use primary and secondary identification colours of associated
system.
2.7.3 Plates
Use rectangular metal or laminated plastic, securely fixed to each item of
equipment.

2.7.4 Lettering
Clear perspex back filled to reveal lettering.

2.7.5 Legends
Engrave plates with an approved text. Incorporate operating duty of equipment
where this is not incorporated in other labelling.
2.8 Valve and cock identification:
2.8.1 Standards
Identify each valve, cock, stop valve, air vent, drain cock etc. with disk engraved
with numerical reference. Except where exposed in occupied areas.

2.8.2 Identification Colours

Use primary and secondary identification colours of associated system for painted or
self colour discs.

2.8.3 Discs and Labels

Securely attach metal or laminated plastic discs, minimum diameter 35mm, to each
item. The labels for valves as alternatives shall be brass or Traffolyte plastic 80 mm by
40 mm with a hole 10 mm from one end. A short length of brass chain with a
ring at each end shall be used to permanently attach the labels to each valve.

2.8.4 Legends
Engrave discs with permanent characters, minimum height 10mm. Each label shall
indicate the type of service and the valve reference number which shall agree with a
schedule of valves which shall be prepared for each service. The schedule shall comprise
the valve reference number, the function of the valve and its location.

Incorporate in operating instructions relating to regulating valves and flow

measuring equipment, details of flow rate, pressure differential and setting, as
appropriate.
2.9 Air volume regulating and control damper identification:
2.9.1 Standards
 Identify each regulating and control damper. Except where exposed in occupied
areas. On ductwork dampers, clearly indicate commissioning set point.

2.9.2 Identification colours

Use primary and secondary identification colours of associated system for painted
or self colour discs.

2.9.3 Discs
Securely attach metal or laminated plastic discs, minimum diameter 35mm, to each item.

2.9.4 Legends
Engrave discs with permanent characters, minimum height 10 mm.
2.10 Instrument identification:
2.10.1 Standards
Identify each instrument by name and, where appropriate, by agreed reference
characters.

2.10.2 Plates
Use rectangular metal or laminated plastic, securely fixed to each instrument.

2.10.3 Legends
Engrave plates with an approved text.

2.11 Danger and warning notices:

2.11.1 Hazardous Systems
Colour code and label hazardous systems and equipment to requirements of Health
and Safety Executive Guidance Notes.

The warning flash as specified in BS 5378 Part 1, "Safety Signs and Colours - Specification for
Colour and Design" shall be attached to all internal and external removable covers of
electrical equipment and panels, which provide shielding from live conductors lables to be in
Arabic and English.
2.12 System identification installation charts, perspex glazed frame:
2.12.1 System Schematics
Supply and fix a referenced schematic diagram (or diagrams) of all systems as installed,
including equipment and ancillary schedules.
Show scheduled information on diagram.

Identify all items by appropriate reference characters.

2.12.2 Control Schematics
Supply and fix a referenced schematic diagram (or diagrams) of all control systems as
installed, including equipment and ancillary schedules. Show scheduled information
on diagram.

Identify all items

by
appropriate
reference characters.

2.12.3 Location
Fix in each plant room or equipment room.

2.12.4 Finish
Perspex sheet glazing with surrounding frame and mounting attachments.
2.13 System Identification Installation Charts, Acrylic Glazed Hardwood Frame
2.13.1 System Schematic
Supply and fix a referenced schematic diagram (or diagrams) of all systems as installed,
including equipment and ancillary schedules. Show scheduled information on
diagram.

Identify all items

by
appropriate
reference characters.

2.13.2 Control Schematic

Supply and fix a referenced schematic diagram (or diagrams) of all control systems as
installed, including equipment and ancillary schedules. Show scheduled information
on diagram

Identify all items

by
appropriate
reference characters.

2.13.3 Location
Fix in each boiler house, calorifier room, plant room or equipment room.

2.13.4 Finish
Hardboard 3mm thick set in hardwood frame and glazed with 1.5mm clear acrylic.
 2.14 System identification installation charts, plastic encapsulated:
2.14.1 System Schematics
Supply and fix a referenced schematic diagram (or diagrams) of all systems as installed,
including equipment and ancillary schedules. Show scheduled information on diagram.
Identify all items by appropriate reference characters.

2.14.2 Control Schematics

Supply and fix a referenced schematic diagram (or diagrams) of all control systems as
installed, including equipment and ancillary schedules. Show scheduled information on
diagram. Identify all items by appropriate reference characters.

2.14.3 Location
Fix in each boiler house, calorifier room, plant room or equipment room.

2.14.4 Finish
Plastic encapsulated chart.

3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Miscellaneous
3.1.1 Colour not covered by this Specification must be agreed with the

CONSULTANT before work commences on site

3.1.2 Labels shall be permanently fixed using rivets or self tapping screws, sharp
edges or tips of the screws, shall be removed.
3.1.3 Control devices, shall be labelled by reference and function in
accordance with circuit and layout diagrams.

3.1.4 Similar labels shall be affixed below each instrument on the instrument
panel and shall indicate the purpose of the instrument and the respective
boiler, tank or other appliance to which its recordings are applicable, and all
relevant performance data as appropriate to the item of plant to enable easy
identification at a later date.
3.1.5 Cables shall be permanently designated using sleeves or ferrules at
every termination in accordance with schematic wiring diagrams.
3.1.6 All terminals shall be designated in accordance with circuit and layout

diagrams.
The designation of terminals may be achieved by the use of proprietary labels
supplied as part of the product supplied by the terminal manufacturer.

3.1.7 All valves controlling mains and sub-circuits for all services shall be labelled
before the works are commissioned in accordance with a schedule of valves,
which shall correspond with valves indicated upon the final as-installed
 drawings and any circuit control diagrams considered necessary.
3.1.8 The Contractor shall supply details of the tagging system he intends to use
together with a schedule of all valves and equipment with a dedicated tag
number related to location to the CONSULTANT before installation of these
items will be allowed to commence.
3.1.9 The schedules and schematic diagrams shall be
framed and glazed and hung in the relevant plant rooms; an alternative
method may be submitted to the CONSULTANT for approval. Duplicate
copies of the schedules and schematic diagrams shall be submitted to the
CONSULTANT for approval.
 SECTION 04
FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all the AC
equipment as indicated on the drawings and in accord with provisions of
Contract Documents.
2. Completely co-ordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental
to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
4. Abbreviations:
a. AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
b. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Engineers.
c. ARI: Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
5. The Contractor shall calculate without extra cost the final required cooling
load, sound level & fan static pressure which shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval.
1.02 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop drawings and product data of all components.
B. Curves showing fan performance with actual system operating point plotted on fan curve.
C. Cooling coil performance.
D. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Operation, maintenance data, recommended spare parts, and 15 % extra stock.
F. Guarantees, two years.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards:
1. AMCA Standard 210, Test Code for Air Moving Devices.
2. NFPA 90-A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems, latest edition.
3. ARI Standard 410-72, Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
1.04 GENERAL
A. Fresh Air handling units: Motor, adjustable drive, fan sections, coil sections, access sections
and other components as indicated:
1. Sections: Rigid die-formed, integrally welded construction and corrosion free of
heavy gauge galvanised steel.
2. Fasten sections together with cadmium plated bolts.
3. Protect all surfaces against corrosion.
4. Hot-dip galvanised drain pan and cooling section.
5. Finish all other casing parts by degreasing and coating with chlorinated rubber
enamel, manufacturer’s standard colour.
6. Unit should be of low leak design.
B. Casings: Panels with independent structural frame carrying bearings, motor, and other
components, or heavy gauge, bolt together construction with end panels carrying bearings.
C. All units shall be of double skin construction insulated between the skins.
1. Removable access panels hinged type for inspection for each section
without dismantling.
2. Designed and rated for pressure systems served.
3. Insulate all panels with minimum 25 mm thick (for indoor installation & 50 mm
thick. for outdoor installation) neoprene coated fibreglass insulation, "K"
value (at 24 oC)
0.038 W/m² degree C maximum.
4. Casing of outdoor installation units shall be weather proof type complete
with a protection roof and sealed tight against water.
D. Fans: AMCA rated double inlet double width backward curved centrifugal type with
especially designed scrolls.
5. Speeds: Below initial critical speed of shaft wheel assembly.
6. Bearings: Self-aligning type with seals, with top grease connections and bottom
relief plug for each bearing.
7. Extend grease fitting on drive side outside of belt guard.
8. Fans shall not exceed maximum outlet velocity 15 m/sec.
E. Drives: Complete with universal bases with heavy duty special adjustment devices,
adjustable V-belt drives and easily removable belt guard.
1. Provide extra heavy mounting bases for large size motors.
2. Arrange ductwork from units so that there is no conflict with motors.
3. Arrange belt guard so that speed can be measured without removing guard.
4. "V" belts and drives: Designed for 150 percent of motor capacity.
5. Motors mounted on slide rail or pivoted bases.
F. Motors: Squirrel cage, general purpose: NEMA frame, for 415 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz., sufficient
capacity to move required amount of air at static pressure indicated. Provide additional
stand-by electric motor for AHU’s of air flow capacity greater than 25000 LPS.

1.05 cooling COIL SECTIONS

A. Chilled water coils - general
1. Coil capacity, as scheduled.
2. Housing: Heavy gauge galvanised steel with 1.4 mm galvanised steel frame for
bolting to other sections.
3. Coils shall be constructed of copper tubing with aluminium fins (maximum of 10
fins per 25 mm) or helical type
4. Headers: Copper.
5. Air face velocity: Not exceeding 2.5 m/s.
6. Provide vent and drain connections at high and low points respectively.
7. Make all coils of drainable type.
8. Provide drain pan for each cooling coil section.
9. Drain pan: Insulated to match casing with minimum 32 mm drain and rust
resistant interior finish.
10. ARI certified.

1.06 HEATING coil section

A. Electric Heating
The electric heater shall be multi-stages completely assembled and wired. Electric
heating section integral within the unit. Heavy duty nickel chromium sheathed
elements internally wired with a maximum density of 16 Watts per square
centimeter.
B. Heater circuits shall be 48 Amps or less, each individually fused. Automatic reset high limit
control shall operate through heater backup contactors. The electric heat units shall have
factory mounted non-fused disconnect for heating power source in main control panel.

1.07 Heat recovery wheels

A. Rotor / Wheels Matrix
The rotor/wheel matrix should be capable of both sensible and latent heat
recovery in the range of 80%. The ratio of weight of desiccant coating and the
mass of aluminium foil shall ensure equal recovery of both sensible and latent
heat over the operating range.
B. Substrate
The substrate or wheel matrix shall be of pure aluminium foil to enable quick and
efficient uptake of thermal energy. The substrate shall be of sufficient mass for optimum
heat transfer and maximum heat recovery at a relatively low rotational speed of 15 to 25
rpm.
C. Desiccant
The desiccant shall be water molecular selective and non-migratory and be of sufficient
mass. The desiccant to be coated with a non-masking porous binder adhesive on the
aluminium substrate which will allow quick and easy uptake and release of water vapour.
D. Rotor
The rotor shall be a non-clogging aluminium media, having a multitude of narrow
aluminium foil channels, thus ensuring a laminar flow and will allow particles upto 600
microns to pass through it.

The rotor construction shall be of alternate flat and corrugated aluminium foil of uniform
width. The rotor honeycomb matrix foil shall be wound and adhered in a manner to
make the rotor structurally rigid and strong and does not allow cracking or deformation
due to temperature or humidity. The surface of the wheel/rotor shall be highly polished
so that the vertical and radial run out does not exceed ±1mm per 1000mm which will
minimise leakage/drag on the radial seals as well as fluctuations in the drive belt tension.

The spacing of the substrate around the rotor should be extremely consistent so that
uniform air flow and performance over the entire face of the air stream is ensured. In
order to achieve uniform pressure drop and air flow across the rotor face the flute height
and pitch should be consistent.

The media should be cleanable with compressed air, low pressure steam or water with light
detergent; without degrading the latent recovery.
E. Purge Section
Built-in purge section should be provided in the unit to ensure maximum, separation of
fresh air from exhaust air to limit carryover of bacteria, dust and pollutants from
exhaust air to fresh air.
F. Seal
The wheel cassette shall be supplied with four pass labyrinth seal. The seals shall not
make any contact with the rotating surface of the wheel. Seals shall be field adjustable
to ensure optimum performance. The seal and purge system shall limit cross
contamination to less than 0.04%.

1.08 Twin Extract Fan Section

A. Unit casing shall be house twin fan assemblies, each comprising double inlet
forward curved centrifugal impellers running in an individual scroll. Impellers
may be either direct driven or belt driven depending upon the fan duty. Motors
shall be manufactured to BS 5000, TEFV type with sealed for life bearings.
Motor insulation shall be Class ‘F’.
B. Fans shall be fitted with air flow sensors and shall discharge into a common
plenum chamber through a linked shutter system. Motors and flow sensors
shall be prewired to fitted isolator accessible from outside.
C. Units shall be supplied for either roof mounting or plant room use as indicated
on the drawings. Units shall be supplied with auto changeover panels with
duty/stand-by selector switch, run/fall indication lamps, cyclic relay for duty
sharing. Starter/Auto changeover panels shall be incorporated within electrical
power supply panels as indicated on electrical schematic drawings.
1.09 FILTERS
1. Filter media shall be U/L listed, Class 1 or Class II, as approved by The Engineer.
2. Filter components assembled to form filter banks shall be products of
same manufacturer.
3. Provide spare parts in accord with manufacturer recommended with
minimum 15% extra stock of each type and size.

FRAMES
Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of galvanized steel or extruded
aluminum with necessary gasketing between frames and walls. Provide holding frames
1.5 mm, "T" section construction.

PANEL FILTERS
1. Media: 50 mm thick fibrous glass blanket, factory sprayed with
flameproof, non- drip, non-volatile adhesive.
2. Holding frames: 1.50 mm minimum galvanized frame with expanded
metal grid on air leaving side and steel rod grid on air entering side,
hinged with pull and retaining handles.
3. Efficiency 30% based on ASHRAE 62-76 test method.
4. Initial resistance 6 mm WG based on 2.5 m/s face velocity.
 HIGH EFFICIENCY BAG FILTERS
1. Media: Reinforced glass fiber performed into series of pockets and bonded
to header. Provide approximately one square meter of media per 100 LPS
capacity.
2. Holding Frames: 1.50 mm minimum galvanized steel with sealing grooves
and gaskets, locking clips, and provision for front mounted panel prefilter
and side removal of filter media.
3. Efficiency: 60-95 % average based on ASHRAE 62-76 test method.
4. Initial resistance. 12 mm WG based on 2.5 m/s face velocity.

PERMANENT WASHABLE FILTERS

1. Media: Metal screen, 25 square mm of screen per 100 square mm of filter
area containing at least 38 m of wire.
2. Holding Frames: 1.2 /mm minimum galvanized frames with retaining handles.
3. Filter equipped with handles and rotary wedge corner latches.
4. Initial resistance 2.5 mm WG based on 2.5 m/s face velocity.
5. Provide two sets of filters for each fan coil, evaporator-blower, and room
type air conditioner unit so that one set can be cleaned while the other is
used.
6. Minimum efficiency shall be 65 percent by ASHRAE Weight Resistant Test
Method at 2.5 m/s.

SAND TRAP LOUVERS

1. Louvers shall be vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to
provide tortuous air flow path and thus trap sand.
2. Louver shall have self emptying drain holes.
3. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum to ASTM B209 and ANSI 1.
Blades shall be 1.6 mm thick and casing 2.0 mm thick.
4. Maximum louver face velocity shall be 1.2 m/s and maximum pressure
drop 50 Pa.
5. Louvers shall be provided with washable filter and an insect screen of
aluminum 2 mm × 2 mm mesh mounted on a standard U type frame with
miter corners. Screens shall be secured to the interior face of the louver
with self-tapping stainless steel screws.
6. Size of louvers shall be as indicated on the drawings. Louvers of heights
1125 mm to 2250 mm shall have central transom and sand chute and for
heights 2250 mm to 4500 mm louver shall have additional central bracing
support as recommended by the manufacturer.
7. Louvers shall have efficiency of 80% with coarse test dust (20 to 200
microns) and 50% efficiency with fine test dust (1 to 70 microns).

FILTER GAUGES

Provide diaphragm - type filter gauge for each filter bank, with 100 mm dial and
pointer graduated to read from 0 to 0.5 kPa.
1.10 INSTALLATION
A. Install as indicated and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
B. Provide drain line from AHU to nearest floor drain or as indicated.
C. Construct and install filters to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide
felt, rubber or neoprene gaskets as necessary.
D. Do not operate fan system connected to filter banks until filters (temporary or
permanent) are in place.
E. Provide new filters at handing over.
F. Replace disposable media filters used during construction.
G. Provide filter banks with removal and access space.

1.11 PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING & ROOF TOP UNITS AND ACCESSORIES

CABINET:
Unit shall be complete with coil, fan, motor, drain pan, and all required wiring,
piping, controls and special features.

Unit manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification.

Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA – 90A requirements for flame spread and
smoke generation.

Unit shall be provided with 2 inch thick synthetic media cleanable filters

selected on ASRA 1996 chapter 25 table 2.

Unit shall be selected at medium speed1996 chapter 25

table 2. Unit shall be selected at medium speed.

1.12 FAN AND MOTORS:

Fan shall direct drive; double width fan wheels shall have forward curved
blades, and be statically and dynamically balanced

Fan motor shall be 3 speed permanent split capacitor types with sleeve type
bearings and over sized oil reservoirs.
1.13 ROOM THERMOSTAT:

To provide 2-wire, modulating space temperature control in electronic

systems through thermostat-resistor element in which resistance decreases
as temperature increases.

Having the following features:

- Wall mounted.
- Temperature scale with set point adjusting lever.
- 3 speed of fan with "OFF ".
- Cover thermometer.
- Range 15-32 deg. C, thermometer scale

13-35 deg. C, sensor Resistance 1715 ohms with

sensitivity of 15 ohms for each 0.5 Deg. C

temperature change

- Accessories including outlet box and mounting screws.

- Thermostat shall control air conditioning unit's

compressors in steps During summer season.

- Thermostat shall control electric heating coil in steps during winter.

1.14 CONDENSER AND EVAPORATOR COILS:

The direct expansion coils are constructed from seamless copper tube
expanded into aluminum fins.

All coils shall be tested at a pressure of 30

kg/cm2 Centrifugal Fans

Forward curved, directly connected to fan motor, statically and dynamically balanced
and designed for whisper quit operation. Materials to be high strength and corrosion
resistant.
 MOTOR
3-speed type, with built-in thermal overload protection and bronze sleeve type
bearings with oil reservoirs. Motor to be resiliently mounted.

Condensate Drain Pan

18 gauge galvanized steel, projecting under entire length and width of coil,
drain pan shall be epoxy resin coated insulated with fire retardant foam
coating, Pan to be treated against corrosion, insulated and pitched for positive
drainage with unit installed level.

COMPRESSOR
Hermetic, R-22 reciprocating compressors shall be specially designed for heavy

duty Middle East conditions with built in oil pump.

Each compressor has internal spring mounting, external anti-vibration mounts.

The electric motor has F class insulation, 100% suction gas cooled and
incorporates protective sheet metal steel shield connected to the crankcase.

Each compressor motor is protected with:

- A low pressure safety switch.

- A high pressure safety switch.
- An internal over load protestor (against high motor temperature
- 5 years warranty for hermetic

sealed compressor. REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT:

This comprises followings elements:

- Evaporator and condenser air coils each constructed of copper tubing

mechanically expanded in aluminum fins.
- Refrigerant lines of copper tubing, de-oxidized, drier leak test.
- Expansion valves and check valves for refrigerant control.
- Filter driers in liquid lines.
- All units leave factory with R-22 operating charge.

CONTROL PANEL

All self contained units are supplied completely pre-wired in accordance with VDE
code requiring only the connection to the 3 phase supply and the installation of a
suitable general disconnect switch and fuses and connecting remote control
thermostat.
 When unit is delivered as split it required field interconnecting wiring and
piping between the evaporator and condenser sections.

The control panel is located in separate compartment and can be inspected

without distributing operation; the control panel contains the followings:

- Starting contactor and overload for each compressor.

- Starting contactors and overloads for evaporator and condenser fan motor.
- 24 volt control relays.
- 220/24 volt control circuit transformer.
- Solid state timer for each compressor.
- Voltage protector.
- Control fuse.
- All appropriate wiring, terminals,

and mains connections. PROTECTION AND SAFETY

- High/low pressure control to protect the compressor against high discharge

and low suction pressures.
- Fan motors 3 phase external and internal protection located in their
contactors and windings respectively.
- Compressor 3 phase external and internal protection located in their
contactors and windings respectively.
- Crankcase heater to guard the compressor against floodback conditions
and to eliminate oil fluffing on start up.

- Timer to protect the compressor against short cycling by not allowing immediate

restart after a momentary power failure or when thermostat opens.

- Simultaneous starting of both compressor is prevented for dual compressor units

- Voltage protector against low voltage, phase reversal, and short cycling.
1.15 NOISE ATTENUATION

The Contractor shall supply and fix acoustic insulation and noise attenuator units
where necessary to reduce the air borne noise transmission through the
distribution duct system; so that the specified noise criteria levels are satisfied.

1.16 SOUND ATTENUATORS

Sound attenuators shall be located at upstream of supply air fan and

downstream of fan return air fan module to ensure effective sound reduction.
The media shall be made of 60kg/m³ rook wool, UL (NFPA 90A) approval
perforated galvanized sheet on the inner casing on outer wall.

The selection and supply of sound attenuators shall be by specialist acoustic.

 Attenuators or splitters of large cross section or length can be manufactured in
modular section as required for ease of site handling.

1.17 Fire dampers

Type - Dampers shall be manufactured to DW142 shall meet the local codes,
the standards of the "National Fire Protection Association" 90A and shall
comply with BS 476. Dampers shall be sized so that the free air space is not
less than the connected duct free air space. Location shall be as shown on
drawings and as required by Local Authority.

Material - Frame shall be constructed 1.2MM galvanized steel casing to be

unaffected by corrosion of high heat. Mechanical parts shall have bronze or SS
non-corrosive pins. When closed, the dampers shall be held closed by a catch
arrangement.

Fuse links - Fire dampers shall be arranged to close automatically and remain
tightly closed upon the operation of an approved fusible link or other approved
heat actuated device, located where readily affected by an abnormal rise of
temperature in the duct. Fusible links shall have a temperature rating
approximately 76oC.

Workmanship - Fire dampers shall be installed so as to provide the positive

barrier to passage of air when in a closed position. Dampers shall be installed
so they will be self- supporting in case of duct destruction due to heat. Care
must be exercised that the frame will be set so that closing device shall not
bind.

Access Hole - Suitable hand hole openings with tightly fitted covers shall be
provided to make accessible for inspection and maintenance, or resetting

Manufacture - Fire dampers and access doors shall be the product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of high quality products.

All fire dampers shall be UL LISTED supplied with a visual indicator of the
damper blade status, which shall be shown externally on the false ceiling.
 The level of cleanliness and protection internal to the ductwork must be as defined

in HVCA document DW/TMC.

Provide fire dampers in all ducts over 125 sq.cm. in area, in the following
locations, Whether or not specifically required by ordinances and codes:-

Duct entering and leaving fire shafts (duct shafts). Ducts passing through
designated fire walls.

Ducts through floors, and not encased in fire shaft. Ducts leaving and entering

plant area. Ducts entering and leaving storage areas

1.18 GUARANTEE:

WARRANTY PERIOD SHALL BE FIVE YEARS FOR THE COMPRESSOR

FROM DATE OF COMMISSIONING.

SECTION 05
AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART - 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1 Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all air handling
units as indicated on the drawings and in accord with provisions of Contract
Documents. Air handling units shall be provided from same manufacture of
 Chillers.
2 Completely co-ordinate with work of all other trades.
3 Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental
to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
4 See Section 15050, for Basic Mechanical
Requirements. See Division 1, for 5General
Requirements. Abbreviations
6
A AMCA: Air Moving and Conditioning Association.
b. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers.
c. ARI: Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
7 The Contractor shall calculate without extra cost the final
required fan static pressure which shall be submitted to the
Consultant / Client's Consultant / Client's representative for
approval.
8 For control of the AHUs, refer to Section - 16930 and as per HVAC
- control & sequence of operation drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTAL

A Shop drawings and product data of all components

B Curves showing fan performance with actual system operating point plotted on fan curve
C Cooling coil performance
D Operation & Maintenance Data: See Contract 'Operation and
Maintenance Data: pare Parts and 15 % Extra Stock' (minimum one
set of each belt set &
filter) Guarantees,
E See Section 01741 'Guarantees:
F Guarantee period shall be one year from the date of initial
handing over and Consultant / Client's Consultant / Client's
representative acceptance there of.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards:
1. AMCA Standard 210, Test Code for Air Moving devices.
2. NFPA 90-A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems, latest edition.
3. ARI Standard 410-72, Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-
Heating Coils.
PART –2 PRODUCTS

2.01 AIR HANDLING UNITS

 A Air handling units: Motor, adjustable drive, fan sections, coil
sections, access sections and other components as
indicated:

1 Sections: Rigid die-formed, integrally welded construction

and corrosion free of heavy gauge galvanised steel.
2 Fasten sections together with cadmium plated bolts.
3 Protect all surfaces against corrosion.
4 Hot-dip
galvanised drain pan and
cooling section.
5 Finish all other casing parts by degreasing and coating with
chlorinated rubber enamel, manufacturer's standard colour.
6 Unit should be of low leak design.

B Type: Provide draw-through or blow-through, vertical or

horizontal, variable or constant volume as indicated in the
schedules.
C Casings: Panels with independent structural frame carrying bearings,
motor, and other components, of heavy gauge galvanized, bolt
together construction
with end panels carrying bearings.
D All units shall be of double
skin construction nsulated
between the skins.

1 Removable access panels hinged type for inspection for each

section without dismantling.
2 Designed and rated for pressure systems served.
3 Insulate all panels with, 50mm thick (for outdoor installation)
neoprene coated fibreglass insulation, "K" value (at 24 oC) 0.038
W/m degree C maximum. casing of outdoor units shall be
weather proof
type suitable for outdoor installation, complete with a protection roof, and
sealed tight against water entrance.
E Fans: AMCA rated, centrifugal backward inclined - double width double inlet - type
1 Speeds: Below initial critical speed of shaft
wheel assembly.
2 Bearings: Self-aligning, heavy duty type, ball or roller bearings
with regreasable
lubrication. Select for 400,000 HRS operation at maximum catalogued
operating conditions.
3 Extend grease fitting on drive side outside of belt
guard.
F Drives: Complete with universal bases with heavy duty special
 adjustment devices, adjustable V-belt drives and easily
removable belt guard.
1 Provide extra heavy mounting bases for
large size motors.
2 Arrange ductwork from units so that there is no conflict
with motors.
3 Arrange belt guard so that speed can be measured without removing guard. "V"
4 belts and drives: Designed for 150 percent of motor
capacity. Motors mounted on slide rail or pivoted bases.
5 Variable volume AHU's shall use fans with variable frequency
drives and DDC temperature control.
G Motors: Squirrel cage, TEFC, general purpose: NEMA frame, for 380 V,
3 phase, 50 hertz, sufficient capacity to move required amount of air
at static pressure indicated. Provide additional stand-by electric
motor for AHU's of
air flow capacity greater than 15000 LPS.
H AHU provided with mixing box complete with outside air
damper, exhaust air damper and return air damper
"Economizer".

2.02 COIL SECTIONS

A. Cooling (Chilled water type) Coils

1 Coil capacity, as scheduled capacity and
working conditions .
2 Housing: Heavy gauge galvanised steel with 1.4 mm galvanised
steel frame for bolting to other sections.
3 Coils shall be constructed of copper tubing with aluminium fins
(maximum of 10 fins per 25 mm) or helical type
4 Headers: Copper.
5 Air face velocity: Not
exceeding 2.5 m/s.
6 Provide vent and drain connections at high and low
points respectively. Make all coils of drainable type.
7 Provide stainless steel drain pan for each
cooling coil section.
8 Drain pan: Insulated to match casing with minimum 32 mm drain
and r ust resistant interior finish.
2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Refer to Section 15240, Mechanical, Vibration
And Seismic Control.
B. Spring type with steel base

2.04 FILTERS
A. Pre - filters and high efficiency
filters and as indicated on
drawings.
B. Refer to Section 15885, 'Air Filters'.
2.05 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES FOR VAV
AHU'S (IF IT IS REQUIRED)
Variable air volume air handling units shall be provided with variable frequency drives,
complete with rectifiers to convert 50 Hz AC power to DC power, and inverters to invert DC
power back to a variable frequency AC power.

A. General requirements for variable

frequency drives shall be:
1 Adjustable frequency in proportion to output speed.
2 Adjustable output voltage with constant volts / Hz over a
constant torque output range.
3 Supply full rated current at frequency within a constant torque
output range.
4 Develop full shaft power needed.
B. Operation
1. Automatic operation
a. Provided from an external signal from main duct system
b. Motor speed: Linearly proportional between maximum and minimum
speeds.
2 Manual operation:
From a unit mounted potentiometer.
3 Auto-restart:
On power failure & return, unit shall automatically come back on
line when drive is in automatic mode.
C. Sequence of Control
1. Fan pressure control:
a. Inverter panel shall accept pressure signal directly and
control pressure with an accuracy of plus/minus 2 percent.
b. Electronic controller shall be integral to inverter panel with
pressure readout and set point adjustment on panel face.

2. Supply fan static pressure control:

a Inverter panel shall accept duct static pressure signal directly and
control duct pressure with accuracy of plus/minus 2 percent.
b Electronic controller shall be integral to inverter panel with duct
static
pressure readout and setpoint adjustable on
panel face.
c Supply fan shall be controlled by a logarithmic declining speed
ratio
which shall be field adjustable within inverter panel.
d Space static pressure sensor with equal accuracy shall override
declining ratio control on low and high space static pressure.
 2.06 HUMIDIFIER:
Steam humidifier duct mounted type using immersed electrodes steam cylinder and
stainless steel steam distribution pipe complete with water level control
and automatic flushing.
PART – 3 FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT

3.01 GENERAL
Supply and install as indicated in the schedule of equipment, packaged modular
Air Handling Units of Double Decker Type, (as shown on drawings) each capable
of the duty as mentioned in the schedule of equipment. The space available for
the unit shall be confirmed with the civil and architectural proposal of the main
contract and sizes of units shall be selected to fit into the spaces available.
Where necessary the units may be built on site, subject to acceptance of the
finished units for warranty purposes by the original supplier and his local agent.
Unless otherwise stated, the air handling units shall be of sectionalized
construction with pre-filter, back filter, chilled water cooling coil and supply air
fan. For fresh air recovery AHU shall be additional with heat recovery wheel,
necessary empty section with access doors, liquid coupled heat exchanger,
return air fan. As indicated in the schedule, the unit configuration should suit
the ducting arrangement as shown on the drawings viz. double
deck construction

3.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

a) The equipment manufacturer shall strictly adhere to following
standards and specification:
b) ISO 9001 certificate required.
c) Equipment shall be Euro vent-certificate to be submitted by
AHU ma nufacturer.
d) Air handling unit manufacturer shall strictly adhere to CEN standards
(committee
European de normalization). Air handling units shall meet the
EUROVENT- CERFIFICATION requirements of :
J Casing strength to

A J Thermal transmittance CLASS T4

J Thermal bridge factor

3.03 UNIT CONSTRUCTION

The unit casings shall be of double skinned panels. Casings shall be assembled with self
supporting modular panel elements with an integrated base frame made of zincates steel
and sections along upper sides of the units.
Sheet metal thickness shall be not less than 1.5 mm for the inner skin and 0.8 mm for the outer
 skin and shall be made from zincates steel sheets. The out side
of the outer skin shall be plastic coated to a thickness of 0.18 mm for additional protection.
Inside and outside of panel wall shall be completely smooth. The overall heat thermal
transmittance (heat transfer coefficient) shall not exceed K=0.59 W/m2k. All
casing panels shall be insulated glass fibre layer of 50mm thick (pressure injected foam
will not be acceptable). Incombustible with class of in flammability.
A1 in accordance to DIN 4102 O in accordance to ISO 1182.2
The base frame of the unit shall be made from sendzimir galvanized sheet metal for size
with largest dimensions up to 2500mm, and hot dip galvanized U-profile for larger units.
Service dose shall be provided with special gasket and locking device. Access dose 400mm
and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and internal opening.
Access dose with width smaller than 400mm shall be removable type fitted with quick
release flap turn lock with spring pressure arrangement. Sealant between panels shall be
anti fungicide sealant material.
All air handling units installed outdoors shall be fitted aluminium weather canopy.

The AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior
of panels. In the events of any condensation problems appear after installation, the
contractor shall undertake all remedial measures to rectify and to the satisfaction of the
consultants. Any stacked or double height coils shall have separate drain pans to reduce
carry over.
Acoustical insulation through the panel:
HI MID FREQUENCY OCTAVE BAND 12
25 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
5 0
14 25 28 27 29 31 34
3.04 VIBRATION ISOLATION

The Air Handling Unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor
and drive assembly on spring isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air
handling unit casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer. In addition to
the above the entire unit shall be mounted on additional vibration isolators.

3.05 FILTER SECTION

Filter cells shall be of standard sizes and shall be obtained from reputed European
manufacturers. The filter shall be sealed against the filter frame using a permanently elastic
gasket to a standard compatible with the filter efficiency. Pressure drop tapings shall be
integrated into the frame to allow a manometer or filter monitor to be fitted. Filter
materials shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, and non- odorous and offer no
sustenance to vermin. Each filter section has to
be provided with manometer.

The filter material shall be pleated to provide a large effective area. Filter section should be
 provided with an inspection door.
The contractor shall supply one set of all filters per AHU as spares for replacement after testing
and commissioning and prior to handing over of the installation.

3.06 PRE FILTER

The Pre-filter material shall be synthetic, pleated to provide a large effective area and shall
be supported by a wire mesh and frame. The filter cells shall be suitable for side withdrawal
on the inspection side. The filter class shall be EU-3 or EU-4 as per Euro vent 4/5 or G3 as
per EN 779.

3.07 BAG FILTER

Bag filter material shall be glass fibre, of standard readily available sizes. The filters shall be
clamped against the frame using a cam locking bar. The filter class should be EU7 as per Euro
vent 4/5 or G7 as per EN 779.

3.08 FAN & FAN MOTOR

Fans shall be double inlet, double width, backward curved centrifugal type with galvanized
steel casings. Fans shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 300-85. Every individual fan shall
be run before delivery to check bearing condition and vibration. Fan shafts shall be mounted
in taper sleeve bearings designed for continuous operation and a mean useful life of 200,000
hours. Backward curved impeller should be coated with 60 micron epoxy painting of high
quality.
The fan shall be connected to the outlet opening by means of an airtight flexible
connection. Fans shall not exceed a maximum outlet velocity of 15m/sec.
The degree of protection shall be IP54 with mounting method B3 and Class F
insulation.
Fan bearing shall be rectal external-lubricated type with extended lube lines to terminate
outside the fan section. The bearing shall be selected for life of
200,000 Hours operation. Fan drive shall be rated at 150% of the maximum
motor power of the units and shall be fitted with adjustable belt tension arrangement. Belt
guards or screen protection door in Fan section shall be provided in accordance with CEN
Standard.
The fan motor shall be suitable for operating 415V, 3Ph 50Hz electrical
power supply. The fan motor shall be wired to the safety isolation switch or connection box.

The contractor shall select power input and speed of the fan subsequent to ascertaining
system static pressure in accordance with pressure drop calculations to the approval of the
 engineer.
The fan shall meet the safety requirements of the CE.
The motor shall be mounted on a common, torsionally rigid galvanized steel base frame.

The fan and motor assembly shall be isolated from the casing by means of spring anti-
vibration mountings selected to suit the speed of the fan and designed for 90% isolation.

3.09 ROTARY HEAT EXCHANGER (THERMAL HEAT WHEEL)

The wheel shall be made of layers of corrugated and intervening flat aluminum foil of
uniform width to ensure smooth surface. This wheel material is bonded together to form a
rigid transfer medium forming a multitude of narrow channels thus ensuring a laminar flow.
The rotary heat exchanger shall be hygroscopic type for transfer of sensible and latent heat.
The whole rotor
shall be chemically treated by controlled corrosion process to produce hygroscopic layer on
aluminum foil. The chemically attached layer should have
high affinity to moisture. Pre-coated aluminum foil should not be used.

Rotor shall be mounted in a sturdy casing with an access door and sealed against casing by
means of wear resistant, adjustable seal. The casing shall be equipped with purging sector.

The wheel shall be cleanable by spraying its surface with compressed air, low temperature
steam, hot water or by vacuum cleaning without affecting its latent heat recovery
properties. The casing shall be equipped with adjustable brush seals which minimize carry-
over to max. 0.5-0.2%. The wheel shall be belt driven
along its perimeter. A constant speed drive motor shall be used. The motors shall be
mounted on a self adjustable base to provide correct belt tension.
The rotary wheel should confirm to ASHRAE 84-78, EN 29001 and BS
7550.
For one piece rotor, hub and spoke shall be in aluminum. On sectorized rotor,
hub made of steel, painted with anti-corrosion pain, galvanized sheet steel spokes. The
direction of air flow through the rotor should be reversing continuously to give excellent
self cleaning effect. In order to prevent fouling and clogging of the rotor, a standard EU-4
filter (synthetic washable) should be in position and the rotor
should always be rotating when the fans in the system are running. A double glass
inspection window should be provided in this section.
The Heat Recovery Wheel shall be constant speed. The HRW shall be provided
with speed detector.
3.10 ELECTRIC HEATING COIL

Electric heating coils shall be heavy construction of 304L stainless steel with absolute safety
finned tubes. Maximum specific power shall be 4 watts/Cm2. The heaters shall be thyristor
controlled.
Heater battery shall be supplied with manual reset over heat thermostat, prewired to terminal
strip and shall have thyristor control.

3.11 HEAT PIPE COOLING COMBINATION UNIT

3.12 GENERAL

The air handling unit shall be equipped with a combination of cooling coil and wraparound
dehumidifier heat pipes integrated into a single assembly. The device shall pre-cool the
return/fresh air, provide cooling and a reheat the supply air.

The pre-cool section shall be located immediately before the cooling coil, and the reheat section
immediately after the cooling coil and shall be supplied at design conditions laid down in the
drawings schedule.
The interconnecting piping between heat pipe sections shall be located at the opposite side
from chilled water connections.
The three functional sections shall be integrated into a common framework, with provision
for collection and drainage of condensate.

3.13 PERFORMANCE

The heat pipe unit shall provide pre-cool and reheat capacity in compliance with maximum
performance criteria laid down in drawings schedule under design conditions.

3.14 CONSTRUCTION

The heat pipe unit shall comprise pre-cool and reheat sections constructed of
copper tubes within continuous plate type fins, with the 3 sections carried
within a single rigid framework.
The tubes shall be of solid drawn copper, of specific internal design to provide
enchanced heat transfer and permanently expanded into the fins collars to form
a rigid continuous contact under all operating conditions. Wall thickness shall be
a minimum of 0.35mm. the tube pattern shall be a staggered equilateral design
and number of rows shall be as specified to provide the required performance.
The heat pipe shall be interconnected with circuitry as specified and
individually
processed, pre-charged with heat transfer fluid hermetically sealed and tested.
 The heat pipe heat transfer fluid shall be classified as Safety Group Al in
BSR/ASHRAE Std. 15-1 9879R.
The fins surfaces shall be of specific design to produce maximum heat transfer
efficiency for heat pipe and may vary from cooling coil to heat pipe.
Performance
shall be verifiable to ENV 1216/
Condensate collection from the assembly shall be provided for by an
approximately sized drain tray in: 18SWG (1.2mm thick) Grade 304
Stainless Sheet steel. The cooling coils shall have vent and drain points.

PART -4 EXECUTION

4.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install as indicated and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
B. Provide drain line from AHU to nearest floor drain or as indicated.

SECTION 06

AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A This Section includes the following:

1. Heat-pipe heat exchangers.

2. Packaged energy recovery units.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Sections for curbs for mounting rooftop equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the
Conditions of the Contract.
2. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights

(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and

 installation and startup instructions.

3. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies

and indicating dimensions,weights, loadings, required clearances,
method of
field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field- installed
wiring.
5. Maintenance data for each energy recovery unit, control, and accessory to

include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.

1.4 QUALITY AASURANCE

1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:

1. ASHRAE Compliance: Provide capacity ratings

for energy recovery devices according to ASHRAE 84, "Method of
Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
2. NRCA Compliance: Provide roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment

constructed according to recommendations of NRCA.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into base. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements

B Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

Extra materials may not be allowed for publicly funded projects.

C Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents.
D Filters: Furnish one set of each type of filter specified.
E Fan Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
F Wheel Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each heat wheel.

PART-2 PRODUCTS
 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the approved manufacturers list

2.2 HEAT-PIPE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A Construction: Aluminum tubes and fins, fabricated with capillary
wick structu re,filled with refrigerant, and sealed; mounted in
galvanized steel flanged casing,with airtight partition between
airstreams.
1. Refrigerant: ASHRAE 15, Group 1

B Control: Provide integral plenum containing heat-pipe coil and face

and bypass gasketed dampers, opposed blade, with rods extended
outside casing for damper operator and linkage
C Control: Pivot center of bottom of heat-pipe coil on shaft and bearings
for coil tilting of approximately 3 degrees in either direction from
horizontal.
Provide tilt controls, including electronic controller, electric actuator and
linkage, thermostats, sensors, and flex material, for automatic supply

temperature regulation, summer/winter changeover, and frost protection Accessories:

Provide the following accessories:

D
1 Plenums with access doors.
2 Drain pans for condensate removal.
3 Automatic, in-place spray-wash system.
4 Weatherproofing for tilt-control system.
5 Protective epoxy-phenolic coating for corrosion
resistance
6. Flexible connector assembly for tilt control.

2.3 PACKAGED ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS

A. Housing: Galvanized steel panels fastened to
structural-steel or formed galvanized steel internal frame, gasketed
and calked weather tight; with waterproof floor, manufacturer's
standard paint finish, and lifting lugs
1. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick fiberglass, coated on
airstream side.
2. Access Doors: Double-wall insulated, one side hinged with
minimum of 2 cam latches operated from either side.
3 Louvers: Weatherproof, with gravity backdraft damper for exhaust and
spring-return 2-position, motor-operated damper for supply, with blade
seals
4 Roof Curb: Refer Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs and
 equipment supports.
B Heat-Pipe Heat Exchangers: Aluminum tubes and fins, fabricated with
capillary wick structure, filled with refrigerant, and sealed.
1. Control: Integral bypass plenum with opposed-blade damper,
damper operator and linkage
C Supply and Exhaust Fans: As scheduled, with spring isolation base and
flexible duct connections, adjustable belt drives, and motors on
adjustable motor bases.
D Filters: Disposable, 2 inches (50 mm) thick, in galvanized steel
frame, upstream of unit in both supply and exhaust airstreams.
E Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping
and electrical conduits. Wire motors and controls so only
external connections are required during installation.

PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 `EXAMINATION
A Examine areas to receive energy recovery units for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of energy recovery units. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A Install energy recovery units as indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B Install heat-pipe exchangers so supply and exhaust flow in opposite
directions. Install flexible connectors on ducts to compensate for tilt
control; make connections airtight and with slack to compensate for full
tilt.
1 Install with clearance space for heat- pipe coil
removal.
2 Install duct access doors in both supply and
exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream, for access to both sides of heat-
pipe coil.
3 Install tilt-control components, including electronic controller,
electric actuator and linkage, thermostats, and sensors.
C floor-mounted units on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high
concrete housekeeping base.
D. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before

testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ducts and fan installation requirements are specified in other Division 15

Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.
B. Ground Equipment.
.1 Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 CLEANING
A fter completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect and clean
exposed finishes. Remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.5 COMMISSIONING
A Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to commission units as

specified below.

1 Energize and verify correct rotation of heat wheels and fans.

2. Adjust seals and purge.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or
malfunctioning controls and equipment

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules
related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and
preventive maintenance.
B Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals.
C Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7
days' advance notice.
 SECTION 07
FAN COIL UNITS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Reference

Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of Division 15.

1.2 Description of Work

12.1 Furnish and install fan coil units as indicated on drawings

1.2.2 Types of fan coil units specified in this section include the following:
a) Horizontal/Vertical units for concealed installations.
b) Horizontal Cabinet units for exposed installations.
1.2.3 Refer to other Division 15 sections for vibration control units used in
conjunction with fan coil units.
1.2.4 Refer to other Division 15 sections for chilled water and condensate drain piping
required in conjunction with fan coil units.
1.2.5 Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work:
a) Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on unit. Including
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as
furnished, or factory installed by manufacturer.
b) Interlock wiring between electrically operated equipment units and between
equipment and field installed control devices.
 1.2.6 Provide the related electrical works of this section to
comply with the requirements of
Division 16 sections.
1.3 Quality Assurance

1.3.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fan

coil units with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
Manufacturers shall have ISO 9001 certification.

1.3.2 Codes and Standard

Comply with the following codes and standards on approved equivalent European
norms and standards:

a) ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan coil units in accordance with ARI 441 “Standard
for fan coil units”; display certification symbol on units of certified models.
b) ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install cooling coils in accordance with
ASHRAE 15 “Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration” and ASHRAE
33-for testing air coils.

c) Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread
and smoke generation. All equipment wiring shall comply with NEC requirements.
d) Unit capacity ratings shall be certified in compliance with industry
Standard441-66 for equipment, testing, and rating of fan coil air conditioners as
administered at A.R.I. Coils to be ARI certified. Unit to be in accordance to UL
specifications and comply with National Electric code.

1.4 Submittals

1.4.1 Product Data : Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for fan coil
units showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings fan performance with
operating point clearly indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and
finishes of materials, and installation instruction.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings : Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit
 dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, construction details, and
field connection details.
1.4.3 Wiring Diagrams : Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements for power
supply wiring to fan coil units. Submit manufacturer’s ladder-
type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are factory – installed and portions to be field- installed.
1.4.4 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions
for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare
parts lists. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in
maintenance manuals.
1.5 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

1.5.1 Deliver fan coil units with factory installed shipping skids and lifting lugs,
pack components in factory fabricated protective containers.
1.5.2 Handle fan coil units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures,
and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return
damaged components to air handling unit manufacturer.
1.5.3 Store fan coil units in clean dry place and protect from weather and
construction traffic.
1.5.4 Comply with manufacturer’s rigging and installation instructions for unloading
fan coil units, and moving them to final location.

2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
Units shall be complete with chilled water coil(s), electric heating coil, fan(s), motor(s), drain
pan, and all required wiring, piping, controls and special features.

2.1.1 Unit Chassis

a) Horizontal/Vertical Base Unit with Plenum for concealed
installation shall have a factory installed, galvanized steel plenum section and throw
away filter. The plenum shall be either bottom or rear return, lined with 12mm thick
glass fiber insulation and include a removable panel to provide an access to the
fan/motor assembly.
b) Horizontal cabinet unit for exposed installation shall be
constructed of steel with re-coatable baked enamel finish. Colour to be approved by
the Architect. Cabinet casing shall be 1.2 mm thick rigid galvanized steel lined with
12mm thick glass fibre insulation and have removable bottom access panel. Unit
shall include hinged bar type return air grille on rear of unit with throwaway filter
and integral double deflection supply grille
2.1.2 Fan /Motor
Fans shall be direct driven, double width fan wheels shall have forward curved blades, and
 be statically and dynamically balanced.
Fan motors shall be 3 speed permanent split capacitor type with sleeve type bearings and
over sized oil reservoirs. Motor shall be suitable for 240V single phase, 50Hz provided with
internal thermal protection

2.1.3 Coil
Coil shall be equipped with a 4 rows minimum for installation in a 2 pipe system. Coils
shall have 12mm copper tubes, aluminium fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical
expansion and have a working pressure of 16 bar. Each coil shall have a manual air vent and
sweat connections for copper tubes. All coils shall be leak tested and proven tight.

2.1.4 Drain pans

The drain pan shall be constructed of galvanized steel extending the entire length and
width of the coil(s) and pitched for drainage. The inside surface of the drain pan shall be
coated with epoxy resin coating and externally insulated with closed cell fire retardant
foam insulation. An extension drain pan shall be provided for installation at the jobsite
under the valve package.

3.0 EXECUTION.
3.1 Installation

3.1.1 Electric wiring between fan motor, fan switch, and automatic control valve, shall be
carried out to comply with the requirements of Division 16 (Electrical). The
Contractor shall provide the necessary quick disconnects for easy removal of the
fan section and also provide suitable terminals for field connections of power and
control thermostat wiring.
3.1.2 At the time of “testing and commissioning” all the “throw away” filtrers shall
be replaced by permanent washable filters for each fan coil unit. The filters
shall be constructed from non-ferrous metal with 25mm thickness and a
minimum of 72% gravimetric efficiency.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall ensure that units are installed level to ensure that
condensate from the drain pan flows freely. Provide drain lines of uPVC Class E to
BS 3505, 25 mm diameter minimum laid to falls of 1:100, and insulated in
accordance with Specification requirements. Extend condensate drain to the
nearest waste line.
3.1.4 Provide ductwork distribution and terminal air distribution device to adequately
condition the spaces served by the individual fan coil units. Final distribution
 shall suit the actual room details and shall in each case be subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
3.2 Startup and Instructions
Check vibration and correct as necessary for air balance work.

After air balancing is complete and permanent sheaves are in place, perform necessary field
mechanical balancing to meet vibration tolerance in Section 15070, Mechanical Sound,
vibration and Seismic Control.
3.3 Testing and Commissioning
Testing, Balancing and Commissioning shall be as referred to throughout this
Section, and in accordance with Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

The test rig and all necessary blanks for the purpose of sealing the ductwork under test
shall be provided; blanks shall be removed after the test has been approved for each section
of the ductwork.

SECTION 08 ROOF TOP UNITS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rooftop cooling units.

B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for type and style of roof
curbs and equipment supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
manufactured isolation bases.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated,
including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required
clearances; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties;
accessories; and installation and startup instructions.

1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating

 obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,

loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof
curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane
system.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article

in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret results of startup and
commissioning requirements. Submit copies of checklists.

D. Maintenance Data:For equipment to include in the maintenance

manuals specified in Division 1.

E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code
for Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by

ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings."

C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than

prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except
Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this

Section that are listed and labeled.

E. Comply with listed and labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a
testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

F. Paint finish shall be suitable for local hot and humid weather conditions. Unit shall
be capable of working at 50 deg. C ambient.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and
installation instructions for unloading and moving to final location.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations

with roof construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the

manufacturer and countersigned by the Contractor, agreeing to replace
components that fail in materials or workmanship, within the specified warranty
period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and
maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products

installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with
labels describing contents.

1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.

2. Filters: One set of
filters for each unit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in

the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable..
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

2.2 ROOFTOP UNITS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation;
and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and
evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.

B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof, double-wall construction with

corrosion- protection coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene
gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 25 mm thick thermal
insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate
drain connection, and lifting lugs.

C. Evaporator Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves

and permanently lubricated motor bearings.

D. Return-Air Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves

and permanently lubricated motor bearings.

E. Exhaust/Relief: Barometric damper.

F. Exhaust/Relief Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable

sheaves and permanently lubricated motor bearings.

G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with

permanently lubricated motor bearings.

H. Filters: 300 mm deep, Class 1 bag filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot

efficiency in galvanized steel frame; with 50 mm thick, permanent, washable,
aluminum type prefilters.
I. Filters: 300 mm deep, Class 1 cartridge filters with 90 to 95 percent dust-spot
efficiency in galvanized steel frame; with 50 mm thick, fiberglass, throwaway
prefilters.

J. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel
casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve;
tested to 3110 kPa and leak tested to 2070 kPa with air under water. Insulate coil
section.

K. Compressors: Semi-hermetic or hermetic compressors with integral

vibration isolators, and crankcase heaters that de-energize during compressor
operation, with thermal expansion valves, filter-dryers, sight glasses, compressor
service valves, and liquid- and suction-line service valves.

1. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced coil refrigerant circuiting with circuit for each
compressor.
2. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloaders with steps as scheduled.
3. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on one compressor.
4. Low-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.
5. High-Pressure Cutout: Manual reset.
6. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.
7. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor
restart for 5 minutes after shutdown.
8. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.

L. Economizer Dampers: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers

with damper operator and control package.

1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow

of 54 L/s per kW with
250-Pa pressure differential.
2. Damper Operator: 24 V, with gear train sealed in oil with spring return.

M. Economizer Control: Return, relief and outside air dampers, outside air filter with
magnehelic gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic control
system with adjustable mixed air thermostat and automatic changeover through
adjustable enthalpy control device.

N. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller;

supply- air static-pressure controller with damper operator operating variable-inlet-
fan vanes or variable speed fan controller.

Remote-Control Panel: Contains controls and indicator lights as

follows:
1. On-off fan switch.
2. Minimum outside-air damper potentiometer position LCD.
3. Supply-fan operating indicator light.
4. Mechanical cooling malfunction indicator light.
5. Clogged filters indicator light.
6. Phase failure protection.
7. Fine delay relay.
8. Antifreeze protection.
P. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air
plenum, to de-energize unit.

Q. Electrical Convenience Outlet: 230-V, AC fused outlet, separately

fused, located in unit cabinet or in roof curb perimeter.

R. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and

monitors unit and communicates to central control processor.

1. Control Outputs: cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and

 economizer damper operation.
2. Return-air-, discharge-air-, outdoor-air-, space-, control set-point temperature LCD.
3. Outdoor enthalpy LCD.
4. Filter pressure drop LCD.
5. Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, operating mode.
6. Inlet-vane and economizer-damper position LCD.
7. Duct static-pressure LCD.
8. Alarm LCD.
9. Control Features: Day/occupied and night/unoccupied modes, temperature reset.

2.3 ROOF CURBS

A. Manufacturer's standard, insulated with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing,

factory- installed wood nailer, according to NRCA standards.

1. Curb Height: Minimum 400 mm.

2. Isolation Curb: Rigid upper and lower steel structure with vibration isolation springs
and vertical and horizontal restraints; with elastomeric waterproof membrane. 50
mm static deflection.
2.4 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for

factory-installed motors. B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose,
continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to ARI

210/240, "Unitary Air- Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment."

B. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to ARI 360,

"Commercial and
Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment."

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Standard

for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions

affecting installation and performance of rooftop units. Do not proceed with
 installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure level. Install and secure rooftop
units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.

D. Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall
penetrations and flashing with wall construction.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The
following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.

B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection
requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate

return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom
of unit.

C. Electrical: Conform to applicable

requirements in Division 16 Sections. D. Ground
equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform

startup service and report results in writing.

B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.

C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
1. Level unit on housekeeping base, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans.
4. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
5. Check that labels are clearly visible.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
7. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
8. Verify that filters are installed.
9. Adjust vibration isolators.
10. Check acoustic insulation.
11. Check operation of barometric dampers.

D. Lubricate bearings on fan.

E. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction

without vibration and binding. F. Adjust fan belts to proper
alignment and tension.

G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Perform starting of refrigeration in summer only.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
H. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection
devices; verify sequences. I. Operate unit for an initial period as
recommended or required by the manufacturer.
J. Calibrate thermostats.

K. Adjust and check

high-temperature limits. L.
Check internal
isolators.
M. Check outside-air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return- and
relief-air dampers.

N. Check controls for correct sequencing of mixing dampers,

refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

O. Start refrigeration and measure and record the following:

1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.
4. Air-cooled-condenser, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

P. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows.

Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
 1. Supply-air volume.
2. Return-air volume.
3. Relief-air volume.
4. Outside-air intake volume.

Q. Simulate maximum cooling demand and check the following:

1. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

2. Short circuiting air through condenser or from condenser to outside-air intake.

R. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes.
Check the following:

1. High-limit heat exchanger.

2. Freezestat operation.
3. Free-cooling mode, outside-air changeover.
4. Alarms.

S. After starting and performance testing, replace filters with new, clean filters, change
vacuum heat exchanger and cooling and condenser coils, lubricate bearings, adjust
belt tension, and check operation of power vents.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

SECTION 09
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

AIR-CONDITIONING & VENTILATING INSTALLATION

1 DESIGN PARAMETERS
The design in general shall be based on ASHRAE standards in addition to the following
particular requirements:
 Outdoor condition : 115 F DB, 85 F WB.
 Inside condition : 75 F(+1) DB , 50 % RH +5%
 Occupancy : Normal
 Fresh Air : Min. 1 air changing /hr
 Noise Level : Offices NC 25-30
Corridors NC 30-35.
 Duct Velocity For : Main ducts : 900 FPM , Branch ducts : 600 FPM
 Exhaust duct : 1500 FPM
 Grilles/ diffuser face velocity : 500-600 FPM.
2 .ROOF MOUNTED PACKAGE UNITS
These shall be fully weatherproofed ,suitable for external mounting and with accoustically
lined,tropicalised steel casing on structural steel base frame. Centrifugal fan with belt drive
and adjustable drive pulleys to permit site adjustment of volume. Anti-vibration mountings
and duct flexible connections.
Units should be with twin refrigeration circuits.
Units should bewith Environmentally Friendly

Refrigerant. Washable, removable, filter panels, 95%

efficiency.

The units shall be used in high ambient temperature(52 degree centigrade)

All units are self-contained and assembled on full perimeter base rail. The base rails have
holes in the four corners for overhead rigging.

Every unit is completely piped, wired, charged and tested at the factory to simplify the field
installation and to provide years of dependable operation. Powder paint cabinets provide
an exceptionally durable finish with the 750 hour salt spray process per ASTM-B117 test
standard.

All supply air blowers are equipped with a belt drive that can be adjusted to meet the exact
requirements of the job.

All compressors include crankcase heat and internal pressure relief. Every refrigerant
circuit includes and expansion valve. A liquid line filter-drier, a discharge line high pressure
switch and a suction line with freezestat and low pressure loss of charge switch.

Low ambient- an integrated low-ambient control allows all units to operate in the cooling
mode down to 0 degreeF outdoor ambient.

Anti-short cycle protection- To aid compressor life, an anti-short cycle delay is incorporated
into the standard controls. Compressor reliability is further ensured by programmable
 minimum run times. For testing, the anti short cycle delay can be temporarily overridden
with the push of a button.

Compressor

Compressors are fully accessible with hermitic reciprocating type.

For protection, all compressors shall be equipped with preset internal relief valve between
suction and discharge sides. The compressors are provided with vibration isolator to arrest
the noise and vibration.

The compressor motors have inherent thermal protection.

Condensers

Condenser coils are manufactured from seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminium fins to ensure optimum heat transfer. All coils are tested against leakage by air
pressure. An integral subcooling circuit is provided to increase the cooling capacity.

Condenser fans

The condenser fans are propeller type, aluminium alloy blades, directly driven by electric
motors. Motors are totally Enclosed Air Over(TEAO) six pole with class “B” insulation and
minimum IP55 protection to ensure long life. The motors are factory wired and suitable for high
ambient operation.

The condenser fans are statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. Complete fan
assembly is provided with suitable acrylic coated fan guard.

Evaporator

Evaporator coils are manufactured from seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminium fins to ensure optimum heat transfer. All evaporaor coils shall be tested against
leakage by air pressure.

Evaporator coil suppiled with suitable size thermostatic expansion valve(s) and multi-circulated
distributors providing capacity modulation to match the compressors.
Evaporator Fan Drive
Unit shall have dual fans mounted on a single heavy duty shaft driven by a single electric
motor, ClassB insulation IP55 protected and totally enclosed rated for continuous
operations.
THE MOTORS ARE FITTED WITH AN ADJUSTABLE BELT DRIVE AS STANDARD.

SPLIT DUCTED UNIT

2.1.1 Condensing Unit
 General:
Furnish and install all air-cooled condensing units in the locations and manner shown on the
plans. The units shall be properly assembled and tested at the factory. These shall be
designed for use with Environmentally Friendly Refrigerant.
Nominal unit electrical characteristics shall be 380 volts, 3 phase 50 Hertz.
Condenser Coil shall be nonferrous construction. Coil shall have aluminium plate fins,
mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. Coil shall be circuited for sub cooling.
 Condenser Fans and Motors:
Unit shall be furnished with direct driven, propeller type fans arranged for vertical discharge.
Condenser fan motors shall have inherent protection, and shall be of the permanently
lubricated type, resiliently mounted. Each fan Shall have a safety guard. Controls shall be
included for cycling fans for intermediate season operation.
 Compressors:
Shall be of serviceable hermetic design with external spring isolator and shall have an
automatically reversible oil pump. Compressor shall unload in response to
suction pressure down to 25%of full capacity in 3 steps minimum for partial load operation.
Compressor shall be located in a section separated from condenser fans and coil.
Multiple compressor units shall have step-start fans and coils. Compressor motor shall have
(part- winding start), (across the line start).
 Condenser Coil:
Coil shall be seamless copper tube arranged in staggered pattern, mechanically expanded
into high efficiency aluminium fins.
The design working pressure shall be 3100 Kpa (31 bar)with a test pressure of 4650Kpa (46.5 bar)
 Controls:
Controls shall be factory wired and located in a separate enclosure. Safety devices shall
consist of high and low pressure switches and compressor overload devices. Unit wiring
shall incorporate a positive acting timer to prevent short cycling of compressor if
power is interrupted. Timer shall
prevent compressor from restarting for approximately 5 min after
shutoff. Units shall be factory wired to operate on single pump out
control.

 Casing:
Casing shall be making unit fully weather proof for outdoor installation. Casing
galvanized steel, zinc phosphates and finished with baked enamel.
Openings shall be provided for power and refrigerant connections. Panels shall be removable to
provide access for servicing.
  Connections:
Only one liquid line, one suction line and power supply connection shall be required for
each unit.

2.1.2 Fan Coil Units (Ducted Type)

 Fan coils shall be two pipes, minimum of four rows of copper coils with fans and filters.
 Basic fan coils shall be 1.3 mm thick galvanized steel, with 15 mm of internal fiber
glass insulation. The cabinet of exposed units shall be 1.3 mm thick steel panels,
primed and baked enamelled finish to a colour indicated by the Consultant.
 Units are to have accessible filters, which shall be metallic washable.
 Coils will be A.R.I rated at least 15 mm OD size copper tube with aluminium fins,
fitted with manual air vent, leak tested at 300 psi.(20 bar)
 Motors shall be 3 speed tap wound with thermal overload protection. Sleeve
bearings with oil tubes and oil reservoirs shall be provided. The motors shall be
permanent split capacitor type. The fan switch shall be located as directed by the
Consultant and should be capable of remote operation.
 Unit operation shall be controlled via wall mounted indoor thermostats having
ON/OFF control, Lo-Med-High fan speed control, temperature setting facility and
space temperature sensor.
 Fans shall be centrifugal, forward curved, statically and dynamically balanced, with
wheels and housing in galvanized steel of at-least 1.3 mm thickness or cast
aluminium.
 Drain pans shall be a minimum of 1.3 mm thick galvanized steel with 25 mm of closed
cell insulation to the sides and bottom. Auxiliary drain pan shall be provided for the
valves.
 Where noise criteria are specified elsewhere, the fan coils must also meet these
requirements and the unit cooling ratings will be determined only at those speeds
which produce noise levels within the acceptable limits.
2.1.3 Fan Coil Units (DECORATIVE TYPE)
 Fan coils shall be two pipes, minimum of four rows of copper coils with fans and filters.
 Basic fan coils shall be of Plastic type body and colour as per manufacturer standards.
 Units are to have accessible filters, which shall be washable type.
 Coils will be A.R.I rated at least 15 mm OD size copper tube with aluminium fins,
fitted with manual air vent, leak tested at 300 psi.(20 bar)
 Motors shall be 3 speed tap wound with thermal overload protection. Sleeve
bearings with oil tubes and oil reservoirs shall be provided. The motors shall be
permanent split capacitor type. The fan switch shall be located as directed by the
Consultant and should be capable of remote operation.
 Unit operation shall be controlled via wall mounted indoor thermostats having
ON/OFF control, Lo-Med-High fan speed control, temperature setting facility and
 space temperature sensor.
 Fans shall be centrifugal, forward curved, statically and dynamically balanced, with
wheels and housing in galvanized steel of at-least 1.3 mm thickness or cast
aluminium.
 Where noise criteria are specified elsewhere, the fan coils must also meet these
requirements and the unit cooling ratings will be determined only at those speeds
which produce noise levels within the acceptable limits.
2.1.4 WINDOW A/C UNITS
Room air conditioner shall be super silent in operation with automatic air sweep controlled
by push button,3 speed,independent exhaust and easy access cleanable filter. Condenser
coils shall be made with copper tubes and aluminium fins.
Window a/c shall have rotary compressors with 5 years guarantee on compressor and one
year for the whole unit.

3 REFRIGERANT PIPES
Refrigerant pipes between outdoor and indoor units are to be of Drawn-Temper copper tube
to ASTM B 280, Type ACR insulated with 20 mm closed cell rubber insulation covered with 2
layers of 8 OZ canvas cloth applied with foster 60-95. In case the distance between the
indoor unit and the roof mounted condensing unit is more than 8 ft an oil trap is to be
installed at the base of vertical suction riser and the same is to be repeated every 15 ft. pipe
length.

SECTION 10
 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plate heat exchangers for HVAC applications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
B. Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in maintenance manuals specified
in Division 1.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional
requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment indicated.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be
considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
B. Heat exchanger manufacturer shall have within Dubai city limits, a fully established
service center with Reconditioning / Regasketing facility. The manufacturer shall
confirm 24 hours service availability to attend faults at project site by service
engineer.
 Supplier to confirm the presence of Factory trained and Qualified Service
Engineer to assist in Installation
and commissioning at site.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:
1. Plate Heat Exchangers:
a. Alfa Laval Thermal, Inc.
b. APV CREPACO, Inc.
c. Armstrong Fluid Handling; Div. of Armstrong International, Inc.
d. Flat Plate, Inc.
e. ITT Fluid Handling; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
f. Mueller: Paul Mueller Co.
g. Tranter, Inc.; Texas Div.
h. Triangle Tube/Phase III Co., Inc.
2.02 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, fixed and
movable end plates, tie rods, plates, and one-piece gaskets.
B. Configuration: Brazed assembly consisting of two end plates, one with nozzles, and
pattern- embossed plates.
C. End-Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.
D. Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless-steel plates, each plate to be with
herringbone corrugations to optimize heat transfer with nominal pressure losses.
Corrugations to be designed to provide support to adjacent plates at evenly
distributed support points to allow pressurization of each circuit to a full differential
of 1.5 times the design pressure without buckling or deformation of the heat transfer
plates.
E. The plate and frame heat exchanger shall be designed with 10% safety margin and
shall be guaranteed to perform the capacities in contact with fluids on hot and cold
sides, plates to be with standard II B finish and tapered gasket grooves.
F. Each heat transfer plate shall use top and bottom carrying bars to accurately locate
the plates in the frame assembly and prevent lateral plate movement and maintain
maximum gasket contact under pressure.
 G. The heat exchanger shall not use welded frame assembly. Entire frame shall be
bolted together to allow unit to be field assembled to permit rigging into place. The
unit cover plates shall be of sufficient thickness for the design pressure and code
requirements and shall have no welded reinforcements or stiffeners. All steel
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared for painting, painting over mill
scale is not acceptable. All steel components shall be epoxy coated. Provide lifting
lugs designed to allow lifting of entire units flooded weight.
H. Plate and Frame should be designed so removal of an individual plate is possible
without having to remove any plates in front or back of that particular plate.
I. Compression bolts shall not require special tools and shall be arranged to permit
pack tightening at fixed cover only. Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to
reduce galling and double width hex nuts to adequately distribute the load.
J. The complete assembly to be factory assembled and tested for a design pressure of
2067 kPa at 116°C for both circuits.
K. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber, shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of
fluids and cause leak to flow to out side of unit.
L. Piping Connections: Grooved.
M. Manufacturer to supply pre-fabricated insulated cover and drip tray. Removable and
reusable panel type insulation cover for the PHE enables expedient removal and
replacement of insulation to facilitate removal and cleaning of plates. To facilitate
assembly and disassembly the insulation pieces shall be held together with stainless
steel “suitcase” type latches.

Panels shall be 1mm Allustucco 3s 3 / 4 h exterior plating, 60mm polyurethane foam

insulation, 0.05mm Aluminium foil inside layer and 20mm Armaflex lining at the bolt holes.
Insulated housing to come complete with a drip tray constructed of 0.75 mm galvanized
steel plate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for
structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of
 heat exchangers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 HEAT EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install heat exchanger on a 1500mm reinforced concrete housekeeping pad
extending 300mm beyond the heat exchanger frame on all sides. Area below plates
shall be tapered to 75mm to form a drainage basin, with integral floor drain.
Coordinate drain location and provide venting and drain valves for servicing of unit.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
Install piping connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.
C. Install piping with flanged connections at heat exchangers.
D. Install shutoff valves at heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
E. Install relief valves on heat exchanger heated-fluid connection.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged
finishes.
3.05 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that heat exchangers are installed and connected according to the
Contract Documents.
B. Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining heat exchangers.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
 4. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days'
advance notice

SECTION 11

FANS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Reference
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of Division 15.

1.2 Description of Work

1.0.1 Furnish and install fans as indicated on drawings
1.0.2 Types of Fans required for project include the following:
a) Axial flow fans
b) Centrifugal Fans
c) Twin fax extract units
d) Kitchen extract fans
e) Smoke extract fans
f) Makeup air and stairwell pressurization fans
1.0.3 Refer to other division 15 sections for vibration control units
used in conjunction with fans.
1.0.4 Refer to other division 15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing work
required in conjunction with fans.
1.0.5 Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work:
a) Power supply wiring from power source to power
connection on unit.Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices,
 except where specified as furnished, or factory installed by manufacturer.
b) Interlock wiring between electrically operated equipment units and between
equipment and field installed control devices.
1.3 Quality Assurance
1.0.6 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture’s of fans
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
1.0.7 Codes and Standards:
a) Fans shall be performance tested in accordance with BS 848.
b) Motors shall comply with BS 5000.
c) Impellers shall be dynamically balanced to ISO 1940 Grade 6.3.

d) AMCA Compliance: Provide centrifugal fans bearing the AMCA Certified ratings
sea. Sound rate centrifugal fans in accordance with AMCA 300 “Test Code for
Sound rating air moving devices”.

e) ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate fans in accordance

with ASHRAE 51 (AMCA 210) “Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating”.
f) UL Compliance: Provide fan electrical components which have been listed and
labeled by UL.
1.4 Submittals
1.0.8 Product Data : Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for fans
including specifications, capacity ratings, fan performance, curves with
operating point clearly indicated, gages and finishes of materials, and
installation instruction.
1.0.9 Shop Drawings : Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions,
weight loadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection
details.
1.0.10 Wiring Diagrams : Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements
for power supply wiring to fans.
manufacturer’s ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring.
Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory – installed and
portions to be field- installed
1.0.11 Spare parts for 2 years operation and maintenance.
1.0.12 Pressure Calculations
Submit pressure drop calculations based on shop drawings for approval by the
before final selection of the unit.

1.5 Maintenance Data

Submit maintenance data parts list for each type of fan accessory, and control. Include this
data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual.
 1.6 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.61 Deliver fans with factory installed shipping skids and lifting lugs, pack
components in factory fabricated protective containers.

1.6.2 Handle fans carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to
air handling unit manufacturer.

1.6.3 Store fans in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.

1.6.4 Comply with manufacturer’s rigging and installation instructions for unloading
fans and moving them to final location.

2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 Mechanical Roof Extract Units

2.1.1 The weather cap and base shall be moulded in ultra violet stabilised polyester resin,
glass reinforced, rendered fire retardant to BS476:Part 7, Class 2 or to equivalent
North American Standards.
2.1.2 The material shall be strong, light in weight, shall give excellent resistance to
atmospheric corrosion and shall be suitable for operational use in a wide range of
climatic conditions.
2.1.3 The unit shall be load tested to ensure a generous structural factor of safety
enabling the units to withstand all normally encountered weather conditions.
The cowl shall be secured to the mounting brackets by stainless steel screws.
2.1.4 Aluminium anti backdraught shutters shall be fitted as standard, being opened
by air movement and closed by stainless steel springs.
2.1.5 Synthetic rubber buffers shall be provided to ensure quiet operation.
2.1.6 Impellers shall be high efficiency, designed specifically for applications in this
range of roof extract units.
2.1.7 Fan support arms shall be of mild steel, reliantly mounted to the base.
2.1.8 The unit shall be designed to operate efficiently when mounted horizontally or on a
pitched roof up to an angle of 30 deg. from the horizontal.
2.1.9 Motors shall be metric sized, ball bearing, squirrel cage induction type, for direct
on line starting. All motors shall have Class F insulation with degree of protection
IP55.
2.1.10 Motor bearings shall be prelubricated with high quality grease.
In ambient temperatures up to 50 deg. C (122deg.F).
prelubricated after
30,000 hours running or five years intermittent use. Where lubricators are fitted the
 motors shall be prelubricated after two years.

2.1.11 Accessories shall include lid guards, silencers and unit mounted isolators.
2.1.12 All fans shall be manufactured to strict quality controls as regulated by BS 5750
Part- 1, ISO 9001, EN29001, Underwriter's
Laboratory.

2.1.13 Fans shall be air tested in accordance with BS 848 Part 1, 1980 and/or fans
performance shall be AMCA certified.

2.2 Twin Fan Toilet Units

2.0.1 Unit casing shall be manufactured in epoxy coated aluminium alloy and shall
house twin fan assemblies, each comprising double inlet forward curved
centrifugal impellers running in an individual scroll. Impellers may be either direct
driven or belt driven depending upon the fan duty. Motors shall be TEFV type with
sealed for life bearings. Motor insulation shall be Class 'F'.
2.0.2 Fans shall be fitted with air flow sensors and shall discharge into a common plenum
chamber through a linked shutter system. Motors and flow sensors shall be
prewired to fitted isolator accessible from outside.
2.0.3 Units shall be supplied for either roof mounting or plant room use as indicated
on the drawings. Units shall be supplied with auto changeover panels with
duty/stand-by selector switch, run/fail indication lamps, cyclic relay for duty
sharing. Starter/Auto changeover panels shall be incorporated within electrical
power supply panels as indicated on electrical schematic drawings.
2.3 Kitchen Extract Fans
2.0.1 Centrifugal exhaust fans shall be belt driven fans with non overloading, backwardly
inclined wheels. Fans shall be single inlet, single width,
with clockwise rotation. Air discharge position shall be top unless specified otherwise.

2.0.2 Fan housing shall be heavy gauge galvanized steel for maximum corrosion
protection, with Weld-Lock construction. Housings shall be field rotatable to
any of eight 45 deg. incremental air discharge positions. Fan scrolls shall be
equipped with a bolted, gasketed access door for Cleaning and inspection.
2.0.3 The bearing supports shall be constructed of welded structural steel members to
prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings, bearings shall be
heavy duty self aligning pillow block ball bearings, grease lubricated and selected
for minimum life (L50) of 200,000 hours at maximum operating speed. Shafts
shall be turned, ground, polished and rust protected. Shafts shall be sized so the
first critical speed is at least 20% over the maximum operating speed. Close
tolerances shall be maintained along the length of the shaft.
 2.0.4 The fan wheel shall be non-overloading backward inclined type. The wheels
shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The wheel and inlet shall be
aerodynamically designed and constructed to provide maximum performance and
efficiency.
2.0.5 Pulleys shall be adjustable cast iron, machined keyed and securely attached.
Belts and pulleys shall be sized for 165% of the installed motor
horsepower. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing, totally enclosed.

After assembly the entire unit, with drive train installed and set to specified RPM, shall have
a computerized vibration analysis performed. Vibration shall be measured in the
horizontal, vertical and axial directions at each bearing to assure quality and smooth
operation. The computerized print out shall be filed and made available to.
2.3.1 Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Air and Sound Certified Ratings
Seal.Fan air performance ratings shall be bear on test conducted in an AMCA
registered laboratory for AMCA 210 air performance testing. The test standardused
shall be ANSI/AMCA Standard 210-85, ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 51-1985 "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating".

2.3.2 All sizes must be tested calculations to other sizes not acceptable. Fan sound
performance shall be based on tests concluded in an AMCA registered
laboratory for AMCA 300 Sound Performance Testing. The test standard 300
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans". All sizes must be
tested, calculations to other sizes are not acceptable, Air or Sound tests results
are to be made available to owner.
2.3.3 Accessories shall include the following:
a) Ventilated weather cover.
b) Drain connection.
c) Vibration isolators.
d) Extended lube line.
2.3.4 Motors shall be high efficiency, totally enclosed with Class 'F' insulation. Fans
shall be UL certified.
2.4 Make up Air / Stairwell Pressurization / lobby & Corridor Pressurization / lift well
Pressurization Fans
2.4.1 All Fans to be Axial fans and shall be direct driven type.
Axial fans to be selected for the capacity as indicated in the schedules (maximum deviation
allowed is +/- 2%). Static pressure indicated in the drawings/schedule is for indication
only. Contractor shall calculate the static pressure requirement as per approved drawings
and submit for engineer’s approval.

2.4.2 Housing shall be of epoxy coated, reinforced, galvanized steel.

2.4.3 The housings louvered sides shall permit a direct air path, giving the housing a low
profile to the roof. Cleanable, permanent filters back up each louvered side to
 prevent airborne contaminants from entering. Filters shall be easily removed
for cleaning.
2.4.4 Motors shall be totally enclosed with class 'F' insulation. Fans shall be fire rated

for 300ºC / 1hr and Dubai Civil Defence approved.

2.5 Wall/Window Mounted Extract Fans

2.5.1 Extract fans shall be of the propeller type suitable for window mounting.
2.5.2 Front cover shall incorporate a finger guard for improved safety. Removal of
front cover shall stop the fan motor and isolate accessible wiring.
2.5.3 Motor shall be lubricated for life and shall be fitted with a thermal cut out providing
protection against accidental overloading.
2.5.4 Fans shall include air operated back draught dampers.
2.6 Ducted Inline Extract Fans
Housing shall be of pressed galvanized steel. Impellers shall be forward curved centrifugal
design driven by speed controllable motors with integral thermal protection. Motors shall
be squirrel cage induction type suitable for 240V/1PH/50Hz electric supply. Bearings shall
be ball type, sealed for life. Speed controllers shall be supplied by fan manufacturer.
2.7 Basement car park Ventilation Fans
Car park areas shall be ventilated using duct less jet fan system. The system using jet fan
shall be designed supplied and commissioned by a specialist supplier.
The ventilation system shall be designed generally in accordance with approved documents
B & F of the building regulations for UK. The system shall be designed in the event of fire,
to provide minimum 10 air changes per hour in order to clear and dilute smoke across
the floor. All jet fans and main extract fans shall be rated for 300ºC / 1 hour, with the extract
flow rate divided between at least 2 fans.
Contractor shall co-ordinate all MEP services with respect to jet fan positions. Should any of
Jet fan to be relocated for site coordination or for any other reason, the revised position
shall be confirmed by specialist supplier of car park ventilation system. If required CFD
(Computational fluid Dynamics) analysis to be redone.
Contractor to submit a detailed sequence of operation for Engineers review and approval.
Principle of car park ventilation system using jet fans is to draw fresh air through louvers at
each floor and push all polluted air and smoke (in case of fire) towards extract fan rooms by
dual speed jet fans. Each extract fan room to be provided with sufficiently sized acoustic
louvers. For number of fan room refer ventilation drawings.

Number and position of jet fans indicated on ventilation drawings is indicate only. Exact
position of jet fans shall be obtained from specialist supplier. Unless certified by specialist
supplier jet fans shall not be installed.

2.8 Make-up Air Fans- Inline Axial flow fans

Axial fans shall be direct driven type.

Axial fans to be selected for the capacity as indicated in the schedules. Static pressure
indicated in the drawings / schedules is for indication only. Contractor shall calculate the
static pressure requirement as per approved drawings and submit for Engineer’s approval.

Rating of fans shall be standard air condition i.e., air temperature of 20ºC
and1.2kg/m³.Axial flow fan shall be suitable for installation as indicated on the drawings.

Fan rating shall be based on test and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA
Publication 211 and comply with the requirements of AMCA Certified Ratings Program.
Axial flow fans performed shall be approved / certified by AMCA, and established in
accordance with ISO 580:1997 or BS848: Part 11 1997 installation type 'D' method of testing
air performance. BS 848 Part 2 1985 for method for noise testing.

Fans shall be supplied with AMCA seal. Axial

fans shall consist of:
Casing (Covering both the impeller and motor assembly. Free inlet, ducted discharge fans
can have shorter casing).
Impeller Electric motor

Motor mounting bracket / frame.

Anti vibration mounts (Spring type for fire rated fans). Bell mouth inlet &

guard (for free inlet fans only).

Fan casing and motor mounting assemblies shall be manufactured from heavy gauge mild
steel to BS 1449 Part 1, 1972 or latter, Grade HR 14 (Minimum thickness 3.00mm for fans
up to 630mm diameter. 5.0mm for diameter for 640mm and above). Fans shall be
provided with inlet and outlet flanges integral of fan casing for connection to ducting
network. Flanges shall be pre-drilled with holes for bolts. All welding shall be continuous.
Complete casing and flanges shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacturer to BS 729:1971
or latter at a rate of 0.46 kgs of zinc per square meter for fans up to 800mm diameter
or 0.61 kgs per meter square for 800mm diameter and above to ensure complete corrosion
protection. (No welding or drilling to be carried out after galvanizing process).

Impeller shall be with high efficiency aerofoil section field adjustable pitch angle blades
clamped to Hub. Impeller blade angles shall be set and fixed at factory but are field
adjustable within motor power limits.
Impeller hub and clamp plates shall be precision die cast in LM6 aluminum alloy to BS
1490: 1970 or latter and shall be X-rated after casting using real time radiography inspection
to verify the quality of casting and to ensure stable casting.
The fan blades shall be of an aerofoil section, high pressure die cast from LM6 aluminum
alloy and include traceability of batch identification and be X – rayed prior to matching to
ensure sound casting.
X-ray report shall be submitted to Engineer.

Impeller shall be non- overloading type and capable of running continuously up to 20%
higher than the selected speed.

The pitch angles of the fan blades shall be individually adjustable and shall be able to
provide laboratory evidence that the impeller has been adequately stressed at the highest
speed supplied.
The impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and key way to BS4235: 1972 or
latter. Axial location shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft
together with a retaining washer and screw, fitted into a tapped hole in the end of the shaft.
The screw shall be locked in position.

The aerodynamic design of the fan / impeller shall be of such that the maximum power
absorbed by the fan occurs within the normal working range and has a non- overloading
characteristic.
Fans shall be directly driven by electric motors unless otherwise specified, suitable for
380- 415V/ 50Hz / 3PH power supply. Motor shall be either B3 foot or B30 pad mounted
type, totally enclosed air stream rated, non-ventilated or fan cooled depending on the
application.
Motor shall supplied with sealed for life bearing with an L10 bearing life of at least 20,000
hours when calculated using ISO 281 for rated fan duty

Motor winding shall have class 'F' insulation with class B (80ºK) temperature rise as a
minimum. Motor performance shall be in accordance with BS5000: Part 99: 1975 or
latter and IEC34- 1. motor unless mentioned elsewhere shall be rated for ambient
temperature of 50ºC.

All motors shall have protection to IP55 standards and be fitted with drain plugs.
Motors shall be wired to an external terminal box with the same level of protection as the
motor.
All free inlet fans shall be provided with inlet bell mouth and guard. Where fans
directly discharging air into a chamber, a conical diffuser shall be provided for higher
efficiency.
 Inlet and outlet guards shall be provided where indicated on the drawings / schedules.
Guards shall be manufactured from mild steel wire and rod, all welded assembly, and
shall be hot dipped galvanized after manufacture.
Guards shall comply with BS 848: Part 5.
Fans shall be provided with attachable mounting feet / plates where indicated for
horizontal or vertical mounting fabricated from mild steel. Mounting feet / plates shall be
hot dipped galvanized after manufacture.
All fans shall comply with the European Machinery Directive and carry the CE mark or
approved equal certification.
2.9 Smoke extract Fans -High temperature fans
In general construction of fans shall be as per specification for standard axial fans.
Where specified fans supplied shall be rated for once only operation of 300ºC for 1 hour.

Fan motor shall be sized to have the power to allow the fan to handle air at normal ambient
temperature to allow periodic testing at ambient temperature. Fan motor that have
been derated to the power required to handle the hot fire smoke are not acceptable as the
fans must be capable of handling relatively cool smoke are not acceptable as the fans must
be capable of handling relatively cool smoke during the early stage of the fire without
overloading the motor.
High temperature / smoke extract fans shall have approval by the UAE civil defense
authorities.
Fire rating of fans shall be independently tested in accordance with EN 12101-
3.Necessary documentation as proof shall be submitted to Engineer.
Fans shall be driven by 2 speed class 'H' motors (1:2 ratio). Please refer schedule/
electrical diagram for details.
2.10 Car park jet fans
Car Park jet fans shall consist of (in the direction of air flow): Bell mouth inlet with
low loss guard.
50mm thick double wall silencers on the fan inlet and outlet. Aerofoil axial flow
jet fan and motor.
Mounting bracket to support the fan from the ceiling (Contractor to provide additional
hangers/ supports if fan need to be dropped lower to steer clear off beams etc). Discharges
deflectors (if needed).
In general construction of fans shall be as per specification for standard axial fans.

Fan motor shall be sized to have the power to allow the fan to handle air at normal ambient
temperature to allow periodic testing at ambient temperature. Fan motor that have
been derated to the power required to handle the hot fire smoke are not acceptable as the
fans must be capable of handling relatively cool smoke are not acceptable as the fans must
be capable of handling relatively cool smoke during the early stage of the fire without
 overloading the motor.
Fans shall be rated for once only operation of 300ºC for 1 hour

Fire rating of fans shall be independently tested in accordance with EN 12101-

3.Necessary documentation as proof shall be submitted to Engineer.
Fans shall be driven by 2 speed class 'H' motors (1:2 ratio). Please refer schedule/
electrical diagram for details.
2.11 Air Curtains
Air curtains shall be suitable for doors of width upto 3m and height upto 2.4m. unit shall be
complete with a polycarbonate cabinet of colour acceptable to architect. Units shall operate
at very low sound level to prevent disturbing personnel and customers. Units shall be
provided with adjustable louvre damper controls to regulate airflow.
Motor shall be class “F” insulation, totally enclosed, rated for continuous duty with lifetime
lubricated sealed ball bearings and protected with thermal overload switch.

2.12 Fire Fighter’s Smoke Control Station (FSCS)

2.12.1 Fire fighter’s smoke control station (FSCS) shall be located as indicated on
drawings.
The control station shall include the following features:

a) The fire fighter’s smoke control station shall provide full monitoring and manual
control capability over all smoke control systems and equipment.
b) The control station shall have the highest priority control over all smoke control
systems and equipment. Where manual controls are also provided at other
building locations for control of smoke control systems, the control mode selected
from the FSCS should prevail. FSCS control should override or bypass other
building controls such as hand off auto and start/stop switches located on fan
motor controllers, and controls intended to protect against electrical overloads,
provide for personnel safety, and prevent major system damage.
c) The fire fighters smoke control station shall contain a building diagram that
clearly indicates the type and location of all smoke control equipment
(fans, dampers, etc.). The building areas affected by the equipment shall
also be clearly indicated.
d) The actual status of the systems and equipment that are activated or are capable of
activation for smoke control shall be clearly indicated at the fire fighters smoke
control station.
 e) Status indication shall be provided for on and off status of each individual fan
used for smoke control. ‘ON’ status should be sensed by pressure difference as
proof of air flow.

2.13 Carbon Monoxide Detection System

2.13.1 The system to comprise of remote sensors, exact location to be agreed with
the Consultant. Sensors to be wired to multiple channel carbon monoxide monitors.

2.13.2 Control shall be 24 volt, 1 ph, 50 Hz.

2.13.3 Monitor controls to be housed in a lockable NEMA-12 enamel finished
cabinet with hinged door and be complete with window.
2.13.4 Cabinet to be fitted with indicating lights to indicate sensor being monitored
and level of carbon monoxide.
2.13.5 Carbon monoxide sensors will continuously monitor the concentrations of
carbon monoxide (CO) prevailing within the car park.

2.13.6 On sensing 100ppm at any CO sensor, a visual and audible

alarm shall be initiated at the panel.
2.13.7 Zone indication of CO sensor being monitored shall be indicated on the
multiple channel CO monitor.
2.13.8 The CO monitor shall be interfaced with the FSCS.

3.0 EXECUTION
2.14 Installation
3.0.1 Install as shown on the drawings, as detailed, and according to manufacturer's
installation instructions. On units provided with a drain connection, reduce drain
connection down to ½inch fitting and leave open.
3.0.2 Align fan and motor sheaves to allow belts to run true and straight.
3.0.3 Bolt equipment to curbs with galvanized lag bolts.
3.0.4 Install thrust restraints in accordance with the requirements of following

Sections

a. Section 15060, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

b. Section 15070, MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION
CONTROL
2.15 Pre-Operation Maintenance
3.0.5 Grease bearings.
3.0.6 Rotate impeller by hand and check for shifting during shipment and check all
bolts, collars, and other parts for tightness.
 2.16 Start-Up and Instructions
3.0.7 Check vibration and correct as necessary for air balance work.
After air balancing is complete and permanent sheaves are in place perform necessary field
mechanical balancing to meet vibration tolerance in Section 15070, MECHANICAL SOUND,
VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROL

2.17 Testing, Balancing and Commissioning:

3.0.8 Testing, Balancing and commissioning shall be as detailed in manufacturers
commissioning literature and in standards listed in this Section as well as per
Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
3.0.9 Coincidentally with the above test, all medium and high pressure
ductwork systems as defined by SMACNA shall be tested for air leakage.

3.0.10 Provide notice of any test to the in writing in accordance with Contract
requirements so that, where he deems necessary or his representative shall
witness the test. The test rig and all necessary blanks for the purpose of sealing
the ductwork under test shall be provided, and blanks shall be removed after
the test has been approved for each section of the ductwork.

SECTION 12
CENTRIFUGAL FANS
PART 1 -
GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor installations.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
vibration hangers and supports.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices.
 3. Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for
disconnect switches.
4. Division 16 Section "Motor Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings

on actual site elevations. B. Operating Limits:

Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute (CFM) and
design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow
use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side
of peak pressure point
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the
peak of static efficiency.
c. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard
screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed to operating and maintenance
personnel.
d. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for
place of installation. Noise level for all ceiling mounted equipment shall not
exceed NC35.
e. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.
5. SUBMITTALS
a. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping,
installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
• Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions
indicated.
• Certified fan sound power
ratings.
• Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical
accessories.
• Material gages and finishes, including color
charts.
• Dampers, including housings, linkages, and
operators.
b. Design Analysis and Calculations shall be submitted for fans indicating the
 manufacturer's recommended sound pressure level ratings, self-alignment and
thrust load requirements, horsepower ratings, and required system rpm's.
c. Shop Drawings from the manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and
indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
d. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately
to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

e. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
f. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test
results for compliance with performance requirements.
g. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in
Divisio n 1.

• Include lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance

data
6. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70
and that are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and
are licensed to use the AMCA Seal.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
Electrical components and devices for the smoke extract fans and kitchen exhaust
fans shall comply with NFPA 70 and to be UL705 listed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location
 following manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting
points.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
clearly describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material,
design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial
or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications
of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered
for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 -year field service record shall not be acceptable..
Products shall be supported by a service organization.
System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

2.2 GENERAL FAN

 REQUIREMENTS A.
General

1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance
with the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and
outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required,
and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ASME B15.1. Installation shall be
such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated
with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint
and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water
fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 23
weathermeter.
C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be provided
for the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-quantity
balancing operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the following:
1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed necessary
for proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the
fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan speed
has been determined.
3.07 FAN
UNITS
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished,
with indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan
shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support
structure.
3.08
HOUSINGS

A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved

 scroll housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to
allow access to internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate
fans downstream from humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for
mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and
reinforced- steel panels with welded seams and the following:
• Outlet guide vanes.
• Motor disconnect switch.
• Spun inlet cone with flange. d.
Outlet
flange.
e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

3.09 WHEELS
A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back
plate, backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-
iron or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

B. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange; heavy back
plate; hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange
and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to
shaft with set screws.

3.10 SHAFTS
A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final
alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a
protective coating of lubricating oil.
Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the fan's
speed range.

2.3 BEARINGS
A. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified, with
provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed
by the service.
B. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and
shall have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000
hours. Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures
encountered. Housings shall be cast iron unless otherwise specified or
 approved.
C. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface
ball check type.
Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be
provided. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on
the side opposite the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible
from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes
where necessary.

D. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel

spiral wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper
pins are not acceptable.

E. Factory sealed antifriction bearings that conform to above specified materials and
ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by
motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt).

2.4 BELT DRIVES

A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment
made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor:

1.5. B. Drives:

1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the
manufacturer's published recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on
maximum pitch diameter of
sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than
1.5.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including
40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-
sheave or
variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-
sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
 8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in
accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in
the presence of the
Engineer.

C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically
balanced at factory.
D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives with cross section to suit sheave grooves.
1. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching
machine at the factory.
Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each belt
set shall be bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.
2. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7 mm thick, 20
mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer
with guard in place.

F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-

opening latches and gaskets. B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel,

for duct connections.

C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.
D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both
ends with 2 permanently lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating
in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with
2 permanently lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream
terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans.
1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.
F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2
plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings,
with blades linked out of air stream to single control lever.
1. Configuration: Parallel blade.
2. Configuration: Opposed blade.
 G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft bearings.

H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate
heat from shaft.
J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive

side of single-width fans. L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet

with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.

2.6 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements

for factory-installed motors. B. Motor Construction:NEMA MG 1,

general purpose, continuous duty,

Design B or
equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 34.

C. Air-over-motor units shall be provided with NEMA-rated Class H insulation for all
services where air stream temperature exceeds 38 deg. C (100 deg. F). Air
velocity over motor surfaces shall be sufficient to maintain insulation temperatures
within NEMA standards at maximum fan horsepower. Motors used with variable
frequency drives (VFDs) shall be rated for VFD use.
D. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
E. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as
otherwise specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with
fixed- sheave standard
belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable, pivoted motor bases wherever
equipment configuration permits proper installation.

2.7 SMOKE EXHAUST FAN

A. General Description: Belt-driven mixed flow, dual speed, fully
weatherproofed and constructed of corrosion resistant materials. Structural steel
support components to be zinc plated and suitable for smoke exhaust. Fans to be
UL listed for smoke removal
with operation temperature of 26 for a minimum of four hours continuous
operation..

B. Fan Housing: Heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication,
 designed to provide easy access from roof level to all moving parts including
motor, without dismantling unit.
C. Fan wheels: Heavy gauge steel, multi-blade, mixed flow, non-overloading, non-
stall type, fully balanced at factory.
D. Motor: Explosion proof, type Class H insulation, continuously rated, provided with

permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings not requiring lubrication for 25000 hours of
operation and in-built thermal overload protection.

E. Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels less than 50 db measured on the
A- scale of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
F. Accessories: Fan to be complete with the following: fusible link damper lifter to
provide heat and smoke relief in the event of an electrical power fail are factory
wired safety disconnect switch mounted inside housing, flexible conduit to
receive field wiring, all around expanded aluminum bird and protection screen,
neoprene foam sealing strip for air seal between base and curb and fixings to roof
curb.
F. Fusible Link Lifter: Fusible link damper lifter automatically opens the butterfly dampers
when air temperature below the damper blades exceeds 74 deg. C to provide smoke and
heat relief with no electrical power required.

2.8 KITCHEN FUME ROOF EXTRACT FAN

A. Fan: Dual speed belt-driven motor, Upblast discharge, centrifugal, vertical
discharge, fully weatherproofed, all durable rust-free aluminum construction and
corrosion-resistant protection. Fan shall be spark-resistant. Fans shall be spark
resistant, UL and cUL listed for grease removal and high static pressures operation
and listed for commercial cocking equipment exhaust applications.
B. Sound Power Level: Select to give sound levels less than 60 dB measured on the A-
scale of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
C. Fan Housing: heavy gauge durable rust-free steel with lock formed seams
permitting no air leakage . Fan housing to be designed for easy access from roof
level to internal parts including motor, V-belt drives and magnetic shutter.
D. Fan Impeller: Steel with backward inclined blades with non-overloading
characteristics, spark proof and non corroding, keyed and locked to drive and shaft,
with the whole rotating element precision balanced at the factory.
E. Shaft to be stainless steel mounted on two heavy duty self-aligning,
permanently lubricated and sealed pillow block ball bearing.
F. Motor: Explosion proof, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently
lubricated ball bearings and in-built thermal overload protection. The motor is to
be protected and isolated from the air-stream and to be forced cooled by
uncontaminated air which is drawn into the motor housing through breath tubes.
Motor is to be mounted on vibration dampeners on a slotted base for belt tension
adjustment. Sheave is to be adjustable to allow field changes in fan speed. Motor is
 to be class F insulation.
G. Motor to incorporate an under voltage relay complete with timer.
H. Accessories: Fan is to be complete with magnetic shutters, factory wired safety
disconnect switch mounted inside housing, automatic shutters to prevent air
recirculation through stand-by fan, flexible tubing to receive field wiring, hinged
access door, 25 mm drain connection and weatherhood.
I. Automatic Change Over Panel: sheet steel painted grey, houses two contactors,
over load relay, selector switch, two indicator lights and reset buttons.

2.9 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat
aluminum parts. Internal parts of fans used for 100% outdoor air shall be specially
painted to suit weather conditions.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat
before assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not
required.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable for high
temperature application as indicated on Drawings.
C. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads
or housed spring isolators as indicated. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
concrete housekeeping base.
 C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods,
vibration isolation springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-
control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
Controls and Seismic Restraints."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.
Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of
the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M, size and location
as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or key to floor
slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units.
Use Portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal- weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface
Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in
other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connectors.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,
including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of
fans, including duct and electrical connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor
shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt adjustments, and lubrication, and to report results
in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages

for proper damper operation. B.

Adjust belt tension.

C. Lubricate bearings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris.
Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks
before startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections forducts, and electrical components are complete.
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers
in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive
system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.

2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures
for air- handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fan
units. Refer to Division 1 Section"[Demonstration and Training]
 [Closeout Procedures]."

SECTION 13

AXIAL FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Propeller fans.
2. Vane axial fans.
3. Jetfoil fans.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
vibration hangers and supports.
2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices.
3. Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for
disconnect switches.
4. Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings

on actual site elevations. B. Operating Limits:

Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data

are described in equipment schedule(s) on the Drawings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping,
 installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings from the manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and
indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections

drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test
results for compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.
1. Include lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70
and that are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements
and are licensed to use the AMCA Seal.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the
Engineer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping
limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
 B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with
labels clearly describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material,
design and workmanship. The standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5
year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily
completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial
market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products
having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable. Products shall
be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.

2.2 PROPELLER FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated,
consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring
with baked- enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to
cast- iron hub.
D. Cast-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades
fastened to cast- aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Extruded-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil
blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the
housing, statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous
operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with
 final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning
ball bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours.
4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched
sets for multiple belt drives.
7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on

the outside of the fan cabinet. G. Accessories: The following

accessories are required as indicated:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades

with nylon bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel,
conforming to OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weather shield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weather shield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to
less than 50 percent.
7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-
overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.3 VANEAXIAL FANS

A. Description: Vane axial fans consisting of fan wheel and housing,
straightening vane section, factory-mounted motor, an inlet cone section, and
accessories. Variable features indicated in equipment schedule include belt driven
or direct drive as indicated, and variable or adjustable pitch.
1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted pneumatic actuator, externally mounted
positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator for variable-volume operation.
B. Housings: Steel with inlet bell and diffuser sections.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges;
inlet cone shall be welded to the fan raceway.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream
from the fan wheel designed
to straighten the airflow.
 C. Wheels: Cast-aluminum, axial-flow type, with airfoil-shaped blades mounted
on cast- iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid steel key.
D. Fan Hub and Blade-Bearing Assemblies: Cast aluminum,
machined and fitted with threaded bearing wells to receive blade-bearing
assemblies.
1. Blades: Replaceable, cast aluminum; factory mounted and
balanced to the hub assembly.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than
70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the fan's speed range.
E. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 100,000 hours.
F. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing, out of air
stream, factory wired to disconnect located on outside of fan housing.
G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment
made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.
2. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at
the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched
sets for multiple belt drives.
5. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on
the outside of the fan cabinet.
6. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
H. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled-steel flanges.
2. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork.
3. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the
discharge of the fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section.
4. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall
and signaling control devices. Control devices and sequence of operation are
specified in other Division 15 Sections.
5. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of the
fan to detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control
devices
and sequence of operation are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
6. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; having peripheral control linkage operated from outside of
the air stream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision
for
manual or automatic operation as indicated.

2.4 JETFOIL TUNNEL FANS

A. Description: Fans shall be axial flow, jetfoil type, especially designed for
 longitudinal ventilation of tunnels, fully reversible blow direction, high thrust, and
silent operation. Fans and all related parts, accessories, electrical and control
elements and cabling shall be UL listed.
Housing: Consist of inner and outer tube, motor flange and guide blade assembly. Fan housing is
to be manufactured from mild steel to ISO 3574 and 3576, grade HR 14. The housing assembly is
to be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ISO 1459-1461.

B. Impeller: Fan to be provided with asymmetrically profiled

impeller and guide blades with high thrust in major blowing direction. Impeller is
to produce same thrust when running in opposite direction of flow. Impeller is to
be dynamically balanced on two planes.
C. Blades and Hub: Cast from aluminum-silicone alloy in
accordance with ISO 3522 and
7720, grade LM6 and LM25. Hub is to have a core of cast steel machined for direct
mounting on the motor shaft.

D. Silencers: Tubular directly mounted on inlet and outlet of fan, of

stainless steel inner casing with galvanized steel outer casing welded to hot dip
galvanized ends and bell mouths, fitted
with stainless steel perforated line and galvanized steel aerodynamic pod, and solid
and galvanized steel wire mesh at inlet/outlet.

E. Motor: Squirrel type reversible single speed, 50 Hz rating,

pad mounted, with self- lubricating ball bearings of L10 life, continuously air
stream rated and complying fully with IEC 34-1, Class F insulation. The motor shall
be suitable for handling smoke laden air at
150 deg. C for 5 hours.

F. Suspension: Anti-vibration compression spring type fixed to tunnel roof by

means of stainless steel studding/nut system. Studding is to be screwed into
stainless steel sockets and locked by means of heavy duty "LOCTITE" or approved
equal. Bolts are to be painted after installation with two coats epoxy anti-corrosion
paint.
G. Finish: The complete fan is to be painted after degreasing, with one coat of mordant
wash followed by one coat of epoxy prime and one coat of epoxy finish to give a total
mean dry film thickness of 100 microns. Color to be agreed by the Engineer
2.5 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements

for factory-installed motors. B. Motor Construction:NEMA MG 1,

general purpose, continuous duty,

Design B or
equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 34.
 C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Paint finish of fans exposed to outdoor shall be suitable for the hot and humid
climate of the project.
D. Internal sides of fans used for 100 percent outdoor air shall be specially painted.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable
for high temperature application as indicated on Drawings.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation.
The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and
Seismic Restraints."
C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation
springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in
Division 15 Section " Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
 D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."

3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connector.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,

including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of
fans, including duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.

3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks
before startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for ducts, and electrical components are complete.
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
 fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers
in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive
system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures
for air- handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
Fix in final position after balancing is achieved
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan
units. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout
Procedures]

SECTION 14
POWER VENTILATORS

GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Utility set fans.
2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Axial roof ventilators.
4. Up blast propeller roof exhaust fans.
5. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
6. In-line ventilators.
7. In-line centrifugal fans.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for roof curbs and
equipment supports.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for
 vibration hangers and supports.
3. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control devices.
4. Division 16 Section "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for
disconnect switches.
5. Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" for starters and fusible switches.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for
roof- mounted exhaust fans.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings

on actual site elevations. B. Operating Limits:

Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow
use of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side
of peak pressure point. b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the
peak of static efficiency.
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and
discharge exposed to operating and maintenance personnel.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping,
installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Design Analysis and Calculations shall be submitted for fans indicating the
manufacturer's recommended sound pressure level ratings, self-alignment and
thrust load requirements, horsepower ratings, and required system rpm's.
C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and
 indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
D. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling
plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted
above ceiling. Submit with Shop Drawings. Show the following:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
F. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test
results for compliance with performance requirements.
G. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
1. Include lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the
Engineer. Electrical components and devices for the smoke extract fans and
kitchen exhaust fans shall comply with NFPA 70 and to be UL705 listed.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements
and are licensed to use the AMCA Seal.
D. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
Smoke exhaust fans to
be UL label for “Power Ventilators for smoke control systems”.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.

1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
 B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.

B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof

penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with
labels clearly describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged

in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered
for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization.
System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.2 GENERAL FAN

REQUIREMENTS A.

1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance
with the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply
with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302.
Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99
and to requirements specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and
outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required,
and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ASME B15.1.
Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the
factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated
with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint
and paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water
fog; ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 23
weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified,
with provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be
imposed by the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and
shall have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000
hours.
Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered.
Housings shall be cast iron unless otherwise specified or approved.

3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall

preclude overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be
surface ball check type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be
provided. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on
the side opposite the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal
maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where
necessary.

4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel

spiral wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper
pins are not
accepta ble.
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above
specified materials and
ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by motors
with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)

D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.
2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the
manufacturer's published recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on
maximum pitch diameter of
she ave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than
 5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40
horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave
or variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-
sheave, high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and
driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in
accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer. E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with
cross section to suit sheave grooves.
2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-
matching machine at the factory.
Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each belt
set shall be bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.

2.3 UTILITY SET FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan
shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or
welded to scroll sheets.
1. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.
C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and
spun- steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel.
2. Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as scheduled.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-
block-type ball bearings with
AFBMA 9, L-50 of 200,000 hours.

F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment
made after installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at
the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched
sets for multiple belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on
the outside of the fan cabinet.
 G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking
aluminum blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with
adjustable linkage.
4. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
5. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
6. Drain Connections: DN20 threaded coupling drain connection installed at
lowest point of housing.
7. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over
motor and drive compartment

2.4 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting
of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive
assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-
piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge

air upward, with rain and snow drains.
C. Housing: Removable, extruded-aluminum, rectangular top; square, one-
piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
D. Housing: Removable, galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece,
hinged, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the
housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning
ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.

G. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to
less than 50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-
overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 13 mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft
dampers mounted in curb base;
 factory set to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50 mm
thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50 mm wood
nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant
strip, with mounting flange. b. Configuration: Built-in cant and
mounting flange.
c. Configuration: Built-in raised
cant and mounting flange.
d. Overall Height: 200
mm. e. Overall Height:
300 mm. f.

2.5 AXIAL ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive axial fans, as indicated, consisting of
housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
curb base, and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle;
square, one- piece, hinged, aluminum base.
Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and

blades. D. Fan Wheel:

Steel hub and blades.

E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the

housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning
ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

F. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection
mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable, 13 mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan
stops.
4. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50 mm
thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50 mm wood
nailer.
Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip,
 with mounting flange. b. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
c. Configuration: Built-in raised
cant and mounting flange.
d. Overall Height: 200
mm. e. Overall Height:
300 mm. f.

2.6 UPBLAST PROPELLER ROOF EXHAUST FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated,
consisting of housing, wheel, butterfly-type discharge damper, fan shaft,
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and
accessories.
B. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced galvanized steel,
containing galvanized steel butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and
drive assembly, and fan wheel.
C. Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced
aluminum, containing aluminum butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and
drive assembly, and fan wheel.
1. Damper Rods: Steel with bronze bearings.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub;
factory set pitch angle.
E. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades
fastened to cast-aluminum hub;
factory set pitch angle.

F. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing; weatherproof

housing of same material as fan housing with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type
ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Motor Mount: On outside of fan cabinet, adjustable base for belt tensioning.
G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50 mm thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50 mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.
2. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
3. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
4. Overall Height: 200 mm.
5. Overall Height: 300 mm.
6. Overall Height: 450 mm.
2.7 CENTRIFU
GAL WALL VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting
of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive
 assembly, and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle;
venturi inlet cone.
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the
housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning
ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to
less than 50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection
mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable, 13 mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting.
5. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall
sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops.
2.8 IN-LINE VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling, wall, duct, or
for concealed in-line applications.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds,
motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing
and receptacle for motor plug-in.
E. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to
less than 50 percent.
F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, or duct collars,
and transition fittings.
2.9 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel,
outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect
switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening
vanes; inlet and outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall,
or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory
wired to disconnect located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable
sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes
from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
 E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant
lock, located in fan outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for units not
connected to ductwork.

2.10 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements

for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous

duty, Design B or equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 34.
C. Air-over-motor units shall be provided with NEMA-rated Class H insulation for all
services where air stream temperature exceeds 38 deg. C (100 deg. F). Air
velocity over motor surfaces shall be sufficient to maintain insulation temperatures
within NEMA standards at maximum fan horsepower. Motors used with variable
frequency drives (VFDs) shall be rated for VFD use.
D. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by
employees or building occupants.
3. Totally enclosed motors where located in unfiltered air streams.
E. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as
otherwise specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with
fixed- sheave standard belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable, pivoted
motor bases wherever equipment configuration permits proper installation.

2.11 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat

after assembly.

C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.

D. Paint finish of fans exposed to outdoor shall be suitable for the hot and humid
climate of the project.
E. Internal sides of fans used for 100 percent outdoor air shall be specially painted.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high
smoke temperature of
260 deg. C (500 deg. F) for a minimum of four hours continuous operation ..

C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation.
The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
D. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen
operation.
Fans shall be UL and cUL listed for grease removal, tested under high temperature
exhaust of 190 deg. C (375 deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance with relevant
NFPA
standard. Fan coating shall be as directed by the Engineer. Units
shall include the
following:
1. Bolted access door.
2. Drain connection.
3. Aluminum grease trap.
4. Weatherhood.
5. Upblast discharge.
6. Windband discharge cap with gravity damper.
7. Outlet guard where fan discharge is accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
 B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control
devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Control
Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using
neoprene pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.
2. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using
housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping
base.
3. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.
4. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods,
vibration isolation springs, and seismic restraints.
5. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded
rods or metal straps, and
neoprene washers.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."

3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided.
Construct base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of
the supported unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36M, size and
location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing.
Anchor or
key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to
facilitate securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing
units. Use Portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal- weight
aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface
Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in
other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connectors.
 B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,
including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of
fans, including duct and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt,
and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks
before startup, and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for ducts, and electrical components are complete.
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan
drive system,
align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures
for air- handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
 Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train the Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
power ventilator units. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and
Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

SECTION 15 AIR CURTAINS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air curtains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each unit.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating
obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and
seismic restraints.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations of exterior walls.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full
range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects/engineers and owners, and any other information specified or required
by the Engineer.
G. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control"
Article in Part 3 of this Section.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

H. Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1.
I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel
finish over powdered mirror.
B. Housing Materials: One-piece, molded, high-impact, white polymer material.
C. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, electroplated-zinc steel with
welded construction and polyester coated finish.
D. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, aluminum construction.
1. Anodized Finish: Match finish and color of adjacent architectural metals.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system
 established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum
finishes.

a. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31

(Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium
matte; Anodic Coating: architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker)
complying with AAMA 607.1.
b. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34
(Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched,
medium matte; Anodic Coating: architectural Class II, integrally colored or
electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker).
3. Mounting Brackets: Steel, for [wall] [ceiling] mounting.
E. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and
capable of reducing air-outlet velocity by [60 percent] <Insert percentage> with
louver in totally closed position.
F. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, wedge shaped, containing
adjustable air- directional vanes with [40-degree] <Insert other appropriate angle>
sweep front to back.

2.2 FANS
A. Fans: Galvanized steel, Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double
inlet statically and dynamically balanced.
B. Fan Drives: Belt, equipped with belt guards and adjustable sheaves and
pulleys for adjusting air-outlet velocity.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Motor Type: [Two speed] [Multispeed], resiliently mounted, continuous duty,
[totally enclosed, air over] [totally enclosed, fan cooled] [open, dripproof]
[explosion proof], with integral thermal-overload protection.

B. Bearings: Permanently sealed, life-time, prelubricated, ball bearings.

C. Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.
2.4 FILTERS
A. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type,
disposable air filters with holding frames.
1. Media: Interlaced glass-fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive in
galvanized- steel frame.
B. Washable Panel Filters: Removable, stainless-steel, baffle-type filters with
spring- loaded fastening; with minimum 2 mm thick, stainless-steel filter frame.
C. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and
suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. [Built-in] [Field-Installed] Thermostat: Line voltage, factory installed and wired
 to the junction box on air curtain.
B. Automatic Door Switch: Remotely installed in door area to activate air curtain
when door opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
C. Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.
D. Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air
curtain to operate from 1 to
300 seconds after door closes.

E. Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 115-V ac transformer with

primary and secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type [1] [12]
enclosure.
F. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.

3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15
Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to air curtain to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's

published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not

indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing,
and report results in writing:
1. After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check of
 individual components.
2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to
confirm motor rotation and
unit operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest units until

satisfactory results are achieved.
Operate electric element through each stage and verify proper operation of
electrical connection.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A.
B. Adjust motor and fan speed to

achieve specified airflow. C. Adjust discharge

louver and dampers to regulate airflow. D.

Adjust air-directional vanes.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air curtains.
1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."
 SECTION 16 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1.0 GENERA
1.1 Reference
Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of Division Fifteen.
1.2 Description of work
1.2.1 This Section includes piping supports complete for all piping systems
except as otherwise specified.
1.3 Quality Control
1.3.1 Reference Standards.
a) British Heating & Ventilating Contractors Association
recommendations. b) Relevant British Standards
BS 3974 Specification for pipe supports.
1.4 Submittals
a) All materials submittals shall include a detailed, clause-wise, compliance
statement.
b) All materials submittals shall include detailed catalogues, product literature
 and descriptions of all equipment and fittings with selection charts,
capacities etc.
c) All material submittals shall include copies of relevant standards.
d) Provide detailed shop drawings of the items of equipment being provided,
indicating the dimensions, materials and characteristics.
e) Materials selection data to be submitted.
f) Shop drawings to include typical details for both vertical and horizontal
pipe work including locations.
g) Contractor to submit details and calculations of how proposed loads can be
safely accommodated by the structure.

2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 All hangers, supports, anchors, and guides shall be in accordance with the British Standard
BS 3974
2.1.2 Dielectric Protection. Furnish acceptable protection or copper plated hangers
between ferrous and nonferrous metal pipe and hangers on all water piping.

2.2 Horizontal Piping Hangers

Provide one of the following types of hangers for horizontal piping manufactured by one of the
approved makes
All Pipe Except Copper
a) Provide clevis type supports. Keep the clevis nut outside the insulation.
b) Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type
hangers, furnish steel pipe clamps
c) For pipes 200 mm and larger, and where provision for expansion and
contraction is required, provide single pipe-roll
support with two rods and adjustable sockets, or for pipe 300 mm and smaller,
adjustable swivel pipe- roll with one rod.

d) Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at
the same level, and fabricate from structural steel shapes. Use roller chairs or
pipe-roll stands where provision for expansion is required.
i) Spacing shall not be farther than the closest interval required for any size pipe
supported thereby, or as necessary to prevent damage or failure to the structure.
ii) Where there is doubt of the structural capacity for concentrated loads
necessary structural calculations shall be carried out and the load distributed
sufficiently.
e) Copper Tubing Support.
i) Hangers Touching Pipe; provide copper plated, split-ring extension hanger.
ii) Hangers on Outside of Insulation; furnish same as specified for steel pipe.
 f) Floor Supports: Provide one of the following means of supporting horizontal
piping from floor:
i) Where bottom of piping is less than 450 mm above finished floor, furnish
cast-iron pipe rests with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor.
ii) Contractor to f a b r i c a t e galvanised steel frame to suit the site
conditions to the approval of the CONSULTANT.

g) Wall Supports. Provide one of the following means of supporting horizontal

piping from wall
i) Furnish steel J-hook for pipe located close to wall (up to 80 mm pipe).
ii) For hanger suspension with 280 kg maximum loading furnish light welded-
steel bracket with hole for one rod, 19 mm diameter.
iii) For pipe-roll stand support, furnish welded-steel brackets.
The dimensions of steel members to be used for brackets shall be suitable for the
supported load and to CONSULTANT’s approval.

2.2.2 Vertical Piping Supports:

a) All Pipe Except Copper:

Vertical pipe supports shall be steel extension pipe-clamps. Manufacturer's rated
maximum loading for each size pipe shall be used (with minimum 50% safety factor) for
spacing of supports. Bolt clamp securely to pipe, reset clamp-end extension on
building structure

b) Copper Tubing Support.

For uninsulated vertical lines, provide copper finished steel riser clamp or plastic coated
steel riser clamp.

2.2.3 Beam Clamps:

a) Non-"C-Style" beam clamps shall be malleable iron for 9.5 mm hanger rods,
forged-steel for hanger rod up to 38mm.
b) "C-Style" beam clamps shall be adjustable hanger rod type, malleable iron
with set screw, jam nut, retaining clip, FM and UL approved.

c) Where beam configuration does not allow horizontal movement of C-clamp

when set screw and jam nut are positioned, retaining clips may be omitted.

2.2.4 Inserts and Expansion bolts:

a) Furnish and set inserts in concrete forms. Provide reinforcing rods for pipe
 sizes over 80 mm or equivalent.
b) Concrete inserts shall be as follows: Black malleable iron universal type for
threaded connections with lateral adjustment for pipe sizes up to 200mm.
c) For pipes 200 mm and over or equivalent group of pipes on trapeze, use
two or more inserts to prevent exceeding maximum loading.
d) As an alternative to the above mentioned inserts the Contractor may use
expansion bolts. If the Contractor uses expansion bolts, the
maximum spacing between supports may need to be reduced so as not to exceed
the maximum loading and the expansion bolt locations shall be determined in
coordination with the structural elements.
2.2.5 Shields:
Provide shields where required, to protect insulation at areas of contact with hangers
and supports.

2.2.6 Support Insulators.

The Contractor shall provide moulded hard rubber insulators at all supports of
insulated pipework to transmit pipe load to hangers (or supports) without crushing the
3
insulation. The rubber density shall not be less than 1100 kg/m and operating
temperature range shall be -20 deg C to 110 deg C. The thickness of insulators
shall be same as the insulation, and vapour barrier (where specified) shall be continuous
across the outside of the insulators.

2.2.7 Manufacturer:
All supports and clamps shall be from one of the approved manufacturers as listed in
Annex “G” of Volume 2 of Contract Documents.

2.2.8 All supports, clamps or frames shall be protected against corrosion by either
galvanizing or two coats of suitable primer with two coats of approved epoxy
paint. Supports/clamps or frames used outside the building shall be galvanized.

3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation / Application / Performance /Erection
a) Provide hangers to support the required loads. Where necessary, supports shall
be designed to permit movement due to expansion and contraction.
b) Support piping with hangers in direct contact with the pipe for insulated
piping not requiring a vapor barrier. Size hangers to fit on the outside of
insulation requiring a vapor barrier.
c) Hang pipe from substantial building structure. Piping shall not be hung from
other piping. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment
 after erection. Do not suspend pipe from metal roof deck.
d) “C” clamps shall be installed as per manufacturer's recommendations.
e) Where noninsulated pipes, in which vibration may occur, pass through walls,
floors, or partitions, encase pipe within acoustical wall sleeves.

3.2 Horizontal Piping Support Schedule

3.2.1 Support horizontal piping on threaded, galvanized, hot rolled steel rod hangers.
Threaded rod shall not be smaller than hanger thread size. Where proprietary hangers
are being used, the threaded rod size shall be as required for the hanger. The maximum
spacing shall be based on the load carrying capacity of the hanger, after allowing a safety
factory of 50% on the insulated full pipe weights.

3.3 Steel Pipe.

Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports:
Nominal Pipe Size, mm
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250

1.5 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.7 3.0 3.4 3.7 4.3 4.9 5.1 5.8 6.1

6.4 6.4 9.5 9.5 9.5 95 13 13 16 16 16 19 24

3.4 Copper Tubing

Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports:

Nominal Pipe Size, mm

15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 150

1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.7 4.2

3.5 U-PVC, PPR Tubing

Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports:

 Nominal Pipe Size, mm
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100-125 150

0.7 0.7 0.9 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.5

Furnish minimum rod diameters as specified for steel pipe.

3.2.3 Support steel piping 300 mm and larger at 6 m intervals or less to ensure even
distribution of loading on structural members.

3.2.4 The spacing specified herein is included to limit deflection in the pipe to
an acceptable minimum. Shorten intervals as necessary so as not to exceed
the support manufacturer's maximum recommended safe load values in
accordance with BS 3974.
3.2.5 Cast iron pipe shall be, as a minimum, supported at each hub.
3.2.6 Trapeze Hanger. Spacing shall not be farther than the closest interval required for
any size pipe supported thereby, or as necessary to prevent damage or failure to
the structure. Provide additional framing as required to transfer loads to adequate
structure.
3.2.7 Supporting rods over 450 mm long shall be braced at every fourth hanger with
diagonal bracing attached to the structure.
3.2.8 The Contractor shall select support distances such that the precast structure is not
subjected to excessive point loads. The contractor will be required to submit
calculations to demonstrate that the proposed loads can be safely supported from
the structure.

3.6 Vertical Piping Support

Support vertical piping with wrought steel riser clamps. Make adequate provision for
expansion, contraction, and lateral stability by using expansion joints. Also, account for
vertical expansion and lateral movement of the building structures.
Support steel pipe at a minimum of every floor as required to relieve joint stresses.
 SECTION 17

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers,

registers, and grilles. B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall
vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and
volume- control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing
diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in
the ceiling and comprising deflecting members discharging supply air in various
directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary
room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which
can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished;
indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings
for each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation,
room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to
scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, grilles and access
panels with other items installed in ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range
of colors available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color
finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's
standard sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same
material to be used for the Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific
requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific
requirements of the systems selected. Other manufacturers' products with equal
performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles
according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems."
C. Location of ceiling mounted diffusers shall be as per coordinated reflected false
ceiling drawings prepared by the Contractor. Color and finish of diffusers shall
match with approved false ceiling.
 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION

A. Air-diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or
vibration. Devices shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for
mounting in indicated surface construction.
B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.
C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid.
Dampers shall be extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal
velocity is not to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer velocities
through diffuser are not to exceed 3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be able to
deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C below room temperature without causing
objectionable conditions.
E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the
face of the device. Volume adjustments shall be made by [removable key]
[tamper-deterring device].
F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.
G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.

H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage),

provide sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.
I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air
quantity, as measured on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless
specified otherwise
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.
B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating
the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and
referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general
arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have
been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria,
airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated,
as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in
the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify the Engineer for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to
allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns
indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean
exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers,
registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.
3.5 DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
A. Diffuser [#]: <INSERT CONCISE DIFFUSER DESCRIPTION>.
1. Material: [Steel.] [Aluminum.]
2. Finish: [Baked enamel, color to be selected and approved by the Engineer.] [Anodized
aluminum.]
3. Duct Connection: [Round] [Square]; <INSERT SIZE IN mm>.
4. Face Size: <INSERT SIZE IN mm>.
5. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: <INSERT MAXIMUM RATING>.
6. Face Style: [Round.] [Square.] [Rectangular.] [Panel.]
[Perforated.] [Linear.] [Troffer.]
7. Mounting: [Stepped down.] [Flush.] [Lay in.] [Snap in.] [Spline.] [Plaster
frame.]
8. Pattern: [Fixed,] [2 position,] [Adjustable,] [one way.] [2 way.]
[3 way.] [4 way.]
9. Dampers: [Opposed blade.] [Butterfly.] [Fire/smoke.] [Combination volume
and pattern control.]
10. Accessories: Include the following:
a. Equalizer deflectors.
b. Smudge ring.
c. Plaster ring.
d. Extractor.
e. Blank-off panel, end caps and mitred corners.
f. Operating keys.
g. Insulated supply and return plenums

3.6 REGISTER SCHEDULE

A. Register [#]: <INSERT CONCISE REGISTER DESCRIPTION>.
1. Material: [Steel.] [Aluminum.]
2. Finish: [Baked enamel, color to be selected and approved by the Engineer.] [Anodized
aluminum.]Face Blade Arrangement: [Fixed horizontal.] [Adjustable horizontal.] [Fixed
3. vertical.] [Adjustable vertical.]
4. Rear Blade Arrangement: [Fixed horizontal.]
[Adjustable horizontal.] [Fixed vertical.] [Adjustable
vertical.]
5. Frame: [32 mm wide.] [25 mm wide.] [Filter.]
[<INSERT FRAME SIZE AND STYLE>.]
6. Mounting: [Countersunk screw.] [Concealed.] [Lay in.]
7. Damper Type: [Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.] [Opposed blade with spring
closing and UL-listed fusible link for 71 deg C .]
8. Accessories: Include plaster frame.
3.7 GRILLE SCHEDULE
A. Grille [#]: <INSERT CONCISE GRILLE DESCRIPTION>.
1. Material: [Steel.] [Aluminum.]
2. Finish: [Baked enamel, white.] [Baked enamel, color to be selected and
approved by the Engineer.] [Anodized aluminum.]
 3. Face Blade Arrangement: [Fixed horizontal.]
[Adjustable horizontal.] [Fixed
vertical.] [Adjustable vertical.]
4. Rear Blade Arrangement: [Fixed horizontal.]
[Adjustable horizontal.] [Fixed vertical.] [Adjustable
vertical.]
5. Frame: [32 mm wide.] [25 mm wide.] [Filter.]
[<INSERT FRAME SIZE AND STYLE>.]
6. Mounting: [Countersunk screw.] [Concealed.] [Lay in.]
7. Accessories: Include plaster frame.
SECTION 18

AIR FILTERATION
PART - 1 GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

A. General:
1 Furnish all labour, materials, tools equipment and services for
air filters in accordance with provisions of contract documents.
2 Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
3 Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install
all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and
devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
4 See Division 1, for General Requirements.
5 Work included
a. Panel filters.
b. High efficiency bag
c.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 15830, Fan Coil Units
2. Section 15895, Ductworks, and Duct
Accessories.
3. Section 15855, Air Handling Units.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Filter media shall be U/L listed, Class 1 or Class II, as
approved by The Engineer.
B. Filter components assembled to form filter banks shall be
products of same manufacturer.
 MAINTENANCE
Provide spare parts in accord with contract minimum 15% extra stock of
each type and size.

PART - 2

PRODUCTS

FRAMES
Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of galvanized
steel or extruded aluminum with necessary gasketing between
frames and walls. Provide holding frames 1.5 mm, "T" section
construction.

PANEL FILTERS
A Media: 50 mm thick fibrous glass blanket, factory sprayed with
flameproof, non- drip, non- volatile adhesive.
B Holding frames: 1.50 mm minimum galvanized frame with expanded
metal grid on air leaving side and steel rod grid on air entering side,
hinged with pull and
retaining handles.
C Efficiency 30% based on ASHRAE
62- 76 test method.
D Initial resistance 6 mm WG based on 2.5 M/s face velocity
HIGH EFFICIENCY BAG FILTERS
A Media: Reinforced glass fiber performed into series of pockets and
bonded to header. Provide approximately one square meter of media
per 100 liters/second capacity.
B Holding Frames: gauge 1.50 mm galvanized steel with sealing
grooves and gaskets, locking clips, and provision for front mounted
panel prefilter and side removal of filter media.
C Efficiency: 80-85 % average based on ASHRAE 62-
76 test method.
D Initial resistance. 12 mm W.G. based on 2.5
M/s face velocity.

PERMANENT WASHABLE FILTERS

A Media: Metal screen, 25 square mm of screen per 100 square mm of
filter area containing at least 38 M of wire.
B Holding Frames: 1.2 gauge minimum galvanized frames with
retaining handles.
C Filter equipped with handles and rotary wedge corner latches.
Initial resistance 2.5 mm WG based on 2.5 M/s face velocity.
D Provide two sets of filters for each fan coil unit so that one set can be
cleaned while the other is used.
E Minimum efficiency shall be 65 percent by ASHRAE Weight
Resistant Test Method at 2.5 M/s.
SAND TRAP LOUVERS
A Louvers shall be vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to
provide tortuous air flow path and thus trap sand.
B Louver shall have self-emptying drain holes.
C Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum to ASTM B209 and ANSI.1.
Blades shall be 1.6 mm thick and casing 2.0 mm thick.
D Maximum louver face velocity shall be 1.2 M/s and maximum
pressure drop 50 Pa.
E Louvers shall be provided with washable filter and an insect screen of aluminum
2 mm X 2 mm mesh mounted on a standard U type frame with miter
corners. Screens shall be secured to the interior face of the louver with
self-tapping
stainless steel screws.
F Size of louvers shall be as indicated on the drawings. Louvers of heights 1125
mm to 2250 shall have central transom and sand chute and for heights 2250 mm

to 4500 mm louver shall have additional central bracing support as

recommended by the manufacturer.

G Louvers shall have efficiency of 80% with coarse test dust (20 to 200
microns) and 50% efficiency with fine test dust (1 to 70 microns

FILTER GAUGES
A. Provide diaphragm - type filter gauge for each filter bank, with 100 mm dial
and pointer graduated to read from 0 to 0.5 KPa.

EXECUTIO

INSTALL

ATION
 A Construct and install filters to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
Provide felt, rubber or neoprene gaskets as necessary.
B Do not operate fan system connected to filter banks until filters
(temporary or permanent) are in place.
C Provide new filters at handing over.
D Replace filters used during construction.
E Provide filter banks with removal and access space

SECTION 19
HVAC SOUND ATTENUATORS
PART - 1

GENERAL

WORK

INCLUDED

A. Duct mounted sound attenuators for air handling units and fans.
B. Contractor to ensure by calculation that Noise Criteria (NC) goals As
recommended by ASHRAE
are met.

RELATED WORK

A. Section 15855 Air Handing Units.

B. Section 15940
Air Outlets and Inlets. C. Section
15860 Fans.
D. Section 15895 Ductwork and Duct Accessories.

APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A NFPA 255 National Fire Protection Association Building Materials. tests of surface
burning characteristics.
B ASTM E84 American Society for Testing and
Materials. Surface burning characterization
 of Building Materials.

C ADC Air Diffusion Council

D AMCA Air Movement and Control Association.

SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
1 The contractor shall submit noise calculations of all AHU's, exhaust fans and terminal
boxes required for sizing sound attenuators to keep Noise criteria (NC) ratings for
rooms as per ASHRAE recommendations.
2 Shop drawings of factory fabricated assemblies.
3 Samples of shop fabricated assemblies if requested by the Consultant / Client's
Consultant / Client's representative.
4 Manufacturer's installation instructions.
5 Certified test data for attenuators of dynamic insertion loss, self generated noise
power levels and aerodynamic performance for reverse and forward flow test
conditions.
6 Submit pressure draft value across attenuator.

PART 2

PRODUCTS

SOUND

ATTENUATO

R
A Outer casing of rectangular silencers shall be made of 1.0 mm
galvanized steel in accordance with ASHRAE Guide recommended
construction for rectangular ductwork. Seams shall be lock-formed
and mastic filled. Assembly shall be airtight.
B BInteior partitions for rectangular silencers shall be made of not less than
0.55 mm galvanized erforated steel.
C Filler material shall be inorganic mineral of glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain
the specified acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5 percent
compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and Settling Material shall be insect,
vermin and moisture- proof. Combustion rating of acoustic fill shall not be less than
the following:
D Flamespread Classification 25
Smoke Development Rating 0Fuel

Contribution 20

And shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 255 and ASTM E84

E Attenuators shall be tested in accordance with AMCA and ADC Tests.

F Silencer ratings shall be determined in a duct-to-reverberant room test facility
provided for airflow in both directions through the test silencer during rating. The
test set-up and procedure shall be such that all effects due to end reflection,
directivity, flanking transmission, standing waves and test chamber sound
absorption are eliminated. Acoustic ratings shall include Dynamic Insertion Loss
(DIL) and self-Noise (SN) Power levels both for FORWARD FLOW (air and noise in
same direction) and REVERSE FLOW (air and noise in opposite directions) with
airflow of at l east 10 m/s entering face velocity. Data for rectangular and tubular
type silencers shall be presented for tests conducted using silencers no
smaller than the following cross-sections: Rectangular 60 x 60 cm; 60 x 75 cm or 60 x 90 cm.
G Construct attenuators to operate at System Static pressure but in no case to be less
than 500 pa.

PART – 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. Install sound attenuators in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Support sound attenuators independent of ductwork.

SECTION 20
CONTROL&INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM

1.01 DESCRIPTION OFWORK

A. Extent of Work: The Contractor shall provide a complete workable HVAC

system based upon this specification and the drawings.
where required. Unless otherwise specified all general
requirements for
temperature control are also applicable to humidity, velocity and pressure control
equipment and associated indicating equipment.
C. Automatic temperature control systems shall include
 all dampers, valves,
thermostats, humidity controllers and all other control devices required to maintain the
conditions detailed on drawings or specified. Control devices shall be connected
complete so as to perform the functions indicated and operate in the required sequence.
Thermometers, indicators and all other necessary accessories shall be included.

D. Cooling plant controls shall be in line with District cooling provider requirements.

1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. A firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of electric-electronic temperature
control equipment of types and sizes which are similar to the required equipment,
and which has been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Temperature control equipment shall be furnished and installed by skilled
personnel, who are regularly engaged in the installation of temperature control
equipment and systems, and who issue complete catalogue information covering a
full line of required equipment. Installation may be done by an authorized
representative of the control system subcontractor (manufacturer;) however, this
shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities or void any other
requirements of the specifications. Temperature control equipment, including
panels and automatic dampers, but not including wire and conduit and other
standard marketed apparatus, shall bear the nameplate of the subcontractor (as
manufacturer) and the entire system including wiring, shall be installed by
mechanics regularly employed by or under contract to the temperature control
subcontractor. The temperature control subcontractor (as manufacturer) shall be
responsible for the quality and satisfactory operation of material not actually
manufactured by him.
C. Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labelled by
Underwriters Laboratories and comply with
National Electrical Manufacturers

Association (NEMA) Standards.

D. All system components are to be designed and built to be fault tolerant.
1. Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% above and 85% below

rated voltage and at

+ 3 Hz variation in line frequency.

2. Provide static, transient, and short circuit

protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected
against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus
connected devices
shall be AC coupled, or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or
halt bus communication.
 1.03 SUBMITTALS
Engineering Submittal for Approval: The intention of the engineering
submittal is
provide sufficient information to allow the Engineer to evaluate the
compliance to specification, system capability and reliability in order to
approval.
B. The Engineering submittal shall include:

1. For the Automatic Control Systems:

a. List of control system components and provision
of detailed control diagrams with system component identification by reference
numbers.
b. Technical specification data sheets for each system component identified by the
reference number given in the control diagrams.
c. A proposed spare parts list to cover basic parts to be used by the Owner to provide a

reliable and trouble-free operations.

C. After installation the Contractor shall keep records of all changes and
adjustments and shall incorporate them into his final submission. This submittal
shall include:

1. Complete "As-Built" drawings comprising of system diagrams, plans, etc.

2. Complete system description.
3. Manufacturer's catalogues with technical data for all devices and equipment.
4. Operation instructions for each system.
5. Maintenance instructions for each item.
6. Parts list of submittal items.
Required copies of all above submittals shall be provided in sets of book form
with hard cover.

1.04 PRODUCTDELIVERY,STORAGEANDHANDLING
A. Provide factory shipping cartons or crates for each piece of equipment.
Maintain
these through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent
equipment
damage and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment.
B.
Store equipment and materials inside and protect from weather. Where
necessary
to store outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable
 waterproof
wrapping.

PART2-PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Contractor shall provide complete electric/electronic control systems including,

but
not limited to piping, sensors, controllers, actuators and all other equipment
and
accessories necessary to perform the required functional control of all HVAC
equipment ie. Cooling plant, All ventilation Fans, Basement ventilation system.

2.02 ELECTRIC/ELECTRONICCONTROLS COMPONENTS

shall be Electric 2-way or 3-way as indicated. All valves shall have modulating or
2-
position characteristics as indicated and shall be double seated balance plug
type.
Valves 50 mm and smaller shall be made of bronze with threaded ends. Valves
65
mm and larger shall have flanged ends. All valves shall have preformed, spring
loaded self-adjusting packing of Teflon, and shall have polished stainless steel stem
to minimize friction. Normal rating of pressure 16 Kg/cm , and temperature
from
0°C to 60°C. Control valves shall have equal percentage characteristics
and
selected to have a ratio of valve pressure drop to system pressure drop of 0.5.
For
valve actuators refer to Clause 2.03.D of this Section.

B. Thermostats:
 1. Thermostats and controllers shall be installed as shown in control diagrams; where mounted on
outside walls shall be provided with insulating subbases. If remote sensing elements are
provided, they shall be installed in air zone served in a convenient location subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
2. Integral devices shall permit adjustment of the operating points
through a
temperature range of not less than 5°C above and below the operating points specified.

3. Thermostats shall have minimum throttling ranges of not less than 1°C. all
controllers shall have means for field adjustment of the throttling range.
4. Each room thermostat shall be attached to a sub-base mounted on the wall
or other building surface. They shall be mounted with centre
lines
1.5 metres above floor, and be located where shown, or if not shown, where they will
respond to the average conditions in the space.

5. Duct thermostats (controllers) used for temperature

control shall be remote sensing element type controlled by "Direct Digital
Control Panel". Duct thermostats used for fire protection may be rigid stem
type. Sensing elements (remote built averaging type or rigid stem) shall be located
where they will respond to a representative temperature within the duct or casing.
Operating and adjusting thermostatic mechanisms shall be enclosed in metal or
phenolic resin cases and be installed outside of ducts and casings. Thermostats used
for fire protection may be mounted on outside of ducts or casings.
6. Where the distance from a bulb to a sensing element panel exceeds
manufacturer's maximum recommended capillary length, a remote transmitter,
mounted on the outside of the duct shall be used between the elements and the
operating and adjusting mechanism on the panel. Capillary tubes and wiring
shall be protected by conduit moulding or flexible armour. Excess capillary lengths
shall be neatly fastened out of the way.
7. Remote self-indicating (dial, capillary) thermometers shall have a nominal
size of 85 mm, liquid fill, and chromium plated rings. Accuracy shall be
within one scale subdivision or 1°C whichever is smaller, plus or minus.
8. Remote temperature transmitters shall be
provided where remote transmitters are furnished for the
monitored controller (thermostat) due to the distance between the sensing
element and its operating mechanism.
9. Transmitter-receiver, indicator combinations shall
be calibrated after installation to give an accuracy of plus or minus 1°C at both
the set point and over the normal range of indication for the particular application.

C. Actuators:
1. Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be proportionally acting type as
 required for proper control with spring return. Where sequential operation is
required or positioning power is necessary, a pilot positioner shall be used.
2. Valve Actuators: Control valves shall be fitted
with electric operated
actuators. Where sequence control of two electric operated valves is required
suitable valve pilot positioners shall be provided to ensure that the correct sequence is
maintained with an adjustable dead zone between the movement of each valve.
Actuators shall be arranged so that valves are normally closed unless otherwise
indicated.

Provide actuators of the electro-hydraulic type with oscillating pumps, pressure

cylinders and pistons for energizing the valves.

2.03 DIRECTDIGITALCONTROL(DDC)PANELS

B. Install all control instruments, except fire protection instruments on the panel.
C. Provide standalone DDC controllers for each Air Handling unit. The DDC controller
shall have in-built features available to network in future, for remote monitoring and
control as part of future Building Management System.
The DDC controllers shall have database and critical parameters stored in
NOVRAM for standalone operation. In addition to above features, the controller
shall accept downloaded database and logic sequences.
The DDC controller selected shall have enough universal input/output points
capability so that the controller can accept various input sensors/data points and
provide necessary control outputs such as PID, floating, 2 position, rest, relay and
calculation, time scheduling, etc., depending on the application modules selected.
The DDC controller shall be capable of accepting NTC thermistors, analog inputs of
0-5V dc (selectable to 2-4 volts), 0-10V dc (selectable 4-8 V dc), 0-20 mA
The DDC controller shall be capable of providing discrete outputs of low voltage
trice (optically isolated), low voltage relay, 24 V dc pulse width modulated output,
analog output of 0-10 V dc etc

All controls, instruments, gages, thermostats, relays, etc., shall be flush mounted on
the front of the panel with all wiring, tubing connections accessibly installed for
servicing. Manual switches and push buttons controllers shall be installed in the
cabinet door and shall be visible and operable with the door closed.

Control panel to house above controller shall be constructed of

sheet steel and have hinged doors with suitable gaskets to protect dust ingress.
 D. Identify each piece of equipment on the panel by a nameplate. Nameplate
an approved black laminated Bakelite with engraved white letters,
deep. The entire panel assembly and installation shall be the responsibility
Temperature Control Manufacturer.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLSYSTEMCOMPONENTS

A.
Smoke Detectors: Duct ionization smoke detectors to BS 5445
provided and installed where indicated. Each duct smoke detector
mounted in a housing which shall work in conjunction with air sampling tubes fo
detection of combustion products in the ducts of air handling systems.
of the detector shall be suitable for mounting directly on the duct. The detecto
be compatible with the low voltage power as supplied from a central
housing shall include a "power on" light, an alarm light and a test-reset switch.
Water Flow Switches: Water flow switches shall be provided complete
accessories and shall be constructed of materials suitable for the service inte
Water flow switches shall operate reliably at minimum flows. False alarms sh
B. avoided due to water hammer, surges or variations in water pressure.
shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
Flow Metre: Provide "anubar" type flow metre sensors where indicted
chilled water system sized for pressure, pipe size, flow range and service.
Air Flow Switch: Provide paddle-type air flow switch to detect air movement in
Switch to be single pole double throw (SPDT) with rating of 8 amp at 220 volt AC
shall be designed for duct mounting on top, bottom or side. Switch
C. 0.74 kw (1 HP) fan motor system and larger.

D.

ELECTRICSYSTEMANDDEVICES
2.05
A. All electric switch devices shall be selected for the applied load and
application. All water thermostats shall be provided with a separable
Monel or stainless steel well. Miscellaneous, electric, and mechanical
devices shall
include:
Any automatic control dampers not specified
to be integral with other equipment. Frames shall not be less than 13
gauge galvanized steel. Blades shall not be over 8 inches wide nor less than
16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball-bearing
or nylon with 13 mm shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight-
seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature
ranges of -40 to 93°.

All proportional control dampers shall be

opposed or parallel blade type as hereinafter specified and all two-position
dampers shall be parallel blade types.
b. Dampers shall be sized to meet
flow requirements of the application.
The sheet metal contractor shall furnish and install baffles to fit the damper
to duct size. Baffles shall not exceed 150 mm.

Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the

temperature control manufacturer shall submit leakage data for all control
dampers with the temperature control submittal. Maximum leakage for
dampers in excess of sixteen inches square shall be 152
LPS per square metre at static pressure of 250 Pa of WG.

2. Smoke dampers where indicated on the

plans shall conform to UL555S.
Leakage Class II or III of this document.

Automatic control valves 50 mm and smaller shall be screwed type,

and valves 65 mm and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be ANSI-
rated to withstand the pressures and temperatures encountered.
Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring loaded Teflon
packaging with replaceable discs.

All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such
that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of
the valve's position. Valves shall be sized for a pressure
drop equal to the coil they serve but not less than 35 Kpa.
All automatically controlled devices, unless specified otherwise, shall in
all cases be provided with actuators sized to operate their appropriate
loads with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action
or two- position action and tight close-off.
Actuators shall be provided with suitable
corrosion resistant linkages for valves or dampers. Except as specified
herein, all actuators shall be sized for the load/close off encountered in
strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
All actuators on outside air dampers,
shall be spring return heavy duty type with oil immersed gear train.
Actuators shall drive to their "normal" position anytime their associated
AHU (etc.) is shut down. Actuators for valves above
50 mm shall be spring return heavy duty type with oil immersed gear
train.
Firestats shall be 57 degrees C manual reset type.
Safety low limit shall be manual reset twenty foot limited fill type
responsive to the coolest section of its length.
Electric thermostats shall be line voltage or low voltage type, suitable for
the application. Low voltage type heating thermostats shall
have adjustable heat anticipation.
Duct Smoke Detectors shall contain an air sampling chamber with sampling
tubes extending through the width of the air duct. Alarm status
indicating lights shall be visible on the front of the detector.

2.06 DATAINPUTSANDOUTPUTS

the remote panel for accurate, responsive, noise free signal input/output.
input response shall be high sensitivity and matched to the loop gain
for precise and responsive control. In no case shall computer inputs
derived
from pneumatic sensors or thermocouples.
B. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD)
100,
1000, or 3,000 ohm platinum, or 20,000 ohm.

Space temperature sensors shall be provided with blank commercial

type locking covers with external set point adjustable knob scaled and
calibrated in degrees C.
2. Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid
stem or averaging type as specified
in the sequence of operation. Water
sensors shall be provided with separable copper, Monel or stainless-steel
well.

Dewpoint sensors shall employ a non-reactive organic bobbin material

to give precise dewpoint readings with error of no more than + or
- 1.5 degrees. The dewpoint sensor shall incorporate an integral draft shield as
part of the instrument for air velocities in excess of 50 feet per minute. The
dewpoint sensor shall operate over a minimum dewpoint temperature range
suitable to application.
Outside air, return air, discharge air, return air, space and well sensors shall
have + or - 1.0 degrees C accuracy between 0 degrees and 100 degrees C.
Relative humidity sensors shall be capacitance type with 10% to 90% range.
Duct mounted humidity sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber.
Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with covers identical to
temperature sensors.
Differential and Static Pressure Sensors and Switches:

Fan proof-of-flow switches and clogged filter indicator switches shall be

adjustable set point and differential pressure type. Switches shall be piped to
fan discharge except where fans operate at less than one inch WC, they shall
be piped across the fan. For fractional horsepower and non-ducted fans,
relays or auxiliary contacts may be used. Maximum pressure rating shall be at
least 10 inches WC.
Pump proof-of-flow switches shall be adjustable differential pressure or
flow type as specified in the sequence of operation or data point summary.
Devices shall be 1035 Kpa rated except chilled water flow switches shall be
provided with totally sealed vapour tight switch enclosure on 2070 Kpa body.
Differential pressure switches shall have valved manifold for servicing.

Air flow and duct static pressure analog sensors shall be high
Accuracy suitable for the low pressures to be encountered.
Water flow analog sensors shall be provided complete with flow element
and shall be an all solid state precision industrial type with stainless steel
metre body, maximum error of no more than .5% of span, and 4 to 20 mA
output. Sensor shall be rated for 1725 Kpa minimum and
installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's instructions complete with
three-valve manifold for calibration and maintenance.

2.07 INSTRUMENTATION

components of ratings, capacities and ranges indicated, and as herein

B. Dial Pressure Gauges: Provide general service brass pressure gauges;
with
drawn steel case with friction fitted steel ring, finished in black. Construct
brass
bar stock 14mm square wrench surface; 5-1/2 mm male thread lower
connection,
dial face 100 mm diameter. Gauge accuracy 2% in middle third of range.
Provide
scale ranges as follows:

Scale ranges for domestic hot and cold water, shall be as follows: 0

to 500 Kpa
 0 to 750 Kpa

0 to 1000 KpaAll gauges shall have figure intervals at 100 Kpa and 10 Kpa
graduations. C. Thermometers:

Glass Thermometers: Thermometers shall be of the adjustable angle

type with case of cast aluminum, finished in baked instrument green
epoxy enamel, with magnifying glass lens containing mercury; accuracy
shall be to within 1% of scale. Unit stem length shall be 150 mm, with
male 22 mm diameter NPT connection. Scale ranges shall be as follows:
a. Hot Water - 0 to 100°C
b. Chilled and Condenser Water - 0 to 50°C
All thermometers shall have 10°C figure intervals and 1°C graduations
Remote Reading Dial Thermometer: Remote reading dial thermometer
shall be of the vapour tension type. Case shall be constructed of drawn
steel or brass with glass lens, 100 mm dial face diameter. Tubing shall be
bronze double braided armour over copper capillary, length to suit
installations. Accuracy shall be + one scale division. Scale ranges shall be
same as (1) above.

Thermometer Wells: Provide thermometer wells made of brass or

stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure.
Provide 50 mm extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut
with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
Gauge Fittings:
Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Provide temperature gage
connector plugs pressure rated for 35 Bar and 95°C. Plugs shall be made
of brass, finished in nickel-plate, and equipped with 13 mm NPT
fitting, and orifice suitable for inserting 3 mm O.D. probe assembly
from dial type insertion thermometer. Orifice shall be with gasketed
screw cap and chain. Provide extension length equal to insulation
thickness, for insulated piping.
Pressure Gauge Fittings:
Pressure Gauge Cocks: Provide between pressure gauges and
gauge tees on piping systems. Gauge cock shall be made of brass with
6 mm female NPT on each end, and "T" handle brass plug.
Syphon: 6 mm straight coil made of brass tubing with 6 mm male

NPT on each end.

Snubber: 6 mm brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc,

through which pressure fluid is filtered. Disc material shall be selected
for fluid serviced and pressure rating.
Connector Plugs: Provide pressure gage connector plugs pressure rated
for 35 Bar and 95°C. Plugs shall be of brass, finished in nickel- plate
equipped with 13 mm NPT fitting and self sealing valve core type
neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 3 mm O.D. probe
assembly from dial type insertion pressure gage. Orifice shall
be equipped with gasketed screw cap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to
insulation thickness, for insulated piping.
Flow Measuring Gages: Calibrated Balance Valves (DRVPT): Provide where
indicated, calibrated balance "y" or globe type valves equipped with readout
connections with valves to facilitate connecting off differential pressure metre.
Each readout valve shall be equipped with integral EPT check valve designed to
minimize system fluid loss during monitoring process. Provide calibrated
nameplate to indicate degree of closure of precision machined orifice. Balancing
valve shall have internal EPT o-ring seals to prevent leakage around rotating
element. Provide balance valves with preformed
polyurethane insulation suitable for use on cooling systems, and to protect
balance valves during shipment.

PART3-EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

instructions, approved shop drawings and details on drawings. Install electrical

work
and use electrical products complying with the requirements of the
applicable electrical sections of these specifications. Mount controllers
convenient
3.02 WIRING

A. Install the complete wiring system for electrical temperature controls.

Conceal wiring except in the mechanical rooms and areas where

electrical conduits are exposed. Provide multi-conductor instrument
(bundle) in place of a single conductor where a number of conductors
run along with a common path. Fasten flexible conductors bridging
and doors, neatly
 B. Number code or color code conductors, excluding those used for local
individual room controls, appropriately for future identification and
servicing of the control system.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION
A. After completion of the entire temperature control installation the
is to demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior
acceptance, that all control systems and associated equipment which are the
responsibility of the control manufacturer are calibrated, installed and operating
in accordance with the project drawings and specifications
manufacturer's most recent published
3.04 INSTRUCTIONS
A. The instruction period for the automatic temperature control system
not
be less than 10 man-days. This period shall be in addition to any time
specified under any other section of these specifications.

SECTION 21
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section - Basic Mechanical

Requirements. B. Section -Fans.

1.02 REFERENCES
 AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
B AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller
Bearings. C AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
E AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving
Devices. F AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
H NFPA 70 - National Electrical
Code. J IEEE - 112B, 587 and 519

SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances,
construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
Product Data:
Provide literature which indicates dimensions, weights,
capacities, ratings,performance, gages and finishes of materials,and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
Submit sound power level data for casing radiation over full operatingrange, as tested
and certified per AMCA standards.

Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring

including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-
installed and field-installed wiring.
C Manufacturer's Installation Instructions

1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

Maintenance Data: Include instructions for routine service, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

Manufacturer: As per approved manufacturer list.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-
installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle
carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS:
In general, all capacities of equipment and electrical characteristics are shown in

schedules on the Drawings. Reference shall be made to the schedules for such information. The
capacities shown are minimum capacities. Variations in the capacities of the scheduled
equipment supplied under this contract will be permitted only with the written direction of the
owner. All equipment shall be shipped to the job with not less than a prime coat of paint or as
specified

hereinafter. Where installation instructions are not included in these Specifications or on the
Drawings, the manufacturer's instructions shall be followed.

PART 2 PRODUCT

MANUFACTURERS
As per approved manufacturer list.

GENERAL

Furnish and install complete 6-step variable voltage, variable frequency (VFD)speed
controllers, as specified herein. All of the variable speed controllers shall be supplied by
one manufacturer for this project. Motors must have a "bypass" switch as specified
herein, to allow them to run if the controller malfunctions. All safety devices shall be
energized. If an equal is proposed and accepted,
Contractor must include installation and start-up by manufacturer's authorized personnel.
The Contractor shall furnish and install Variable Speed Drive motor controllers to vary and
pump schedules on the Drawings. One controller shall control the speed of one motor
only. See schedules and Drawings for quantity of controllers required.
The variable speed drive shall produce an adjustable AC voltage and frequency output
for complete motor control using solid state t echnology. The VSD shall be
automatically controlled by a grounded electronic (4-20 ma) control signal. The drive
shall produce an output
volts/Hertz pattern to produce adequate starting torque under all conditions and
operate smoothly at all operating speeds on variable torque load. The
VSD shall be self-contained totally enclosed in NEMA 1 ventilated cabinet and capable
of operation between 0 degrees and 40 degrees Celsius.

Vest's shall be ETL or UL listed. All components used on option units shall be
ETL or UL listed. Vest's shall be designed to meet
IEEE-587 and shall comply with all applicable provisions of the latest revision of the
National Electric Code. The VSD shall comply with IEEE-519 with respect to the line noise
 generation.

The controllers shall be suitable for use with both standard and high efficiency 3- phase,
squirrel cage, induction motors.

The service factor of the controller shall be equal to 0.95 with a power unit rating basis
of 100 percent rated current continuous. Rated continuous current of the VSD shall be
equal to 110% of driven motor's FLA rating.

Each controller shall consist of a converter, D.C. link filter or supply power back feed RF
(radio frequency) filter, and an inverter section with each section modularized for ease of
troubleshooting. PWM controllers shall also have output line filters for motor noise
reduction. All components shall be factory mounted and wired on a dead-front, grounded,
freestanding or wall mounted minimum NEMA 1 enclosure arranged for top or bottom
conduit entry.

The controller enclosure shall be provided with the manufacturer's illustrated operating
instructions and parts list mounted inside the enclosure door, manual speed control
potentiometer, three position mode selector switch ("manual - off - auto", or equivalent),
"power on" light, auxiliary relays and contacts for interlock and control wiring.

The 6-step VSD shall convert 415 volt, three phase 50 Hertz utility power to variable
voltage and frequency, three phase, AC power. Both 6-step and PWM shall be designed
to provide stepless motor control from 20 percent to 100 percent of base speed.

FEATURES
The VSD shall incorporate the

following minimum features:

Input power: 415 V/3 phase/50 Hz.

Input fused disconnect switch.

Input line filter capable of protecting the electronics against transient voltage spikes or
notches, as well as backfeed of RF (Radio Frequency) interference,into the incoming
power supply.
Fuseless electronic power protection for ground fault protection.
Isolation transformers for ground fault protection
are not acceptable. Ground fault shall not cause
fuses to open.
 The following door mounted devices:

1. "Power on" light

2. Hand/off/auto (or equivalent) selector switch
3. Manual speed potentiometer (1000 ohms) and ammeter
4. Digital display unit
5. Status, frequency/percent speed and fault diagnostics
Minimum/maximum adjustable speeds
Disconnect switch and thermal motor overloads.
Manual speed control during manual control mode.
A thermally protected transfer switch for manual bypass of the VSD.
The VSD shall have auto-restart after power failure, power surge, undercurrent and
overcurrent. Overcurrent restart shall be limited to a maximum of five attempts.
Electronic and control follower board.
External signal shutdown feature (i.e. fire/smoke, freeze, operable and normal
bypass mode).
Output terminal for remote frequency and current meters (4 to 20 ma).

Trip relay for remote fault indication.

A door interlock, designed to cut power to the unit when the door is opened.
Instantaneous overcurrent trip.
Unit o temperature protection.
A bypass switch which shall simultaneously isolate the VSD from input and output
power, and provide line power directly to the motor. The bypass switch shall also
have the capability of starting and stopping the motor The switch shall consist of an
enclosure separate from the VSD. The following shall be mounted on the
Enclo sure door:
Door interlocked main input disconnect switch
Power on light.
"Drive-off-bypass" manual mode selector switch
A "normal operation-off-test" selector to facilitate static
testing of the drive at startup or while the motor is
operating in the bypass mode.
Speed lockout circuitry to allow the lockout or bypass of
at least three speed ranges within the full range of the
controller.
DISCONNECT AND INTERFACE
The following shall be mounted within the enclosure:
Line, load and bypass contactors capable of
interrupting the locked rotor rating of the driven motor. Bypass
and load contactors must be mechanically interlocked to prevent
simultaneous closure.
Overload relay
A dedicated terminal strip to allow the controller to be interconnected
with external shutdown contacts from smoke detectors, fire detectors,
damper interlocks, freeze-stats, time clocks, remote master on-off
switch, energy management and control system (FCMS) and input
signals. The system must be capable of shutdown whether in the drive or
in the bypass mode by remote detectors.

FAULT DETECTION DEVICES

A diagnostic fault detection center shall be integral to each VSD,
providing an indication of the following fault conditions:
External fault
Processor line fault
Low AC line voltage
High AC line voltage
Current overload
High DC buss voltage
VSD output fault

CONTROL
All control adjustments shall be made without the necessity of an extender board of
specialized meters, but rather from front access adjustable potentiometers.
Low voltage logic and 115 V control circuits shall be electrically Isolated from the
power circuits. Signal circuit common shall be grounded.
The VSD shall include a power ride-through feature to allow continuous
operation through up to a three to five cycle line loss.
Electronic output overload protection shall be provided to eliminate the
use of bimetallic overloads. The drive shall not be phase sequence sensitive.
The VSD shall have independently adjustable acceleration and deceleration circuits
of 5 to 120 seconds. Extended time periods are also acceptable.
The VSD shall have full function output current limit adjustable f rom 10 to 100
percent.
SYSTEM OPERATION
Selector switch in the "off" position - the controller run circuit shall be open and the
system shall not operate.
Selector switch in the "manual" position - the speeds of the motors shall be
controlled by the manual speed potentiometer.
Selector switch in the "auto" position - operation shall be via the input 0 to 10 VDC
signal with the output speed proportional to the input signal. If required for
incorporation into the controls s cenario, the VSD manufacturer shall furnish a
pressure transducer mounted in the drive enclosure to convert a 3 to 15 psi pressure
signal to a 0 to 10 VDC signal.

The bypass switch shall provide the ability to service the control in bypass operation
while not de-energizing the motor. It shall also allow for start/stop functions for the
motor.

In case of an output ground fault or similar abnormal output condition, any VSD
serving multiple units shall be able to automatically alternate its output to either the
duty device or the standby device. The VSD shall be fully operational after an output
ground fault condition.

PART 3 EXECUTION

As part of the purchase price and agreement, a full, unconditional, one (1) year warranty
on all parts and labor shall be provided. The warranty shall include all parts, labor,
shipping, field service or technician time, labor or travel expenses and verbal or written
correspondence with the VSD manufacturer or his representatives, including that which
might be incidental to the proper installation and operation of the equipment.

The manufacturer's representative shall provide a list of recommended spare parts.

The manufacturer's representative shall provide terminal block to terminal block wiring
 diagrams coordinated with the owner to provide a complete and functional operating
system. Furnish detailed drawings showing construction, dimensions, wiring diagrams
and installation procedures for engineer's approval.

The manufacturer shall provide a factory trained technician to start the VSD and place it
into operation.

VSD's shall be wall hung units. Contractor shall provide instruct mounting bracket for
drives. Contractor shall reinforce the wall studs with bracing as required to adequately
support the drive. Installation of the VSD shall allow for clearance in front of the drive as
required by the latest revision of the National Electric Code for an electrical panel.

3..06 TESTING

Components shall be pretested and complete VSD shall have full burn-in under full load
for a minimum of 12 hours with the driven device and motor to be furnished for this
project. VSD's shall be shipped to the pump or fan manufacturer for testing. The units
shall be operated over the full speed range to certify noise and vibration limits are met.

Vibration shall be measured at each bearing in all three places and shall not exceed 1.0
mils in any plane.
Ambient noise generated by the VSD shall be limited to an amount equal to the system
noise level as designated by the latest ASHRAE noise level guidelines for such
equipment. Noise level criteria at different octave bands and mid-frequencies shall be
furnished with the submittal data.

Up to two of the three lock-out ranges can be used to avoid out of tolerance noise or
vibration conditions. Maximum range of any lock-out range shall be limited to 50 RPM..
 SECTION 22
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

GENERAL
Reference
Conform to general requirements for mechanical services of division 15.
Description of Work
Furnish and install air outlets as indicated on drawings.
Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:

Ceiling air diffusers

Wall registers and grilles
Louvers
Refer to section 15810 for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction with air
outlets and inlets.
Refer to section 15950 for balancing of air outlets and inlets.
Quality Assurance
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms r e g u l a r l y e n g a g e d in
manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
Codes and Standard:
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI650 “Standard
for air outlets and inlets”
ASHRAE Compliance:Test and rate air outlets and inlet in accordance with ASHRAE 70
“Method of Testing for Rating the Air flow Performance of outlets and Inlet”.
ADC Seal: Provide aiCr outlets and inlets bearing ADC certified rating seal.
AMCA compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 “Test Method for
Louvers, Dampers and Shutters”.
MCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified rating seal.

Submittals
 Product Data : Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for air outlets and inlets
including the following:
Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawings designation, room location, number
furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished, indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration
ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings.
Indicate selections on data.
Shop Drawings : Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit
dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, construction details,
and field connection details.
Submit mock-up installation for CONSULTANT approval before final selection.
Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:
Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory fabricated fiber
board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or
inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent
dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from
weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors;
when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with
waterproof wrapping.

2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 GeCneral

2.1.1 Select all diffusers to provide uniform air coverage without overlap. Air
velocity up to a height of 6’ (1.8m) above the floor shall be 25 to 50 fpm (0.13 to
0.25 m/s).
2.1.2 Noise generated by outlet or inlet at peak volume shall be such that room
sound pressure level does not exceed
-12 noise criterion 26 with an 8 Db. Room attenuation; the
sound power level reference to 10 power watts
2.1.3 All volume and air pattern devices shall be fully adjustable from the face of
the diffuser, register or grille
2.1.4 Size of all round flexible or rigid duct connections to diffusers shall be the same
size as diffuser inlet diameter.
2.1.5 Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be arranged for flush mounting in lay-in
type ceilings and overlap mounting in plaster, mineral tile and similar ceilings,
with concealed fixings unless otherwise directed.
2.1.6 Grilles, register and diffuser locations shall be adjusted to suit reflected
ceiling drawings, or site instructions. It is recommended that all grilles,
registers, diffusers, louvers be from one manufacturer.
2.1.7 All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be supplied completely
factory powder coated. Finish colour shall be to the approval of the CONSULTANT.
The interior of all grilles and diffusers is to be factory painted matt black
2.1.8 All supply grilles and diffusers will have opposed blade balancing dampers. All
will have foam rubber sealing band around the edge to seal to the structure. All
pivots will be round section, not of formed sheet, and not relying on a spring steel
locking wire.
2.1.9 Unless otherwise specified basic grilles and diffuser materials shall be
Aluminium extruded sections. Sections in the airstream shall be carefully
selected to minimize turbulence.
2.1.10 All grilles and diffusers supplied on this project shall be tested and rated in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70-72, ADC Test Code 1062-GRD and
ISO1374.
2.2 Linear Bar Grilles
Linear bar grilles shall be fabricated from aluminium, with 6.4mm wide bars on

12.5mm centres pressed into a notched steel retaining bar. The core can be either welded
into the cuter frame, or, where the grille is used in a sill application, held in the outer frame
by spring clips fixed to the core retaining bar.

The outer frame shall be 35mm deep and shall have a visible flange 25.4 mm wide.
Mitred end caps shall be welded to give a near invisible joint.

The grill shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black, and shall
be fixed with universal mounting brackets. Both the
damper and the fixing brackets shall be accessible through the face of the grille.

Continuous grilles shall be provided with positive alignment strips, which fit into special
keyways extruded into the frame of the grille to ensure clean unbroken lines.
2.3 Four-way Ceiling Diffusers
Ceiling Diffusers shall be multicone giving 4 way horizontal discharge

The three centre cones of the diffuser shall be manufactured from pressed
aluminium, with the remaining cones and the outer frame fabricated from extruded
aluminium welded at the corners to give near invisible joint
The core shall be removable without the use of special tools, but for safety, shall be
fixed to the outer frame by a small length of chain.
The diffuser shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black. All
supply air diffusers shall be provided with an equalizing grid.
2.4 Wall Register
Wall registers shall be double deflection fabricated from aluminium, the front vanes being horizontal,
the rear vanes vertical. This grille shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt black
and adjustable from the face of the diffuser.
Both sets of vanes shall be fully adjustable without the use of special tools.
2.5 Eggcrate Grille
Eggcrate return or extract grille shall be provided with a steel lattice core of 12.7mm x

12.7mm openings, giving a free area of 90%.

The core shall be fixed into an extruded aluminium frame, with welded corners and a 25mm face flange.

The grille shall be complete with wire mesh and an opposed blade damper painted matt black and
adjustable through the face of the diffuser.
2.6 Circular Ceiling Diffusers
Circular ceiling diffuser shall be of aluminium construction with two concentric inner spinnings.

The diffuser core shall be fully adjustable for vertical or horizontal air discharge, and shall be removable
without the use of special tools.
A flap damper shall be provided in the neck of the diffuser which is adjustable from the diffuser face.
2.7 Linear Slot Diffusers
Linear Slot diffusers shall provide an unobtrusive continuous air diffusion with a pleasing aesthetic
appearance. Hairline butt joints shall ensure clean unbroken linear runs for active and dummy sections
The diffusers shall be complete with pattern control blades, fully adjustable from face of diffuser
through 180 degrees and shall be fitted with end caps at each end.

The diffuser members shall be constructed from high quality aluminium extrusions to BS 1474 while the

pattern control blades shall be of black rigid PVC.

2.8 Exhaust Disc Valves

 Exhaust valves shall be manufactured from high quality sheet steel spinnings protected by a stove
enameled or powder coated paint finish. Flanges shall be fitted with sealing gaskets.

The valves shall be installed with the aid of a mounting ring and air flow adjusted by rotating the
central disc. Finish of valves shall be to the CONSULTANT’s approval.
2.9 Extract Air Louvres
Louvres shall be extruded Aluminium frame with Aluminium blades of not less than 2 mm thickness,
and shall be firmly fixed so as not to vibrate. Unsupported blade width shall not exceed 1800 mm.
Behind each louvre shall be an insect mesh screen 76 x 6 mm made from 2 mm
diameter stainless steel wire. The screen will be clamped by a 20 mm frame and will be firmly fixed to
the outer edges of the louvre. The frame shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

The connection to the louvre shall be flexible and shall ensure no duct load is transmitted to the
louvre.
Louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the CONSULTANT.

2.10 Sand Trap Louvre for Air Intake

Sand trap louvres shall have a double deflection inlet passage to separate sand from incoming air by
means of centrifugal forces.

Separation efficiency particle size 350-700 shall not be less than 90% at a face velocity of 1M/Sec and
not less than 70% at a face velocity of 2M/sec.
Sand trap louvre shall be of aluminium construction, self cleaning and maintenance free. The base of
the louvre shall have self-emptying sand holes.

Pressure drop at 2 M/Sec average face velocity shall not exceed 120 pascals. Stainless steel insect

mesh shall be included.

Sand louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of THE CONSULTANT.
2.11 Jet Nozzles
Jet flow nozzles shall be of high quality aluminium construction suitable for larger throw distances with
optimum acoustic properties. The nozzles shall be manually adjustable within an angular range
of 30 degrees upwards to 30 degrees downwards.

3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
3.1.1 Verify inlet/outlet locations.
3.1.2 Verify the size of air terminals to achieve proper air pattern.
3.1.3 Verify ceiling and wall systems are ready for installation
 3.1.4 Ensure the noise generated by air terminals is within the permissible range.
3.1.5 Coordinate beginning and completion of installation with other works.

3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Install all Air Inlets and Air Outlets as indicated on project drawings and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.2.2 Where electrical reheat coils are provided with air terminal boxes, provide duct access doors
in ductwork upstream and downstream of reheat coil. Duct access doors shall be of the
necessary dimensions to access and replace reheat coils.
3.2.4 Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Or as per
architectural specifications.
3.2.5 Interface with other products
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

3.3 Cleaning
3.3.1 Protect all Air Inlets and Air Outlets against entry of foreign matter during construction works.
3.3.2 Remove all dirt and foreign matter from the entire duct system and clean diffusers,
registers and grilles before operating fans.
3.3.3 Provide temporary capping to prevent entry of foreign matter during construction.

3.3.4 Clean duct systems, Air Inlets and Air Outlets with high power vacuum machines.
Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning.
Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

3.4 Identification
The identification shall be as detailed in standards listed in this Section as well as per Section 15075

Mechanical Identification.

3.5 Testing, Balancing and Commissioning:

Coordinate adjustment of Air Inlets an Air Outlets with procedures of Testing, Balancing and
Commissioning as detailed in standards listed in this Section as well as per Section 15950 Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing.

- End of Section –
 SECTION 01
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DRAWINGS, INSTRUCTIONS AND SAMPLES

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS LISTS:
Approximately 30 days after award of Contract, submit lists of equipment
and materials, with names of proposed manufacturers and drawings of
interrelated items. All submissions are to show submis- sion dates.

SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:

Two months prior to commencement submit for approval detailed shop
and installation drawings showing to-scale dimensions of equipment, pipes
etc. in plan and elevation with clearances and rela- tion of same to space
assigned.

SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:

Of equipment and material are to include manufacturer's detailed
drawings, cuts of catalogues and descriptive literature showing type,
performance characteristics, construction, component parts, dimensions,
arrangement, operating clearances, capacity, electrical characteristics,
power requirements, motor, drive and testing information.

SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:

Submit manufacturer's certified drawings, templates and installation
instructions for all equipment showing operating weights, weight
distribution, location of vibration isolation mounts, size and location of
anchor bolts, drainage and other openings and other pertinent data to
assist in design of bases and supports.

SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:

Mark clearly in ink catalogues, pamphlets and manufacturer's drawings for
proper identification of item proposed and indicate, with reasons,
deviations from the Specification and the Drawings.
 SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:
Submit for approval in letterform, materials not covered by drawings e.g.
pipes, fittings and incidentals giving ratings and names of manufacturers.

SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:

No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to Site until
drawings etc. have been approved.

FURTHER DRAWINGS:
During the progress of the work, submit shop-drawings, to 1/20 or 1/10
scale, as required by the Engineer and as specified elsewhere.

ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS:
Are generally diagrammatic and are not to be scaled. Measurements
are to be made from estab- lished bench marks.

ENGINEERS DRAWINGS:
Check all architectural, structural and electrical drawings in laying
out work to verify adequacy of space in which work is to be installed.
Notify the Engineer where space appears inadequate.

SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:

Reference to equipment or material by name, make or catalogue number
and lists of approved manufacturers are to be interpreted as establishing
standard of quality and performance and are not intended to eliminate
equivalent products of other manufacturers.

MINOR CHANGES AND MODIFICATIONS:

May be made in layout to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for
proper execution of the work.

COOPERATE:
With other trades to permit their work to be installed satisfactorily and
with minimum interference or delay.

COORDINATE:
Space requirements in shafts, chases, double partitions and hung ceilings
with other trades. FURNISH :
To other trades templates, patterns, setting out plans and shop details
necessary for proper installation and coordination of adjacent work.

PROTECTION:
Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage
and construction. PAINT FINISH:
Equipment to have factory applied enamel paint finish.

INSTRUCTION MANUALS:
Provide six copies in bound booklet form containing the following
information:
brief description of each system and piece of equipment with basic
operating features
descriptive literature of equipment and components with manufacturer's
name, model number, capacity rating and operating characteristics service
manual prepared by manufacturer for every major piece of equipment
giving operating and maintenance instructions, starting and shut-down
instructions, lubrication instructions and list of possible breakdown and
repairs
manufacturer's list of general spare parts for every piece of equipment,
with unit prices
manufacturer's list of recommended spare parts for one year of operation
for every piece of equipment, with unit prices detailed and simplified one
line, colour coded flow diagram of each system with tag number, location
and function of each valve and instrument detailed and simplified colour
coded as-installed wiring diagrams of motor controllers and automatic
controls with tag number, location of each instrument and electrical device
with description of sequence of operation and interlocks.
INSTRUCTION MANUALS:
Submit in draft form for review and approval prior to final issue and at
least four weeks in advance of completion date of the system.

RECORD DRAWINGS:
Submit an approved complete set of as- built drawings and electrical
wiring diagrams in tracing or other reproducible form.

SAMPLES:
Submit samples of proposed materials and workmanship for approval.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

ACCESS:
Install work to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
Approved deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this.

PURPOSE:
Ensure that access doors and frames are provided for easy access to
concealed equipment, controls, valves, traps, vents, drains, clean-outs, and
other devices requiring periodic operation, inspection and maintenance.

DETAILS:
Access doors and frames are to be provided by others. Provide details,
dimensions and locations of access doors required and submit for approval
in sufficient time to enable doors to be installed during normal course of
work.

IDENTIFICATION:
Access doors are to be identified to indicate location of concealed work.
Method and schedule for identification of access doors is to be approved.
411:3 LABELS, TAGS AND CHARTS
NAMEPLATES:
Each piece of equipment is to have a conspicuous certified nameplate
permanently attached at fac- tory, printed or stamped clearly with name
and address of manufacturer, equipment model number, serial number,
date of manufacture, electrical characteristics, performance rating or duty,
pressure, temperature or other limitations and other pertinent data.

LABEL AND IDENTIFY:

Equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, valves etc. as to duty,
service or function. Label controls and electrical devices to indicate clearly
what they control.

LABELS:
Attach to equipment etc. or to adjacent permanent surfaces in an
approved permanent manner. TAG
Controls and instruments that cannot be easily identified with Bakelite
labels. TAG:
Valves and controls except equipment shut-off valves located at
equipment.

LABELS AND TAGS:

Submit for approval a schedule of equipment and devices to be labelled
and tagged, with suggested nomenclature

CHARTS:
Are to be prepared of schematic flow diagrams of each piping system with
location and function of each valve and with type and size of each essential
feature of the system.

CHARTS:
Prepare schedules for equipment lubrication and maintenance and
essential operating instructions.

CHARTS:
Submit for approval.

CHARTS:
Mount on wooden plaques or 6 mm Masonite boards, cover with heat
bonded clear plastic laminate or frame under glass and permanently fix
with four brass screws at approved locations.
TRAINING
INSTRUCT AND TRAIN:
Employer's designated personnel in the operation and maintenance of
every part, device and piece of equipment in the systems, with emphasis
on proper start-up and shut-down procedures, preventive maintenance
and lubrication procedures with recommended lubricants, overhaul and
maintenance methods, adjustment and calibration of instruments and
controls, use of special tools and safe practices.

EXPENSES:
The Employer will bear all expenses of his personnel allocated for training.

INITIAL OPERATIONS OF SYSTEMS

AFTER INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE:
Operate systems for time required to complete tests specified under
CLEANING, TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING, to demonstrate
performance in accordance with design requirements and to provide
instruction and training to the Employer's designated personnel.

COMMENCEMENT DATE:
Obtain approval of commencement date.
NOISE AND VIBRATION
EQUIPMENT:
Is to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable sound or
vibration.
NOISE AND VIBRATION:
Noticeable outside a room in which moving equipment is installed, or
annoyingly noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable.

NOISE LEVEL:
Resulting from equipment and heard in the same building or nearby
buildings is not to exceed 40 decibels as measured with a standard sound
level meter on the 'A' scale.

CORRECTION:
Conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved
means and as directed.

VIBRATION CONTROL:

Is to be by approved vibration isolators applied and installed in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions.

GUARANTEE:
Is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, acceptable noise and
vibration levels and reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water.

DEFECTS DURING GUARANTEE PERIOD:

If during guarantee period any equipment or material proves defective or
any part of system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced
and defects and malfunctions corrected as directed by the Engineer.
EXTENSION OF GUARANTEE:
If during guarantee period any piece of equipment is replaced or rebuilt,
the guarantee period for this equipment is to be extended for a new
period equal to the original guarantee period.

MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION:

Provide necessary skills and labour to assure proper operation and to
provide regular and preventive maintenance required for equipment and
controls during guarantee period, on a continuous 24 hour basis.

MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION:

Act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or
system.

MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION:

Provide the Employer with monthly inspection certificates of equipment,
record findings on a check list and certify that each piece of equipment has
been examined, is operating as intended and has been properly
maintained as recommended by manufacturer.

MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION:

Check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function as designed.

SPARE PARTS:
For normal wear and tear are to be provided by the Employer.
STANDARDS
STANDARDS: abbreviations are to mean the following: ANSI - American
National Standards Institute

ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

ASME - American society of Mechanical Engineers

AGA - American Gas Association

BS - British Standards

DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normalisierung

ISO - International Standardization Organization

FM - Factory Mutual

NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

NBS - National Bureau of Standards

SAE - Society of Automotive Engineers

UL - Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.

DM - Dubai Municipality requirement, regulation and by laws Local Civil
Defence requirement.
SECTION 02
PIPES AND FITTINGS
PRODUCTS
PIPES AND FITTINGS
STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

150 mm diameter and under to be galvanized, seamless to BS l387, heavy

class, ISO 65 or DIN 2440.
FITTINGS FOR GALVANIZED STEEL PIPES:

Fittings for black steel pipes 50 mm diameter and under to be 1030 kPa
steam working pressure rating, banded type.

FITTINGS FOR GALVANIZED STEEL PIPES

Over 50-mm diameter to be steel seamless butt-welding with 37 degrees

bevelled ends, of same schedule, thickness and rating as pipe of
corresponding size.

FITTINGS FOR GALVANIZED STEEL PIPES:

Where backwelding is required to be screwed forged steel .

FLANGES:

To be of same pressure rating, facing, drilling and thickness as mating

flanges on valves, accessories and equipment.

FLANGES ON GALVANIZED STEEL PIPES:

To be black forged steel slip-on or weld neck type.

GASKETS:

For flanged joints in ductile iron pipes to be high grade natural rubber to
BS 2494 Part 1.

GASKETS:

for flat face flanges on steel pipes to be full face ring type with punched
holes.

RING GASKETS:

1.5 mm thick asbestos composition.

BOLTS AND NUTS:

Black steel to BS 4190 of length to allow nuts to utilize full length of

thread.

THREAD SEALANT:

Teflon tape or approved special joint compound.

FERROUS PIPES AND FITTINGS

CAST IRON SOIL PIPES AND FITTINGS: to BS 416 for above ground and BS
437 for below ground, spigot and socket type, with lead grooves in socket
and beads on spigot, factory coated internally and externally by dipping in
bitumen base solution.
DUCTILE IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS: to BS 4772, K12, with NP 16 flanges
integrally cast. Pipes to be centrifugally cast. Fittings to be double flanged
of same standard and manufacture as pipe. Pipe and fittings to be coated
at factory with coal tar base solution to BS 4l64.

FERROUS PIPEWORK

HORIZONTAL CAST IRON PIPES: support at every joint, at base of each

vertical stack, at each change in direction, at each branch connection and
at not more than 1.5 m spaces on straight runs.
HORIZONTAL CAST IRON PIPES: securely attach U-channel support to
structure with 20 mm masonry expansion bolts.

VERTICAL CAST IRON PIPES: support at a minimum of each storey height.

DUCTILE IRON PIPES: support with at least one support per length of pipe
and at intervals not exceeding 3.5 m with hanger preferably located
adjacent to joint.

JOINT CAST IRON PIPES by caulking.

FLANGED JOINTS IN DUCTILE IRON PIPE: do not cut flanged pipes to fit
required lengths. Use special flanged short pieces.

FLANGED JOINTS IN DUCTILE IRON PIPE: where flanged short pieces of

standard length do not close gap left between flanges, use special plain
end distance pieces or pipe blocks of same material and pressure class as
pipes.

FLANGED JOINTS IN DUCTILE IRON PIPE: use special long tie bolts with two
nuts to bolt flanges together with distance piece or pipe block between.
Distance piece to be gasketed at both ends to flanges.

FLANGED JOINTS IN DUCTILE IRON PIPE: where flanges on equipment do

not match pipe or fitting flanges provide approved flanged steel adaptors.
COPPER PIPEWORK

SUPPORT pipes at intervals not exceeding maximum support spacing and

by hanger rod of minimum size as follows:

Pipe Diameter Maximum Support Spacing Minimum Size of Hanger

Rod
Pipes Pipes
Horizontal Vertical

mm m mm

42 and smaller1.8 1.2 m 10

54 3.0 each storey 10
67 3.0 each storey 13
76.1 3.0 each storey 13
108 3.0 each storey 16

LINE iron supports with felt between pipe and support to prevent
electrolytic corrosion.

JOINTS: make using 45-5 tin-antimony solder with soldering flux suitable
for application.

JOINTS: do not enlarge pipe when reaming.

JOINTS between copper pipe and threaded valves or steel pipes to be

made by brass threaded connectors with solder cup one end and threaded
to British Standard Taper Pipe Thread other end, or by copper flanges with
solder cup end, depending on size of pipe. Unions on copper pipes to have
solder cup ends.

NON-FERROUS PIPES AND FITTINGS

NON PRESSURE PVC PIPE:

To BS 5255 for 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm pipes, to BS 4514 for 82 mm,

110 mm and 160 mm pipes installed above ground, to BS 4660 for 110 mm
and 160 mm pipes installed below ground and to BS 3506 for 200 mm
pipes and above.

NON PRESSURE PVC FITTINGS:

Couplers joints with rubber sealing rings.

SEALING RINGS ON PVC PIPES:

To provide for expansion and contraction to be rubber to BS 2494 Part 2.

PIPE ACCESSORIES

To be same size as pipe run.

PIPE UNIONS:

On threaded pipes 50 mm diameter and under to have female

threaded ends and ground metal to metal seats. Unions to be of
same manufacture, pressure class and material as other pipe
fittings.

ELBOWS :

To be long radius type.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:

Seamless bronze tubing with annular corrugations covered with high

tensile bronze braid suitable for 1030 kPa cold water working pressure.

FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS :

To have screwed ends for pipes 50 mm diameter and under and flanged
ends for pipes over 50 mm diameter.

EXPANSION JOINTS:
Stainless steel, packless bellows type, suitable for 130 kPa steam working
pressure and 1720 kPa cold water working pressure.

EXPANSION JOINTS:

To have screwed ends for pipes 50 mm diameter and under and flanged
ends for pipes over 50 mm diameter.

EXPANSION JOINTS:
(U.K.)

IWK (Germany)

Zallea Brothers (U.S.A.)

Anaconda (U.S.A.)

Flexonics (U.S.A.)
Keflex, Inc. (U.S.A.)

or approved equal.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

Submit drawings for approval.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

Are to allow adjustment of slope of piping and removal without

dismantling pipes.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

To be designed and tested to sustain load 8 times actual supported load.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

To be steel with smooth flat bearing surfaces, to carry weight of piping and
contents without sagging, swaying, vibrating or deforming, and allowing
free movement of pipes due to expansion and contraction without noise
or damage to piping or construction.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

To be complete with all necessary structural steel, rods, bolts, nuts,

turnbuckles and other components.
PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES:

20 mm diameter U-bolts to fit around pipe loosely for guides and welded
to pipe for anchors.

WORKMANSHIP
PIPEWORK GENERALLY
INSTALL:

Pipework in accordance with best engineering practice to present a neat,

pleasing appearance. Vertical pipes to be plumb and horizontal pipes
pitched up in direction of flow to allow proper venting and drainage.

GROUP:

pipes together where practicable and run in straight parallel lines close
and parallel to walls, ceilings and columns.

CLEARANCE:

Leave adequate clearance between pipes and adjacent pipes, walls,

ceilings and columns for making joints properly, easy installation and
removal of valves and accessories and proper installation of insulation and
in- dividual pipe hangers and supports.

ACCESSIBILITY:

Install concealed piping to permit easy accessibility for maintenance and

repair, particularly of valves, vents, drains and other accessories.

AIR POCKETS:

Install piping to avoid air pockets and dirt traps.

AIR POCKETS:
Use eccentric reducers where appropriate to avoid air pockets, with flat of
reducer on top on water piping to permit proper venting of system.

EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION:

Install piping to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to

piping or structure. Provide adequate offsets and changes of direction to
accomplish this and on long runs provide expansion loops or expansion
joints.

EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION:

Where pipe loops or changes in direction cannot be employed to absorb

thermal movement provide expansion joints and pipe anchors and guides.

INSPECTION:

Do not paint, cover or enclose piping until it is tested, inspected and

approved.

JOINTS:

Cut pipes square and to exact length with a hacksaw. Ream cut end with a
special tool to full inside diameter and remove chips.

THREADED JOINTS:

Threads to be cut to British Standard Taper Pipe Thread. Cut threads with
new dies and remove burrs and chips with wire brush.

THREADED JOINTS:

Make up tight close to shoulder of male thread. Use Teflon tape, thread
sealant or other approved special jointing compound.

FLANGED JOINTS:

Make perfectly square with pipe, fit with rings gaskets and assemble with
steel square head machine bolts and hexagonal nuts.
PIPE UNIONS OR FLANGES:

Provide at connections to equipment, near valves, controls, strainers and

other accessories requiring removal.

PIPE UNIONS OR FLANGES:

Provide at adequate intervals in piping to permit easy disassembly.

PIPE UNIONS OR FLANGES:

Fit between valves and equipment to permit removal of equipment

without disturbing piping.

EXPANSION JOINTS:

When used give consideration to anchoring and guiding pipes for

controlled expansion and contraction. Follow instructions of manufacturer.
FITTINGS:

Changes in direction and size, branching and jointing of pipes are to be

made with regular pipe fittings. Do not bend pipe.

FITTINGS:

Field fabricated fittings, bushings, close nipples and street elbows will not
be allowed.

CONNECTIONS TO MOVING EQUIPMENT:

Make through flexible connections. Provide shut-off valves on both sides of

equipment. Make any reductions in pipe size at equipment connections
with all pipe accessories of same size as pipe runs.

CLEANING:

Clean equipment, materials and piping on inside and outside from loose
mill scale, blisters, sand, plaster, paint droppings, dirt, oil, grease, labels
and all foreign matter.

CLEANING:
Wire brush piping on outside before painting or covering.

CLEANING WATER SYSTEMS:

After completing each section clean pipes, fittings, valves and accessories
internally by flushing with clean water.

PIPEWORK SUPPORT - GENERALLY

SUPPORT:

Piping independently of equipment.

SUPPORT:

Piping at intervals to avoid air pockets and dirt traps.

SPANS:

Specified maximum spans are for straight runs of pipe.

LOCATE:

Supports to carry weight of pipe, valves, fittings, insulation, appurtenances

and contents without sagging.

LOCATIONS:

In addition to maximum spans specified, location of supports and hangers

is to take into account concentrated loads, elimination of overhung
sections or bends, load reaction on terminal connections, pipe expansion
and contraction, vibrations, hydrostatic testing, water hammer and seismic
forces.

LOCATIONS:

Reduce spacing of supports to less than three quarters of maximum spans

specified where changes in direction or branch connections occur.

LOCATIONS:
Locate supports immediately adjacent to changes in direction of piping,
branch connections and concentrated loads irrespective of maximum
spans specified.
SUPPORT RISERS:

Independently of adjacent horizontal hangers.

FIX:

Supports to structure with masonry expansion bolts without causing

overstress to structure.

INTERMEDIATE STEEL:

Provide where required to transfer loads to areas of structure where they

can be safely accommodated.

MASONRY EXPANSION BOLTS:

Drill in structure and install in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

MULTIPLE PIPING RUNS:

Where bottoms of lines are approximately at same level, support in groups

on trapeze hangers. Keep pipes in position with U-bolts. Lines subject to
extreme thermal expansion to be free to slide or roll.

TRAPEZE HANGERS:

Maximum spacing to be that for smallest pipe

supported.

SPRING CUSHIONS:

Use where horizontal pipe is subject to considerable vertical movement or

vibration.
ANCHORS:

Weld U-bolts to pipes at points of contact and bolt to structural angle

frame securely fixed to structure.

TEMPORARY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

Will not be allowed. Do not use wire, metal bands, rope, wood, chain,
strap or perforated bar. Do not hang pipes from other pipes.

412.4.3 FERROUS PIPEWORK

HORIZONTAL STEEL PIPES:

Support at intervals not exceeding maximum support spacing and

by hanger rod of minimum size as follows:

Pipe Diameter Maximum Support Spacing

Rod

mm m mm

15 1.5 10
20 1.8 10
25 2.0 10
32 2.5 10
40 2.7 10
50 3.0 10
65 3.3 13
80 3.6 13
100 4.2 16

412.4.4 PVC PIPEWORK

STORAGE:

Handle pipes with care. Store in the shade. Support along entire length on
level ground free from loose stones. Do not stack more than three layers
high. Place sockets at alternate ends of stack and protruding beyond pipes.
Stake stacks to prevent movement. For long term storage provide pipe
racks with continuous supports. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for storage.

PIPES AND FITTINGS:

To have cleanly cut square ends. Pipes to be reasonably straight.

JOINTS:

Make rubber ring joints or welded solvent joints in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. Use solvent made and supplied by
manufacturer.
ABOVE GROUND SUPPORTS:

Provide at intervals not exceeding maximum spacing as follows:

Pipe Diameter Maximum Support Spacing

Pipes Pipes

Horizontal Vertical

mm m

15 600 1200
20 700 1400
25 750 1500
32 800 1600
40 900 1800
50 1050 2100
82 1350 2700
110 1500 3000
160 1800 3600

ABOVE GROUND SUPPORTS:

Pipes to be well supported but not tightly clipped to allow freedom of

movement except at anchors. Use soft rubber or other flexible membrane
between pipe and clip. Anchor at changes in direction and at valves.
Accommodate thermal movement by expansion joints or bellows. Comply
with manufacturer's recommendations for above ground supports.

UNDERGROUND PIPES:

Anchor at changes in direction and at valves and stop ends.

UNDERGROUND PIPE EXCAVATION:

Trench is not to be open too far in advance of pipe laying and then
backfilled as soon as possible.

UNDERGROUND PIPE BEDDING:

Use free draining sand, gravel, loam or soil. Compact fill firmly between
side of pipe and trench. Bedding to be thoroughly compacted in layers not
exceeding 150 mm to give uniform bed. Lay pipes directly on bedding. Do
not use brick or hard material under pipe. Further bedding material to be
placed around pipe and thorougly compacted in 75 mm layers by careful
tamping.

UNDERGROUND PIPE:

Backfill trench above pipe in layers 300 mm thick each layer well rammed.

UNDERGROUND PIPE:

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for laying underground

pipe.

SPECIAL ADAPTORS:

Use for connecting PVC pipes and fittings to pipes of other materials.
 SECTION 03
COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

PRODUCTS
COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
VALVES - GENERALLY
SIZE:
To be same as pipe run.

RATING:
1380 kPa steam working pressure rating and 1380 kPa cold water non-
shock pressure rating, unless otherwise specified.
SUBMISSIONS:
Approval of manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of his
valves. After award of Contract and prior to start of construction submit
for approval a complete summary of valves proposed indicating service,
manufacture, figure number, type and pressure rating.

THREADED VALVES;
To have British Standard Taper Pipe Thread.

GATE VALVES:
To be capable of being repacked under pressure.

GATE VALVES
GATE VALVES:
50 mm diameter and under to be screwed, with bronze body and trim,
solid wedge disc, non-rising stem and screwed bonnet.

GATE VALVES:
Over 50 mm diameter to be flanged, with cast iron body, bronze trim, solid
wedge disc, non-rising stem and bolted bonnet.

CHECK VALVES
SILENT CHECK VALVES:
To be non-slam, spring loaded and suitable for installation in any position.

SILENT CHECK VALVES:

Over 50 mm diameter to be flanged, with cast iron body, bronze seat and
disc, 18-8 stainless steel spring, with body having 1720 kPa working
pressure rating.

SILENT CHECK VALVES:

To have straight guided disc with two-point bearing. Wearing parts
including disc, seat and other guide bushing to be replaceable.

SILENT CHECK VALVES:

To have flow area in excess of pipe area for minimun pressure drop.

FLOAT VALVES
50 mm diameter and under to have screwed inlets and over 50 mm
diameter to have flanged inlets.

AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS:

Float type with brass base and connection tail. Body, cover, float and
vacuum breaker of high quality temperature resisting synthetic material,
suitable for working pressure of 600 kPa and temperature of 168 deg. C.

AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS:

Obtain from the following:
Braukmann (Germany) or approved equal.

PRESSURE
REDUCING VALVE:

Pressure reducing valves shall be of the variable input constant output

pressure type and capable of complete closure in a no flow condition to
prevent pressure equalization.

The downstream pressure settings shall be capable of being adjusting.All

pressure reducing valves, guides, rings, piston rings and junk rings, bronze
liners, leather cups and face rings and stainless steel indicator rods with all
other components of suitable non-corroding materials.

The relay system shall comprise bronze body, diaphragm guide, support
and piston, stainless steel spindle nylon valve face, synthetic reinforced
rubber diaphragm and steel spring.

The relay system shall having isolating cocks, bronze body, bronze bodied
orifice/strainer units and copper strainers.All pressure reducing valves
shall be flanged to the appropriate table in accordance with BS 10, and
sized as appropriate to their duty.

Valves shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of

fluctuations in demand and shall also prevent a pressure rise when
demand is zero.Valve shall be suitable for horizontal or vertical installation
and shall be UL listed.

Valves shall be single-seated, hydraulically-operated, pilot controlled

diaphragm type globe valve.Valve stem shall be top and bottom guided
and shall be actuated by a resilient diaphragm.

Pilot control shall be a direct acting, adjustable, spring-loaded valve with

bronze body and stainless steel trim.Valves shall have integral low flow by-
pass valves.

Main valve, pilot control valve and all trim shall be factory-assembled into
one unit.
INSTRUMENTS

PRESSURE GAUGES to be Bourdon tube type, with minimum 100 mm dial

diameter, flangeless back, 15 mm male threaded bottom connection, black
finished, cast aluminium case, threaded black epoxy finished cast
aluminium ring, gasketed glass face, type 316 stainless steel spring tube,
stainless steel precision movement and micrometer adjustment on needle.

PRESSURE GAUGES to be graduated in kg per square centimeter with 1

kg/cm2 divisions.
SUNDRIES

LABELS:

Laminated Bakelite with black surface, white core and incised lettering in
English.
TAGS:

1.5 mm x 50 mm diameter aluminium sheet, stamped with numbers and

letters filled with black paint and complete with brass hooks or chains.

MASONRY BOLTS:

Approved make, minimum 20 mm diameter.

PIPE SLEEVES:

Galvanized steel pipe, two nominal pipe sizes larger than pipe for bare
pipes and of size to accom- modate thickness of insulation for insulated
pipes.

ESCUTCHEON PLATES:
For uninsulated pipes passing through walls, floors and ceilings to be nickel
plated split ring type to match pipe size. Plates for pipes passing through
sleeves extending above floor surface to be deep recessed type.
STRAINERS:

To be same size as pipe run.

50 mm diameter and under to be screwed, Y- type, bronze body, 1030 kPa

steam working pressure rating, with 20 mesh stainless steel screen,
screwed cap and 15 mm diameter tapped hole for blowdown valve.

Over 50 mm diameter on water service to be flanged, basket type, cast

iron body, 860 kPa steam working pressure rating, with 20 mesh stainless
steel basket screen, bolted cap and 20 mm diameter tapped hole at
bottom for blowdown valve.

WORKMANSHIP
GENERALLY

THREADED VALVES:

Exercise care in installing to avoid straining valve bodies.

THREADED VALVES:

When attaching pipe to valve in place, use second wrench to hold valve
whilst pipe is being tightened. To avoid damage to seat do not screw pipe
too far into valve.

GATE VALVES:

Do not use for throttling purposes such as regulations, balancing or

controlling. Use only for shut- off purposes with valve either fully closed or
fully open.

AUTOMATIC AIR
VENTS:

Fix at all high points of water piping systems.

ISOLATING VALVES:

Provide on all water piping system branches.

SECTION 04
PUMPS
PRODUCTS

GENERALLY

MOTORS:

Supply pumps complete with electric motors. Horizontal base mounted

pumps to have motor mounted on common cast iron or steel base
properly aligned at factory.

SHAFT PACKING OR MECHANICAL SEALS :

To be compatible with pump design and nature of liquid pumped, in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

IMPELLERS AND ROTATING ASSEMBLIES:

To be statically and dynamically balanced at factory.

PLUGGED CONNECTIONS:

To be provided for casing vent, drain and suction and discharge pressure
gauges.

OPERATING POINT OF FLOW AND HEAD:

Is to fall near point of maximum efficiency obtained from manufacturer's

published data. Do not select pumps to operate near the end of their
curve.

HORSEPOWER RATING OF ELECTRIC

MOTOR:

Is to ensure non- overloading throughout capacity range of pump.

ELECTRIC MOTORS:

To be supplied for available current. Speed is not to exceed 1750 rpm

unless otherwise specified.

SUBMISSIONS:

Submit the following for approval for each pump prior to shipment:
certified performance curves showing job number, customer, customer
order number, pump designation number shown on the Drawings, date of
manufacture, model num
ber, pump size, impeller diameter, impeller type, maximum impeller
diameter pump can accommodate, rpm, flow- head characteristic curve,
consumed horsepower curve, pump efficiency curve parts numbers and
parts lists outline dimensional drawing showing overall dimensions,
location of foundation bolt holes and size, location and rating of suction
and discharge nozzlesrecommended list of spare partsinstallation,
operation and maintenance instruction manual details and wiring diagrams
of pump controllers, starters, controls or other electrical device or
accessoryspecial instructions for installation and connection of each
electrical device, control or accessorymotor data such as make, model
number, serial number, horsepower rating, rpm, voltage, phase,
frequency, class of insulation, allowable temperature rise, full load
amperes and locked rotor amperes starter data such as make, model
number, size, heater sizes, ampere rating, line voltage, control voltage and
frequency.

CLEAR WATER PUMP

END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP

TYPE:

Horizontal, base mounted, end suction, single stage, centrifugal type,

directly connected to motor through heavy duty flexible coupling, with
heavy gauge coupling guard.

BASE:

Pump and motor to be mounted on common cast iron base reinforced

against deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting
hole.

PUMP CASING:
High tensile strength close grain cast iron with smooth waterways, register
fitted and bolted to bearing frame for permanent alignment, with bronze
wear rings and tapped and plugged bottom drain and top vent con-
nections.

IMPELLER:

Cast iron, enclosed type, fitted to shaft with key and locked in place.

SHAFT:

one-piece stainless steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust with
minimum deflection.

MECHANICAL SEAL:

Ni-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel metal parts.

BEARINGS:

pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty grease

lubricated ball bearings mounted in heavy iron frame with supports to
base for maximum rigidity.
ELECTRIC MOTOR:

Totally enclosed, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated

and sealed ball bearings.

WASTE WATER AND SOILED WATER

PUMPS

SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMP

TYPE: submersible, portable, centrifugal type, forming single compact unit
with its motor, to rest on sump floor on combined base and suction
strainer and finished with black, non-hardening, corrosion resistant,
rubber- bitumen paint.

ACCESSORIES: three level regulators, lengths of durable multi-conductor

electric cable, holder for level regulators and control panel.

CONSTRUCTION: cast iron casing with integral threaded discharge elbow,

cast iron, impeller and motor stator housing and stainless steel shaft, nuts
and bolts. Pump to have clamp for discharge pipe, watertight cable entry,
two double face mechanical seals, oil casing to lubricate and cool seal
rings, bronze case wear rings and bronze terminal cover.

ELECTRIC MOTOR: totally enclosed type with two thrust ball bearings and
with stator insulated to Class F against moisture and heat.

LEVEL REGULATORS: pear-shaped type, with internal mercury switch,

weighted to be vertical in air and horizontal in water without floating.

LEVEL REGULATORS to have three contacts for starting or stopping pump.

One to be for pump stop at low sump level, one for start at high sump level
and one for high level alarm installed above pump start regulator.

CONTROL PANEL: totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct on line type, with
no volt and overload protection in each phase, suitable for automatic
operation of pump.

MANUFACTURERS: obtain pump from one of the following:

Grundfos (Dinmark.)
Flygt (U.K.)
Homa (Germany)
KSB (Germany) or approved equal.

SECTION 05
TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING

WORKMANSHIP

GENERALLY

CONDUCT TESTS:

In the presence of and as directed by the Engineer.

DO NOT cover, enclose or paint any system until tested, inspected and
accepted.

TESTING DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE

SYSTEMS

BEFORE INSTALLING SANITARY FIXTURES:

Subject systems to water pressure test to prove tightness and to flow test
to prove freedom from obstruction.

WATER PRESSURE TEST:

Apply to whole system or in sections. Close all openings with plugs and fill
system with water to point of overflow at highest opening. Vent all air and
ensure that water reaches all parts of system to be tested. No section to
be tested to less than 3 m head of water.

TEST PERIOD:

To be for at least 4 hours prior to inspection of system. Inspect all joints

and pipes whilst under pressure and correct leaks or defective joints by
replacing with new joints and materials. Makeshift repairs and application
of repair compound will not be permitted.

REPEAT TEST:

After corrections are made and until systems are proven tight.

OBSTRUCTIONS:

In systems are to be cleared and systems subjected to further test at no

extra cost.

TESTING WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

HYDROSTATICALLY TEST:

Systems in whole or in sections to prove tightness under specified test

pressure. Maintain test pressure for period specified under system
concerned. All parts of systems are to be subjected to test pressure not
less than 10 bar for 24 hour.

TEST PROCEDURE:

Apply test before connecting piping to equipment. Remove, disconnect or

blank off equipment, accessory or device which might be damaged by test
pressure. Valves are to be open but not completely backseated. End valves
are to be capped. On flanged piping, temporary blank flanges are to be
installed and firmly anchored to accommodate developed end thrust.
Piping that may be damaged by end thrust is to be properly anchored,
especially at changes in direction.

TEST PROCEDURE:

Plug and blank off openings in system and fill slowly with water. Vent
entrapped air. Ensure water reaches all parts of system. Apply pressure
with hand pump connected to discharge into system through a globe
valve, check valve and recently calibrated pressure gauge. When test
pressure is reached close globe valve and monitor pressure variations.
System is not to have any noticeable drop in pressure throughout specified
period that test pressure is maintained.

TEST PROCEDURE:
With system under pressure, inspect pipes and joints for leaks.

DEFECTS:

Replace defective parts. Makeshift repairs and application of repair

compound will not be permitted.

REPEAT TEST:

Until completely tight system is obtained.

RELEASE PRESSURE:

Slowly to prevent damage.

TESTING OF EQUIPMENT

TEST:

All equipment to prove performance and proper functioning and to

demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction that equipment meets design
requirements.

DATA TO BE MEASURED:

Are those parameters given on the Schedule of Equipment.

TESTING AND ADJUSTING CONTROLS

OPERATE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS:

Simultaneously with equipment or system controlled and test for proper,
accurate and dependable operation.

CALIBRATE AND ADJUST:

Until approved.

TESTING PUMPS

TESTS AFTER INSTALLATION:

Carry out the following:

test pump for flow and head against actual system friction loss and static
pressure to demonstrate that pump meets specified requirements

measure phase current and voltage for calculation of motor horsepower.

RE-TEST:

After pump or equipment is adjusted, repaired or replaced.

 SECTION 06
SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM

GENERALLY

REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for pipework, fittings and

other products common to this and other plumbing installations.

PIPES

uPVC PIPES AND FITTINGS:

Drainage, vent and rain water pipes and fittings inside the building shall be
of Upvc to BS 4514 FOR pipe sizes 80 mm diameter and above. And
MuPVC/ABS to BS 5255 for pipe sizes 50 mm diameter and smaller. Fittings
shall be push fit type.

PUMPS
DUPLEX SEWAGE & WAST SUMP PUMPS

Refer to section 414

FLOOR DRAINS:

Upvc comprising drain body with integral seepage pan, of minmum water
seal of 7 cm, clamping collar secured to drain body with screws and
threaded adjustable head strainer body permitting up to 32 mm vertical
adjustment of strainer height without disturbing flooring or connections
during installation, shall be have heavy duty stainless steel grade 304 cover
with removable strainer and cover plate, floor drain shall have built in
rodding eye.

FLOOR DRAINS:

Strainer body is to permit installation of different interchangeable strainer

variations on same floor drain. Floor drains to have inside caulked bottom
outlet with adjusting screws.
FLOOR DRAINS:

Strainer to be nickel bronze secured to strainer body.

FLOOR DRAINS TYPE FD-1 :

To have 150 mm round flat strainer with 58 sq.cm. minimum open free
area.

Strainer to be nickel bronze secured to strainer body with vandal-proof

brass screws.

VENT COWLS:
UPVC wire basket to fit snugly inside open end of vent pipes extending
above roof.

DRIP PANS:

Provide under piping where impossible to route water or drainage piping

passing over or within 1.5 m of electrical apparatus and in rooms
containing electrical equipment.
1.3 mm thick galvanized sheet metal, reinforced and made water tight.

WORKMANSHIP

GENERALLY

REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for workmanship common to

this and other plumbing installations.

EXECUTE:

Workmanship in accordance with the American Standard National

Plumbing Code or approved equal standard.

PIPEWORK

HORIZONTAL PIPES:

Lay at uniform slope of not less than 1% and not more than 3%.

CHANGES OF DIRECTION:

In pipes are to be gradual using long sweep fittings and 45 degree fittings.
CHANGES OF DIRECTION:

Avoid unnecessary turns and offsets and run wastes as direct as possible
from sanitary fixtures to vertical stacks.

VENT SANITARY FIXTURES:

To prevent siphon age of traps and air binding.

VENT PIPES:

Slope and connect to drip back into soil or waste pipe by gravity.

VENT PIPES:

Where connected to a horizontal soil or waste pipe connect vent pipe

above centreline of soil or waste pipe. Vent pipe is to rise vertically or at an
angle of not more than 45 degrees from vertical to a point at least 150 mm
above flood level rim of fixture before offsetting horizontally or before
connecting to branch vent.

VENT PIPES:

Make connections to vent stack at least 150 mm above flood level rim of
highest fixture served by vent.

VENT PIPES :

Above roof are to pass through flashed and waterproofed sleeves.

CLEANOUTS ON DRAIN PIPES:

Provide where shown on the Drawings, at or near the foot of every vertical
stack and on long horizontal pipe runs at 15 m intervals.

CLEANOUTS:

On exposed pipes to be installed directly on pipe and those on concealed

pipes extended through and ter- minated flush with finished floor or wall
and concealed to match surrounding finished surface in an approved
manner. Conceal cleanouts in floor or wall with access covers or panels.

FLOOR DRAINS:

Provide different types and sizes as detailed.

VENT COWLS:

Provide on all external vent pipes.

 SECTION 07
RAINWATER DRAINAGE

PRODUCTS
GENERALLY

REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for pipework, fittings

and other products common to this and other plumbing
installations.

PIPES

PIPES:

Drainage, vent and rain water pipes and fittings inside the building
shall be of Upvc to BS 4514 FOR pipe sizes 80 mm diameter and
above. And MuPVC/ABS to BS 5255 for pipe sizes 50 mm diameter
and smaller. Fittings shall be push fit type.

PIPES AND FITTINGS:

To be product of same manufacturer.

COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

SUNDRIES

ROOF DRAIN TYPE RD-1:

UPVC, side type, suitable for flat roof finish, Outlets to be precision
composite moulding in uPVC. Drain to be self-colored, smooth,
glossy as moulded and as manufactured by Terrain or approved
equal.
WORKMANSHIP

GENERALLY

REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for workmanship

common to this and other installations.

EXECUTE:

Workmanship generally as specified in Section 421 Sanitary Drainage

and Vent System, unless otherwise specified.

PIPEWORK

CONNECTION TO ROOF DRAIN:

Use expansion joint or pipe offset.

CHANGES IN DIRECTION:
Make with long radius fittings.

ROOF DRAINS:

Install in a completely watertight manner with the roof as detailed

on the Drawings.

SECTION 08
PLUMBING FIXTURES

PRODUCTS

GENERALLY

REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING-GENERAL for pipe work, fittings

and other products common to this and other plumbing
installations.

COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

GENERAL

PLUMBING FIXTURES, trim and accessories to be obtained from one

approved manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
VITREOUS CHINA:

First quality, of specified colour, with smooth glazed surfaces free

from warps, cracks, checks, flaws, discoloration or other
imperfections.

VITREOUS CHINA ACCESSORIES:

To match fixtures and of same manufacture and colour.

EXPOSED PIPING AND METAL TRIM:

Chrome plated brass with polished finish guaranteed not to strip or

peel off..

SUBMIT FOR APPROVAL:

List of all proposed plumbing fixtures, trim and accessories,

indicating manufacturer, type and model number and submit
catalogues.
SUBMIT SAMPLES:

Of fixtures, trim and accessories for approval.

STORE:

Plumbing fixtures under cover and keep dry. Separate with clean
dust sheets or polythene when not in manufacturer's own packing.

STORE:
Metal fixtures on level surface to prevent twisting. Prevent contact
with cement and lime and do not pack in straw.

SELF TAPPING SCREWS:

To BS 4174.

MORTAR:

To Section G21 of the Architectural Specification, comprising cement

and sand (1:1) or (1:2).

BLACK BITUMEN COATING SOLUTION :

For cold application to BS 3416 Type 1.

LEAD CAULKING COMPOUND:

Equal parts of red and white lead mixed with hempen spun yarn and
mixed to a stiff consistency.

WATERPROOF JOINTING COMPOUND FOR

WASTES:

Type recommended by waste manufacturer.

LAVATORIES

LAVATORY - TYPE LAV-1:

white vitreous china, 610 x 510 mm, countertop type, oval, with one
hole for single mixer and with overflow, Ideal Standard No. G.0800
Ova lux or approved equal, complete with following trim and
accessories or approved equal:

15 mm single hole mixer with 160 mm high nozzle and 32 mm pop-

up waste, Ideal Standard Ceramix No. A 1247.

32 chrome plated P-trap with wall tube and wall flange, adjustable
type, Ideal standard No. G8105.

two 15 mm angle valves with 300 mm long tubes, blue and red
indices, Ideal Standard No.
G.4303

soap holder, recessed type, 150 x 150 mm, Ideal Standard universal
No. G. 9506. towel rail, 600 mm long, recessed type, Ideal Standard
universal No. G.9167

WATER CLOSETS

WATER CLOSET - TYPE EWC-1:

white vitreous china, European type, floor mounted, (P or s -trap),

close coupled to flush tank, Ideal Standard Conca No. G (1121 or
1122) or approved equal, complete with the following trim and
accessories or approved equal:
White solid plastic seat and cover with metal hinge, rubber washers
and plastic screws and nuts, Ideal Standard No. G. 5150. toilet paper
holder, recessed type 150 x 150 mm, Ideal Standard universal No. G
9508.Flush tank and trim Ideal Standard No. G 2304 two 15 mm
angle valves with 300 mm long tubes, blue and red indices, Ideal
Standard No. G.4303.

WATER CLOSET - TYPE AWC-1:

white vitreous china, three piece Asiatic water closet, shall be from
Twayford or locally No. 10052 squatting WC suite consisting of
vitreous china squatting WC pan vitreous china (P or S) and fireclay
squatting plate with integral treads or approved equal, complete
with the following trim and accessories or approved equal:
vitreous china high level cistern, 9 litres capacity with side inlet and
overflow. valve less fittings with plastic syphon.
brackets, screw to wall. flush pipe and clips inlet connection
10 mm angle stop and supply valve, chromium plated, Ideal standard
No. G 4303.

SINKS

KITCHEN SINK - TYPE KS-1:

stainless steel type 302, inset type for fixing into counter top, single
bowl, single drainer, 16 gauge thickness, with 10 cm high splash
back, (2200 x 600 mm, with bowl on left, manufactured by Franke
Samy or approved equal, complete with the following trim and
accessories or approved equal:
32 chrome plated P-trap with wall tube and wall flange, adjustable
type, stainless steel detachable overflow
15 mm mixer, deck mount type Ideal Standard Europe No. G 1015
soap holder, recessed type, 150 x 150 mm, Ideal Standard Universal
No. G 9506.

SHOWERS

SHOWER - TYPE SH-1:

White or coloured vitreous china receptor, 700 x 700 x 110 mm deep

with anti-skid floor and 50 mm corner drain opening, Ideal Standard
No. T 117070, or approved equal, complete with the following trim
and accessories or approved equal:
50mm waste fitting with strainer
Soap holder with hand grip bar, recessed type, 300 x 150 mm, Ideal
Standard Universal No. G 9505.
Shower station with holders Ideal Standard No. G 6113.

BATHTUB
BATHTUB - TYPE BT-1:

vitreous China acrylic bathtub, 180 cm x 80 mm, with leg supports,

for tiling in and of same colour as other fixtures in bathroom, ideal
standard (Twin) No. R 878080 or approved equal, complete with the
following trim and accessories or approved equal:
waste and overflow with 40 mm waste fitting with strainer, 32 mm
overflow fitting with plug and chain, 40 x 50 mm trap with threaded
outlet and plastic overflow pipe 15 mm mixer Ideal standard Ceramix
No. G. 2500. Shower station with holders Ideal Standard No. G 6113.
double robe hook, recessed type, Ideal Standard Universal No. G
9152.
Towel holder , recessed type, Ideal Standard Universal No. G 9167.
BIDETS
BIDET - TYPE B-1:
white vitreous china, floor mounted, with douche, one hole for
single mixer and with overflow, Ideal Standard Conca No. G1113 or
approved equal, complete with the following trim and accessories or
approved equal:
15 mm single hole mixer, with taps, rim to douche diverter, douche,
and 32 mm pop-up waste, Ideal Standard Ceramix No. G 1429.
32 mm P-trap Or S- Trap and wall flange, adjustable type Ideal
standard No. G8106.
two 15 mm angle valves with 30 cm long tube, blue and red indices,
Ideal Standard No. G. 4303

WORKMANSHIP
GENERALLY
REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for workmanship
common to this and other plumbing installations.

FIXING
PROTECTION:
Retain protective coverings, when practical, during and after fixing.
Do not stand in or on any fixture. Do not use fixtures for preparing or
soaking materials or for washing tools. Replace fixtures which are
chipped or scratched.
FIX:
Plumbing fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Use fastenings supplied by manufacturer
wherever possible.
Plumbing fixtures straight, true and securely to supporting surfaces.
Lay out roughing where required to ac- curately conform with
finished walls and floors.

FLOOR FIXING:
Do not bed floor standing fixtures in cement mortar unless so
specified.

CORBELLED FIXTURES:
Rigidly support built-in and cast- in fixtures until wall is complete.

CORBELLED FIXTURES:
Do not fix to chair supports until wall finishes are complete.

CISTERNS:
Fix at height recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise
specified or detailed.

POINTING:
Seal joints between fixtures and adjacent surfaces with synthetic
rubber based sealant in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

COVER TRIM:
Seal joints between fixtures and adjacent surfaces with plastics cover
trim fixed with adhesive recommended by manufacturer, miter all
corners and remove surplus adhesive.

PROTECTION
CHROME PLATED TRIM:
Use strap or padded wrenches when fixing.

CHROME PLATED TRIM:

Apply ample coating of petroleum jelly on exposed surfaces
immediately after installation for protection until final acceptance.

CONNECTING TO PIPES
CONNECT :
Fixtures to drain and water supply pipes in an approved gastight and
watertight manner.

TAPS:
Fix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations making
watertight seal with fixture and backnut.

WASTES:
Bed in waterproof jointing compound and fix with resilient washer
between fixture and backnut.

FIXING SLAB AND STALL FIRECLAY URINALS

LEAD SAFES:
Construct with lead burned joints. Apply one coat cold bitumen to
surfaces which will be in contact with mortar or grout.

SETTING OUT:
Assemble ranges dry to check fit and accuracy. Inform the Engineer if
unsatisfactory.

OUTLET CHANNELS:
Bed to waste connector with bedding compound.

SLABS:
Completely fill space behind with cement sand grout 1:5. JOINTS :
To be not wider than 3 mm. Rake out to depth of 6 mm and point
flush with jointing compound supplied by urinal manufacturer.

TREADS:
Bed in cement-sand mortar 1:5, with fall towards channel.

CLEANING AND PAINTING

CLEAN:

Off labels, plaster, paint droppings, petroleum jelly and other foreign
matter from fixtures, trim and ac- cessories, polish and test for
perfect working condition before hand over.

PAINT :
Concealed brackets, hangers and plates.
 SECTION 09
SANITARY AND DRAINAGE- OUTSIDE BUILDINGS

PRODUCTS
GENERALLY
REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for pipework, fittings
and other products common to this and other plumbing
installations.

PIPES
GENERALLY
NON PRESSURE PVC PIPES AND FITTINGS: to BS 4660 for 110 mm
and 160 mm pipes with rubber sealing rings and drilled in
accordance with BS 65 and BS 540, all pipes shall be protected with
concrete encasement.

SANITARY DRAINAGE
PIPES AND FITTINGS: u PVC pipe.
MAIN DRAINS LEAVING BUILDING: u PVC pipes up to manholes.
PIPES BETWEEN INSPECTION CHAMBER AND SEWAGE DISPOSAL
SYSTEM: non pressure U.PV.C pipes.

COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

SUNDRIES
INSPECTION CHAMPER COVERS AND FRAMES: to medium duty with
square frame and cover, coated at factory with tar or bitumen base
composition.

WORKMANSHIP
GENERALLY
REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for workmanship
common to this and other plumbing installations.
PIPEWORK GENERALLY
LAY PIPES on good foundation to prevent settlement. Pipes laid in
trenches to have solid uniform bearing throughout their length.
LAY PIPES in trenches supported along their length on layer of clean
compacted sand.
LAY PIPES to uniform slope not exceeding 3% and true to line and
grade.

LAY PIPES at not less than 600 mm below finished grade and not
closer than 1 m to bearing walls and footings.

FREE VERTICAL DROP of sewer pipe into inspection chamber is not to

exceed 450 mm from invert of pipe to invert of manhole.

CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS: make with minimum

disturbance to existing lines. Existing pipes or structures damaged
whilst making connections are to be replaced or reconstructed to
the Engineer's satisfaction at no extra cost.

PROTECTION: keep pipes clean until work is accepted. Close exposed

ends of pipe with wooden plugs and adequately secure when pipe
laying is not in progress.

GROUNDWATER: keep trenches dry during pipe laying by pumping,

use of well points, underdrains or other approved means. Make pipe
joints in the dry.

UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
INSPECTION CHAMBER

CONSTRUCTION: in situ reinforced concrete.

FLOORS: form by hand with cement mortar to size and shape of
sewer. Changes in sewer size to be gradual and even. Floors to have
gradual slope from side walls to central channel. Half pipe inverts
may be used in straight through manholes.

INLETS: main and side inlets are to have drop of 50 to 80 mm above

invert of central channel.

WALLS: plaster internally with two coats cement and sand (1:3) to
total thickness of 15 mm.

STEPS: galvanized pipe steps set in place during construction,

properly embedded, beginning 600 mm above bottom and spaced at
approximately 350 mm centers.

LEAKS: caulk and repair if approved or remove entire work and

rebuild at no extra cost.

GROUNDWATER LEVEL: keep below bottom of manhole until

concrete has obtained adequate set.

COVERS are to fit frames. Replace if found to rattle under traffic.

Plugging, burning in or filling to obtain tight covers will not be
allowed.

COVERS: recess in concrete is to be neatly and accurately made to

dimensions of frame. Thoroughly embed frame in mortar and set
frame and cover level and to proper grade.
DROP MANHOLE: provide where conditions necessitate free vertical
drop exceeding 450 mm.
GROUNDWATER LEVEL: keep below bottom of tank until concrete
has obtained adequate set.
COVERS are to fit frames. Replace if found to rattle under traffic.
Plugging, burning in or filling to obtain tight covers will not be
allowed.

COVERS: recess in concrete is to be neatly and accurately made to

dimensions of frame. Thoroughly embed frame in mortar and set
frame and cover level and to proper grade.

VENT PIPE: extend above grade and provide with vent caps.

PROTECTION
PROTECT incomplete work from floating. Lines or structures not
stable against uplift during construction are to be well braced or
otherwise protected.

INSPECTION AND TESTING

INSPECTION: completed underground lines are to be inspected and
approved by the Engineer.

TEST underground lines by plugging end of pipe and filling with

water to minimum 3 m head. Maintain pressure for 24 hours.
Inspect pipes and joints and obtain approval before backfilling
trench.

DEFECTIVE WORK: repair or replace as directed.

 SECTION 10

DOMESTIC COLD WATER

PRODUCTS
GENERALLY
REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for pipe work, fittings
and other products common to this and other plumbing
installations.

PIPES
PIPES:
All domestic cold water piping except those chased in walls and the
vertical riser, shall be from Polypropylene pipes and fittings and
joints shall be of class PN25.

All pipes to be factory tested as per DIN 8078 and installation as per
DIN 16928.

Water transfer pipe from basement floor to the roof tank and gravity
riser shall be in bare copper to BS 2871, Table – X , Part 1.
 All concealed vertical drops of domestic cold water pipes in wall
chase shall be in PEX pipes to DIN 16892 & 16893 with DVGW
approval

POLYPROPYLENE PIPES AND FITTINGS :

Shall be manufactured according to DIN 8077 and 8078 Shall be
verify the following properties :
Corrosion resistance, and preventive of Olgae development .
Sound insulating qualities to give sound proofing effects on noise
transmission through buildings structure related to water flow and
hydraulic shock .
Hygienic harmless.
Self-ignition shall be according to ASTM 1929/68 and at 330 C, and
melting range from 140 C - 150 C.
Thermal conducting at 20 C should be not more than 0.24 W/mK.
Comply with requirement of the fire classification B2.
High pressure capacity up to 12 bar.
With stand temperature up to 70 C without any deformation and
for a long time.
Low calorific value .
Toxicity free .

PEX PIPES AND FITTINGS :

GENERALLY
Cold water distribution pipe work embedded within builders work
inside toilets, bathrooms, kitchen shall be composed of:
a. cross linked polyethylene pipe according to DIN 16892 and 16893
pulled in a corrugated conduit of ordinary polyethylene.
b. Fittings and valves of bronze or DZR construction.

PIPES
The inner pipe shall be a cross link polyethylene pipe withstanding up
to 95 deg. C at a maximum pressure of 10 bar without deformation
or damage.
Short time temperature loading up to 110 degree C.
The pipe shall be resistant to all natural constituents of drinking
water to DIN 2000, disinfectants and cleaning agents to DVWG –
W291 and DIN 2000, anti-corrosion agents to DIN 1988 T4 (E) and
common building materials, such as mortar, cement and plaster.
The pipe manufacturer shall offer minimum of 50 years guarantee for
pipes and 10 years guarantee for the complete system.
All pipes shall stamped on equal intervals showing clearly the name of the
manufacturer along with the pressure and temperature rating of these
pipes.
All pipes shall be laid so that the 16 mm PEX water

pipe can be replaced.

FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES

pipes shall be connected to the different fittings via a wall box of
reinforced plastic fitted with bronze elbow suitable for 15 mm or 20
mm threaded connection.
The box should be suitably designed in order to enable the
replacement of existing pipes in the even of their damage.

All valves, box, elbows, tee, bends shall be of bronze.

Connection shall be of a cone grip union type allowing : full flow

capacity, minimum pressure loss, easily detachable with torque
clearly defined for a fool proof installation.
Contractor shall use proper tools for assembly as recommended by
manufacturer, i.e. assembly pliers, ratchet torque, wrench, cutters,
etc.….

WORKMANSHIP
PIPES INSULATION
- All internal domestic cold water pipes shall be insulated with
closed cell elastomeric rubber foam insulation with density of 55 –
70 kg/m3 plus a water proof 20 x 20 woven glass cloth adhered
between two coats of approved lagging adhesive and one final coat
of vapour barrier insulation thickness shall be 19 mm for all pipes up
to 75 mm diameter and 25 mm for pipes of higher diameters with
density of 65 – 80 kg/m3.

- All external domestic cold water pipes shall be covered by 32

mm rigid insulation with density of 55 – 70 kg/m3 and shall be
finished with a water proof 20 x 20 woven glass cloth adhered
between two coats of approved fire resistant fungicidal protective
lagging adhesive and one final coat of vapor barrier.
- where any insulated piped service is run external to the
building, including all insulated pipe work run on roof, the piped
service shall be clad using an outer covering of stoned aluminum,
sheet of 0.9 mm.
- Similar cladding is to be applied to piped in plant rooms, car
parking in service trench, in attic floor and in open to sky shafts.

UNDERGROUND PIPEWORK
INSTALL:
At least 3 m away from any sewer line. Protect from contamination
from any source.
TESTS
HYDROSTATICALLY TEST:
System as specified in Section 41 Plumbing - General to a pressure of
10 bar applied for 24 hours.

SECTION 11

DOMESTIC HOT WATER

PRODUCTS

GENERALLY
REFER TO SECTION 41 PLUMBING - GENERAL for pipework, fittings
and other products common to this and other plumbing installations.

PIPES
PIPES:
All domestic hot water supply and return piping except those chased
in walls and the vertical riser, shall be from Polypropylene pipes and
fittings and joints shall be of class PN25.

All pipes to be factory tested as per DIN 8078 and installation as per
DIN 16928.

All concealed vertical drops of domestic hot water supply and return
pipes in wall chase shall be in PEX pipes to DIN 16892 & 16893 with
DVGW approval

1- POLYPROPYLENE PIPES AND FITTINGS :

Shall be manufactured according to DIN 8077 and 8078 Shall be

verify the following properties :
- Corrosion resistance, and preventive of Olgae development .
- Sound insulating qualities to give sound proofing effects on noise
transmission through buildings structure related to water flow and
hydraulic shock .
- Hygienic harmless.
- Self-ignition shall be according to ASTM 1929/68 and at 330 C,
and melting range from 140 C - 150 C.
- Thermal conducting at 20 C should be not more than 0.24
W/mK.
- Comply with requirement of the fire classification B2.
- High pressure capacity up to 12 bar.
- With stand temperature up to 70 C without any deformation
and for a long time.
- Low calorific value .
- Toxicity free .

2- PEX PIPES AND FITTINGS :

GENERALLY
Hot water distribution pipe work embedded within builders work
inside toilets, bathrooms, kitchen shall be composed of:
- crosslinked polyethylene pipe according to DIN 16892 and 16893
pulled in a corrugated conduit of ordinary polyethylene.
- Fittings and valves of bronze or DZR construction.

PIPES
The inner pipe shall be a cross link polyethylene pipe withstanding up
to 95 deg. C at a maximum pressure of 10 bar without deformation
or damage.

Short time temperature loading up to 110 degree C.

The pipe shall be resistant to all natural constituents of drinking

water to DIN 2000, disinfectants and cleaning agents to DVWG –
W291 and DIN 2000, anti-corrosion agents to DIN 1988 T4 (E) and
common building materials, such as mortar, cement and plaster.

The pipe manufacturer shall offer minimum of 50 years guarantee

for pipes and 10 years guarantee for the complete system.

All pipes shall stamped on equal intervals showing clearly the name
of the manufacturer along with the pressure and temperature rating
of these pipes.
All pipes shall be laid so that the 16 mm PEX water pipe can be
replaced.
FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES
pipes shall be connected to the different fittings via a wall box of
reinforced plastic fitted with bronze elbow suitable for 15 mm or 20
mm threaded connection.

The box should be suitably designed in order to enable the

replacement of existing pipes in the even of their damage.

All valves, box, elbows, tee, bends shall be of bronze.

Connection shall be of a cone grip union type allowing : full flow

capacity, minimum pressure loss, easily detachable with torque
clearly defined for a fool proof installation.

Contractor shall use proper tools for assembly as recommended by

manufacturer, i.e. assembly pliers, ratchet torque, wrench, cutters,
etc.….

WORKMANSHIP
PIPES INSULATION
- All internal domestic hot water supply and return pipes shall be
insulated with closed cell elastomeric rubber foam insulation with
density of 55 – 70 kg/m3 plus a water proof 20 x 20 woven glass
cloth adhered between two coats of approved lagging adhesive and
one final coat of vapour barrier insulation thickness shall be 19 mm
for all pipes up to 75 mm diameter and 25 mm for pipes of higher
diameters with density of 65 – 80 kg/m3.

- All external domestic hot water supply and return pipes shall be
covered by 32 mm rigid insulation with density of 55 – 70 kg/m3 and
shall be finished with a water proof 20 x 20 woven glass cloth
adhered between two coats of approved fire resistant fungicidal
protective lagging adhesive and one final coat of vapor barrier.

- where any insulated piped service is run external to the building,

including all insulated pipe work run on roof, the piped service shall
be clad using an outer covering of stoned aluminum, sheet of 0.9
mm.

- Similar cladding is to be applied to piped in plant rooms, car

parking in service trench, in attic floor and in open to sky shafts.

UNDERGROUND PIPEWORK
INSTALL:
At least 3 m away from any sewer line. Protect from contamination
from any source.

TESTS
HYDROSTATICALLY TEST:
System as specified in Section 41 Plumbing - General to a pressure of
10 bar applied for 24 hours.
 SECTION 15

VALVES

PART 10 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical

piping systems.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate
to this Section:
Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."

SUBMITTALS
Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design,
pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating
materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required
clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its
application.
Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies
indicating at least 5 installed units, similar to those proposed for use, that
have been in successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions
on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in

Division 1 Section "Product Requirements", under "Source Limitations"
Paragraph.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping
and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice
documents referenced.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
Block check valves in either closed or open position.

Use the following precautions during storage:

Maintain valve end protection.
Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-
point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the
ground in watertight enclosures.
Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts.
Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART - PRODUCTS
BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as
specified below.
Non rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full
extension of rising stems.
Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed
under ground and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 300
micron fusion bonded epoxy coating.
Valves installed above ground and indoors: apply coating for internal and
external parts.
Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application
Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures
and temperatures.
Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the
following special operator features:
Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 and smaller, except for plug
valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish the Employer with 1 wrench
for every 10 plug valves.
Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 and larger, installed 2400 mm
or higher above finished floor elevation.
Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 and larger.
Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide
extended stems arranged to receive insulation.
Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain
connections.
Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24
for bronze valves.
Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.
Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a
melting point below 450 deg. C for gate, globe, and check valves; below
216 deg. C for ball valves.
All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access
shall be provided.
GATE VALVES

Gate Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380 kPa cold
working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070 kPa CWP; cast-bronze body
and bonnet, or EPDM lined solid-bronze wedge, copper- silicon alloy rising
stem, mechanical packing, threaded connections; and with aluminum or
malleable- iron handwheel.
Gate Valves, DN65 and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 1380 kPa CWP, ASTM
A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, EDPM lined solid cast-iron wedge, brass-
alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, mechanical packing, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

BALL VALVES

Ball Valves, DN100 and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 4140 kPa CWP,
ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated
brass ball, standard port for DN15 valves and smaller and conventional
port for DN20 valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem;
Teflon seats and seals; threaded connections:
Operator: Steel handwheel.
Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
Operator: Lever operators with lock.
Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
Memory Stop: For operator handles.

PLUG VALVES

Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 1200 kPa CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and
bonnet, EDPM lined cast- iron plug, mechanical packing, flanged or
grooved end connections:
Operator: Lever.
Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 and larger.
Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 and larger, 2400
mm or higher above floor.

GLOBE VALVES

Globe Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380 kPa CWP, or
Class 150, 2070 kPa CWP; cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber,
bronze, silicon bronze-alloy stem, mechanical packing threaded
connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
Globe Valves, DN65 and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 1380-kPa CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings,
renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke,
mechanical packing, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron
handwheel.

BUTTERFLY VALVES

Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, Class 125 1380-kPa CWP, 1035- kPa maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended
neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM sleeve and stem seals,
flanged, lug, or grooved style:
Disc Type: Aluminum bronze, EPDM lined.
Disc Type: Elastomer-coated ductile iron, EPDM lined.
Disc Type: Epoxy-coated ductile iron, EPDM lined.
Operator for Sizes DN50 to DN150: Standard lever handle, with latch lock.
Operator for Sizes DN200 to DN600: Gear operator with position indicator.
Operator for Sizes DN200 and Larger, 2400 mm or Higher above Floor:
Chain-wheel operator.

CHECK VALVES

Swing Check Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380 kPa
CWP, or Class 150, 2070 kPa CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, cast-bronze
body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat,
threaded connections.
Swing Check Valves, DN65 to DN 150: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 1380 kPa
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast- iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing,
weighted non-slam, silent type, bronze disc, flanged or grooved end
connections.
Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126,
AWWA C508 having integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight,
air cushioned side mounted cylinder, cast iron disk, double clevis
connected to ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved connection.
Lift Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body and cap (main components),
horizontal or vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, silent type, bronze disc
EPFM rubber disc with stainless-steel holder threaded connections.

PART - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and
corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to
prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides
and seats made accessible by such operation.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage.
Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material
for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom
from defects and damage.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

INSTALLATION

Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged
to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system
shutdown.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where
necessary.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the
pipe.
Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm above finished floor
elevation.
Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

THREADED CONNECTIONS

Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve
internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into
valve.
Align threads at point of assembly.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads,
except where dry seal threading is specified.
Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end
into which the pipe is being threaded.

FLANGED CONNECTIONS

Align flange surfaces parallel.

Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of
flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants
on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque
wrench.
For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and
downstream for proper shutoff and retention.

VALVE END SELECTION

Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

Steel Pipe Sizes, DN50 and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.

APPLICATION SCHEDULE
General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty;
globe and ball valves for throttling duty. Refer to piping system
Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.
Refer to the Drawings also for the requirement of the type of the valve.
Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa CWP, with stem extension.
Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, mechanical packing EPDM lined.
Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system,
and bronze disc.
Butterfly Valves: Class 125, aluminum bronze EPDM lined. EPDM or Buna N
sleeve and stem seals.
Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat, EPDM lined plates.
Check Valves: Class 125, swing type as indicated, EPDM lined plates.
Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140 kPa CWP, with stem extension and memory
stop.
Plug Valves: EPDM packing.
Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze disc; or Class 125, cast-
iron body.
Butterfly Valves: Class 125, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated ductile
iron disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class
125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, or Class 125, cast-iron body lift
check.
Condenser Water Systems: Check the suitability of valves to ozone
treatment when used for condenser water. Use the following valve types:
Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140 kPa CWP, with memory stop.
Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class
125, cast-iron body.
Butterfly Valves: Class125, aluminum bronze, epoxy-coated ductile iron
disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class
125, cast-iron body swing check; Class 125, or Class 125, cast-iron body lift
check.

ADJUSTING

Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put
into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak
persists.
 SECTION 16
PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS

PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical
piping systems.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials,

working pressures, and temperatures.
Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between
anchors.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection
and design of expansion fittings and loops.
Anchor Details:Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions
and methods of assembly.
Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and
personnel.
Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for
each expansion fitting and loop.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional
engineer.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
registered and qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located
and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

PART - PRODUCTS
PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200 kPa minimum pressure rating, with

end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-
end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless
otherwise indicated.
Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows,
stainless-steel-pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and
carbon-steel shroud.
Expansion Compensators: 1200 kPa minimum pressure rating, with
internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
End Connections for DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
End Connections for DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.
Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and
pressure rated for 1200 kPa at 116 deg. C minimum.
Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external
control rods; and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
Types: Single and double sphere.
Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-
metal-hose legs joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet
and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer
sheaths.
Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.
End Connections for DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
End Connections for DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
Joints for DN50 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 4800 kPa at 21 deg. C and 3550 kPa at 315 deg.
C minimum pressure ratings.
Joints for DN65 to DN150 : Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg. C and 1380 kPa at 315 deg.
C minimum pressure ratings.
Joints for DN200 and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 1130 kPa at 21 deg. C and 830 kPa at 315 deg.
C minimum pressure ratings.

PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS

Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint

designed for repacking under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at
204 deg. C minimum with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to
match piping system, drip connection if used for steam piping systems, and
flanged- end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.
Double-Slip Type: With base.
Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition
packing, designed for 360- degree rotation and angular deflection, and
1725 kPa at 204 deg. C minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials Specifications," and with
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of
pressure-containing parts and bolting.
End Connections for DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
End Connections for DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
Joints for DN150 and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
Joints for DN200 and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.

GUIDES

Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base
for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug
anchor for use in hardened Psortland cement concrete, and tension and
shear capacities appropriate for application.
Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with
hardened Portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities
appropriate for application.
Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy
resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where
fastener is to be installed.
Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on
stud, unless otherwise indicated.
Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Division
3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and
concrete.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged
nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior
applications.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART - EXECUTION
EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are
installed.
Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as

required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during
anticipated change in temperature.
Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications."
Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's
written instructions.

GUIDE INSTALLATION

Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

ANCHOR INSTALLATION

Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those

permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses
to connected equipment.
Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars
to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions
indicated, or otherwise required, and include embedded fasteners.
Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written
instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.
Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and
anchors installed on or in concrete.
PAINTING

Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same
materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC- PA 1 requirements
for touching up field-painted surfaces.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of
0.05 mm.
Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 17
METERS AND GAGES

PART – GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical systems and water
meters installed outside the building.
Related Sections include the following:
Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water meters outside the
building.
Division 13 Sections for fire-pump flow-measuring systems.
Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping" for gas meters.
Mechanical equipment Sections that specify meters and gages as part of
factory-fabricated equipment.
Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters shall be furnished by the
contractor to site, ready for installation. Where install exposed to weather
conditions, meters and gauges shall be corrosion resistant.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance

curves for each meter, gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale
range, fittings, and location for each meter and gage.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages
certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance
with specified requirements.
Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. Include data for the following:
Flow-measuring systems.
Flowmeters.
Thermal-energy flowmeters.
Water meters.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Comply with applicable portions of ASME and ISA standards or approved

equal pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gages.
Uniformity/standardization of meters and gages furnished, of a single
manufacturer, shall be maintained throughout the airport facilities.

PART 17 - PRODUCTS
THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:

Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg. C, with 1-degree scale divisions.
Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg. C, with 1-degree scale
divisions .
Condenser Water: minus 18 to plus 70 deg. C, with 1-degree scale
divisions.
Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg. C, with 1-degree scale divisions.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale
division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

Description: ASTM E 1.
Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front,
spring secured, 230 mm long.
Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical
plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched
markings.
Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of
length to suit installation.

DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.

Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115 mm diameter, glass lens.
Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical
plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze Bourdon tube pressure gage.
Movement: Brass, precision geared.
Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently
etched markings.
Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of
length to suit installation.

REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.

Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115 mm diameter, glass lens.
Movement: Brass, precision geared.
Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently
etched markings.
Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to
suit installation.
Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.

BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS

Description: ASME B40.3; direct-mounting, universal-angle dial type.

Case: Stainless-steel with 125 mm diameter, glass lens.
Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical
plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
Element: Bimetal coil.
Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched
markings.
Stem: Stainless-steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.

INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS

Description: ASME B40.3, bimetal type.

Dial: 25 mm diameter.
Case: Stainless-steel.
Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3 mm diameter, tapered-end stem with
nominal length of 125 mm.

SEPARABLE SOCKETS

Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe

fitting to hold fixed thermometer stem.
Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.
Material: Stainless-steel, for use in steel piping.
Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not
insulated.
Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

THERMOMETER WELLS

Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe

fitting to hold test thermometer.
Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.
Material: Stainless-steel, for use in steel piping.
Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than
thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not
insulated.
Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
All thermometer wells are not to restrict the flow or service flow and are
not to be installed with sections outside the service being monitored.

DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES

Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with

threaded end for attaching thermometer.
Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than
thickness of exterior insulation.
Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm, but not less than
thickness of insulation lining.
PRESSURE GAGES

Description: ASME B40.1, phosphor-bronze Bourdon tube type with

bottom connection; dry type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type,
for booster sets and pumps.
Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115 mm diameter, glass lens.
Connector: Brass, DN8.
Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
Range: Comply with the following:
Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure.
Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.

PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS

Valves: DN8 brass or stainless-steel needle type.

Syphons: DN8 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
Snubbers: ASME B40.5, DN8 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant
porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working
pressure.
TEST PLUGS

Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN15 fitting.

Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa minimum.
Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3 mm OD probe from
dial-type thermometer or pressure gage.
Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg. C,
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg. C, ethylene-
propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial
thermometers, and carrying case.
Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the
system's operating conditions.

FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS

System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing,

valves, fittings, and conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter,
and system fluid.
Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range
of equipment or system where used.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total
volume in liters.
Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150 mm
diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting
to flow element.
Scale: Liters per second.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting
made for installation in piping.
Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and
attached tag with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50
and smaller elements and flanged or welded for DN65 and larger
elements.
Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa.
Temperature Rating: 121 deg. C.
Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made
for insertion into piping.
Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with
brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data.
Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa.
Temperature Rating: 121 deg. C.

TURBINE FLOWMETERS

Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in liters per second.

Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body and plastic turbine or
impeller, with integral direct- reading scale.
Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa minimum.
Temperature Rating: 82 deg. C minimum.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total
volume in liters.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 2-1/2 percent.

VORTEX-SHEDDING FLOWMETERS

In-Line Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation between pipe

flanges; measures flow directly in liters per second.
Construction: Stainless-steel body, with integral transmitter and direct-
reading scale.
Pressure Rating: 6900 kPa minimum.
Temperature Rating: 260 deg. C minimum.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total
volume in liters.
Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power operation.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 7-10 percent for liquids and 1-1/4 percent for
gases.
Insertion Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation in pipe;
measures flow directly in liters per second.
Construction: Stainless-steel probe, with integral transmitter and direct-
reading scale.
Pressure Rating: 6900 kPa minimum.
Temperature Rating: 260 deg. C minimum.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.
Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total
volume in liters.
Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent for liquids and 1-1/2 percent for gases.

FLOW INDICATORS
Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation
in piping systems.
Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic
pelton-wheel indicator.
Pressure Rating: 860 kPa.
Temperature Rating: 93 deg. C.

THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS

Instruments include turbine-wheel flowmeter, two temperature sensors,

transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery pack, integral stop
valves, strainer, and magnetic trap.
Instruments include turbine-wheel or flow-sensor element and meter, two
temperature sensors, transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral
battery pack, integral stop valves, strainer, and magnetic trap.
Construction: Bronze body.
Pressure Rating: 860 kPa.
Temperature Range: 0 to 121 deg. C.
Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatt
hours or joules.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.

WATER METERS

Description: AWWA C700, displacement type, bronze case. Registers flow

in liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
Description: AWWA C701, turbine type. Registers flow in liters or cubic
meters as required by utility.
Description: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case. Registers flow in
liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
Description: AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line, proportional,
detector type; 1035 kPa working pressure; with meter on bypass. Registers
flow in liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
Bypass Meter: AWWA C702, compound type, bronze case; size not less
than one-half nominal size of main-line meter.
Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; size not less than
one-half nominal size of main-line meter.
Description: AWWA C703, UL-listed, FM-approved, main-line-turbine,
detector type; 1200 kPa working pressure; with strainer and with meter on
bypass. Registers flow in liters or cubic meters as required by utility.
Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine type, bronze case; not less than DN50.
Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; direct-reading type
complying with AWWA C706; modified with signal transmitting assembly,
low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.
Remote Registration System: Utility's standard; encoder-type complying
with AWWA C707; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage
connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.
Data-Acquisition Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and
quantity.
Visible Display Units: Comply with utility's requirements for type and
quantity.

PART - EXECUTION
METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written

instructions for applications where used.

THERMOMETER INSTALLATION

Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

Install in the following locations:
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic and chiller.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up
central systems.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
Inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank.
Outside-air, supply air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
Each duct thermometer support flange.
Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing
connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use
minimum tubing length.

Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed

thermometers are indicated.
Install with socket extending to center of pipe.
Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.
Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test
thermometers are indicated.
Install with stem extending to center of pipe.
Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct
thermometers are indicated. Attach to duct with screws.

PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION

Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on

pipe at most readable position.
Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
Building water-service entrance.
Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.
Inlet and Outlet of each hydronic coil in Air Handling Units.
Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each
pump, including fire and booster pumps.
Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.

FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping

systems.
Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at
inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as
indicated.
Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight
lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by
manufacturer's written instructions.
Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in
accessible locations.
Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or
brackets in accessible locations.
Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and
meters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.

FLOWMETER INSTALLATION

Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETER INSTALLATION

Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line
for remote sensor. Mount meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide
bracket to support meter.

WATER METER INSTALLATION

Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to AWWA M6 and

utility's requirements.
Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water meter
inlet. Install valve on water meter outlet and valved bypass around meter,
unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.
Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter
inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters,
valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.
Install detector-type water meters with shutoff valves on water meter inlet
and outlet and on full- size valved bypass around meter. Support meter,
valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

Install roughing-in piping and specialties for water meter installation

according to utility's instructions and requirements.

CONNECTIONS

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The
following are specific connection requirements:
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow
service and maintenance.
Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated
meters and devices.
Ground electrically operated meters.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
Install electrical connections for power and devices.
Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 16
Sections.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after

installation.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces.
Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred
surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.

SECTION18
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration

isolation roof curbs, and seismic restraints and snubbers.
Related Sections include the following:
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger restraints.
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for flexible duct connectors.
Division 15 piping Sections for flexible pipe connectors.
Division 15 equipment Sections for HVAC equipment.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of
isolator specified. Include load deflection curves.
Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional
engineer, for the following:
Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design
of vibration isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages
and attachments to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include
auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints
and snubbers.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

registered and qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the
kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
design and installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints
that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of
vibration and seismic restraints. All selection shall be certified by
manufacturer.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

Project seismic zone is 2A with a zone factor of 0.15.

Building Importance Factor: 1.0.

SEISMIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

General Requirements: The requirements for seismic protection measures

described in this section shall be applied to the mechanical equipment and
systems listed below.
Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected
shall include the following items to the extent required on the Drawings or
in other Sections of the Specification:
Storage tanks for oil and water.
Water, oil and gas piping.
Expansion air separator tanks.
Valves and fittings for piping.
Heat exchangers.
Water chiller units.
Cooling towers.
Air and refrigerant compressors.
Refrigerant piping.
Air handling units.
Pumps with motors.
Ducts.
Exhaust and return fans.
Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems shall be installed
as required on the Drawings and other Sections of the Specification and
shall be seismically protected in accordance with this Specification:
All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below Under
"Items Not Covered By This Section".
Chilled water distribution systems outside of buildings.
Fuel piping outside of buildings.
All water supply systems.
Storm and sanitary sewer systems.
Condenser water piping outside the building.
Fuel storage tanks.
Water storage tanks.
Contractor Designed Bracing: The Contractor shall design the bracing in
accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Design shall be
performed by a certified engineer. Resistance to lateral forces induced by
earthquakes shall be accomplished without consideration of friction
resulting from gravity loads.
Items Not Covered By This Section: Fire Protection Systems. Seismic
protection of piping for fire protection systems shall be installed as
specified in Division 13.
Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints: Seismic restraints are not required
for the following items:
Gas piping less than 25 mm inside diameter.
Piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 32 mm inside diameter.
All other piping less than 64 mm inside diameter.
Rectangular air handling ducts less than 0.56 m² in cross sectional area.
Round air handling ducts less than 711 mm in diameter.
Piping suspended by individual hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the
top of pipe to the bottom of the supporting structural member where the
hanger is attached. All hangers shall meet the length requirements. If the
length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the entire run
shall be braced.
Ducts suspended by hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of the
duct to the bottom of the supporting structural member. All hangers shall
meet the length requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded by
one hanger in the run, the entire run shall be braced.
Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be seismically protected in
accordance with the provisions of this Specification.

COORDINATION

Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-

restraint devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is
supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration
isolation bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Sections.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Sections.

PART - PRODUCTS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Noise Criteria:
Noise Criteria: Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and
duct systems shall not exceed following NC levels:

Type Of Room NC LEVEL

Auditoriums, Theaters 35
 Bathrooms and Toilet Rooms 40
Mosques 35
Conference Rooms 35
Corridors 40
Dining Rooms, Food Services/ Serving 35
Kitchens 50
Laundries 50

Lobbies, Waiting Areas 40

Locker Rooms 50
Offices, large open 40
Offices, small private 35
Shops 50

For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the
Contractor shall select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria,
local ordinance noise levels, and ASHRAE requirements are not exceeded.
Selection procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook 2001, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration.
An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to
compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between
room test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after
occupancy which may include the addition of sound absorbing material,
such as furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The
room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power
level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.
In the absence of specified measurement requirements, measure
equipment noise levels 0.914 m from equipment and at an elevation of
maximum noise generation.
Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria: For each piece of machinery in
the human work environment, the maximum airborne sound levels shall
not exceed 84 dB A-weighted scale, continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB
peak sound pressure-level, impact or impulse, noise. Unless otherwise
specified the maximum equipment airborne sound power level in dB shall
not exceed the following data:

Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)

 Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)
Equipment
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air Handling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79
Make-Up Air Fan 91 91 80 84 82 76 71 65
Air Conditioning 100 96 90 89 86 80 75 72
Unit
Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Cooling Tower 110 110 105 102 98 95 92 87
Air Compressor 90 89 92 93 92 92 90 81
Pump 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72
Fan 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37

Seismic Restraint Requirements:

All mechanical equipment not supported with isolators external to the unit shall be
securely anchored to the structure. Such mechanical equipment shall be properly
supported to resist a horizontal force of 50 percent of the weight of the equipment
furnished.
All mechanical equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall be provided with
seismic restraints capable of resisting a horizontal force of 100 percent of the weight of
the equipment furnished.
Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment:
Not to exceed a self- excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per
second (0.20 inch per second) RMS, filter in, when measured with a
vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal, and
axial directions or measured at equipment mounting feet if bearings are
concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and motors may be
made at the mounting feet.
Materials: Rubber shall be natural rubber. Elastomer shall be chloroprene.
Shore A durometer measurement of both materials shall range between
40 and 60. Inorganic materials such as precompressed, high-density,
fibrous glass encased in a resilient moisture-impervious membrane may be
used in lieu of specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this
substitution is made, specified deflections shall be modified by the
manufacturing source to accommodate physical characteristics of
inorganic materials and to provide equal or better vibration isolation.
Weather-exposed metal vibration- isolator parts shall be corrosion
protected. Springs shall be chloroprene coated.

VIBRATION ISOLATORS

Floor Mountings:
Double Deflection Neoprene (Type N): Shall include neoprene covered steel support
plated (top and bottom), friction pads, and necessary bolt holes.
Spring Isolators (Type S): Shall be freestanding, laterally stable and include acoustical
friction pads and leveling bolts. Isolators shall have a minimum ratio of spring diameter-
to-operating spring height of 1.0 and an additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of
rated deflection.
Pads (Type D), Washers (Type W), and Bushings (Type L): Pads shall be felt, cork,
neoprene waffle, neoprene and cork sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and
steel waffle, or reinforced duck and neoprene. Washers and bushings shall be
reinforced duck and neoprene. Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa (50 pounds
per square inch).
Hangers: Shall be combination neoprene and springs unless otherwise
noted and shall allow for expansion of pipe.
Combination Neoprene and Spring (Type H): Vibration hanger shall contain a spring and
double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring shall have a diameter not less
than 0.8 of compressed operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum
additional travel of 50 percent between design height and solid height. Spring shall
permit a 15-degree angular misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.
Spring Position Hanger (Type HP): Similar to combination neoprene and spring hanger
except hanger shall hold piping at a fixed elevation during installation and include a
secondary adjustment feature to transfer load to spring while maintaining same
position.
Neoprene (Type HN): Vibration hanger shall contain a double deflection type neoprene
isolation element. Hanger rod shall be separated from contact with hanger bracket by a
neoprene grommet.
Spring (Type HS): Vibration hanger shall contain a coiled steel spring in series with a
neoprene grommet. Spring shall have a diameter not less than 0.8 of compressed
operating spring height. Spring shall have a minimum additional travel of 50 percent
between design height and solid height. Spring shall permit a 15 degree angular
misalignment without rubbing on hanger box.
Hanger supports for piping 50 mm (2 inches) and larger shall have a pointer and scale
deflection indicator.

SEISMIC CONTROLS

Captive Spring Mount for Seismic Restraint (Type SS):

Design mounts to resiliently resist seismic forces in all directions. Snubbing shall take
place in all modes with adjustment to limit upward, downward, and horizontal travel to
a maximum of 6 mm (1/4-inch) before contacting snubbers. Mountings shall have a
minimum rating of one G coefficient of gravity as calculated and certified by a
registered structural engineer.
All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment.
Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent
of the rated deflection. Mountings shall have ports for spring inspection. Provide an all
directional neoprene cushion collar around the equipment bolt.
Spring Isolators with Vertical Limit Stops (Type SP): Similar to spring
isolators noted above, except include a vertical limit stop to limit upward
travel if weight is removed and also to reduce movement and spring
extension due to wind loads. Provide clearance around restraining bolts to
prevent mechanical short-circuiting. Isolators shall have a minimum
seismic rating as described above.
Seismic Pad (Type DS): Pads shall be felt, cork neoprene waffle, neoprene
and cork sandwich, neoprene and fiberglass, neoprene and steel waffle, or
reinforced duck and neoprene, with steel top plate and drilled for an
anchor bolt. Washers and bushings shall be reinforced duck and neoprene.
Size pads for a maximum load of 345 kPa.
Thrust Restraints Type (THR): Combination spring and elastomeric
restraints with coil spring and elastomeric insert in compression. Factory
set for thrust.
Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30
degrees of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation
efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
Manufactured Seismic Snubbers: All-directional, double-acting snubbers.
Construction: Interlocking steel members restrained by a 19 mm thick, replaceable,
shock- absorbing neoprene insert. Maintain 3 mm clearance in all directions between
rigid and resilient surfaces.
Fabricated Seismic Snubbers: Welded structural-steel shapes designed and
fabricated to restrain equipment or vibration isolation bases from
excessive movement during a seismic event. Design to resist gravity forces.
Construction: Welded steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36M.
Resilient Components: 19 mm thick, replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene insert.

VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES

Rails (Type R): Design rails with isolator brackets to reduce mounting
height of equipment and cradle machines having legs or bases that do not
require a complete supplementary base. To assure adequate stiffness,
height of members shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension
but not less than 100 mm (4 inches). Where rails are used with neoprene
mounts for small fans or close-coupled pumps, extend rails to compensate
overhang of housing.
Integral Structural Steel Base (Type B): Design base with isolator brackets
to reduce mounting height of equipment that require a complete
supplementary rigid base. To assure adequate stiffness, height of members
shall be a minimum of 1/12 of longest base dimension, but not less than
100 mm (4 inches).
Inertia Base (Type I): Base shall be a reinforced concrete inertia base. Pour
concrete into a welded steel channel frame, incorporating prelocated
equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves. Level the concrete to provide a
smooth uniform bearing surface for equipment mounting. Provide grout
under uneven supports. Channel depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 of
longest dimension of base but not less than 150 mm (6 inches). Form shall
include 13-mm (1/2-inch) reinforcing bars welded in place on minimum of
203 mm (8 inch) centers running both ways in a layer 40 mm (1-1/2 inches)
above bottom. Use height saving brackets in all mounting locations.
Weight of inertia base shall be equal to or greater than weight of
equipment supported to provide a maximum peak-to-peak displacement
of 2 mm (1/16 inch).
Curb Mounted Isolation Base (Type CB): Fabricate from aluminum to fit on
top of standard curb with overlap to allow water run-off and have wind
and water seals which shall not interfere with spring action. Provide
resilient snubbers with 6 mm (1/4 inch) clearance for wind resistance. Top
and bottom bearing surfaces shall have sponge type weather seals.
Integral spring isolators shall comply with Spring Isolator (Type S)
requirements.

VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS

Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and

watertight curb designed to resiliently support roof-mounted equipment
and to withstand 56 m/s wind impinging laterally against the side of the
equipment. Design restraints to meet seismic requirements.
Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding,
unhoused, laterally stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building structure and
include a wood nailer strip for attachment of roof material and 50 mm of rigid
insulation on the inside of the assembly.
Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to permit leveling
of equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly with a rubber isolation pad.
Locate spring isolators so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life
of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.
Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials, attached to
the upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of the lower support
assembly, and counterflashed over the roof materials.

PART 21 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION

Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products

according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration
isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural floors as required.
Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration
isolation bases. Bolt isolator baseplates to structural supports as required.
Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21 MPa
concrete, and trowel to a smooth, hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is
specified in Division 3.
Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on
vibration isolators.

SEISMIC CONTROL

Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or

concrete inertia bases.
Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-
mounted piece of equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the
vibration isolators and bolt to supporting structure.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at

normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust
limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operations.
Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and
stop.

SELECTION GUIDE FOR VIBRATION ISOLATORS

ON GRADE 3 m FLOOR 9 m FLOOR 12 m FLOOR 15 m FLOOR

SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN
BASE ISO MI BAS ISO MI BAS ISOL MI BAS ISO MI BAS ISO MI
EQUIPMEN TYPE L N E L N E TYP N E L N E L N
T TYP DEF TYP TYP DEF TYP E DEF TYP TYP DEF TYP TYP DEF
E L E E L E L E E L E E L
REFRIGERATION MACHINES
ABSORPTIO --- D --- --- SP 1 --- SP 1 --- SP 1.7 --- SP 1.7
N
PACKAGE --- D --- --- SP 1 --- SP 1.7 --- SP 1.7 R SP 2.5
D
HERMETI
C

ON GRADE 3 m FLOOR 9m 12 m 15 m
SPAN FLOO FLOO FLOO
R R R
EQUIPME SPAN SPAN SPAN
NT BAS ISO MI BAS ISO MI BAS ISO MI BAS ISO MI BAS ISO MI
E L N E L N E L N E L N E L N
TYP TYP DEF TYP TYP DEF TYP TYP DEF TYP TYP DEF TYP TYP DEF
E E L E E L E E L E E L E E L
OPEN B D --- B SP 1 --- SP 1. B SP 1. B SP 3.
7 7 5
CENTRIFUG
AL
ROTARY- --- N 0.4 --- N 0.4 --- N 0.4 --- N 0.4 --- N 0.4
SCREW
 RECIPROCATING:
500 - 750 --- D --- --- SP 1.7 R SP 1.7 R SP 2.5 R SP 3.5
RPM
751 RPM --- D --- --- SP 1 --- --- 1.7 R SP 2.5 R SP 2.5
&
OVER

COMPRESSORS PUMPS
UP --- D,L --- ---- D, --- --- D,L --- --- D,L, --- --- D,L ---
THROU , L, , W ,
GH 1- W W W W
1/2 HP
2 HP AND OVER:
500 - 750 --- D --- --- S 1.7 --- S 2.5 --- S 2.5 --- S 2.5
RPM
750 RPM --- D --- --- S 1 --- S 1.7 --- S 2.5 --- S 2.5
&
OVER

PUMPS
CLOS UP --- --- --- --- D, --- --- D,L --- --- D,L, --- --- D,L ---
E TO L, , W ,
COUPL 1-/2 W W W
ED HP
2 HP --- --- --- I S 1 I S 1 I S 1.7 I S 1.7
&
OVE
BASE R
MOUN
UP --- --- --- I S 1 I S 1 I S 1.7 I S 1.7
TE D
TO
10
HP

ON GRADE 3 m FLOOR 9m 12 m 15 m
SPAN FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR
SPAN SPAN SPAN
EQUIPMENT BAS ISOL MIN BAS ISOL MIN BAS ISOL MIN BAS ISOL MIN BAS ISOL MIN
 E TYP DEF E TYP DEF E TYP DEFL E TYP DEF E TYP DEF
TYP E L TYP E L TYP E TYP E L TYP E L
E E E E E
15 I S 1 I S 1 I S 1.7 I S 1.7 I S 1.7
HP
THR
U 40
HP
50 HP I S 1 I S 1 I S 1.7 I S 2.5 I S 2.5
&
OVE
R

ROOF VENTILTORS
ABOVE OCCUPIED AREAS:
5 HP & --- --- --- CB S 1 CB S 1 CB S 1 CB S 1
OVER

CENTRIFUGAL BLOWERS
UP TO 50 HP:
UP TO 200 B N 0.3 B S 2.5 B S 2.5 B S 3.5 B S 3.5
RPM
201 - 300 B N 0.3 B S 1.7 B S 2.5 B S 2.5 B S 3.5
RPM
301 - 500 B N 0.3 B S 1.7 B S 1.7 B S 2.5 B S 3.5
RPM
501 RPM & B N 0.3 B S 1 B S 1 B S 1.7 B S 2.5
OVER
60 HP & OVER:
UP TO 300 B S 1.7 I S 2.5 I S 3.5 I S 3.5 I S 3.5
RPM
301 - 500 B S 1.7 I S 1.7 I S 2.5 I S 3.5 I S 3.5
RPM
501 RPM & B S 1 I S 1.7 I S 1.7 I S 2.5 I S 2.5
OVER
 COOLING TOWERS

ON 3 m FLOOR 9m 12 m 15 m
GRADE SPAN FLOOR FLOOR FLOOR
SPAN SPAN SPAN
EQUIPME BAS ISO MI BA ISO MI BAS ISO MI BAS ISO MI BA ISO MI
NT E L N SE L N E L N E L N SE L N
TYP TYP DE TYP TY DEF TYP TYP DE TYP TYP DEF TYP TY DEF
E E FL E PE L E E FL E E L E PE L
UP TO --- --- --- --- SP 1 --- SP 1.7 --- SP 2.5 --- SP 3.5
500
RPM
501 RPM --- --- --- --- SP 1 --- SP 1 --- SP 1.7 --- SP 2.5
&
OVER

AIR HANDLING UNIT PACKAGES

SUSPENDED:
UP THRU 5 --- --- --- --- H 1 - H 1 --- H 1 --- H 1
HP -
-
7-1/2 HP & OVER:
UP TO --- --- --- --- H,T 1. - H,T 1.7 --- H,T 1.7 --- H,T 1.7
500 H 7 - H H H
RPM R - R R R
501 RPM --- --- --- --- H,T 1 - H,T 1 --- H,T 1.7 --- H,T 1.7
& H - H H H
OVER R - R R R
FLOOR MOUNTED:
UP THRU 5 --- D --- --- S 1 - S 1 --- S 1 --- S 1
HP -
-
7-1/2 HP & OVER:
UP TO --- D --- R S,T 1. R S,T 1.7 R S,TH 1.7 R S,T 1.7
 500 H 7 H R HR
RPM R R
501 RPM --- D --- --- S,T 1 - S,T 1 R S,TH 1.7 R S,T 1.7
& H - H R HR
OVER R - R
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL AND VANE AXIAL FANS, FLOOR MOUNTED: (APR 9)
UP THRU 50 HP:

ON GRADE 3 m FLOOR 9 m FLOOR 12 m FLOOR 15 m FLOOR

SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN
BASE ISOL MIN BAS ISOL MIN BASE ISOL MIN BAS ISOL MIN BAS ISOL MIN
EQUIPMENT TYPE TYPE DEF E TYP DEFL TYPE TYPE DEF E TYPE DEFL E TYP DEF
L TYP E L TYPE TYP E L
E E
UP TO 300 --- D --- R S 2.5 R S 2.5 R S 2.5 R S 3.5
RPM
301 - 500 --- D --- R S 1.7 R S 1.7 R S 2.5 R S 2.5
RPM
501 - & OVER --- D --- --- S 1 - S 1 R S 1.7 R S 2.5
-
-
60 HP AND OVER:
301 - 500 R S 1 R S 1.7 R S 1.7 R S 2.5 R S 3.5
RPM
501 RPM & R S 1 R S 1.7 R S 1.7 R S 1.7 R S 2.5
OVER

NOTES:
 1. For suspended floors lighter than 100 mm thick concrete, select deflection
requirements from next higher span.
2. For separate chiller building on grade, pump isolators may be omitted.
3. Direct bolt fire pumps to concrete base. Provide pads (D) for domestic water
booster pump package.
4. For projects in seismic areas, use only SS & DS type isolators and snubbers.
5. Isolators not required where cooling tower is located on grade or on roof
over mechanical room.
6. Suspended: Use "H" isolators of same deflection as floor mounted.

SECTION 19
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions

of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated

to fixtures and equipment inside building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution Systems" for exterior water service
piping.
2. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers,
pressure gages, and fittings.
3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping
specialties.

DEFINITIONS

A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water
to building.
 B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between
water service piping and water distribution piping.
C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys
water to fixtures and equipment throughout the building.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.
2. PB: Polybutylene.
3. UPVC: Polyvinyl chloride, Uplasticized.
4. RTRP, (GRE): Glass reinforced epoxy resin pipe.
5. PP: Polypropylene.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping

systems rated for 1.5 times the system working pressure. The following
is the minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Combined Fire-Protection and Domestic, Service Entrance Piping: 1725 kPa.
2. Service Entrance Piping: downstream the PRV: 1100 kPa.
3. Water Distribution Piping: 860 kPa.

SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s literature and data for piping and fittings.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
C. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning and Disinfection" Article.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made

to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related
Materials," for plastic potable-water piping components. Include
marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping.
D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health
Effects," Sections 1 through 9 for potable-water piping and
components.
EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed,

are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels describing contents. Deliver materials to the Employer.
1. Keyed Couplings, DN100 and Smaller: 12 of each type and size installed.
Include one extra gasket with each coupling.
2. Keyed Couplings, DN125 and Larger: 6 of each type and size installed. Include
one extra gasket with each coupling.

PART - PRODUCTS
PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. PVC pipe to SAS 14, DIN 8062 or equivalent ASTM standard as specified
below.
C. Pressure type uPVC to BS 3505, Class E, fittings shall be machine welded
and all pressure fittings shall be 100 percent fiberglass reinforced
(except couplings, reducer couplings or reducer bushings) or equivalent
ASTM standard as specified below.
D. Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the following markings in accordance
with ASTM F 441: manufacturer's name, material designation code,
nominal pipe size, schedule or class, pressure rating in psi or kilopascal,
the ASTM designation number F 441 and National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) seal of approval for potable water.
E. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F441, Schedules 40 and 80
F. UPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.
G. PVC Pressure Type Plastic Pipe: PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM D 2241
for plain end and ASTM D 2672 or ASTM F 480 for bell end.
H. RTRP, (GRE) Pipe: pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2996 or
ASTM D 2310 rated for 15 bar working pressure at 50 deg. C (122 deg.
F).
I. PB and PP Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2662, Schedule 80.

PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS

 A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials
are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Schedule 80, CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F 437.
C. Schedule 80, CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 439.
D. Schedule 40, CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 438.
E. CPVC Plastic-Piping-System Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2846.
F. Schedule 80, PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467.
G. Schedule 40, PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466.
H. Schedule 80, PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.
I. PVC Gasketed Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150; with gaskets.
J. RTRP Fiberglass reinforced resin pipe fittings: ASTM D 2310 rated for 15
bars working pressure and 50 deg. C (122 deg. F).

JOINING MATERIALS

A. General:Applications of the following piping joining materials are

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for commonly used joining materials.
C. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size
as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible
with piping to be joined.

VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty
valves.

PART - EXECUTION
EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

PIPING APPLICATIONS
 A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to
piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves
underground. However valves may be installed within a valve chamber:
1. All sizes: RTRP resin pipe and fittings, and mechanical interlocking joints.
2. All sizes: PP pipe and fittings, and mechanical interlocking joints
D. Aboveground, Water and Soft Water Distribution Piping: Use the
following:
1. ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe and CPVC, Schedule 40 threaded
fittings.
2. DN40 and Smaller: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3. DN50: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded
fittings.
4. DN50: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent- cemented joints.
5. DN50: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40 socket
fittings; and solvent- cemented joints.
6. DN50: ASTM D 2846, CPVC pipe and fitting system and solvent-cemented
joints.
7. DN65 to DN90: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC, Schedule 80
threaded fittings.
8. DN65 to DN90: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
9. DN65 to DN90: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
10. DN100 to DN150: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC, Schedule
80 threaded fittings.
11. DN100 to DN150: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80
socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
12. DN100 to DN150: ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40
socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints.
13. DN200:ASTM F 441, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
14. All pipe sizes: ASTM D 1785, uPVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-
cemented joints. Use for cold water only, downstream of pressure reducing
valves.
E. Hot water Distribution Piping; Use the following:
1. All pipe sizes: ASTM F 441, CPVC or ASTM D 2662 PB, Schedule 80; CPVC
socket fittings and solvent cemented joints, or PB head fusion fittings.

VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types

 are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Use globe or ball valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Valve sizes DN50 and smaller shall be provided with threaded end
connections and removable unions.
D. Valve sizes DN65 and larger shall be provided with grooved end
connections for mechanical couplings.

PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"

for basic piping installation.

SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes

and locations indicated for service entrances into building. Refer to
Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water service piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and
test tee with valve, inside building at each service entrance pipe.
C. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water-pressure
regulators.
D. RTRP (GRE) Service Entrance Piping: Comply with manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures. Install buried piping between
shutoff valve and connection to water service piping with restrained
joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor at entrance. Include thrust-block
supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
E. Install wall penetration system at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking
rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division
15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals.

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward towards drain.

 B. Install piping level without pitch.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"

for basic piping joint construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and
bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Solvent-Cemented, Thermoplastic Pipe and Fitting Joints: Handle
cleaners, primers, and solvent cements according to ASTM F 402.

ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS

A. Rough-in water piping for water meter installation according to utility

company's requirements.
B. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility
company's requirements. Water meter shall be provided by the
Contractor.

VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch

and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, and where indicated.
Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 and smaller. Use gate or
butterfly valves for piping DN65 and larger.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment,
on each supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where
indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 and smaller. Use gate
or butterfly valves for piping DN65 and larger.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water
riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain
water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and
branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch,
discharge side of each pump and circulator, and where indicated. Use
 ball valve for piping DN50 and smaller and butterfly valve for piping
DN65 and larger. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
balancing valves.
E. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return
branch, discharge side of each pump and circulator, and where
indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
calibrated balancing valves.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger

and support devices. Install the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal
runs 30 m and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal
runs longer than 30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight,
horizontal runs longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10
mm minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for CPVC plastic piping with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. DN25 and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 900 mm with 10 mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1500 mm.
2. DN32 to DN50: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 10 mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
3. DN65 to DN90: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 13 mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
4. DN100 and DN125: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 16
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
5. DN150: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19 mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
6. DN200: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 22 mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
F. Install hangers for uPVC plastic piping with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
 1. DN50 and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 10 mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
2. DN65 to DN90: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 13 mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
3. DN100 and DN125: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 16
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
4. DN150: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19 mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
5. DN200: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 22 mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.

CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use

transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff
valve, and extend to and connect to the following:
1. Booster Systems: Connect cold-water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in
sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division
15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide
shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for
connections DN65 and larger.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by the Engineer.
2. During installation, notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Engineer.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing- in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by the Engineer to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If the Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the Engineer.
B. Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,
 submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of
piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been
covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test
pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

CLEANING AND DISINFECTION

A. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution

piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the Third party
specialist or, if method is not prescribed, procedure described in either
AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 mg/L
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water
coming from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples to an approved Third party Specialist for analysis and
for coliform count.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the Engineer. Repeat procedure if
biological examination shows contamination. An acceptable test shall show
absence of coliform organism.
B. Prepare, certify and submit reports for purging and disinfecting
activities. Report shall indicate:
a. Name and location of the job and date disinfection was performed.
b. Material used and retention period of disinfectant.
c. PPM of chlorine during retention and after flushing.
d. Statement that disinfection was performed as specified.
e. Signature and address of certifying agency.
C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work
progresses.

COMMISSIONING
 A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary
sealing of piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain
plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as
specified for application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready
for use.
C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments,
and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.
D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and
operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 550 kPa
maximum, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.

SECTION 20
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING

GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions
of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm
drainage piping inside building and to locations indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary
sewerage and storm drainage.
2. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for foundation drains.
3. Division 2 Section "Septic Tank Systems" for sewerage disposal systems.
4. Division 2 Section "Interceptors" for sewerage and drainage system
interceptors.
5. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drainage and vent piping
system specialties.

DEFINITIONS

A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that

conveys sanitary sewerage from building.
B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys
storm drainage from building.
C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between
outside building sewer piping and inside drainage piping.
D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys
wastewater and vapors from fixtures and equipment throughout the
building.
E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage piping, under pressure.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping
materials:
1. uPVC: Polyvinyl chloride, unplasticized.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping

systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, Gray water and Vent Systems(above ground): to PN6 bar.
2. Soil, Waste, Gray water (under ground): to PN10 bar.
 3. Sewerage, Force-Main Piping Systems: to PN10 bar.

SUBMITTALS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made

to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation.
C. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as
Uniform Plumbing Code “UPC” and American Society of Plumbing
Engineers “ASPE” data books.

PART - PRODUCTS
PIPES AND TUBES

A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. uPVC Plastic Pipe And Fittings: BS 5255 (partially replaced by series of
BS ENs) and BS 4515: Part 1, for aboveground, BS 4660 for
belowground, with solvent weld joints or joining materials to relevant
ASTM standard as specified below.

JOINING MATERIALS

A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"
for commonly used joining materials.
C. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size
as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible
with piping to be joined.
D. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping:
ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping
 to be joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
E. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and
stainless-steel band assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of
piping to be joined. Include the following:
a) Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal.
b) Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
c) Bands: Stainless-steel, one at each pipe insert.
F. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric
compression gasket, made to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and
outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include the following:
a) Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F 477 elastomeric seal.
b) Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.

VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves. Use valves

specified for "Domestic Water Systems" applications.

PART - EXECUTION
EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to

piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Soil, Waste, Drainage and Vent Piping Above and/or Underground: Use
the following:
1. All sizes : uPVC plastic pipe, and fittings.
D. Sewerage Force Mains, Above and/or Underground. Use the following:
(equivalent BS Standard suitable for working pressure and application is
acceptable).
1. All sizes: uPVC Schedule 40 Plastic Pipe, and fittings.
VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types

are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Use globe or ball valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"

for basic piping installation.

SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage"

for sanitary and storm sewer piping.
B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer
piping in sizes and locations indicated for service entrances into
building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections of
building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.
C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping
in sizes and locations indicated for service entrances into building.
Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections of building storm
drains and building storm sewers.
D. Extend building sanitary drain, force-main piping and connect to
sanitary sewer piping in size and location indicated for service entrance
into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or equivalent,
inside building.
E. Extend building storm drain, force-main piping and connect to storm
sewer piping in size and location indicated for service entrance into
building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or equivalent, inside
building.
F. Install well penetration system at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking
rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division
15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and
 mechanical sleeve seals.

DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using

appropriate branches, bends, and long- sweep bends. Sanitary tees and
short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in
direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-
branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or
side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses
may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow
greater than 45 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size of
drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
B. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system.
Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required
gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain
swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
DN80 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN100
and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of
flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
D. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
E. Install underground, uPVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D
2321. Provide concrete protection for uPVC pipe installed at depth
1.2m or less.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"

for basic piping joint construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and
 bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. uPVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to BS 5255 and BS
4515: Part 1.

VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each pump discharge and where
indicated. Use gate or ball valves for piping DN50 and smaller. Use gate
or butterfly valves for piping DN65 and larger.
B. Check Valves: Install non-slam type, swing check valve on each pump
discharge, downstream from shutoff valve.

HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger

and support devices. Install the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal
runs 30 m and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal
runs longer than 30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight,
horizontal runs longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10
mm minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for uPVC plastic piping with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. DN32 and DN40: Maximum horizontal spacing, 500 mm with 10 mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
2. DN50: Maximum horizontal spacing, 600 mm with 10 mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
3. DN65 and DN100: Maximum horizontal spacing, 900 mm with 12 mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
4. DN150 :Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 19 mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
 5. DN200 through DN300: Maximum horizontal spacing, 2000 mm with 22 mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3000 mm.
F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage

piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and
connect to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."
3. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections
DN65 and larger.
C. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to
and connect to the following:
1. Sump Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sump-pump discharge.
2. Sewerage Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sewerage-pump discharge.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and
approved by the Engineer.
2. During installation, notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Engineer.
a) Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing- in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b) Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by the Engineer to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If the Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the Engineer.
B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of the Engineer
or, in absence of such procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,
submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of
piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced
drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work
that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
 3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except
outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping
system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 3 m of head.
Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection starts through
completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and
traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and
watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they
leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 250 Pa.
Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this
pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional
air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for
gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of the Engineer or, in
absence of such procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-
main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been
covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.
Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test
pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion
thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work

progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid
clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and
construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work
stops.
D. Exposed uPVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with
2 coats of water-based latex paint.

SECTION 21
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions

of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following:

1. Water distribution systems.
2. Soil, waste, and vent systems.
3. Storm drainage systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping
joining materials, joint construction, basic installation requirements;
escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals that are not in this
Section.
2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and
globe valves.
3. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages,
fittings, and water meters.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying
requirements.
5. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for water-supply piping and
connections.
6. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping
and connections.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping

systems with following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Water Distribution Piping: 860 kPa.
2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30 kPa.
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 kPa.
4. Force-Main Piping: 690 kPa.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated

capacities of selected equipment and shipping, installed, and operating
 weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances,
and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring
connections for the following plumbing specialty products:
1. Backflow preventers.
2. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
3. Water regulators.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Water filters.
6. Thermostatic water mixing valves and water tempering valves with antiscale
protection.
7. Strainers.
8. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
9. Hose stations.
10. Hydrants, and sanitary post hydrants.
11. Trap seal primer valves and systems.
12. Drain valves.
13. Backwater valves.
14. Water hammer arresters.
15. Hose bibbs.
16. Air-admittance valves.
17. Vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies.
18. Cleanouts.
19. Floor drains, including garage drains and terrace drains; open receptors, and
trench drains.
20. Roof drains, including flower bed drains and balcony drains.
21. Grease interceptors, grease recovery units, oil interceptors, oil storage tanks,
and solids interceptors.
22. Sleeve penetration systems.
B. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
C. Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional

requirements, and characteristics of plumbing specialties and are based
on the specific types and models selected. Other manufacturers'
products with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing
specialties made to specified standards.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties
specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
 D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation.
E. Comply with NFPA 70, for electrical components.
F. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related
Materials," for plastic potable-water piping components. Include
marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and "NSF-dwv" on
plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed,

are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the
Employer.
1. Water Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity not less than 200 percent of amount
of each type and size installed.
2. Operating Key Handles: Furnish one extra key for each key-operated hose
bibb and hydrant installed.

PART - PRODUCTS
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. General: American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) standard,

backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and
maximum pressure loss indicated.
1. DN50 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. DN65 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged
ends.
a) Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow
preventers having cast-iron or steel body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome-plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
5. Strainer on inlet.
B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable
for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke
gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and
pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting
located between 2 positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 83 kPa maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
C. Antisiphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for
 continuous pressure application. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded
check valve, spring-loaded floating disc, test cocks, and atmospheric
vent.
1. Pressure Loss: 35 kPa maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
D. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1024, suitable for
continuous pressure application. Include union inlet and 2 independent
check valves.
E. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1032, suitable for
continuous pressure application for carbonated beverage dispensers.
Include stainless-steel body; primary and secondary checks; ball check;
intermediate atmospheric-vent port for relieving carbon dioxide; and
threaded ends, DN10.
F. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047,
FM approved or UL listed, and suitable for continuous pressure
application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and
outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressure-differential
relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap fitting located between 2
positive-seating check valves; and bypass with displacement-type water
meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer.
1. Pressure Loss: 83 kPa maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
G. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1052, suitable for at least
0.19 L/s flow and applications with up to 30 kPa back pressure. Include
2 check valves; intermediate atmospheric vent; and nonremovable,
ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread on outlet.
H. Back-Siphonage Backflow Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1056, suitable for
continuous pressure and backflow applications. Include shutoff valves,
check valve, test cocks, and vacuum vent.

DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS

A. Description: ASSE 1021, fitting suitable for use with domestic

dishwashers and for deck mounting; with plastic body, chrome-plated
brass cover; and capacity of at least 0.32 L/s and inlet pressure of at
least 35 kPa at temperature of at least 60 deg. C. Include 16 mm ID inlet
and 22 mm ID outlet hose connections.

WATER REGULATORS
 1. General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of
1035 kPa minimum, of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures
indicated. Include integral factory-installed or separate field-installed Y-
pattern strainer.
2. DN50 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
3. DN65 and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body, or ductile iron Y pattern body,
with flanged ends. Include AWWA C550 or FDA-approved interior epoxy
coating for regulators with cast-iron body.
4. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
5. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome-plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.

BALANCING VALVES

A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with 2 readout ports and

memory setting indicator. Include manufacturer's standard hoses,
fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
1. DN50 and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob, calibrated
nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
2. DN50 and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and
threaded ends.
3. DN65 and Larger: Cast-iron, Y-pattern body with bronze disc and flanged or
grooved ends.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball
valve, rated for 2760-kPa minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body
with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and
seals, blowout-proof stem, solder-joint ends, and vinyl-covered steel
handle with memory- stop device.

WATER FILTERS

A. General: Cartridge-type assemblies suitable for potable water of size

and at flow rate and pressure loss indicated. Include housing, fittings,
filter cartridges, and cartridge end caps.
B. Wall-Mounting Type: Housing head section with threaded inlet and
outlet, mounting bracket, and removable lower section for 250 mm
long filter cartridge.
1. Housing Material: Stainless-steel, 1035 kPa minimum operating pressure.
2. Housing Material: Plastic, 860 kPa minimum operating pressure.
3. Cartridge: Activated-charcoal filter media, 250 mm, 10-micron-particulate
removable rating.
4. Cartridge: Wound- or molded-fiber filter media, 250 mm, 10-micron-
particulate removable rating.
5. Cartridge: Pleated-polypropylene filter media, 250 mm, 10-micron-particulate
removable rating.
 C. Floor-Mounting Type: Stainless-steel housing rated at 1035 kPa
minimum operating pressure.
1. Base Section: Floor-mounting section with inlet and outlet connections and
removable top section for one or more 10-micron-particulate removable-
rating cartridges.
2. Connections, DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
3. Connections, DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
4. Cartridge: Activated-charcoal filter media.
5. Cartridge: Wound- or molded-fiber filter media.
6. Cartridge: Pleated-polypropylene filter media.
D. Ultra-Violet (UV) Sterilizing Unit:
1. Unit: To include 304 stainless-steel sterilizing chambers with removable head.
UV lamps to slide into high purity sleeves. Sleeves are attached to chamber
head so that they may be easily removed as a bundle for inspection or
cleaning. Flow regulator on discharge line to maintain flow to ensure an
exposure dosage of 30,000 micro-watt-sec/cm². Sterilizer to include high
powered ballast, fuse, power safety switch, all inside white enamel housing
with stainless-steel cover and electrical cord rated for a flow of <j> gpm.
2. Unit: To include UV intensity sensor and meter with safe/unsafe zones to
indicate UV below effective range, mounted on sterilizer housing.

THERMOSTATIC WATER MIXING VALVES

A. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing

valve with bronze body. Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-
water-supply inlets, adjustable temperature setting, and capacity at
pressure loss as indicated.
1. Bimetal Thermostat, Operation and Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum.
2. Liquid-Filled Motor, Operation and Pressure Rating: 690 kPa minimum.
B. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:
1. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions.
2. Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
3. Cabinet: Stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door.
4. Cabinet Mounting: Recessed.
5. Thermometer: Manufacturer's standard
C. Manifolded, Thermostatic Water Mixing Valve Assemblies: Factory-
fabricated unit consisting of parallel arrangement of thermostatic water
mixing valves.
1. Arrangement: One large-flow, thermostatic water mixing valve with flow-
control valve, pressure regulator, inlet and outlet pressure gages, and one
small-flow, thermostatic water mixing valve with flow-control valve. Include
outlet thermometer, factory- or field-installed inlet and outlet valves, and
other indicated options.
2. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions.
3. Piping Component Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
 4. Cabinet: Stainless-steel box with stainless-steel hinged door.
5. Cabinet Mounting: Recessed.

STRAINERS

A. Strainers: Y-pattern, unless otherwise indicated, and full size of

connecting piping. Include ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel
screens with 1.2 mm round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa minimum steam working pressure, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. DN50 and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends.
3. DN65 and Larger: Cast-iron body, with interior AWWA C550 or FDA-approved
epoxy coating and flanged ends.
4. Y-Pattern Strainers: Screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown.
a) Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
5. Basket Strainers: Bolted flange or clamp cover, and basket with lift-out
handle.
a) Simplex Type: Single unit, with one basket.
b) Duplex Type: Double unit, with bronze or stainless-steel diverter valve and 2
baskets.
c) Drain: Factory- or field-installed, hose-end drain valve.
B. Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-
steel body; with bolted flange or clamp cover and drain with plug.
1. Basket: Bronze or stainless-steel with 3.2 or 4.8 mm diameter holes and lift-
out handle.
2. Female threaded ends for DN50 and smaller, and flanged ends for DN65 and
larger.

OUTLET BOXES

A. General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with fittings complying with

ASME A112.18.1M. Include box with faceplate, services indicated for
equipment connections, and wood-blocking reinforcement.
B. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hose connections, drain, and the
following:
1. Box and Faceplate: Stainless-steel.
2. Box and Faceplate: Enameled or epoxy-painted steel.
3. Box and Faceplate: Plastic.
4. Shutoff Fittings: 2 hose bibbs.
5. Shutoff Fittings: Combination, single lever.
6. Supply Fittings: Two DN15 gate, globe, or ball valves and DN15 copper, water
tubing.
7. Drain Fitting: DN50 drainage piping P-trap with DN50 standpipe extending
from floor to outlet box and DN50 waste.
8. Drain Fitting: DN40 drainage piping P-trap with DN40 standpipe extending
 from floor to outlet box and DN40 waste.
9. Inlet Hoses: Two 1500 mm long clothes washer inlet hoses with female hose-
thread couplings.
10. Drain Hose: One 1200 mm long clothes washer drain hose with hooked end.
C. Ice Maker Outlet Boxes: With hose connection and the following:
1. Box and Faceplate: Stainless-steel.
2. Box and Faceplate: Enameled or epoxy-painted steel.
3. Box and Faceplate: Plastic.
4. Shutoff Fitting: Hose bibb.
5. Supply Fitting: DN15 gate, globe, or ball valve and DN15 copper, water tubing.
D. Reinforcement: 50 mm by 100 mm or 50 mm by 150 mm, fire-
retardant-treated-wood blocking between studs.

WASHER-SUPPLY OUTLETS

A. Description: Surface-mounting, washer-supply outlet fittings complying

with ASME A112.18.1M and reinforcement. Include the following:
1. Shutoff Fitting: Combination, single lever.
2. Supply Fittings: Two DN15 gate, globe, or ball valves and DN15 copper, water
tubing.
3. Reinforcement: 50 mm by 100 mm or 50 mm by 150 mm, fire-retardant-
treated-wood blocking between studs.

HOSE STATIONS

A. General: Assembly with fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1M and

hose-connection outlet with threads complying with ASME B1.20.7.
B. Mixing-Valve Hose Station: Hot- and cold-water mixing valve with
shutoff and check valves on inlets, hose with nozzle, and the following:
C. Mixing-Valve Hose Station: Steam and cold-water mixing valve with
shutoff and check valves on inlets, hose with nozzle, and the following:
1. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose
connection, and hose rack. Include manufacturer's standard thermometer in
front.
2. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless-steel.
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. Body Material: Bronze with stainless-steel wetted parts.
5. Body Finish: Rough brass.
6. Body Finish: Rough brass or chrome plate.
7. Installation: Wall mounting. Include reinforcement.
8. Installation: Floor mounting on stainless-steel pedestal.
9. Supply Fittings: Two DN15 gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves and
DN15 copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are included
with fitting.
10. Supply Fittings: Two DN20 gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves and
 DN20 copper, water tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are included
with fitting.
11. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure;
15 m long.
12. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure;
7.5 m long.
13. Nozzle: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Single-Valve Hose Station: Hot-water valve with shutoff valve on inlet,
hose with nozzle, and the following:
E. Single-Valve Hose Station: Cold-water valve with shutoff valve on inlet,
hose with nozzle, and the following:
1. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose
connection, and hose rack. Include manufacturer's standard thermometer in
front.
2. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless-steel.
3. Body Material: Bronze.
4. Body Material: Bronze with stainless-steel wetted parts.
5. Body Finish: Rough brass.
6. Body Finish: Rough brass or chrome plate.
7. Installation: Wall mounting. Include reinforcement.
8. Installation: Floor mounting on stainless-steel pedestal.
9. Supply Fitting: DN15 gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and DN15
copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with fitting.
10. Supply Fitting: DN20 gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and DN20
copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with fitting.
11. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure;
15 m long.
12. Hose: Manufacturer's standard for service fluid, temperature, and pressure;
7.5 m long.
13. Nozzle: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Reinforcement: 50 mm by 100 mm or 50 mm by 150 mm, fire-
retardant-treated-wood blocking between studs.

HYDRANTS

A. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, key operation. Provide

one operating key.
1. Inlet: DN20 or DN25 threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet:ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads, and integral or field-installed,
nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker with ASME
B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet.
3. Type: Projecting.
4. Type: Recessed.
5. Finish: Rough bronze.
6. Finish: Polished bronze.
7. Finish: Nickel bronze.
A. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic
 draining, antibackflow type, key operation, with DN20 or DN25
threaded or solder-joint inlet, and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads
on outlet. Include operating key for each hydrant.
1. Type: Projecting.
2. Type: Recessed.
3. Finish: Rough bronze.
4. Finish: Polished bronze.
5. Finish: Nickel bronze.
B. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, projecting, automatic draining,
antibackflow type, key operation. Include operating key for each
hydrant.
1. Inlet: DN20 or DN25 threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.
3. Finish: Rough bronze.
4. Finish: Polished bronze.
5. Finish: Nickel bronze.
C. Post Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, bronze casing, cast-iron
or cast-aluminum casing guard, key operation. Include operating key for
each hydrant.
1. Inlet: DN20 or DN25 threaded.
2. Outlet: Integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection
vacuum breaker with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet and
tapped drain port in valve housing.
3. Length: As required for installing inlet valve below frost line.

SANITARY POST HYDRANTS

A. Description: Nonfreeze, post hydrant with nondraining chamber for

storing water trapped downstream from inlet valve.
1. Inlet: DN25 threaded.
2. Outlet: Integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection
vacuum breaker with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Include
brass or bronze casing and other parts in contact with water, and handle or
key operation. Include operating key for each hydrant.
3. Length: As required for installing storage chamber below frost line. Use of
draining-type post hydrant for this application is prohibited.

TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Trap Seal Primer Valves: Valve shall be connected to drains in order to

keep these drains wet and avoid smells penetrating into the building.
Valve shall be to ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following
characteristics:
 1. 860 kPa minimum working pressure.
2. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
3. Inlet and Outlet Connections: DN15 threaded, union, or cement joint.
4. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: DN15 threaded or cement joint.
5. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that
is not chrome finished.
B. Trap Seal Primer System: Factory-fabricated, automatic-operation
assembly for wall mounting with the following:
1. Piping: DN20, PVC, water tubing inlet and manifold with number of DN15
outlets as indicated.
2. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover.
3. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for [120-
V] [230-V], ac power.
4. Water Hammer Arrester: ASSE 1010.
5. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

DRAIN VALVES

A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, DN20 ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa
minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-
plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout- proof stem, and
vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and
cap.
B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 1380-kPa
minimum CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body,
with DN6 side drain outlet and cap.

BACKWATER VALVES

A. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with

removable bronze swing-check valve and threaded or bolted cover.
1. Closed-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang
closed unless subject to backflow condition.
2. Open-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang open
unless subject to backflow condition.
3. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to
field-installed cleanout at floor, instead of cover.
B. Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with
removable ball float, threaded inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet.
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH

201, bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes
are based on water-supply fixture units, ASME A112.26.1M sizes A
through F and PDI-WH 201 sizes A through F.
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, DN15 or
DN20 threaded or solder-joint inlet. Provide ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose
threads on outlet and integral or field-installed, nonremovable,
drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker.
1. Finish: Rough brass.
2. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
3. Operation: Wheel handle.
4. Operation: Operating-key (handle) type. Include operating key.
C. Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation
sealing diaphragm, designed to admit air into drainage and vent piping and
to prevent transmission of sewer gas into building.
1. Stack Vent Valve: ASSE 1050, designed for installation as terminal on soil,
waste, and vent stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in DN50
to DN100.
2. Fixture Vent Valve: ASSE 1051, designed for installation on waste piping,
instead of vent connection, for single fixture, in DN32 to DN50.
D. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Manufactured assembly made of 20 kg/sq.
m, 1.6 mm thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 200
mm from pipe with galvanized steel boot reinforcement, and
counterflashing fitting.
1. Vent Cap: Open top, without cap.
2. Vent Cap: Low-silhouette model with vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Vent Cap: Extended model with field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
E. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, service class, hub-
and-spigot, cast-iron, soil- pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot
riser section of length to provide depth indicated; where indicated,
increase fitting of size indicated, joined with ASTM C 564 rubber
gaskets. Size P-trap as indicated.
F. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching
connected piping, cleanout where indicated, and trap seal primer valve
connection where indicated.
1. DN50: 100 mm minimum water seal.
2. DN65 and Larger: 125 mm minimum water seal.
G. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or
spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection.
 H. Air-Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2, cast iron or cast bronze, with fixed air
gap, inlet for drain pipe or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet.
I. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with
bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or
hub top for extending vent pipe.
J. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof
design. Include vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
K. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop-fabricated or field-
fabricated, frost-proof assembly constructed of galvanized steel,
copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 25 mm enclosed air
space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension,
with counterflashing, as indicated.
L. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with
bronze sleeve, packing gland, and packing, of size and end types
corresponding to connected piping.
M. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 48/A48 M, gray-iron casting, with DN100
outlet; shop-applied bituminous coating; and inlet size indicated.
N. Downspout Boots: ASTM A 74, service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron
soil pipe.
O. Downspout Nozzles: Cast-bronze body with threaded inlet for pipe size
indicated, and cast-bronze wall flange with mounting holes.
1. Finish: Polished bronze.
2. Finish: Nickel bronze.

SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly for plastic

soil, waste, and vent stacks, consisting of sleeve and stack fitting with
firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with
integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete
slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A48 M, cast-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack
fitting with neoprene O-ring at base and cast-iron plug in thermal-release
harness in branch. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
a) Special Coating:Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for
plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.

FLASHING MATERIALS
 A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the
following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. General Use: 20 kg/sq. m or 1.6 mm thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 15 kg/sq. m or 1.2 mm thickness.
3. Burning: 30 kg/sq. m or 2.4 mm thickness.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/653M , with 0.20 percent copper
content and 1.016 mm minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
Include Z275 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if
indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated
polyethylene, 1 mm minimum thickness.
D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being
fastened.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and
similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible
with material being installed.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART - EXECUTION
PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and

devices according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated, at each
water-supply connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and to
other equipment and water systems as indicated. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction. Locate backflow preventers in same
room as connected equipment. Install air-gap fitting on units with
atmospheric-vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest
floor drain. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and
balance valve bypass. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator,
and solenoid valve, and where indicated.
E. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
F. Install wall hydrants with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
G. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of one percent and connect to floor-drain
body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
H. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For
interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and
centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove
valve cover for servicing.
I. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as
indicated.
J. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as
indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN100. Use DN100 for larger drainage
piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN100 and smaller and 30 m
for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
K. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with
finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors.
L. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and
cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
M. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout
passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
N. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over
stack flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set
grates of drains flush with finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as
indicated.
P. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow
floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following
drainage area radii:
1. Radius, 750 mm or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 6
mm total depression.
2. Radius, 750 to 1500 mm: Equivalent to one percent slope.
3. Radius, 1500 mm or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater
than 25 mm total depression.
Q. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building
drain, unless otherwise indicated.
R. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between
 drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof
membranes where penetrated.
S. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
T. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof
membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Size outlets
as indicated.
U. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between
drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof
membranes where penetrated.
V. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
W. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting,
according to the Engineer's requirements, and with clear space for
servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension if required, with cover
flush with finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or
cradle supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Pit Installation: Set unit in pit as indicated.
5. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having
integral cleanout on outlet.
6. Coordinate oil-interceptor storage tank and gravity drain with Division 2
Section "Interceptors."
X. Install grease recovery units on floor. Include trapping, venting, and
flow-control fitting according to the Engineer's requirements, and with
clear space for servicing.
1. Install control panel for grease recovery unit as indicated.
Y. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached
to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall
construction if no support is indicated.
Z. Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement
built into walls.
AA. Secure supplies to supports or substrate.
BB. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing
specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not
indicated.
CC. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
DD. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect
wastes unless trap is indicated.
EE. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab
 supporting fixtures and drains.
FF. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed
finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern
escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
GG. Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting
plumbing specialties.

CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified
in other Division 15 Sections.
2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment
specified in other Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems.
3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and
equipment specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to
plumbing piping systems.
B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required
for connections.
C. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and
devices that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 16
Sections.
D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold-water-
supply piping of sizes indicated.
E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent
piping, with approved trap, of sizes indicated.
F. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and
accessories as indicated.
1. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and flow-control fitting
and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic draw off-type
unit.
2. Grease Recovery Units: Connect inlet, outlet, and vent piping; controls;
electric power; and factory-furnished accessories.
3. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity draw off piping to
unit; flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity draw off and
suction piping to oil storage tank.
4. Solids Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet.
G. Ground electric-powered plumbing specialties.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque- tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
 not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
H. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and
devices that require power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect
switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.

FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans,

sumps, or other drainage shapes are required.
B. Burn joints of lead sheets where required.
C. Solder joints of copper sheets where required.
D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through
or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 2500
mm, and skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending
at least 200 mm around specialty.
E. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
F. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
G. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or
commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into
pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
I. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage
shapes as indicated. Install drain connection if indicated.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of factory-authorized

service representative to supervise the field assembly of components
and installation of grease recovery units, including piping and electrical
connections, and to report results in writing.
1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged
and malfunctioning controls and components.

COMMISSIONING
 A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
perform startup services.
B. Before startup, perform the following checks:
1. System tests are complete.
2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or
repaired.
3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.
C. Before operating systems, perform the following steps:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open general-duty valves to fully open position.
3. Remove and clean strainers.
4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with
water until clear.
D. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no
procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through
complete sequence of operations.
E. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during
commissioning.

DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
interceptors and/or grease recovery units. Refer to Division 1 Section
"[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid

clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and
construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when
work stops.

CLEANOUT SCHEDULE

A. Floor cleanout type FCO-1: Cast iron round check plug with threaded
spanner wrench cover, water tight, with nickel bronze finish except
where indicated to be polished stainless-steel finish.
 B. Floor cleanout type FCO-2: uPVC construction complete with
removable cover and extension piece.

FLOOR DRAIN SCHEDULE

A. Floor drain type FD-1: Coated cast body with bottom outlet membrane
clamp and adjustable collar with strainer. No-hub outlet. Polished
bronze top finish.
B. Floor drain type FD-2: Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, collar,
no-hub outlet, 300mm diameter strainer and 150mm diameter funnel.
C. Floor drain type FD-3: Cast iron body and flashing collar with cast iron
grade and slotted sediment bucket.
D. Floor drain type FD-4: Coated cast iron receptor with solid water dam
and cast iron bottom strainer secured with vandalproof screws. No-hub
outlet and flashing clamp. Dam size to be 10.5 diameter.
E. Floor drain type FD-5: uPVC construction with one outlet and multiple
inlets, complete with strainer.
F. Floor drain type FD-6 for kitchen installations: stainless steel type 316,
330 mm round adjustable top collar, secured scoriated cover, caulk
outlet and internal gasketed closure plug to prevent sewer gas from
escaping into served space.

SCHEDULE OF TERRACE DRAINS

A. Terrace drain type TD-1: Coated cast iron body and flashing clamp with
seepage openings and secured square hole heavy duty grate. No-hub
bottom or side as indicated outlet, brass finish.

SCHEDULE OF ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof drain type RD-1: 8” x 12” Scupper drain consisting of coated cast
iron body with back outlet, oblique grate with 90 degree combination
frame and membrane flashing clamp.
B. Roof drain type RD-2: 4” roof drain consisting of coated cast iron body
with bottom outlet, with combination flashing ring and gravel stop
frame, membrane flashing clamp and aluminum doom.
SCHEDULE OF BALCONY DRAINS AND FLOWER BED DRAINS

A. Balcony drain type BD-1: Coated cast iron body with bronze flashing
clamp and bronze top secured with brass screws. Threaded side outlet.
B. Flower bed drain type FBD-1: Coated cast iron body with cast bronze
secured dome and flashing ring complete with bronze mesh dome
screen.

SCHEDULE OF GARAGE DRAINS

A. Garage drain type GRD-1: Heavy duty suitable for car trench loading
coated cast iron, (300 mm), diameter top drain, with bottom outlet,
seepage pan and combination flashing clamp and frame for heavy duty,
deep flange slotted grate. Grate to have polished bronze finish.

SCHEDULE OF GREASE INTERCEPTORS

A. Grease interceptors. Acid resistance coated interior and exterior

fabricated steel grease interceptor. Interceptor shall be complete with
bronze cleanout plug and double wall trap seal with removal pressure
equalizing/flow diffusing baffle and sediment tray, gasketed non-skid
secured cover with recessed lift hardle and enzyme port having bronze
plug, complete with flow control fitting.

SCHEDULE OF OIL INTERCEPTORS

A. Oil interceptor: Acid resistant coated interior and exterior fabricated

steel oil interceptor with air relief by-pass, bronze cleanout plug and
visible double wall trap seal, removable combination pressure
equalizing/flow diffusing baffle and sediment bucket, horizontal baffle,
adjustable oil drawoff and vent connections either side, secured
gasketed non-skid secured cover complete with flow control fitting.
 SECTION 22
PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 31 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other

fittings, and related components.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements
that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and
walls, floors, and counters.
2. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet and bath
accessories.
3. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply
stops.
4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers
and other specialties not specified in this Section.

DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion

thereof that can be approached, entered, and used by
physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of
plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include
supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub
spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe
fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included
where indicated.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each plumbing fixture category and type

specified. Include selected fixture, trim, fittings, accessories,
appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate
materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and
flow-control rates.
B. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated
units.
C. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to
include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in
 Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and

other components of each category from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not
available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from
other manufacturers specified for this category.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and
components specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
C. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and
other components that are compatible.
D. Coordinate with architectural drawings in color selection and
installation of plumbing fixtures.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing,

crating, and covering.
B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture

locations and verify that plumbing fixtures can be installed to
comply with original design and referenced standards.

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products

installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage,
and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra
materials to the Employer.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not
less than 10 percent of each type and size installed.
 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units
not less than 5 percent of each type and size installed.
3. Faucet, Laminar-Flow Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not
less than 10 percent of each type and size installed.
4. Faucet, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not
less than 10 percent of each type and size installed.
5. Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not
less than 5 percent of each type and size installed.
6. Shower, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units
not less than 5 percent of each type and size installed.
7. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units
not less than 10 percent of each type installed.
8. Provide hinged-top, wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes,
having separate compartments for each type and size of extra
materials listed above.
9. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units
not less than 5 percent of each type installed.
10. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units
not less than 5 percent of each type installed.
11. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5
percent of each type installed.
12. Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 50
percent of each type and size installed.

PART 32 - PRODUCTS
PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS

A. Comply with applicable standards below and other

requirements specified.
1. Electric Water Coolers: ARI 1010 and UL 399.
2. Emergency Equipment: ANSI Z358.1.
3. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
4. National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 2.
5. Plastic Bathtubs: ANSI Z124.1, ANSI Z124.1a, and ANSI Z124.1b.
6. Plastic Lavatories: ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.3a.
7. Plastic Laundry Trays: ANSI Z124.6.
8. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.
9. Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2 and ANSI Z124.2a.
10. Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6.
11. Plastic Whirlpool Bathtubs: ANSI Z124.1, ANSI Z124.1a, and
ANSI Z124.1b; and ASME A112.19.7M.
 12. Porcelain-Enameled Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
13. Semivitreous Ceramic Fixtures: ASME A112.19.9M.
14. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
15. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME
A112.19.3M.
16. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
a) Exception: ASME A112.19.9M, semivitreous, ceramic fixtures,
except water-closet bowls and urinals with integral traps, may be
furnished instead of vitreous-china fixtures.
17. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
18. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
19. Whirlpool Bathtub Fittings: ASME A112.19.8M.

LAVATORY/SINK FAUCET STANDARDS

A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements

specified for lavatory, sink, and similar-type- fixture faucet
fittings. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s-
maximum flow rate; and polished, chrome-plated finish; except
where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with
supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture
receptor.
1. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
2. Faucet Hose:
3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
8. Sink Spray Hoses.

BATHTUB/SHOWER FAUCET STANDARDS

A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements

specified for bathtub and shower faucet fittings. Include hot-
and cold-water indicators; 0.16-L/s- maximum flow rate; and
polished, chrome- plated finish; except where otherwise
indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and outlet
with diverter valve; tub spout; and shower head, arm, and
flange.
1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing- and Thermostatic-Control,
Antiscald Faucets: ASSE 1016.
2. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
 3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing
Devices: ASTM F 445.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.1 or ASME B1.20.7.
5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and
ASSE 1016.
8. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
9. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE
1016.

MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS

A. Comply with ASME A112.18.1M and other requirements

specified for fittings, other than faucets. Include polished,
chrome-plated finish, except where otherwise indicated.
Coordinate fittings with other components and connectors.
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
2. Automatic Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1028.
3. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME A112.18.1M.
4. Fixed Flow Restrictors: ASSE 1034.
5. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
6. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS

A. Comply with applicable standards below and other

requirements specified for components for plumbing fixtures,
equipment, and appliances.
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.
2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.
3. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
5. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
7. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2 and ANSI Z124.2a.
8. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
9. Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO A117.1.
10. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
11. Whirlpool Bathtub Equipment: UL 1795.
FITTINGS

A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture

 schedules at the end of this Section for materials for supplies,
supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings.
B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings
include the following:
1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final
connection.
2. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression,
loose-key type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching
supply riser.
3. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, angle or straight; compression,
wheel-handle type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet
matching supply riser.
4. Supply Risers: DN10 flexible copper tube with knob end. Use
chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
5. Supply Risers: DN10 rigid brass tube with DN8 straight, knob-end
tailpiece. Use chrome- plated tube for exposed applications.
6. Supply Risers: DN10 rigid brass tube with DN8 offset, knob-end
tailpiece. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
7. Traps: Tubular brass with 1.1 mm wall thickness, with no-leak slip-
joint inlet, cleanout, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match
equipment. Use chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
8. Traps: Cast brass with no-leak slip-joint inlet, cleanout pipe nipple
to wall, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use
chrome-plated tube for exposed applications.
9. Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 1.1 mm wall thickness, with no-
leak slip-joint inlet, and size to match equipment.
10. Continuous Waste: Tubular brass, 0.8 mm wall thickness, with no-
leak slip-joint inlet, and size to match equipment.
11. Continuous Waste: Tubular plastic with no-leak slip-joint inlet and
size to match equipment.
12. Indirect Waste: Tubular brass, 1.1 mm wall thickness, and size to
match equipment.
13. Indirect Waste: Tubular brass, 0.8 mm wall thickness, and size to
match equipment.
14. Indirect Waste: Tubular plastic and size to match equipment.

PART - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for potable, hot- and cold-water supply

piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping systems; and
supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations
and types of supports match those indicated, before installing
and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data
 when roughing-in data are not indicated.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions
where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

APPLICATIONS

A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures specified in this Section

or other Sections, according to the following:
1. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported
from wall construction.
2. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories, sinks, drinking
fountains, and electric water coolers.
3. Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals, lavatories, and
other fixtures where indicated.
4. Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require
securing to wall and recessed, box-mounted, electric water coolers.
5. Fabricate reinforcement from 50 mm by 100 mm or 50 mm by 150
mm fire-retardant-treated- wood blocking between studs or 6 mm
by150 mm steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to
secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend beyond ends
of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs.
B. Include fitting insulation kits for accessible fixtures according to
the following:
1. Lavatories: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles,
drain, trap, and waste to wall.
2. Lavatories: Cover hot-water supply, stop and handle, drain, trap,
and waste to wall.
3. Sinks: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies, stops and handles, drain,
trap, and waste to wall.
4. Sinks: Cover hot-water supply, stop and handle, drain, trap, and
waste to wall.
5. Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot- and cold-water supplies,
offset drain, trap, and waste to wall.
6. Fixtures with Offset Drain: Cover hot-water supply, offset drain,
trap, and waste to wall.
7. Other Fixtures: Cover exposed fittings below fixture.

PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and

other components according to manufacturers' written
 instructions.
B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers'
written instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced
standards.
C. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet
flanges and gasket seals.
D. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets with fittings
and gasket seals.
E. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet water closets with support
manufacturer's tiling frame or setting gage.
F. Install toilet seats on water closets.
G. Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.
H. Install flush meter valves for accessible water closets and
urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment.
Install other actuators in locations that are easy for
handicapped people to reach.
I. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever
handle mounted on wide side of compartment.
J. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports
attached to building substrate when supports are specified,
and to building wall construction where no support is
indicated.
K. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures
having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to
reinforcement built into walls.
L. Fasten recessed, wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built
into walls.
M. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
N. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.
O. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space
behind fixture.
P. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement
grout.
Q. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use
gate or globe valve where specific stop valve is not specified.
1. Exception: Omit stop valves on supplies to emergency equipment,
except when permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. When
 permitted, install valve chained and locked in OPEN position.
R. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
S. Install faucet, laminar-flow fittings with specified flow rates and
patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with
required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.
T. Install supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in
fixture supplies at stop valves.
U. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and
patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with
required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required.
V. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum
flow rates in shower arms.
W. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having
integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, except where
otherwise indicated.
X. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated,
or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
Y. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in
counter with spout over sink.
Z. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in
exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
AA. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters
using sanitary-type, 1-part, mildew- resistant, silicone sealant
according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants." Match sealant color to fixture color.
BB. Comply with ADA requirements for installation of fixtures in
areas accessible to the handicapped.

CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division

15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping
 systems and plumbing equipment specified in other Division 15
Sections.
B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to
plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for fitting
sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture.
C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in
Other Sections: Connect equipment with supply inlets, supply
stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use
fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect
fittings to plumbing piping.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
E. Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices
that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 16
Sections.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified

for locations where installed.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings,
and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures
and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and
demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures
and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units
operate properly.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and
controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and
 controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water
coolers, faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves having
controls, to produce proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and
stops.
E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings, including flush tanks,
with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials. Include the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris,
and reinstall strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from flush tanks and drains.

PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except
when approved in writing by the Engineer.
WATER CLOSET SCHEDULE

A. Water Closet EWC-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Vitreous-China Water Closet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>;.
3. Flushometer Valve:
b) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME; >
4. Toilet Seat:
b) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>;
5. Fixture Color: [White.] <INSERT OTHER>
6. Bowl Type and Operation: [Elongated, siphon jet.] [Elongated,
blowout.] [Round front, siphon jet.] <INSERT OTHER>
7. Mounting and Outlet: [Floor mounted, floor outlet.] [Wall hanging,
back outlet.] [Floor mounted, back outlet.]
8. Fixture Bolt Caps: [White,] [Color matching bowl,] plastic or china.
9. Rim Height: [356 to 394 mm .] [445 to 457 mm .] [254 mm .]
<INSERT OTHER>
10. Tank: [Close coupled.] [One-piece bowl and tank.] <INSERT OTHER>
11. Tank Trim: [Flush valve.] [Flushometer tank.]
12. Accessible-Fixture Tank: [Modified as required for lever or push-
 button mounting on top of tank or on side of tank that will be on
wide side of fixture compartment.]
13. Design Water Consumption: [6 L per flushing cycle.] [13.2 L per
flushing cycle.] <INSERT OTHER>
14. Flushometer Valve Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper
pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with spud,
screwdriver check stop, and vacuum breaker.
15. Flushometer Valve Operation: [Diaphragm.] <INSERT OTHER>
16. Flushometer Valve Finish: [Rough brass.] [Polished, chrome-plated,
exposed metal parts.]
17. Flushometer Valve, Water Consumption and Pressure: Factory set
or field adjusted, 6 L maximum per flushing cycle at 0.5 bars.
<INSERT OTHER>
18. Flushometer valve components include the following:
a) Brass, lever-handle actuation.
b) Bacteria-control-coated, brass, lever-handle actuation.
c) Nonhold-open feature.
d) Wheel-handle stop.
e) Metal, push-button actuation.
f) Seat bumper on stop.
g) Hydraulic, push-button-actuation, flushing system.
h) Bedpan washer with diverter valve, spray head, and support.
i) Battery-powered, sensor-actuation, automatic flushing system.
j) Electric, hard-wired, sensor-actuation, automatic flushing system.
k) Tailpiece, trap-primer connection.
19. Supply Inlet: [DN15] [DN10] with wall flange.
20. Supply Stop: [Loose key.] [Wheel handle.] <INSERT OTHER>
21. Supply Riser: [DN15,] [DN10,] [flexible riser with collar end.] [rigid
riser with collar end.]
22. Toilet Seat: Solid-plastic, water-closet seat with bumpers and
hardware, compatible with water closet and as follows:
a) Color: [White.] [Black.] [Matching water closet.] <INSERT OTHER>
b) Class: [Commercial, Heavy Duty.] [Commercial, Standard.]
[Residential.] [Commercial, Extra-Heavy-Duty type, exceeding
requirements of Commercial, Standard class.]
c) Size: [Elongated.] [Round front.]
d) Pattern: [Open front without cover.] [Open front with cover.]
[Closed front with cover.]
e) Hinge Type: [Check (CK).] [Noncheck (NC).] [Self-sustaining check
(SC).] [Self-raising (SR).]
23. Fixture Support: Vertically adjustable, cast-iron, {elevated-type,}
water-closet carrier with combination support and waste fitting
assemblies and tiling frame or setting gage. Include additional
faceplate and coupling for water closet at wide pipe space.
Compact-type carrier for back-to-back water-closet installation is
prohibited.
24. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>
 B. Wheelchair Water Closets: Provide same as specified for water
closets P-[ ] except water closet height to top of seat shall be
432 to 483 mm above floor and complete with two white nylon
coated aluminium grap/support rails with fixing plates to wall
provided with four sets of walls plugs and 45 mm screws, 450
mm and 970 mm long

URINAL SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible] }Urinal UR-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Vitreous-China Urinal:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;
4. Flushometer Valve:
5. Fixture Color: [White.] <INSERT OTHER>
6. Type and Operation: [Siphon jet.] [Washdown.] [Blowout.] <INSERT
OTHER>
7. Mounting and Outlet: [Wall hanging, back outlet.] [Wall
hanging, bottom outlet.] [Floor mounted, floor outlet.]
8. Fixture Bolt Caps: [White,] [Color matching bowl,] plastic or china.
9. Rim Height: [610 mm.] [432 mm.] <INSERT OTHER>
10. Design Water Consumption: [3.8 L per flushing cycle.] <INSERT
OTHER>
11. Flushometer Valve Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper
pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with spud,
screwdriver check stop, and vacuum breaker.
12. Flushometer Valve Operation: [Diaphragm.] <INSERT OTHER>
13. Flushometer Valve Finish: [Rough brass.] [Polished, chrome-plated,
exposed metal parts.]
14. Flushometer Valve, Water Consumption and Pressure: [Factory set
or field adjusted, 3.8 L maximum per flushing cycle at 0.5 bars.]
<INSERT OTHER>
15. Flushometer valve components include the following:
a) Brass, lever-handle actuation.
b) Bacteria-control-coated, brass, lever-handle actuation.
c) Nonhold-open feature.
d) Wheel-handle stop.
e) Metal, push-button actuation.
f) Hydraulic, push-button-actuation, flushing system.
 g) Electric, timer-actuation, automatic flushing system.
h) Battery-powered, sensor-actuation, automatic flushing system.
i) Electric, hard-wired, sensor-actuation, automatic flushing system.
16. Fixture Support: Type I, vertically adjustable, urinal, chair carrier
with coupling; [steel-pipe] [heavy-duty, rectangular-steel,] upright
members; bearing plate; and feet. <INSERT OTHER>
17. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>
B. Wheelchair Flush Valve Type Urinals: Provide same as specified
for urinal UR [] except with elongated projecting bowl, 508 mm
long from wall to front of flare, and ASME A112.19.5 trim.
Furnish urinal manufacturer's certification of conformance.
Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers. Mount
urinal with front rim a maximum of 432 mm above floor and
flush valve handle a maximum of 1118 mm above floor for use
by handicapped on wheelchair.
BIDET SCHEDULE

A. Bidet BD-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are

indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Fixture Material: Vitreous china.
4. Fixture Color: [White.] <INSERT OTHER>
5. Mounting: [Floor mounted.] [Wall hanging.]
6. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: [One hole, centered.] [2 holes, 51 mm
each side of center.] [2 holes, 102 mm each side of center.] [3
holes, centered and 51 mm each side of center.] [3 holes, centered
and 102 mm each side of center.] <INSERT OTHER>
7. Mounting: [Floor mounted.] [Wall hanging.]
8. Fixture Bolt Caps: [White,] [Color matching bowl,] plastic or china.
9. Faucet Construction: [Center set with inlets on 102 mm centers,]
[Center set with central inlets,] [Widespread with inlets on 203 mm
centers,] [Single-inlet,] cast brass with pop-up waste and vacuum
breaker. <INSERT OTHER>
10. Faucet Valve Operation: Manual, ON-OFF, [over-rim.] [spray.]
<INSERT OTHER>
11. Faucet Mounting Position: [Centered on fixture deck.] [Wall,
centered on fixture.]
12. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Handle{s}: [Dual lever.] [Dual, metal knobs.] [Dual, crystal knobs.]
[Single lever.] <INSERT OTHER>
b) Spout: [Integral with body.] [Spray nozzle in bowl.] <INSERT OTHER>
13. Supply Inlets: [DN10,] [DN15,] brass pipe or copper tubing.
 14. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight,
compression, [loose-key type,] [wheel-handle type,] same size as
supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. <INSERT OTHER>
15. Supply Risers: DN10 flexible with knob end. <INSERT OTHER>
16. Drain: Pop-up with DN32 tailpiece, included with faucet. <INSERT
OTHER>
17. Tubular Trap: [DN32,] DN40 by DN32,] [1.1 mm wall thickness,
tubular brass,] [0.8 mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [plastic
tubular fittings,] with slip-joint inlet[, cleanout,] and wall flange.
18. Cast-Brass Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap, with slip-
joint inlet, [cleanout,] [DN32,] [DN40,] pipe nipple to wall, and wall
flange.
19. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap,
with slip-joint inlet,{cleanout,} [DN32] [DN40] tubular brass, waste
to wall, and wall flange.
20. Fixture Support: [Vertically adjustable, lavatory or sink, chair carrier
with support plate or device matching fixture mounting; steel-pipe
upright members; and feet.] <INSERT OTHER>
21. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

LAVATORY SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible] Lavatory LAV-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Vitreous-China Lavatory:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
4. Enameled, Cast-Iron Lavatory:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME; >
5. Enameled, Steel Lavatory:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
6. Stainless-Steel Lavatory:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
7. Plastic Lavatory:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
8. Faucet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
9. Laminar-Flow, Faucet-Spout Fitting:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
10. Hair Interceptor:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
11. Fitting Insulation Kit:
12. Fixture Color: [White.] <INSERT OTHER>
13. Fixture Dimensions: <INSERT SIZE>
14. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: [One hole, centered.] [2 holes, 51 mm
each side of center.] [2 holes, 102 mm each side of center.] [3
holes, centered and 51 mm each side of center.] [3 holes, centered
and 102 mm each side of center.] <INSERT OTHER>
15. Mounting: [Wall hanging.] [Counter.] [Counter, self-rimming.]
[Undercounter.] [Wall hanging with pedestal.] <INSERT OTHER>
16. Faucet Construction: [Center set with inlets on 102 mm centers,]
[Center set with central inlets,] [Widespread with inlets on 203 mm
centers,] [Single-inlet,] [cast brass,] [cast-brass underbody and brass
escutcheon,] [nonmetal (plastic) underbody and plastic or brass
escutcheon,] [and with pop-up waste.] [and without pop-up waste.]
<INSERT OTHER>
17. Faucet Valve Operation: [Manual, ON-OFF.] [Manual, adjustable,
self-closing, metering.] [Electric, hard wired, sensor actuation,
automatic.] <INSERT OTHER>
18. Faucet Mounting Position: [Centered on fixture deck.] [Counter,
centered on fixture.] [Centered on fixture backsplash.]
19. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Accessible-Fixture Operation: [Manual.] [Sensor actuation.] <INSERT
OTHER>
b) Handle(s): [Dual lever.] [Dual, 3 or 4 arms.] [Dual, metal knobs.]
[Dual, crystal knobs.] [Dual, metering, self-closing, pushbuttons.]
[Single-lever toggle.] [Extended, single-lever toggle.] [Single, push-
pull and twist.] [Dual, 102 mm wrist blade.] [Dual, 152 mm wrist
blade.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Spout: [Integral with body.] [Swing gooseneck.] [Fixed-position
gooseneck.]
d) Spout Length, Centerline of Inlets to Outlet: <INSERT IF OTHER
THAN MFR'S STANDARD>
e) Gooseneck Height and Offset, Centerline of Inlets to Outlet:
<INSERT IF OTHER THAN MFR'S STANDARD>
f) Spout Outlet: [Manufacturer's standard aerator.] [0.032-L/s laminar
flow.] [0.047-L/s laminar flow.] <INSERT OTHER>
g) Spout-Outlet, Flow-Control Fitting: [0.032 L/s.] [0.047 L/s.] <INSERT
OTHER>
20. Supply Inlets: [DN10,] [DN15,] brass pipe or copper tubing.
21. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight,
compression, [loose-key type,] [wheel-handle type,] same size as
supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. <INSERT OTHER>
22. Supply Risers: [DN10 flexible with knob end.] [DN10 rigid with DN8
straight, knob-end tailpiece.] [DN10 rigid with DN8 offset, knob-end
tailpiece.] <INSERT OTHER>
23. Supply, Flow-Control Restrictors: [DN10,] [DN15,] 0.032 L/s.
<INSERT OTHER>
24. Drain: [Grid strainer with DN32 tailpiece.] [Grid strainer with DN32
offset waste.] [Pop-up with DN32 tailpiece, included with faucet.]
[Open with rubber stopper and chain.] <INSERT OTHER>
25. Tubular Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] [1.1 mm wall thickness,
 tubular brass,] [0.8 mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [plastic
tubular fittings,] with slip-joint inlet[, cleanout,] and wall flange.
26. Cast-Brass Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap, with slip-
joint inlet, [cleanout,] [DN32,] [DN40,] pipe nipple to wall, and wall
flange.
27. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap,
with slip-joint inlet, [cleanout,] [DN32] [DN40] tubular brass, waste
to wall, and wall flange.
28. Hair-Interceptor Trap: Chrome-plated, brass [or stainless-steel]
housing with removable brass or stainless-steel screen or bucket;
[DN32] [DN40] inlet and outlet, pipe nipples to sink drain and wall;
and wall flange.
29. Supply Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for supplies
from wall to fixture with removable covering for stops and handles.]
[Molded, soft-plastic covering for hot-water supply from wall to
fixture with removable covering for stop and handle.] [Shaped,
cushioned-jacket plastic covering with self-sticking fastening system
for supply stops and risers to fixture.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket
plastic covering with self-sticking fastening system for hot-water
supply stop and riser to fixture.] Include manufacturer's standard
fasteners, straps, and adhesives.<INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
30. Drain Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain piping
from fixture to wall.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket plastic covering
with self-sticking fastening system for drain piping and trap.]
Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives.
<INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
31. Fixture Support: [Type I, exposed arm;] [Type II, concealed arm;]
[Type III, hanger plate;] vertically adjustable, lavatory, chair carrier
with [steel-pipe] [heavy-duty, rectangular-steel,] upright members;
and feet. <INSERT OTHER>
32. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>
B. Wheelchair Lavatories: <TXT>Provide same as specified for
lavatory LAV [ ] except lavatory minimum dimensions to be 508
mm by 686 mm front to rear, 737 mm minimum clearance
from bottom of front rim to floor, 864 mm front rim height
above floor. Provide ASME A112.18.1M copper alloy centerset
faucets, gooseneck spout with aerator 125 mm above rim, 100
mm wrist action handles, perforated grid strainers with offset
tailpiece, and 32 mm adjustable P-trap.

SHOWER SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible] Shower SH-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Plastic Shower Enclosure:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
4. Antiscald Faucet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
5. Mixing-Valve Faucet and Miscellaneous Fittings:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
6. Cabinet Shower Unit:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
7. Terrazzo Shower Receptor:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
8. Plastic Shower Receptor:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
9. Fixture Enclosure Color: <INSERT COLOR>
10. Fixture Enclosure: [Built in-place] [Acrylic plastic] [Fiberglass plastic]
[Enameled steel][ with slip-resistant bathing surface]. <INSERT
OTHER>
11. Fixture Enclosure Dimensions: <INSERT SIZE>
12. Fixture Enclosure Drain: Integral corrosion-resistant metal with
removable strainer and DN50 bottom outlet. <INSERT OTHER>
13. Fixture Enclosure Grab Bar: [Factory fabricated.] [Field installed.]
<INSERT DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION>
14. Shower Base Receptor: [Included with enclosure.] [Precast terrazzo]
[Acrylic plastic] [Fiberglass plastic] [Acrylic or fiberglass plastic] with
threshold matching enclosure[ and slip- resistant bathing surface].
Include integral corrosion-resistant-metal drain with removable
strainer and DN50 bottom outlet.
15. Shower Base Receptor Color: [Included with enclosure.] <INSERT
COLOR>
16. Shower Base Receptor Dimensions: <INSERT SIZE AND SHAPE>
17. Faucet Construction: Cast-brass, [dual, manual-control, mixing valve
with escutcheons.] [pressure-equalizing-control{ with high-
temperature-limit control},] [thermostatic-control, with high-
temperature-limit control,] single-handle mixing valve with check
stops, and escutcheon.
18. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Handle(s): [Dual, 3 or 4 arms.] [Single-lever, chrome-plated brass.]
[Crystal.] <INSERT OTHER>
b) Shower Head, Arm, and Flange: [Manufacturer's standard {with
manual flow control in head}.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Shower Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: [0.1 L/s.] [0.13 L/s.] [0.16 L/s.]
<INSERT OTHER>
d) Hand Shower, Hose, and Brackets or Slide: [Manufacturer's
standard.] <INSERT OTHER>
e) Hose-Supply, Flow-Control Fitting: [0.1 L/s.] [0.13 L/s.] [0.16 L/s.]
<INSERT OTHER>
 19. Supplies: [Copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve if check
stops not included with faucet.]<INSERT OTHER>
20. Drain: [Included with enclosure.] [Included with receptor.] [DN50,
nickel-bronze-strainer, floor drain.] <INSERT OTHER>
21. Trap: [DN50 drainage piping.] <INSERT OTHER>
22. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF
APPLICABLE; ADD BASE SUPPORT IF REQUIRED>

BATHTUB SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible ]Bathtub BT-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Enameled, Cast-Iron Bathtub:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
4. Enameled, Steel Bathtub:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
5. Plastic Bathtub:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
6. Antiscald Bathtub Faucet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
7. Mixing-Valve Faucet and Miscellaneous Fittings:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
8. Plastic Fixture Material: [Acrylic] [Fiberglass] plastic.
9. Fixture Color: <INSERT COLOR>
10. Fixture Dimensions: <INSERT SIZE>
11. Bathing Surface: [Manufacturer's standard.] [Slip resistant.]
12. Faucet Construction: Cast-brass, [dual, manual-control, mixing valve
with escutcheons.] [pressure-equalizing-control{ with high-
temperature-limit control},] [thermostatic-control, with high-
temperature-limit control,] single-handle mixing valve with check
stops, and escutcheon.
13. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Handle(s): [Dual, 3 or 4 arms.] [Single-lever, chrome-plated brass.]
[Crystal.] <INSERT OTHER>
b) Tub Filler Spout: [Manufacturer's standard.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Shower Diverter Valve: [Manufacturer's standard.] <INSERT OTHER>
d) Shower Head, Arm, and Flange: [Manufacturer's standard {with
manual flow control in head}.] <INSERT OTHER>
e) Shower Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: [0.1 L/s.] [0.13 L/s.] [0.16 L/s.]
<INSERT OTHER>
f) Hand Shower, Hose, and Brackets or Slide: [Manufacturer's
 standard.] <INSERT OTHER>
g) Hose-Supply, Flow-Control Fitting: [0.1 L/s.] [0.13 L/s.] [0.16 L/s.]
<INSERT OTHER>
14. Supplies: [Copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valve if check
stops not included with faucet.]<INSERT OTHER>
15. Supplies: DN15 copper tubing. <INSERT OTHER>
16. Waste and Overflow Fitting: DN40, [1.1 mm] [0.8 mm] wall
thickness, tubular brass. Include lever-operated, pop-up waste and
overflow with universal-type outlet connection on waste tee; and
DN40, [1.1 mm] [0.8 mm] wall thickness, tubular waste. <INSERT
OTHER>
17. Trap: DN40 cast brass with [pipe] [1.1 mm wall thickness, tubular-
brass] waste. <INSERT OTHER>
18. P-Trap: [DN40] [DN50] drainage piping.
19. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE;
ADD BASE SUPPORT IF REQUIRED>

WHIRLPOOL BATHTUB SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible] Whirlpool Bathtub WP-[#]: Where plumbing

fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Enameled, Cast-Iron Whirlpool Bathtub:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
4. Enameled, Steel Whirlpool Bathtub:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
5. Plastic Whirlpool Bathtub:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME;>
6. Plastic Fixture Material: [Acrylic] [Fiberglass] plastic.
7. Fixture Color: <INSERT COLOR>
8. Fixture Dimensions: <INSERT SIZE>
9. Bathing Surface: [Manufacturer's standard.] [Slip resistant.]
10. Faucet: Manufacturer's standard cast-brass, manual-control mixing
valve with dual, supply valves and escutcheons. Include tub filler
spout, and air-control valve. <INSERT OTHER>
11. Whirlpool Fittings: [Manufacturer's standard.] <INSERT OTHER>
12. Controls: [Manufacturer's standard.] <INSERT OTHER>
13. Pump: <INSERT CAPACITY AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS>
14. Water Heater: <INSERT CAPACITY AND ELECTRICAL
CHARACTERISTICS>
15. Supplies: DN15 copper tubing. <INSERT OTHER>
16. Waste and Overflow Fitting: DN40, [1.1 mm] [0.8 mm] wall
 thickness, tubular brass. Include lever-operated, pop-up waste and
overflow with universal-type outlet connection on waste tee; and
DN40, [1.1 mm] [0.8 mm] wall thickness, tubular waste. <INSERT
OTHER>
17. Trap: DN40 cast brass with [pipe] [1.1 mm wall thickness, tubular-
brass] waste. <INSERT OTHER>
18. P-Trap: [DN40] [DN50] drainage piping.
19. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE;
ADD BASE SUPPORT IF REQUIRED>

WASH FOUNTAIN SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible] Wash Fountain WF-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures

of this designation are indicated, provide products complying
with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
3. Applicable Standards: <INSERT IF KNOWN>
4. Bowl Material: [Terrazzo.] [Stainless steel.] [Plastic.] <INSERT
OTHER>
5. Fixture Color or Finish: <INSERT IF REQUIRED>
6. No. of Stations: [One.] [2.] [3.] [4.] [6.] [8.]
7. Shape and Dimensions: [914 to 965 mm,] [1370 mm,] [round.]
[semicircular.] [corner.] [In-line (side by side).] <INSERT OTHER>
8. Mounting: [Floor.] [Wall.]
9. Faucet{s}: Manufacturer's standard [manual] [sensor-actuated]
mixing valve with check stops or field-installed check valves.
10. Supplies: [DN10] [DN15] [DN20] [DN25] copper tubing with ball,
gate, or globe valves.
11. Drain: Manufacturer's standard grid drain with [DN32] [DN40]
[DN50] tailpiece. <INSERT OTHER>
12. Cast-Brass Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] [DN40,] [DN50,] cast-
brass trap, with slip-joint inlet[, cleanout,] [DN32,] [DN40,] [DN50,]
pipe nipple to wall, and wall flange.
13. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: [DN32 ,] [DN40 by DN32 ,] [DN40 ,]
[DN50 ,] cast-brass trap, with slip-joint inlet[, cleanout,] [DN32,]
[DN40,] [DN50,] [1.1 mm] [0.8 mm] wall thickness, tubular brass,
waste to wall, and wall flange.
14. P-Trap: [DN50] drainage piping. <INSERT OTHER>
15. Fixture Support: [Manufacturer's standard mounting frame.]
<INSERT OTHER>
16. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>
SINK SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible] Sink S-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Stainless-Steel Sink:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
4. Enameled, Cast-Iron Sink:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
5. Enameled, Steel Sink:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
6. Plastic Sink:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
7. Faucet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
8. Laminar-Flow, Faucet-Spout Fitting:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
9. Disposer:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
10. Hot-Water Dispenser:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
11. [Sediment] [Plaster] Interceptor:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
12. Fitting Insulation Kit:
13. Fixture Color: [White.] <INSERT OTHER>
14. Fixture Dimensions: <INSERT NO. OF COMPARTMENTS AND SIZES>
15. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: [2.0 mm.] [1.6 mm.] [1.3 mm.] [1.0
mm.] [0.8 mm.]
16. Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: [One hole, centered.] [2 holes, 51 mm
each side of center.] [2 holes, 102 mm each side of center.] [3
holes, centered and 51 mm each side of center.] [3 holes, centered
and 102 mm each side of center.] [4 holes, centered, 102 mm each
side of center, and 203 mm to left of center.] [5 holes, centered,
102 mm each side of center, and 203 mm each side of center.]
<INSERT OTHER>
17. Fixture Mounting: [Counter.] [Counter, self-rimming.] [Wall
hanging.] <INSERT OTHER>
18. Faucet Construction: [Center set with inlets on 102 mm centers,]
[Center set with central inlets,] [Widespread with inlets on 203 mm
centers,] [Single-inlet,] [and cast brass.] [and cast-brass underbody
and brass escutcheon.] [and nonmetal (plastic) underbody and
plastic or brass escutcheon.] <INSERT OTHER>
19. Faucet Mounting: [Centered on fixture deck.] [Counter, centered on
fixture.] [Centered on fixture backsplash.] <INSERT OTHER>
20. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Accessible-Fixture Operation: [Manual.] [Sensor actuation.] <INSERT
OTHER>
b) Handle[s]: [Dual lever.] [Dual, 3 or 4 arms.] [Dual, metal knobs.]
[Dual, crystal knobs.] [Single-lever toggle.] [Extended, single-lever
toggle.] [Single, push-pull and twist.] [Dual, 102 mm wrist blades.]
[Dual, 152 mm wrist blades.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Spout: [Integral with body.] [Swing.] [Swing gooseneck.] [Fixed-
position gooseneck.]
d) Spout Length, Centerline of Inlets to Outlet: <INSERT IF OTHER
THAN MFR'S STANDARD>
e) Gooseneck Height and Offset, Centerline of Inlets to Outlet:
<INSERT IF OTHER THAN MFR'S STANDARD>
f) Spout Outlet: [Manufacturer's standard aerator.] [0.1 L/s laminar
flow.] [0.13 L/s laminar flow.] <INSERT OTHER>
g) Spout-Outlet, Flow-Control Fitting: [0.1 L/s.] [0.13 L/s.] <INSERT
OTHER>
21. Supply Inlets: [DN15, brass pipe or copper tubing.] <INSERT OTHER>
22. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight,
compression, [loose-key type,] [wheel-handle type,] same size as
supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. <INSERT OTHER>
23. Supply Shutoff Valves: DN15 gate, globe, or ball.
24. Supply Risers: [DN10 flexible with knob end.] [DN10 rigid with DN8
straight, knob-end tailpiece.] [DN10 rigid with DN8 offset, knob-end
tailpiece.] [DN15 copper tubing.] <INSERT OTHER>
25. Supply, Flow-Control Restrictors: DN15, [0.032 L/s.] [0.06 L/s.]
<INSERT OTHER>
26. Drain[s]: [38 mm grid strainer with] [38 mm removable, stainless-
steel strainer bucket with] [89 mm grid strainer with] [89 mm
removable, stainless-steel crumb cup with] [89 mm removable,
chrome-plated, brass crumb cup with] [DN40 tubular-brass
tailpiece.] [DN40 tubular stainless- steel tailpiece.] <INSERT OTHER>
27. Plaster Sink Drain: Grid strainer with [DN40,] [DN50,] 1.1 mm thick,
tubular-brass tailpiece.<INSERT OTHER>
28. Plaster Sink Waste: [DN40,] [DN50,] 1.1 mm thick, tubular-brass
tailpiece. <INSERT OTHER>
29. Continuous Waste: [DN40,] [1.1 mm thick, tubular brass with slip-
joint inlet.] [0.8 mm thick, tubular brass with slip-joint inlet.]
[tubular plastic with slip-joint inlet.] <INSERT OTHER>
30. Tubular Trap: [DN40,] [1.1 mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [0.8
mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [plastic tubular fittings,] with slip-
joint inlet [, cleanout,] and wall flange.
31. Cast-Brass Trap: [DN40,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap, with slip-
joint inlet, [cleanout,] [DN32,] [DN40,] pipe nipple to wall, and wall
flange.
32. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap,
with slip-joint inlet,{cleanout,} [DN32] [DN40] tubular brass, waste
to wall, and wall flange.
33. Indirect Waste: [DN40,] [DN50,] [1.1 mm thick,] [0.8 mm thick,]
[tubular brass.] [plastic tubular fittings.] [pipe.] <INSERT OTHER>
 34. Interceptor: [Cast iron with interior and exterior, acid-resistant-
enamel coating,] [Stainless-steel] [plaster] [sediment] interceptor
designed for floor mounting. Include [DN40,] [DN50,] inlet and
outlet; removable, corrosion-resistant screens or bucket; and
[DN40,] [DN50,] waste piping with wall flange.
35. Food-Waste Disposer: Household, continuous feed. Include 115
VAC, 29-rev/s motor with overload protection and reset button;
wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-resistant grinder
or shredder; DN40 outlet; quick-mounting, stainless-steel sink
flange; antisplash guard; and combination cover/stopper. <INSERT
OTHER DESCRIPTION; BATCH-FEED TYPE IS ALSO AVAILABLE>
a) Model: [1/3 hp,] [1/2 hp,] [3/4 hp,] model with cutlery- or stainless-
steel grinder or [shredder.] [shredder and sound-insulated
chamber.] [shredder, sound-insulated chamber, and stainless-steel
outer shell.] <INSERT OTHER>
36. Hot-Water Dispenser: Household. Include instant ON-OFF control;
insulated, corrosion- resistant-metal storage tank that is open to
atmosphere; electric, 115 VAC heating element; chrome-plated
faucet or spout; removable strainer; thermostat control for water
temperature up to 88 deg. C; and thermal overload protection.
<INSERT OTHER, FAUCET MODEL IS AVAILABLE>
a) Model: [1.26 L ] [1.9 L ] minimum tank capacity, [500 W] [750 W]
[1300 W] minimum input, with [gooseneck spout, and lever
operator.] [twist-knob spout assembly.] <INSERT OTHER>
37. Supply Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for supplies
from wall to fixture with removable covering for stops and handles.]
[Molded, soft-plastic covering for hot-water supply from wall to
fixture with removable covering for stop and handle.] [Shaped,
cushioned-jacket plastic covering with self-sticking fastening system
for supply stops and risers to fixture.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket
plastic covering with self-sticking fastening system for hot-water
supply stop and riser to fixture.] Include manufacturer's standard
fasteners, straps, and adhesives.<INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
38. Drain Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain piping
from fixture to wall.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket plastic covering
with self-sticking fastening system for drain piping and trap.]
Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives.
<INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
39. Fixture Support: [Type I, exposed arm;] [Type II, hanger plate;]
[Type III, combination, exposed arm and hanger plate;] [Type IV,
support plate;] vertically adjustable, sink, chair carrier with [steel-
pipe] [heavy-duty, rectangular-steel,] upright members; and feet.
<INSERT OTHER>
40. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

SERVICE SINK SCHEDULE

A. Service Sink SS-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this designation

are indicated, provide products complying with the following:
 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Enameled, Cast-Iron, Wall-Mounting Service Sink:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
4. Enameled, Cast-Iron, Floor-Mounting Service Sink:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
5. Stainless-Steel Service Sink:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
6. Faucet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
7. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: [2.0 mm .] <INSERT OTHER>
8. Fixture Dimensions: <INSERT SIZE>
9. Mounting: [Trap standard and wall bracket.] [Floor.] <INSERT
OTHER>
10. Rim Guard: [Manufacturer's standard.] [Chrome plated, brass.]
[Coated wire.] <INSERT OTHER>
11. Faucet: Widespread, cast brass with supplies on 203 mm centers.
<INSERT OTHER>
12. Faucet Mounting: [Fixture back.] [Wall, centered on fixture.]
13. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Finish: [Rough chrome.] [Polished chrome.] [Rough brass.]
b) Handles: [Dual lever or 4 arm.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Supply Stops: [Integral, in shanks.] <INSERT OTHER>
d) Spout: [With integral vacuum breaker, pail hook, and hose-thread
outlet.] <INSERT OTHER>
e) Wall Brace: [Assembly with wall bracket and support to faucet
spout. <INSERT OTHER>
f) Hose: 762 mm minimum, flexible hose with stainless-steel hose wall
bracket.
14. Trap Standard: [DN80 ] [DN50 ] with grid strainer, enameled
interior, cleanout, floor support, and pipe waste to wall. <INSERT
OTHER>
15. Drain: [DN80 ] [DN50 ] with grid strainer. <INSERT OTHER>
16. P-Trap: [DN80 ] [DN50 ] drainage piping.
17. Supplies: DN15 copper tubing{ with ball, gate, or globe valve}.
<INSERT OTHER>
18. Reinforcement: [Provide for wall-mounting faucet{ and wall brace}.]
<INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

MOP-SERVICE BASIN SCHEDULE

A. Mop-Service Basin MS-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Terrazzo Mop-Service Basin:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
4. Plastic Mop-Service Basin:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
5. Stainless-Steel, Mop-Service Basin:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
6. Faucet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
7. Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: [2.0 mm .] <INSERT OTHER>
8. Fixture Dimensions: [610 by 914 mm ] [610 by 610 mm ] [152 mm ]
[305 mm ]. <INSERT OTHER>
9. Mounting: [Floor.] <INSERT OTHER>
10. Rim Guard: [Manufacturer's standard.] [Chrome plated, brass.]
[Coated wire.] <INSERT OTHER>
11. Faucet: Widespread, cast brass with supplies on 203 mm centers.
<INSERT OTHER>
12. Faucet Mounting: [Wall, centered on fixture.] <INSERT OTHER>
13. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Finish: [Rough chrome.] [Polished chrome.] [Rough brass.]
b) Handles: [Dual lever or 4 arm.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Supply Stops: [Integral, in shanks.] <INSERT OTHER>
d) Spout: [With integral vacuum breaker, pail hook, and hose-thread
outlet.] <INSERT OTHER>
e) Wall Brace: [Assembly with wall bracket and support to faucet
spout. <INSERT OTHER>
f) Hose: 762 mm minimum, flexible hose with stainless-steel hose wall
bracket.
14. Drain: [DN80 ] [DN50 ] with grid strainer. <INSERT OTHER>
15. P-Trap: [DN80 ] [DN50 ] drainage piping.
16. Mop Rack: <INSERT DESCRIPTION>
17. Supplies: DN15 copper tubing [with ball, gate, or globe valve].
<INSERT OTHER>
18. Reinforcement: Provide for wall-mounting faucet[ and wall brace.]
[, wall brace, and hose-hook bracket.] <INSERT SPECIFIC
REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE

LAUNDRY TRAY SCHEDULE

A. Laundry Tray LT-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Enameled, Cast-Iron Laundry Tray:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
4. Plastic Laundry Trays:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
5. Fixture Dimensions: <INSERT NO. OF COMPARTMENTS AND SIZES>
6. Fixture Mounting: [Wall hanging.] [Floor stand.] [Counter.]
7. Faucet Construction: [Cast brass.] <INSERT OTHER>
8. Faucet Mounting: [Centered on back of fixture.] [Centered on
fixture deck.] [Wall, centered on fixture.] [Counter, centered on
fixture.]
9. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Spout: [Swing.] <INSERT OTHER>
b) Handles: [Dual lever or 4 arm.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Soap Dish: [Integral, mounted on faucet.] <INSERT OTHER>
10. Supply Inlets: [DN15, brass pipe or copper tubing.] <INSERT OTHER>
11. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight,
compression, [loose-key type,] [wheel-handle type,] same size as
supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. <INSERT OTHER>
12. Supply Shutoff Valves: DN15 gate, globe, or ball.
13. Supply Risers: [DN10 flexible with knob end.] [DN10 rigid with DN8
straight, knob-end tailpiece.] [DN10 rigid with DN8 offset, knob-end
tailpiece.] [DN15 copper tubing.] <INSERT OTHER>
14. Drain{s}: Manufacturer's standard grid drain with DN40 tubular-
brass tailpiece. <INSERT OTHER>
15. Continuous Waste: [DN40,] [1.1 mm thick, tubular brass with slip-
joint inlet.] [0.8 mm thick, tubular brass with slip-joint inlet.]
[tubular plastic with slip-joint inlet.] <INSERT OTHER>
16. Tubular Trap: [DN40,] [1.1 mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [0.8
mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [plastic tubular fittings,] with slip-
joint inlet [, cleanout,] and wall flange.
17. Cast-Brass Trap: DN40, cast-brass trap, with slip-joint inlet,
[cleanout,] DN40, pipe nipple to wall, and wall flange.
18. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: DN40, cast-brass trap, with slip-joint inlet,
[cleanout,] DN40 tubular brass, waste to wall, and wall flange.
19. Fixture Support: [Type I, exposed arm;] [Type II, hanger plate;]
[Type III, combination, exposed arm and hanger plate;] vertically
adjustable, sink, chair carrier with steel-pipe upright members and
feet.] [Manufacturer's standard steel stand or base unit.] <INSERT
OTHER>
20. Reinforcement: [Provide for wall-mounting faucet.] <INSERT
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

SHAMPOO BOWL SCHEDULE

A. Shampoo Bowl SB-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures of this

designation are indicated, provide products complying with the
 following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Shampoo Bowl:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
4. Hair Interceptor:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
5. Fixture Material: [Enameled, cast iron.] [Plastic.]
6. Fixture Dimensions: <INSERT SIZE>
7. Fixture Mounting: [Wall hanging.] [Counter mounting.]
8. Faucet: Manufacturer's standard cast-brass, center-set type with
diverter, hose, and spray.<INSERT OTHER>
9. Faucet Mounting: [Fixture deck.] <INSERT OTHER>
10. Supply Inlets: [DN10,] [DN15,] brass pipe or copper tubing.
11. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight,
compression, [loose-key type,] [wheel-handle type,] same size as
supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. <INSERT OTHER>
12. Supply Risers: [DN10 flexible with knob end.] [DN10 rigid with DN8
straight, knob-end tailpiece.] [DN10 rigid with DN8 offset, knob-end
tailpiece.] <INSERT OTHER>
13. Drain: [Manufacturer's standard grid drain with DN40 tailpiece.]
<INSERT OTHER>
14. Tubular Trap: [DN40,] [1.1 mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [0.8
mm wall thickness, tubular brass,] [plastic tubular fittings,] with slip-
joint inlet{, cleanout,} and wall flange.
15. Cast-Brass Trap: DN40, cast-brass trap, with slip-joint inlet,
[cleanout,] DN40, pipe nipple to wall, and wall flange.
16. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: DN40, cast-brass trap, with slip-joint inlet,
{cleanout,} DN40 [1.1 mm,] [0.8 mm,] wall thickness, tubular brass,
waste to wall, and wall flange.
17. Hair-Interceptor Trap: Chrome-plated, brass [or stainless-steel]
housing with removable brass or stainless-steel screen or bucket;
DN40 slip-joint inlet; DN40 outlet; DN40 pipe nipple to wall; and
wall flange.
18. Fixture Support: [Vertically adjustable, lavatory or sink, chair carrier
with support plate or device matching fixture mounting; steel-pipe
upright members; and feet.] <INSERT OTHER>
19. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

DRINKING FOUNTAIN SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible ]Drinking Fountain DF-[#]: Where plumbing fixtures

of this designation are indicated, provide products complying
 with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Vitreous-China Drinking Fountain:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
4. Stainless-Steel Drinking Fountain:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
5. Miscellaneous-Material Drinking Fountain:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
6. Miscellaneous Fixture Material: [Plastic.] [Enameled steel.]
[Masonry.] [Concrete.] <INSERT OTHER>
7. Fixture Color: <INSERT COLOR>
8. Fixture Mounting: [Wall hanging.] [Pedestal.] <INSERT OTHER>
9. Supply: [DN10] [DN15] copper tubing with gate, globe, or ball valve.
10. Cast-Brass Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap, with slip-
joint inlet, {cleanout,} [DN32,] [DN40,] pipe nipple to wall, and wall
flange.
11. P-Trap: [DN50 drainage piping with DN40 riser to fixture drain.]
<INSERT OTHER>
12. Supply Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for supply from
wall to fixture with removable covering for stop and handle.]
[Shaped, cushioned-jacket plastic covering with self- sticking
fastening system for supply stop and riser to fixture.] Include
manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives. <INSERT
COLOR IF REQUIRED>
13. Drain Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain piping
from fixture to wall.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket plastic covering
with self-sticking fastening system for drain piping and trap.]
Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives.
<INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
14. Fixture Support: Type I, vertically adjustable, hanger-plate, water-
cooler, chair carrier with [steel-pipe] [heavy-duty, rectangular-
steel,] upright members, bearing plate, and feet. <INSERT OTHER>
15. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

ELECTRIC WATER COOLER SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible ]Electric Water Cooler EWC-[#]: Where plumbing

fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
 the following:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
3. Fixture Type: [Bubbler.] [Bilevel bubbler.] [Bubbler with hot-water
faucet.] [Bottle.] [Bubbler with remote chiller.] <INSERT OTHER>
4. No. of Bubblers or Stations: [One.] [2.] [3.] <INSERT OTHER>
5. Fixture Unit Capacity: <INSERT CAPACITY CHILLED WATER>
6. Fixture Cabinet Material: [Stainless steel.] [Enameled steel.] [Vinyl-
covered steel.] <INSERT OTHER>
7. Fixture Color or Finish: <INSERT COLOR OR FINISH>
8. Fixture Mounting: [Wall.] [Free standing.] [Semirecessed.]
[Recessed.] <INSERT OTHER>
9. Wall Grille: [Stainless steel.] [Enameled steel.] <INSERT SIZE>
10. Supply: DN10 copper tubing with gate, globe, or ball valve. <INSERT
OTHER>
11. Water Filter: [Manufacturer's standard.] [Cartridge type for 254 mm
cartridge with stainless- steel or plastic housing, fittings, and
mounting bracket. Include replaceable, activated-carbon, wound-
fiber, or pleated cartridge with 10-micron removal rating.]
12. Cast-Brass Trap{s}: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] cast-brass trap, with
slip-joint inlet, [cleanout,] [DN32,] [DN40,] pipe nipple to wall, and
wall flange.
13. Supply Insulation Kit{s}: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for supply
from wall to fixture with removable covering for stop and handle.]
[Shaped, cushioned-jacket plastic covering with self- sticking
fastening system for supply stop and riser to fixture.] Include
manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives. <INSERT
COLOR IF REQUIRED>
14. Drain Insulation Kit[s]: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain
piping from fixture to wall.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket plastic
covering with self-sticking fastening system for drain piping and
trap.] Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and
adhesives. <INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
15. Fixture Support: [Type I,] [Type II, bilevel,] vertically adjustable,
hanger-plate, water-cooler, chair carrier with [steel-pipe] [heavy-
duty, rectangular-steel,] upright members, bearing plate[s], and
feet. <INSERT OTHER>
16. Reinforcement: [Fabricate to enclose mounting box.] <INSERT
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

B. Wheelchair Electric similar to Water Cooler EWC[ ]) except

cooler is provided with 686 mm minimum knee clearance from
front bottom of unit to floor and 914 mm maximum spout
height above floor. Bubblers shall also be controlled by push
levers, by push bars, or touch pads one on each side or one on
front and both sides of the cabinet
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

A. [{Accessible }Emergency Eyewash EW-[#]:]

[{Accessible }Emergency Shower ES-[#]:] Where plumbing
fixtures of this designation are indicated, provide products
complying with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
3. Material: <INSERT MATERIALS OR COATINGS OF MAJOR
COMPONENTS>
4. Mounting: [Wall.] [Counter.] [Floor, with wall brace.] <INSERT
OTHER>
5. Supply: [DN15] [DN25] [DN40] copper tubing. <INSERT OTHER>
6. Drain: <INSERT DESCRIPTION IF REQUIRED>
7. Trap: <INSERT DESCRIPTION IF REQUIRED>
8. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>

EMPLOYER-FURNISHED [FIXTURE] [EQUIPMENT] SCHEDULE

A. [Accessible ]Employer-Furnished [Fixture] [Equipment] [#]:

Where plumbing fixtures of this designation are indicated,
retain fixture in-place or relocate and reinstall as indicated, and
provide products complying with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
3. Flushometer Valve:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
4. Toilet Seat:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
5. Faucet:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
6. Laminar-Flow, Faucet-Spout Fitting:
a) <INSERT PRODUCT NAME>
7. Fitting Insulation Kit:
8. Flushometer Valve Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper
pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with spud,
screwdriver check stop, and vacuum breaker.
9. Flushometer Valve Operation: [Diaphragm.] <INSERT OTHER>
10. Flushometer Valve Finish: [Rough brass.] [Polished, chrome-plated,
exposed metal parts.]
11. Flushometer Valve, Water Consumption: Factory set or field
adjusted, 6 L maximum per flushing cycle.
12. Flushometer valve components include the following:
a) Brass, lever-handle actuation.
b) Bacteria-control-coated, brass, lever-handle actuation.
c) Nonhold-open feature.
d) Wheel-handle stop.
e) Metal, push-button actuation.
f) Seat bumper on stop.
g) Hydraulic, push-button-actuation, flushing system.
h) Bedpan washer with diverter valve, spray head, and support.
i) Battery-powered, sensor-actuation, automatic flushing system.
j) Electric, hard-wired, sensor-actuation, automatic flushing system.
k) Tailpiece, trap-primer connection.
13. Supply Inlet: [DN15] [DN10] with wall flange.
14. Supply Stop: [Loose key.] [Wheel handle.] <INSERT OTHER>
15. Supply Riser: [DN15,] [DN10,] [flexible riser with collar end.] [rigid
riser with collar end.]
16. Toilet Seat: Solid-plastic, water-closet seat with bumpers and
hardware, compatible with water closet and as follows:
a) Color: [White.] [Black.] [Matching water closet.] <INSERT OTHER>
b) Class: [Commercial, Heavy Duty.] [Commercial, Standard.]
[Residential.] [Commercial, Extra-Heavy-Duty type, exceeding
requirements of Commercial, Standard class.]
c) Size: [Elongated.] [Round front.]
d) Pattern: [Open front without cover.] [Open front with cover.]
[Closed front with cover.]
e) Hinge Type: [Check (CK).] [Noncheck (NC).] [Self-sustaining check
(SC).] [Self-raising (SR).]
17. Faucet Construction: [Center set with inlets on 102 mm centers,]
[Center set with central inlets,] [Widespread with inlets on 203 mm
centers,] [Single-inlet,] [cast brass,] [cast-brass underbody and brass
escutcheon,] [nonmetal (plastic) underbody and plastic or brass
escutcheon,] [and with pop-up waste.] [and without pop-up waste.]
<INSERT OTHER>
18. Faucet Valve Operation: [Manual, ON-OFF.] [Manual, adjustable,
self-closing, metering.] [Electric, hard wired, sensor actuation,
automatic.] <INSERT OTHER>
19. Faucet Mounting Position: [Centered on fixture deck.] [Counter,
centered on fixture.] [Centered on fixture backsplash.]
20. Faucet Components: Include the following:
a) Accessible-Fixture Operation: [Manual.] [Sensor actuation.] <INSERT
OTHER>
b) Handle{s}: [Dual lever.] [Dual, 3 or 4 arms.] [Dual, metal knobs.]
[Dual, crystal knobs.] [Dual, metering, self-closing, push buttons.]
[Single-lever toggle.] [Extended, single-lever toggle.] [Single, push-
pull and twist.] [Dual, 102 mm wrist blade.] [Dual, 152 mm wrist
blade.] <INSERT OTHER>
c) Spout: [Integral with body.] [Swing gooseneck.] [Fixed-position
gooseneck.]
d) Spout Length, Centerline of Inlets to Outlet: <INSERT IF OTHER
THAN MFR'S STANDARD>
e) Gooseneck Height and Offset, Centerline of Inlets to Outlet:
<INSERT IF OTHER THAN MFR'S STANDARD>
f) Spout Outlet: [Manufacturer's standard aerator.] [0.032 L/s laminar
flow.] [0.047-L/s laminar flow.] <INSERT OTHER>
g) Spout-Outlet, Flow-Control Fitting: [0.032 L/s.] [0.047 L/s.] <INSERT
OTHER>
21. Supply Inlets: [DN10,] [DN15,] brass pipe or copper tubing.
22. Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight,
compression, [loose-key type,] [wheel-handle type,] same size as
supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. <INSERT OTHER>
23. Supply Risers: [DN10 flexible with knob end.] [DN10 rigid with DN8
straight, knob-end tailpiece.] [DN10 rigid with DN8 offset, knob-end
tailpiece.] <INSERT OTHER>
24. Supply, Flow-Control Restrictors: [DN10,] [DN15,] 0.032 L/s.
<INSERT OTHER>
25. Drain: [Grid strainer with DN32 tailpiece.] [Grid strainer with DN32
offset waste.] [Pop-up with DN32 tailpiece, included with faucet.]
[Open with rubber stopper and chain.] <INSERT OTHER>
26. Tubular Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] [DN40,] [1.1 mm wall
thickness, tubular brass,] [0.8 mm wall thickness, tubular brass,]
[plastic tubular fittings,] with slip-joint inlet, cleanout, and wall
flange.
27. Cast-Brass Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] [DN40,] cast-brass trap,
with slip-joint inlet[, cleanout,] [DN32,] [DN40,] pipe nipple to wall,
and wall flange.
28. Cast-Brass/Tubular Trap: [DN32,] [DN40 by DN32,] [DN40,] cast-
brass trap, with slip-joint inlet[, cleanout,] [DN32] [DN40] tubular
brass, waste to wall, and wall flange.
29. Hair-Interceptor Trap: Chrome-plated, brass [or stainless-steel]
housing with removable brass or stainless-steel screen or bucket;
[DN32] [DN40] inlet and outlet, pipe nipples to sink drain and wall;
and wall flange.
30. Supply Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for supplies
from wall to fixture with removable covering for stops and handles.]
[Molded, soft-plastic covering for hot-water supply from wall to
fixture with removable covering for stop and handle.] [Shaped,
cushioned-jacket plastic covering with self-sticking fastening system
for supply stops and risers to fixture.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket
plastic covering with self-sticking fastening system for hot-water
supply stop and riser to fixture.] Include manufacturer's standard
fasteners, straps, and adhesives.<INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
31. Drain Insulation Kit: [Molded, soft-plastic covering for drain piping
from fixture to wall.] [Shaped, cushioned-jacket plastic covering
with self-sticking fastening system for drain piping and trap.]
Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives.
<INSERT COLOR IF REQUIRED>
 32. Fixture Support: Vertically adjustable, cast-iron, [elevated-type,]
water-closet carrier with combination support and waste fitting
assemblies and tiling frame or setting gage. Include additional
faceplate and coupling for water closet at wide pipe space.
Compact-type carrier for back-to-back water-closet installation is
prohibited.
33. Fixture Support: [Vertically adjustable, chair carrier with support
plate or device matching fixture mounting; steel-pipe upright
members; and feet.] <INSERT OTHER>
34. Reinforcement: <INSERT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS, IF APPLICABLE>.

SECTION 23
PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged booster pumps to maintain

pressure in the building potable-water distribution systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Sections for fire-suppression pumps.
2. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements.
3. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Pumps" for potable-water
circulators and pumps.
4. Division 15 Section "Potable-Water Storage Tanks" for separate
hydropneumatic tanks.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated

capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each type and size of packaged booster pump
indicated.
 B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for packaged
booster pumps. Include setting drawings with templates,
directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and
other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control
systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of packaged booster

pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections,
and dimensional requirements of packaged booster pumps and
are based on specific manufacturer types and models selected.
Other manufacturers' pumps with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a
testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective

coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for
handling.

PART - PRODUCTS
PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged booster

pump units; suitable for potable-water service.
B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section
"Motors."
C. The internal surface of the volute shall be coated with 300
micron fusion bonded epoxy coating applied at the factory.
D. Piping: ASME B31.9 for piping materials and installation.
1. DN100 and Smaller: ASTM B 88M, Type B, drawn, copper, water
tube with copper, solder- joint, pressure fittings and brazed joints
or ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded,
cast-iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. DN125 and Larger: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe
with threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded joints.
3. Header End Connections DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
4. Header End Connections DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
E. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components,
may have grooved ends for grooved joints.
F. Shutoff Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or
higher if required to suit system pressure; bronze, rising-stem
gate valve or MSS SP-110, 4135 kPa minimum CWP, bronze ball
valve with ends matching piping.
G. Shutoff Valves, DN65 and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, or
higher if required to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, OS&Y,
cast-iron gate valve with flanged ends or MSS SP-67, Type I for
tight shutoff, 1206 kPa CWP, single-flanged, cast-iron butterfly
valve.
H. Check Valves, DN50 and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or
higher if required to suit system pressure; bronze, non-slam,
swing check valve.
I. Check Valves, DN65 and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, or higher
if required to suit system pressure; bronze-trim, cast-iron, non-
slam, swing check valve.
J. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material
isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action
and to stop corrosion.
1. DN50 and Smaller: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 1725 kPa
minimum working pressure at 82 deg. C.
2. DN65 and Larger: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly;
for 1035 or 2070 kPa minimum working pressure as required to suit
system pressures.
K. Sensors: Pressure switches.
L. Control Panel: Automatic, with load control and protection
 functions. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an
integral part of unit.
2. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12.
3. Motor Controller: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with
undervoltage release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type
disconnect, and short-circuit protective device.
a) Control Voltage: 230 V ac, using integral control power transformer.
4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of
control panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.
6. Duplex, Automatic Alternating Starter: Switches lead pump to lag
main pump and to 2 pump operation.
7. Triplex, Sequence (Lead-Lag-Lag) Starter: Switches lead pump to 1
lag main pump and to 3 pump operation.
8. Instrumentation: Unit suction and discharge pressure gages.
9. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are
operating.
M. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested units before shipping.
N. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and
exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion
compound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles.

COMPACT, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Description: Simplex packaged unit, with pump, piping, valves,

sensor, hydropneumatic tank, and controls for constant-speed
operation.
1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 860 kPa and as required to suit system
pressure.
2. Pump: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," for close-
coupled, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
a) Construction: Single stage, radially split, bronze fitted.
b) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Control Valve: Adjustable, automatic, direct-acting pressure
regulator on pump discharge.
4. Relief Valve: Adjustable, pressure-relief type on pump discharge.
5. Hydropneumatic Tank: Minimum 38-L water-volume capacity,
precharged, diaphragm or bladder tank.
CONSTANT-SPEED-DRIVE, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping,

valves, sensors, and controls for constant- speed operation.
1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 1200 kPa, and as required to suit system
pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Duplex, with 2 equal-size pumps.
3. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with 1 small lead and 2 large equal-size
lag main pumps.
4. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with 3 equal-size pumps.
5. Pumps: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," for close-
coupled, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
6. Pumps: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," for close-
coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.
a) Construction: Single stage, radially split, bronze fitted.
b) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
7. Pumps: Comply with HI 2.1-2.5, "Vertical Pumps," for multistage
barrel pumps.
a) Construction: Multistage, bronze fitted.
b) Impellers: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed or semiopen, and keyed to shaft.
8. Control Valve:Adjustable, automatic, pilot-operated, pressure
regulator for each pump discharge.

VARIABLE-SPEED-DRIVE, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping,

valves, sensors, controls, and adjustable- speed-drive units for
variable-speed operation.
1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 1200 kPa, and as required to suit system
pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Duplex, with two equal-size pumps.
3. Pump Arrangement: Triplex, with three equal-size pumps.
4. Pumps: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," for close-
coupled, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
5. Pumps: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," for close-
coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.
a) Construction: Single stage, radially split, bronze fitted.
b) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
6. Variable-Speed-Drive Controllers: Adjustable-speed-drive unit for
each pump.

PART - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify

actual locations of connections before packaged booster pump
installation.
CONCRETE

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, for packaged booster pumps. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."

INSTALLATION

A. Install packaged booster pumps according to manufacturer's

written instructions and with access for periodic maintenance,
including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
B. Support packaged booster pumps using the following
vibration-control devices, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic
Restraints."
1. Install units with total of 7.5 hp or less, with rubber-isolator mount
or spring-isolator vibration isolators.
2. Install units with total of more than 7.5 hp, with concrete-filled,
inertia-base vibration isolation bases and spring-isolator vibration
isolators.
C. Support connected piping so weight of water distribution
piping is not supported by packaged booster pumps.
CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15

Section "Water Distribution Piping." Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and
discharge pipe equal to or greater than size of unit suction and
discharge headers.
2. Install flexible pipe connectors on piping connections to unit suction
and discharge headers. Install flexible pipe connectors same size as
piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
 Methods" for flexible pipe connectors.
3. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to unit suction and
discharge headers. Install valves same size as unit suction and
discharge headers. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-
duty valves.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
C. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16
Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
COMMISSIONING

A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.

B. Controls: Set for automatic starting, stopping, sequential, and
alarm operations.
C. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive
maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for
handling hot liquids is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do
not operate pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of trouble is
determined and corrected.
3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
D. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and
prepare pumps for operation.
2. Open valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motors.
4. Open discharge valves slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
6. Close valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.

DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain packaged booster pump units. Refer to Division 1
Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.
 SECTION 24
SEWAGE PUMPS

PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sewage pumps for the building sanitary

drainage systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for sewage pump motors.
PUMP SELECTION

A. Where parallel pump operation is indicated, pumps shall be

selected with characteristics specifically suited for the service
without unstable operation.
B. Pumps shall be selected for service within 4 percent of
maximum efficiency for a given casing and impeller series.
C. Pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the
published maximum diameter of the casing or less than 15
percent larger than the published minimum diameter of the
casing will be rejected.
D. Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated. A pump unit shall
deliver, at rated speed, not less than the specified flow against
the specified or indicated discharge head while the liquid level
is not more than 300 mm above the datum elevation of the
pump. Datum elevation shall be taken as the level of the
entrance eye of the impeller.
E. Discharge head, specified or indicated, shall include the friction
head of the system piping external to the pump unit and the
static head measured from a point of reference on the sump to
the highest point in the system.
F. Ratings shall be based on pumping clear, fresh water at a
temperature of 50 deg. C (122 deg. F).

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer catalog shall show:

1. Performance data including performance curves and indicating
brake horsepower, head, flow and NPSH.
2. Equipment foundation data.
3. Furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of
pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps.
Include setting drawings with templates, directions for
installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
The following shall be submitted:
1. Connection Diagrams: Connection diagrams shall show details of
connection of cables and pump motors.
2. Control Diagrams: Control diagrams shall show motor starters,
 relays, or any other component necessary for safe operation.
3. Fabrication Drawings: Fabrication drawings shall indicate size, type,
and efficiency rating.
4. Installation Drawings: Installation drawings shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommended instructions.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Wiring diagrams shall show detail wiring for
power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Test Reports: Test reports shall be submitted for the following
tests:
1. Hydrostatic leak.
2. Static heads.
3. Pump flow capacity.
A. Certificates: Listing of product installations for similar items
shall identify at least 5 installed units similar to those proposed
for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of
5 years. List shall include purchaser, address of installation,
service organization, and date of installation. Certificates shall
be submitted for the each equipment and accessories showing
conformance with the referenced standards contained in this
Section.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: The following shall be submitted:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions
2. Vibration specifications.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections,

and dimensional requirements of pumps and are based on
specific manufacturer types and models selected. Other
manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics
may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a
testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective

coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for
handling.

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products

installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage,
and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. One set of manufacturer recommended spare parts for each type
and size of pump.

PART - PRODUCTS
STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such
products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5-years prior to
bid opening. The 5-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. The 5-years experience shall be satisfactorily
completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less
than a 5-year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations.

SEWAGE PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage,
centrifugal, end-suction sewage pump units complying with UL
778 or equivalent European or BS Standard. Include motor,
operating controls, and construction for permanent
installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
Pumps available only with flanged- end discharge pipe may be
furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Motor shall be manufacturer's standard construction
for the service and shall be permanently sealed, oil-filled, and
watertight. Motor space shall be fitted with watertight
expansion provisions to accommodate temperature normal to
specified duty. Motor seals shall remain watertight under any
pressure developed in the volute and under a sump-level static
head of not less than 9100 mm of water; Shop Drawings shall
so certify. Motors shall be single speed, with grease-lubricated
ball bearings, and non-overloading through full range of pump
performance curves. Power cord shall be of suitable length,
waterproof, internally grounded, oil-resistant, Type SO
chloroprene, with 3 prong plug.
E. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel, AISI Type 316.
F. Pump shaft shall be constructed of ground and polished AISI
Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel with hardened
wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations.
Hardened surfaces may be overlays of 500 Brinell Stellite, Wall
Colmonoy, or similar proprietary metals, or plasma-spray-
applied ceramic materials of not less than 900 Brinell hardness.
Mechanical properties and diameter of the shaft shall ensure
that whip, deflection, or vibration will not be of sufficient
magnitude to impose greater than design loads on the
specified shaft bearings under normal operating conditions.
Means shall be provided for external adjustment of the
clearance between the impeller and the inner surfaces of the
volute section.
G. Bearings and Lubrication: One or more antifriction ball- or
roller-bearings shall be furnished in the motor and bearing
 support housing above the cover-plate surface, with full
provision for the mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust
loads imposed. Bearings shall be sealed and grease-lubricated
and shall have an L-10 rating of not less than 200,000 hours.
Shop Drawings shall bear the manufacturer's certification of
bearing life. Bearings shall be manufactured from vacuum-
processed or degassed-alloy steels. Bearings shall be furnished
with grease and pressure-relief fittings at bottom or opposite
side the bearing where discharge may be viewed.
H. Intermediate shaft bearings shall be of the sleeve type. Center
distance between any 2 bearings on the shaft shall not exceed
1370 mm or 1520 mm for pumps operating at 1,200 rpm or
less. Sleeve-bearing length shall be not less than 2 times the
shaft diameter. A sleeve bearing located near the lower
extremity of the shaft shall be provided.
I. Flexible Couplings: Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor
shaft through a flexible coupling. Flexible member shall be a
tire shape or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape made of
chloroprene material and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible
coupling shall act as a dielectric connector, shall not transmit
vibration or end thrust, and shall permit up to 4-degree
misalignment under normal duty.
J. Support Pipe: A wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric
with the pump shaft shall connect the pump to the sump
coverplate. Support-pipe flanges shall be machined and
doweled to ensure proper alignment of the pump and shaft
whenever the pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the
field.
K. Liquid-Level Control: Simplex unit shall have a float mechanism
to provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the
liquid in the sump rises to a predetermined level. A means of
adjustment, such as float-rod stops, shall be provided to allow
for variation in the start and stop level-control points. Float
and stem shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant
steel, and all other parts of the fluid-level- sensing mechanism
below the coverplate shall be bronze, brass, or material of
equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of sewage.
 L. Liquid-Level Control: Duplex pump unit shall be furnished with
the electrical and mechanical devices required to provide
automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the
sump rises to a predetermined level. Controls shall
automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump to
the other and shall operate both pumps simultaneously
whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds the capacity of the
operating pump. A means of adjustment such as float-rod
stops shall be provided to allow for variations in the start and
stop level-control points. Float and rod shall be AISI Type 304
or 316 corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts of the fluid-
level sensing mechanism below the cover shall be bronze,
brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive
effects of sewage.
M. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested units before shipping.
N. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and
exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion
compound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with
screwed-in plugs.

WET-PIT-MOUNTED, VERTICAL SEWAGE PUMPS

A. Description: Vertical, separately coupled, suspended sewage

pump complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for wet- pit-volute sewage
pumps.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically
and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap
screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single
suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron;
statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog
design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
 6. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: Stainless-steel shaft with bronze
sleeve bearings. Include oil- lubricated, intermediate sleeve
bearings at 1200 mm maximum intervals if basin depth is greater
than 1200 mm, and grease-lubricated, ball-type thrust bearings.
7. Pump and Motor Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing
torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
8. Pump Discharge Piping: GRP.
9. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting
pumps, motors, and controls. Refer to "Sewage Pump Basins"
Article for other requirements.
10. Cover Shaft Seal: Stuffing box, with graphite-impregnated braided-
yarn rings and bronze packing gland.
11. Motor: Mounted vertically on cast-iron pedestal.
a) Thermal Overload Protection:Built into pump motors or starters, as
appropriate, according to size.
12. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529, pedestal-mounted float switch; with
floats, float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to
alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to
operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.
13. Float-Guide Pipe: Stainless Steel Guide pipe or other restraint for
floats and rods in basins of depth greater than 1500 mm.
14. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with
electric bell; 230 V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote
alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.

QUICK-DISCONNECT-SYSTEM, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS

A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump

complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sewage pumps.
Include quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron legs that elevate pump to permit
flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange arranged to
connect to quick-disconnect-system discharge-elbow fitting.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically
and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap
screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single
suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron;
statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog
design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
6. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless-steel, with factory-sealed, grease-
lubricated ball bearings.
7. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
8. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in
overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor
waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding plug
and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
9. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm,
and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing
assembly for connection at pump.
10. Pump Discharge Piping: GRP.
11. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting
controls. Refer to "Sewage Pump Basins" Article for other
requirements.
12. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
a) Guide Rails: 2 stainless-steel vertical pipes, attached to baseplate
and basin sidewall or cover.
b) Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor,
supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.
c) Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or
other attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d) Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e) Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that
mates to movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f) Lifting Chain: Stainless-steel type AISI 316 chain attached to pump
and basin cover at manhole.

13. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless

wall mounting is indicated; with 3 micropressure switches in IP67 to
IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include
automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
14. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with 3 mercury-float switches in IP67 to
IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include
automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
15. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float
switch; with floats, float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic
alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles
and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.
16. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in
basins of depth greater than 1500 mm.
17. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with
electric bell; 230 V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote
alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
18. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, IP67 to IEC 60529 enclosure with
micropressure-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
 battery operation is indicated.
19. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, IP67 to IEC 60529 enclosure with
mercury-float-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
battery operation is indicated.

STATIONARY, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS

A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump

complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sewage pumps.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron legs that elevate pump to permit
flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange arranged for
vertical discharge.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically
and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap
screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single
suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron;
statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog
design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
6. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless-steel, with factory-sealed, grease-
lubricated ball bearings.
7. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
8. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in
overload protection; and three- conductor waterproof power cable
of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly
for connection at pump.
9. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm,
and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing
assembly for connection at pump.
10. Pump Discharge Piping: GRP pipe.
11. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting
controls. Refer to "Sewage Pump Basins" Article for other
requirements.
12. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with 3 micropressure switches in IP67 to
IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include
automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
13. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with 3 mercury-float switches in IP67 to
IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include
 automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
14. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float
switch; with floats, float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic
alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles
and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.
15. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in
basins of depth greater than 1500 mm.
16. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with
electric bell; 230 V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote
alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
17. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, IP67 to IEC 60529 enclosure with
micropressure-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
battery operation is indicated.
18. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, IP67 to IEC 60529 enclosure with
mercury-float-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
battery operation is indicated.

SUBMERSIBLE, GRINDER SEWAGE PUMPS

A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump

complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sewage pumps.
Include quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Impeller: Bronze or stainless-steel impeller, with stainless-steel
grinder assembly.
3. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless-steel, with factory-sealed, grease-
lubricated ball bearings.
4. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
5. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in
overload protection; and three- conductor waterproof power cable
of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly
for connection at pump.
6. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm,
and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing
assembly for connection at pump.
7. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53,
Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
8. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting
controls. Refer to "Sewage Pump Basins" Article for other
requirements.
9. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
a) Guide Rails: 2 Stainless-steel vertical pipes, attached to baseplate
and basin sidewall or cover.
 b) Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor,
supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.
c) Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or
other attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d) Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e) Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that
mates to movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f) Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel grade SS316 cable attached to pump
and basin cover at manhole.
10. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with three mercury-float switches in
IP67 to IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables.
Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units
on successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
11. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, IP67 to IEC 60529 enclosure with
mercury-float-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
battery operation is indicated.

SUBMERSIBLE, CUTTER SEWAGE PUMPS

A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump

complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sewage pumps.
Include quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron legs that elevate pump to permit
flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange arranged to
connect to quick-disconnect-system discharge-elbow fitting.
3. Impeller: Bronze or stainless-steel impeller, with stainless-steel
cutter assembly.
4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless-steel, with factory-sealed, grease-
lubricated ball bearings.
5. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
6. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in
overload protection; and three- conductor waterproof power cable
of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly
for connection at pump.
7. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm,
and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing
assembly for connection at pump.
8. Pump Discharge Piping: GRP pipe.
9. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting
controls. Refer to "Sewage Pump Basins" Article for other
requirements.
10. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
a) Guide Rails: 2 Stainless-steel vertical pipes, attached to baseplate
 and basin sidewall or cover.
b) Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor,
supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.
c) Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or
other attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d) Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and
positioning device.
e) Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that
mates to movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f) Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel grade SS316 cable attached to pump
and basin cover at manhole.
11. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with 3 mercury-float switches in IP67 to
IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include
automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
12. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, IP67 to IEC 60529 enclosure with
mercury-float-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
battery operation is indicated.

SEWAGE PUMP, REVERSE-FLOW ATTACHMENT

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, reverse-flow pump attachment

for factory or field installation in sewage pump basin.
B. Inlet Fitting: 1 combination inlet-overflow strainer fitting.
C. Valves: 2 shutoff valves and 2 check valves.
D. Strainers: 2 strainer housings with reverse-flow, self-flushing
strainers.
E. Pipe and Fittings: Size and configuration required to connect to
sewage pumps and piping.

SEWAGE PUMP BASINS

A. Description: Factory fabricated with sump, pipe connections,

and separate cover.
B. Basin Sump: Fabricate watertight, with sidewall openings for
pipe connections.
1. Material: Fiberglass or cast iron.
2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, rail systems,
and accessories.
3. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with basin sump,
cast in or attached to sump, in location and of size required to
 anchor basin in concrete slab.
C. Basin Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and
bushings, for access, pumps, pump shafts, control rods,
discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.
2. Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement capable of supporting foot
traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate,

ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves. Use valves specified for
domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include features
and devices indicated.

PART- EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before pump
installation.
EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2

Section "Earthwork."

CONCRETE

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, for sewage pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."

INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance,
 including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sewage Pumps: Suspend pumps
from basin covers. Make direct connections to sanitary
drainage piping.
E. Submersible Sewage Pumps: Set pumps on basin floor. Make
direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.
1. Anchor quick-disconnect systems to bottom of basins and basin
sidewalls or covers. Install pumps so pump and discharge pipe
disconnecting flanges make positive seals when pumps are dropped
into place.
F. Sewage Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to drainage
and vent piping. Brace interior of basins according to
manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or
collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten
to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with
finished floor.
G. Packaged Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to
drainage and vent piping.

CONNECTIONS

A. Sanitary drainage and vent piping installation requirements are

specified in Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and
specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of
pump nozzles, and connect to sanitary drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam, swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each
sewage pump discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever
check valves for piping DN65 and larger.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and
connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.

ADJUSTING

A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop,

and alarm operation as required for system application.

COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive

maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of
rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate
pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined
and corrected.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not
exceeding safe motor power is as follows:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain sewage pump units. Refer to Division 1 Section
"[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.
 SECTION 25
WATER TUBE BOILERS

PART - GENERAL
SUMMARY

A. Related Documents:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this
Section.
2. Review these documents for coordination with additional
requirements and information that apply to work under this
Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Boilers.
2. Boiler trim.
3. Fuel burning equipment and connections.
4. Controls.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
2. Division 01 Section "Special Procedures."
3. Division 03 Section ["Concrete"] ["Cast-in-Place Concrete"].
4. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Specialties".
5. Division 23 Section "Steam and Condensate Specialties".
REFERENCES

A. General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the
extent stated. Where differences exist between codes and
standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the
current one at the time of commencement of the Work.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of
applicable regulatory requirements.
4. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Results for HVAC" for codes
and standards, and other general requirements.
B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
1. 10 CFR 430 Appendix N
2. 29 CFR 1910.7 Definitions and Requirements for a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)
C. State of California Code of Regulations (CCR):
1. CCR Title 8 Industrial Relations (Cal/OSHA): Ch 4. Division of
Industrial Safety (DIS):
a) SubCh 2. Boiler & Fired Pressure Vessel Safety Orders
b) SubCh 5. Electrical Safety Orders

D. Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD)

E. American Gas Association (AGA):
1. AGA Directory of Certified Appliances and Accessories
2. AGA Z21.13 Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water
Boilers
F. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. ASME BPVC Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Construction Sec I of
Power Boilers
2. ASME BPVC Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Construction Sec IV of
Heating Boilers
3. ASME BPVC Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Construction Sec VIII
of Pressure Vessels
G. Hydronics Institute (HI):
1. HI Testing and Rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating
Boilers
H. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI)
I. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
(NBBPVI):
1. NBBPVI 23 National Board Inspection Code
J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt
Maximum)
 K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code
2. NFPA 58 Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases
3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
L. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL Gas and Oil Equipment
Directory

SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 23 Section "Common

Results for HVAC, Review of Materials and Division 01 Section
"General Requirements."
B. Test Data:
1. Factory inspection and test reports as specified in subpart 2.14,
‘Source Quality Control.’
2. Field test report as specified in subpart 3.02, ‘Field Quality Control.’
C. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned and detailed drawings, including
control wiring diagrams complete and specific for each boiler
supplied.
D. Product Data: Include descriptive data, specifications, ratings,
performance data, installation instructions, and start-up
instructions.
E. Operations and Maintenance Data:
1. Initial Submittal: Operating instructions, maintenance instructions,
and parts list.
2. Closeout: Complete manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ASME [Sec I] [Sec IV] [and] [Sec VIII,] NFPA 54, and
AGA Z21.13 for boiler fabrication.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 code for internal wiring of factory wired
equipment.
C. Comply with CCR title 8, Ch 4, SubCh 2 safety regulations.
D. Units shall be approved and labeled by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL) recognized under 29 CFR 1910.7.
E. Provide factory tests to check construction, controls, and
operation of unit. [Test shall be witnessed by the University [at
Subcontractor's expense].]
 F. Provide authorized boiler inspection prior to shipment, and
submit copy of inspection report to the University.
G. Guarantee boilers less than 300,000 Btuh (88 kW) to operate at
a minimum seasonal efficiency of [80 percent AFUE for hot
water units] [75 percent AFUE for steam units].
H. Guarantee boilers greater than 300,000 Btuh (88 kW) to have a
maximum and minimum rated combustion efficiency of 85
percent for gas fired boilers.
I. Air Quality: Boiler and burner installation shall conform to and
comply with Bay Area Air Quality Management District
(BAAQMD) requirements for stack emission. Boiler stack
emissions shall be limited to [ ]ppm CO and [ ]ppm NOx.
J. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum
efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum
Efficiency Requirements."

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE

A. Protect boilers from damage by leaving factory inspection

openings and shipping packaging in place until final installation.

MAINTENANCE

A. Provide wire brush and [one piece] [hinged] handle for tube
cleaning.
PART - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Bryant, Cleaver Brooks, Kewanee

B. No substitutions

MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Performance rating shall be in accordance with HI, ‘Testing and

Rating Standard for Cast Iron and Steel Heating Boilers.’
B. Provide [ ] boilers for producing [steam] [hot water], each with
gross input of [ ] Btu/hr ( W), gross output of [ ] Btu/hr ( W) at
 [ psi ( kPa)] working pressure at [sea level] [ -foot ( -m)
elevation].
1. Minimum Efficiency AFUE: percent.
2. Minimum Thermal Efficiency: percent.
3. Minimum Combustion Efficiency: percent.
C. Provide factory-assembled, factory fire-tested, self-contained,
readily transported unit ready for automatic operation except
for connection of [water,] [steam,] fuel, electrical, and vent
services.
D. Mount on integral structural-steel frame base and provide
integral forced-draft burner, burner controls, boiler trim,
refractory, insulation, and jacket.
E. Provide at least 5 sq ft (1.5 m2) of fireside heating surface for
each rated boiler horsepower.
F. Water entering hot water boiler shall be thoroughly mixed with
hot boiler-water through jet-induced circulation.
G. Electrical Characteristics:
1. [ ] rated load amperes.
2. [ ] V, [single] [three] phase, 60 Hz.

BOILER SHELL

A. Construct to applicable ASME BPVC for allowable working

pressure of [[30 psi (210 kPa)] [60 psi (415 kPa)] [125 psi (865
kPa)] [140 psi (kPa)] [200 psi (1 380 kPa)] [400 psi ( kPa)] [860
psi (kPa)] [970 psi ( kPa)] gauge water.] [15 psi (105 kPa)]
[150 psi (1 035)] gauge steam.]
B. Construct of welded steel boiler plate with adequately sized
water legs and tube headers, providing thermal internal water
circulation without an external circulation source.
C. Tubes: Seamless water tubes, minimum 13-gauge (2-mm)
steel, inclined tube design for straight tube boiler, or seamless
water tubes, minimum 12-gauge (2.5-mm) steel, six pass
serpentine bend design not subject to thermal shock for
flexible-tube boiler. Individual tubes shall be easily removed
 and replaced, without either welding or rolling, and without
entry into combustion chamber or major disassembly of the
jacket. Boiler shall not have less than 5 sq ft (1.5 m2) of heating
surface per boiler horsepower.
D. Provide two lifting eyes on top of boiler.
E. Provide adequate tappings, observation ports, removable
panels, and access doors for entry, cleaning, and inspection.
F. Insulate casing with readily removable 2-inch (50-mm) thick
glass-fiber blanket insulation covered by sectional, preformed
minimum 18 gauge (1.2 mm) sheet-metal jacket. Boiler casing
temperature shall not exceed ambient boiler-room
temperature by more than 18°F (Ð10°C) with surface air
velocity of 1 ft/sec (0.304 m/sec).
G. Factory-paint boiler, base, and other components with hard-
finish silicone enamel.

STEAM BOILER TRIM

A. Provide steam pressure gauge 0 to 30 psi (0 to 210 kPa) gauge

with cock and test connection and ASME-rated pressure-relief
valve [15 psi (105 kPa)] [150 psi (1 035 kPa)] [200 psi (1 380
kPa)] [ psi (kPa)] gauge.
B. Water Column:
1. Provide water column with cocks, gauge-glass set, and blowdown
valves for gauge glass and column.
2. Provide low-water cutoff with automatic reset integral with water
column to prevent burner operation automatically whenever boiler
water falls below safe level. Provide a probe-type auxiliary low-
water safety cutoff, manual reset type.
3. Provide boiler feedwater condensate return pump control, integral
with water column to maintain water level automatically by
controlling pump operation. Provide control range of at least [
inches ( mm)] [ gallons (L)].
C. Steam Pressure Controls:
1. Provide operating-pressure controller for burner to maintain steam
pressure setting.
2. Provide high-limit-pressure controller with manual reset for burner
to prevent steam pressure from exceeding safe system pressure.
D. Provide automatic conductivity blowdown control and direct
chemical feed system to boiler and condensate tank.
HOT WATER BOILER TRIM

A. Provide combination water pressure and temperature gauge,

and ASME-rated pressure-relief valves [30 psi (210 kPa)] [40 psi
(275 kPa)] [50 psi (345 kPa)] [80 psi (550 kPa)] [100 psi (690
kPa)] [psi (kPa)] gauge.
B. Provide low-water cutoff with automatic reset integral with
water column to prevent burner operation automatically when
boiler water falls below safe level. Provide a probe-type
auxiliary low-water cutoff, manual reset type.
C. Temperature Controls:
1. Auto reset type shall control burner ON-OFF and burner firing rate
to maintain boiler water temperature.
2. Manual reset type shall control burner to prevent boiler water
temperature from exceeding safe system water temperature.
D. Provide fixed-setting type pressure control to ensure minimum
operating pressure.
E. Provide air-vent tapping in boiler shell.

FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT AND OPERATING AND SAFETY CONTROLS FOR

BOILERS WITH GROSS RATING OF 40 HORSEPOWER (30 kW) AND OVER

A. General:
1. Forced-draft automatic burner integral with front head of boiler,
designed to burn natural gas and propane. Burner operation shall
be [ON-OFF] [HI-LOW] modulating with low-fire ignition position.
Maintain fuel-air ratios automatically with flue-gas temperature at
least 68°F (20°C) above dew-point temperature of flue gases at
boiler outlet.
2. The boiler burner equipment, operating controls, and safety
controls shall be designed to the recommendations of NFPA [54]
[58] and the Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI) for automatic gas- fired
boilers, with the following exception: a normally open vent-line
solenoid valve shall be provided between dual safety shutoff valves
on gas pilots regardless of Btu/hr (W) rating.
B. Equipment and Controls:
1. The fuel burning equipment shall be designed, set, and adjusted at
the factory to burn approximately 1050 Btu/cu ft (308 W/m3)
natural gas having a specific gravity of 0.63, or propane-air mixed
gas of the same burning characteristics. The propane-air mixed gas
will be used as a standby gas.
2. Provide forced-draft, high-radiant annular entry, premix flame
retention power burner with electric ignition with gas-electric
 ignition and gas pressure regulator.
3. All combustion air shall be furnished by the burner blower, which
shall be an integral part of the burner.
a) The gas burner shall burn the specified quantity of fuel without
objectionable vibration, noise, or pulsation, with not more than 15
percent excess air and no more than [ ] ppm ( mg/kg) NOx and [ ]
ppm (mg/kg) CO in the products if combustion with minimal volatile
organic compound (VOC) emissions commensurate with the best
available control technology (BACT).
4. The combustion head shall be designed to maximize the
stoichiometry of the fuel-air mixture while significantly reducing the
thermal NOx levels.
5. Primary-secondary air control shall be a design function of the
combustion head. Combustion heads requiring an external
adjustment will not be accepted.
6. Equip the burners with a cast or heavy steel blower housing with
integral fan scroll.
7. Provide a permanent observation port in the burner to allow
observation of both the pilot and the main flame.

C. The burning equipment shall be able to handle either gas

without changing orifices or making adjustments. Unit
efficiency, based on the gas analysis, shall not be less than 80
percent.
D. The burner shall be of the multiple-jet or annular-port flame-
retention type, and shall use an interrupted, spark-ignited
proved gas pilot. The gas-pilot assembly shall include a pilot
burner, a spark-ignition assembly and minimum 6,000-V
ignition transformer. The primary/secondary air shutters shall
be adjustable.
E. The forced-draft fan shall be a centrifugal type with electric-
motor drive, [direct] [V-belt]. The fan shall be dynamically
balanced. Motors less than 1/2 hp (0.37 kW) shall be high-
efficiency, 115 V, 60 Hz, single-phase, and larger motors shall
be [208 V] [460 V], 60 Hz, high-efficiency three-phase.
F. The fan damper and the butterfly valve shall be actuated by a
modulating control motor through mechanical linkages with
adjustable limits to provide turndown ratios or full modulation
as specified of the burner in response to firing demand from
the temperature controller.
OPERATING AND SAFETY CONTROLS

A. In addition to the control components shown in the ‘Gas Train’

subpart of this section, the following operating and safety
controls shall be provided:
1. Operating water temperature controller, adjustable differential,
100-240°F (38-116°C), Honeywell ‘L4006A’ or ‘L4008A’ (remote
bulb), , or equal. Operates two safety shutoff valves.
2. Proportional temperature controller, liquid-filled remote bulb, 100-
240°F (38-116°C), Honeywell ‘90,’ ‘T991A,’ , or equal.
Operates proportioning control motor and butterfly valve.
3. Proportional-control motor shall operate fan damper and butterfly
control valve through mechanical linkages, Honeywell ‘M941C,’
Modutrol motor, or equal, including auxiliary switch to provide low-
fire-start interlock.
4. High-limit temperature controller, 110-290°F (43-143°C), Honeywell
‘L4006E,’ , or equal, lockout on temperature, rise, manual reset,
120 V, 60 Hz, with thermal well. Shuts burner down on high water
temperature. Manual reset to restart. (On steam boilers: high-
pressure switch Honeywell ‘L404C,’ , or equal.)
5. Low-water cutoff, McDonnell-Miller ‘150,’ , or equal. Shuts
burner down on low water and restarts automatically when water
level is restored. Will be mounted in piping above the boiler by
others. Contacts shall be provided for alarming and to shut burner
down.
6. Low-water safety cutoff with manual reset, electrode-probe type,
NRTL listed and approved, Hydrolevel Corp. ‘OEM-170MC,’
Honeywell ‘RW700B,’ or equal. Shuts burner down immediately on
low water and provides alarm. Manual reset required to restart.
Mount on boiler or piping above the lowest permissible water level.
7. Running-airflow pressure switch shall sense pressure or flow on fan
discharge downstream of fan damper. Safety lockout shall occur
when the switch opens; Dwyer ‘1823,’ Honeywell ‘C645C,’ or equal.
8. Repurge-airflow switch shall measure differential pressure between
fan discharge downstream of damper and stack. Purge-airflow
interlock shall sense at least 60 percent of maximum airflow for
purge cycle to continue; Dwyer ‘1823,’ Honeywell ‘C645C,’ or equal.
In lieu of a differential-pressure switch, a fan-damper position
switch may be used to prove that fan damper is in high-fire
position. Auxiliary switch on control motor is not an acceptable
method.
9. Hot-water-pump running interlock shall shut boiler down when
pump is not operating. Wiring will be installed in field by others.
10. All mercury-bulb snap-action switches shall be mounted on
vibration-free supports. The low- gas-pressure switch and the
running-airflow pressure switch shall be connected with union or
flare-out pressure fittings.
11. The following items shall be provided and installed on boilers at the
factory:
 a) Pressure relief valve sized, set, and stamped in accordance with
ASME BPVC and the State of California Boiler Safety Orders (CCR
title 8, Ch 4, SubCh 2)
b) Combination temperature and pressure gauge, dial type, or
separate temperature and pressure gauges shall be provided
c) Flue-gas temperature gauge

FLAME MONITOR PROGRAMMING CONTROL

A. Requirements: The flame monitor programming control shall

be Honeywell ‘7800 series,’ , or equal, to supervise pilot and
main flame. An infrared amplifier shall be used. The control
system shall be designed to specifically conform to and comply
with IRI requirements for automatic gas burners, and shall be
NRTL listed. The control shall provide the following functions:
1. General Functions:
a) The control shall accomplish a safe-start component check during
each start, which will prevent the burner from firing under
conditions that cause the flame relay to assume and hold its
energized position due to the presence of an actual flame, a flame-
simulating component failure, or a mechanical failure.
b) A circuit shall be provided for a valve-position interlock that proves
the automatic safety shutoff valve is closed prior to start-up. Boiler
start-up program shall not proceed to ignition unless valve is proved
to be closed.
c) A purge period of at least 30 seconds, with the damper driven to
the open position, and with an interlock circuit to prove airflow rate
during the purge period. A starting interlock circuit is required to
prove that the burner equipment is in the low-fire position at the
start of the cycle and at time of ignition, plus an interlock to prove
airflow during the purge and firing cycle.
d) A pilot-establishing period of not more than 10 seconds.
e) Limited trial-for-ignition of main flame, restricted to not more than
10 seconds for gas. Safety shutdown following flame failure, with
fuel and ignition circuits de-energized in 3 seconds nominal.
f) A post-purge period of 15 seconds following a shutdown.
g) The control system shall recycle automatically under control of the
operating control and when power is restored following power
failure.
h) An interlock circuit shall be provided for the running-airflow switch,
low-gas-pressure switch, high-gas-pressure switch, and/orsother
switch, that must be closed during the prepurge and firing cycles. A
safety lockout shall occur if this interlock circuit opens during an
operating cycle.
i) The control shall permit discreet connection of the operating
temperature controller, safety limit switches (high temperature,
two low water cutoffs, high gas temperature and low gas pressure),
 starting interlocks, running-airflow switch, modulator switching
circuits, and lockout alarm.
2. Mechanical and Electrical Function:
a) The control system shall be designed for 120-V operation with one
side grounded. Switching shall be accomplished in the hot circuit.
b) The program timing shall be accomplished by a self-checking
microprocessor, The timing periods shall not vary more than 5
percent through an ambient temperature range of +32 to +125°F
(0.0 to +52C), and through a supply voltage range of plus 10
percent or minus 15 percent of nominal line voltage.
c) The flame monitor control shall incorporate a latch circuit that
prevents the fuel valve from becoming re-energized following a
safety shutdown, until a lockout has occurred and a manual reset
has initiated a complete restart.
d) Test jacks shall be provided for direct connection of a flame-signal
meter.
e) The control chassis shall be of plug-in design to facilitate
replacement without disconnecting external wiring.
3. Flame Detection Functions:
a) The pilot and main flames shall be monitored by an infrared-
sensitive scanner that cannot be actuated by hot refractory.
b) The scanner shall mount on and sight through a 1/2- or 3/4-inch
(13- or 19-mm) standard pipe.
c) The scanner shall be suitable for operation over an ambient
operating temperature range of 0 to 125°F (Ð18 to +52°C), as
measured on the mounting hub.
d) The control shall be designed to cause the flame relay to drop out
or stay out if a component in the electronic circuit, susceptible to
shorting or openings, fails.

BOILER CONTROL PANEL

A. The boiler control panel shall be mounted on the wall adjacent

to the boiler. Independent mounting is required to avoid
vibrations that may be generated by the boiler. Maintain
required NEC clearance in front of panel. Panel shall have
provisions to padlock controls in the OFF position to protect
service personnel.
B. All wiring in the panel, and on the controls external to the
panel, shall be factory installed and tested and shall conform to
and comply with the State of California Electrical Safety Orders
(CCR title 8, Ch 4, SubCh 5). The control panel shall be listed by
an NRTL for industrial flame control panels and shall bear the
label of an NRTL to identify it as such.
C. The control cabinet shall contain the flame monitor and
 programming control, a magnetic motor starter with thermal
overloads for the fan, a stepdown transformer (if necessary) to
provide 120 V, 60 Hz, single-phase power for the control
components, a burner ON-OFF switch, control-circuit breaker,
numbered terminal strips, color-coded wiring, engraved
nameplates, reset push button, and necessary relays and
switches.
D. On boilers over 40 hp (30 kW) gross capacity, a manual set-
point potentiometer shall be provided for manual operation of
the proportioning-control motor. In addition, indicating lights
shall be installed on the control panel for Control Power ON,
Burner ON, and Flame Failure. An indicating meter shall be
provided to monitor the flame signal of the flame-monitor
control.
E. Provide direct digital control (DDC) interface hardware to allow
remote access for monitoring and controlling the boiler.

ALARM SYSTEM

A. An alarm system shall be provided. The alarm panel shall be

incorporated in the boiler-control panel.
B. All wiring in the alarm panel and on the controls external to
the panel shall be factory installed and tested, except for
interconnecting wiring between the packaged boiler unit and a
remotely mounted alarm panel. Wiring shall conform to and
comply with the State of California Electrical Safety Orders
(CCR title 8, Ch 4, Subch 5).
C. The first off-limit conditions shall be incorporated in the ‘first-
out’ alarm panel:
1. Pilot-flame failure (manual reset on flame-monitor controller)
2. Flame failure (manual reset on flame-monitor controller)
3. Low water level (automatic reset when low water condition is
corrected)
4. High water (automatic reset) for steam
5. High temperature (manual reset on high-limit temperature
controller) for HHW
6. High pressure (manual reset on high-steam pressure controller) for
steam
7. Automatic safety shutoff valve not closed prior to start-up
8. Low-low water (manual reset on water level control)
 9. High gas pressure (manual reset on high-gas-pressure switch)
10. Low gas pressure (manual reset on low-gas-pressure switch)
11. Low combustion airflow
D. Alarm lights shall be provided on the alarm panel to indicate
each off-limit condition. An audible alarm shall be included on
the panel. An alarm test circuit shall be provided. The ‘first-out’
alarm indicator shall be Fireye ‘53SE2,’ or equal (no known
equal).
E. The alarm system shall be designed to send one alarm signal to
[the central building alarm station] [the central plant
mechanical alarm station].

EMISSION CONTROL

A. The recirculation system shall be used when boiler CO and NOx

emissions must be reduced to meet [Bay Area Air Quality
Management District (BAAQMD)] [San Joaquin Unified Air
Pollution Control District (SJUAPCD)] air quality standards.
B. Flue Gas Treatment System: Provide a flue gas treatment
system to reduce the NOx emission below [ ] ppm ([ ] mg/kg)
corrected to 3 percent oxygen including required components
and controls, commensurate with the BACT.

FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT AND OPERATING AND SAFETY CONTROLS FOR

BOILERS WITH GROSS RATING OF LESS THAN 40 HORSEPOWER (30 kW)

A. The fuel burning equipment shall be the same as that specified

for larger boilers elsewhere in part 2 of this document, except
operation shall be ON-OFF rather than modulating.
B. The boiler gas train shall be same as that specified for larger
boilers, except the butterfly control valve is not required. Two-
stage firing with low-fire start and low and high-fire run shall
be employed except where the furnace heat release rate is less
than 50,000 Btu/cu ft ( W/m3). For two-stage firing, the
motorized safety shutoff valve (MSSOV) shall be Honeywell
‘V5055B’ valve body with ‘V4062’ actuator; ITT General
Controls ‘V710’ valve body with ‘AH4’ actuator with two-stage
control, 120 V, 60 Hz, or equal. Valve opening time shall be 15
 seconds (maximum) on the first stage.
C. The operating and safety controls shall be the same as that
specified for larger boilers, except two- position temperature
controller and two-position damper motor are required.
D. The flame monitor and programming control shall be the same
as that specified for larger boilers, except the system shall be
wired for ON-OFF control.
E. The boiler control panel shall be same as that specified for
larger boilers.
F. The alarm shall be same as that specified for larger boilers.

PART - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION

A. Install boiler on concrete housekeeping base, sized minimum 4

inches (100 mm) larger than boiler base. Refer to Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
B. Maintain minimum of 36-inch (915-mm) clearance around
boiler.
C. Complete structural, mechanical, and electrical connections in
accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain.

TESTING AND PREPARATION

A. Boilers shall be fire tested at the factory.

B. Provide services of factory representative of boiler-burner
manufacturer to:
1. Supervise installation of burners and controls.
2. Start up and adjust burners and controls.
3. Test individual burner controls for proper operation.
4. Test safety controls for proper operation.
5. Set burner firing rates for specified conditions.
6. Adjust burners for optimum fuel-air ratio over entire operating
range.
7. Test boiler safety (or relief) valves.
8. Test combustion efficiency over full operating range using Interact
2000, Baccarac Electronic Meter, or equal, and provide University
with test results.
9. Test for NOx emissions.
 10. Test for gas leaks.
C. The University will witness all of the above tests [at
Subcontractor’s expense]. Provide a minimum of five working
days notice prior to the tests.
D. Submit written report by boiler-burner manufacturer
confirming that safety and operating controls and burners have
been properly installed, calibrated and adjusted, and certify
that current BAAQMD air pollution control standards are being
met.

CLEANING AND FLUSHING

A. After the boiler has been installed, the Subcontractor shall boil
out the boiler and the entire piping system at low pressure for
a period of not less than 8 hours by recirculating a solution
consisting of 4 lb (2 kg) trisodium phosphate for each 1000 lb
(454 kg) of water contained in the system. After boiling out,
the boiler and system shall be drained and thoroughly flushed
and immediately refilled with clean water and drained again.
Finally, refill immediately to normal operating level with clean,
chemically treated soft water, approved by University
Representative, before placing into service.

SCHEDULES

A. Provide a schedule when several boilers of different sizes are

to be specified. Complete, following identification method
used on the drawings. This schedule contains no units of
measurement. These may be added to the schedule legend or
included within each insert.
 SECTION 26
THERMAL SOLAR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Prequalification for Design Build Contractors

A. The proposed manufacturer(s) must hold a quality system

certificate such as ISO, Key Mark or equivalent, for his
manufacturing assembly process and quality control.
B. Performance and quality test EN12975, (Test institution:
Institut für Solartechnik SPF or Fraunhofer Institute ISE or
equivalent).
C. Certified solar glass U1 nGL > 0.900 (Institut für Solartechnik
SPF or Fraunhofer Institute ISE or equivalent).
D. Certified and solar approved insulation. Produced without any
gas-emitting binding agent (Institut für Solartechnik SPF or
equivalent) High temperature, humidity and UV resistant
E. Certified chromium steel compensator connection (Institut für
Solartechnik SPF or equivalent) with easy-install connectors
F. The flat plate collectors should have a life expectancy of 20
years as per German VDI 2067 Blatt 1 / Part 1.
G. Storage Cylinders with electric heaters should have a life
expectancy of 15 years as per German VDI 2067 Blatt 1 / Part 1.
H. All the main equipment such as Flat plate collectors, Storage
Cylinders, Control system should be manufactured by same
manufacturer and certification from the country of origin
needs to produced.
I. The Supplier of the equipment must be a subsidiary of the
manufacturer in the country.
J. Warranty period for the solar panels, cylinders, and pumps
shall be 2 years from the date of delivery.
K. The Supplier must be capable of providing and supporting any
maintenance activities associated with the equipment by
trained personnel.
 L. The Supplier must carry a stock of critical parts in the event of
breakdown and must be able to supply consumables under any
planned maintenance schedules within a maximum agreed
time.
M. The Supplier must be able to provide training to any
nominated third party operators using the equipment.
N. The solar simulation, which is done with the Valentin T-Sol
software to be submitted as a part of the submittal.
O. Origin: The country of origin of the solar panels, cylinders, and
control systems should be of European origin.
Solar System Design Criteria:

A. Daily hot water consumption liters / day at 60 °C

temperature
B. Water incoming temperature at Winter (February) 15 °C at
Summer (August) 28°C
C. 100% Backup for the Solar to be provided with boiler or
electric heaters
D. Domestic hot water Solar fraction should be not less than 75%
E. Fractional energy savings as per EN 12976 should not be less
than 75%
F. Total System efficiency should not be less than 50%
G. The above mentioned figures for Hot water consumption are
only indicative therefore Supplier must carryout own
evaluation and design for the required system performance for
the project.

Specifications for Solar Panels – Vitosol 200 F

A. Solar panels to be horizontal type with Absorber area of 2.30

m2 & Gross area of 2.53 m2
B. Flat plate collectors are with a high efficient Sol-Titanium
coating. High efficiency through a highly selective coated
absorber, internal piping and extremely effective insulation.
Alu Frame is eloxal coated for high resistance against seawater.
Flat plate Collectors to ensures high absorption of solar
radiation and low emission of thermal radiation.
 C. A copper pipe through which the heat transfer medium flows is
fitted to the absorber.
D. The heat transfer medium channels the absorber heat through
the copper pipe. The absorber is encased in a highly insulated
collector housing, which minimizes collector heat losses. The
high quality thermal insulation provides temperature stability
and is free from gas emissions. Collector piping is laser welded.
E. Maximum height of the collector and support system from roof
level must be below 85 cms.

Specifications – Solar panel

Type: Vitosol
200F
Gross area (sq.m): 2.53
Absorber surface area (sq.m): 2.30
Aperture area (sq.m): 2.32
Dimensions:
Width mm 2385
Height mm 1061
Depth mm 90
Optical efficiency* %: 81
Thermal loss value k1* (W/m2.K): 3.48
k2* (W/m2.K2): 0.0164
Thermal capacity kJ/(m2.K): 6.4
Weight (kg): 45
Liquid content (liters): 2.48
Permissible operating pressure** (bar) 6
Max. Idle temp*** (C) 211
Connection (mm) 22
* Relative to the absorber surface area
** The collector must be pressurised in cold, sealed system with at least 1.5 bar
*** The idle temperature is that temperature occurs at the hottest part of the
collector at 1000W global radiation strength if no heat is drawn off.

Solar – Divicon
To simplify the installation and selection of the pumps and safety equipment, the
equipment supplier have to supply the Solar- Divicon. The Solar – Divicon comprises

A. Pre assembled and sealed valves and safety assembly,

B. Flow regulating valve to control the solar heating system
during commissioning and operation,
C. Integral check valves.

Heat Exchanger Cylinders – Vitocell V 100

Type: Vertical storage type, factory assembled.

Cylinders should be 1000 liters x 4 nos = 4000 liters storage cylinders with integrated
coil for the heat transfer for the entire water contents in the cylinder and for the
backup for solar 6KW electric heater to be provided for each cylinder 6 KW x 4
cylinders.

Storage Section:

A. Corrosion-resistant cylinder made from steel with Ceraprotect

enamel coating. The ceraprotect enamel coating should be
with sacrificial anode to protect against corrosion.
B. Soft PUR foam thermal insulation, colour of plastic coated
thermal insulation: Vito silver.
C. Cylinders to be glass lined if the capacity is upto 1000 liters and
for the cylinders above 1000 liters the cylinders should be
stainless steel.
D. Additional cathodic protection via a external currency anode to
be provided with LED display.
 E. Low thermal losses through high grade all round CFC free
thermal insulation.
F. The permissible operating pressure of the cylinder should be
not less than 10 bars.
G. The cylinders should be 4nos x 1000 liters, since in case of any
rectification in the cylinders, one cylinder can be easily
changed without affecting the working of the other cylinders.
H. The cylinders should be capable for a maximum operating
temperature of 95 °C.
I. The cylinder shall be provided with drain, inspection & cleaning
aperture.
J. The cylinders should be designed such that if it is required it
can be connected to the solar equipment in the future without
any modification.

Certification: The cylinders should be manufactured in accordance and comply with

the following standards DIN 4753 AD codes of practice. The manufacturer should
have CE 0036 and TUV certificates.

In-direct heating / cooling: In-direct heating / cooling through hot water or chilled
water with integrated coil right down to the cylinder floor to heat the entire water
contents.

Solar Control Unit – Vitosolic 200

Vitosolic 200 offers terminals for the connection of a mains power supply, solar
circuit pump, circulation pump for heating up the pre-heat stage, switched output for
suppressing reheating by the boiler or thermal function.

Vitosolic 200 starts the solar circuit pump for DHW as soon as the set differential
temperature has been reached.

The temperature inside the DHW cylinder will be limited by the electronic
temperature limiter in Vitosolic
200. This device switches the solar circuit pump off when the set temperature is
exceeded.
An energy statement can be created by measuring the temperature differential and
entering the volume flow.

Display of the hours run by the solar circuit pump.

Certified control for circulation pump, collectors and DHW Cylinder from
manufacturer with temperature difference control. Optimized for high solar
performance.
Interface with building automation system and connection to the boiler backup
cascade controller. Data logging can be added to the solar controller

Air separator
For installation in the flow pipe of the solar circuit, preferably upstream of the inlet
to the DHW cylinder. With automatic air-vent valve, shut-off valve and locking ring
connection.

Quick acting air-vent valve

For installation at the highest point of the system. With shut-off valve and locking
ring connection.

Filling valve
For flushing, filling and draining the system. With locking ring connection.

Pumps, Fittings
Certified high quality with temperature resistance for solar circuit. Copper or black
steel piping for temperature upto 120 °C

Piping, Insulation, Valves

For solar circuit the piping should be copper or black steel piping for temperature
upto 120 °C

For Hygienic water circuit, hygienic copper or plastic piping for maximum
temperature maximum 90 °C

Copper pipes with high temperature and fluid resistant connections or equivalent
Insulation material, CFC-free and PVC-free (ozone depletion potential of zero)

SECTION 27
SUMP PUMPS

PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sump pumps for the building storm

drainage systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for sump pump motors.

PUMP SELECTION

A. Where parallel pump operation is indicated, pumps shall be

 selected with characteristics specifically suited for the service
without unstable operation.
B. Pumps shall be selected for service within 4 percent of
maximum efficiency for a given casing and impeller series.
C. Pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the
published maximum diameter of the casing or less than 15
percent larger than the published minimum diameter of the
casing will be rejected.
D. Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated. A pump unit shall
deliver, at rated speed, not less than the specified flow against
the specified or indicated discharge head while the liquid level
is not more than 300 mm above the datum elevation of the
pump. Datum elevation shall be taken as the level of the
entrance eye of the impeller.
E. Discharge head, specified or indicated, shall include the friction
head of the system piping external to the pump unit and the
static head measured from a point of reference on the sump to
the highest point in the system.
F. Ratings shall be based on pumping clear, fresh water at a
temperature of 50 deg. C (122 deg. F).
SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer catalog shall show:

1. Performance data including performance curves and indicating
brake horsepower, head, flow and NPSH.
2. Equipment foundation data.
3. Furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of
pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps.
Include setting drawings with templates, directions for
installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
The following shall be submitted:
1. Connection Diagrams: Connection diagrams shall show details of
connection of cables and pump motors.
2. Control Diagrams: Control diagrams shall show motor starters,
relays, or any other component necessary for safe operation.
3. Fabrication Drawings: Fabrication drawings shall indicate size, type,
and efficiency rating.
4. Installation Drawings: Installation drawings shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommended instructions.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Wiring diagrams shall show detail wiring for
 power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Test Reports: Test reports shall be submitted for the following
tests :
1. Hydrostatic leak.
2. Static heads.
3. Pump flow capacity.
D. Certificates: Listing of product installations for similar items
shall identify at least 5 installed units similar to those proposed
for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of
5 years. List shall include purchaser, address of installation,
service organization, and date of installation. Certificates shall
be submitted for the each equipment and accessories showing
conformance with the referenced standards contained in this
Section.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: The following shall be submitted :
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Vibration specifications.
F. Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections,

and dimensional requirements of pumps and are based on
specific manufacturer types and models selected. Other
manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics
may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a
testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective

coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
 C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for
handling.

EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products

installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage,
and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. One set of manufacturer recommended spare parts for each type
and size of pump.

PART - PRODUCTS
STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such
products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5-years prior to
bid opening. The 5-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. The 5-years experience shall be satisfactorily
completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less
than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations.

SUMP PUMPS, GENERAL

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage,

centrifugal, end-suction sump pump units. Include motor,
operating controls, and construction for permanent
installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 and Smaller: Threaded.
Pumps available only with flanged- end discharge pipe may be
furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and
non-overloading through full range of pump performance
curves.
E. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be AISI Type 316.
F. Pump shaft shall be constructed of ground and polished AISI
Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel with hardened
wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations.
Hardened surfaces may be overlays of 500 Brinell Stellite, Wall
Colmonoy, or similar proprietary metals, or plasma-spray-
applied ceramic materials of not less than 900 Brinell hardness.
Mechanical properties and diameter of the shaft shall ensure
that whip, deflection, or vibration will not be of sufficient
magnitude to impose greater than design loads on the
specified shaft bearings under normal operating conditions.
Means shall be provided for external adjustment of the
clearance between the impeller and the inner surfaces of the
volute section.
G. Bearings and Lubrication: One or more antifriction ball- or
roller-bearings shall be furnished in the motor and bearing
support housing above the cover-plate surface, with full
provision for the mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust
loads imposed. Bearings shall be sealed and grease-lubricated
and shall have an L-10 rating of not less than 200,000 hours.
Shop Drawings shall bear the manufacturer's certification of
bearing life. Bearings shall be manufactured from vacuum-
processed or degassed-alloy steels. Bearings shall be furnished
with grease and pressure-relief fittings at bottom or opposite
side the bearing where discharge may be viewed.
H. Intermediate shaft bearings shall be of the sleeve type. Center
distance between any 2 bearings on the shaft shall not exceed
1370 mm or 1520 mm for pumps operating at 1,200 rpm or
less. Sleeve-bearing length shall be not less than 2 times the
shaft diameter. A sleeve bearing located near the lower
 extremity of the shaft shall be provided.
I. Flexible Couplings: Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor
shaft through a flexible coupling. Flexible member shall be a
tire shape or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape made of
chloroprene material and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible
coupling shall act as a dielectric connector, shall not transmit
vibration or end thrust, and shall permit up to 4-degree
misalignment under normal duty.
J. Support Pipe: A wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric
with the pump shaft shall connect the pump to the sump
coverplate. Support-pipe flanges shall be machined and
doweled to ensure proper alignment of the pump and shaft
whenever the pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the
field.
K. Liquid-Level Control: Simplex unit shall have a float mechanism
to provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the
liquid in the sump rises to a predetermined level. A means of
adjustment, such as float-rod stops, shall be provided to allow
for variation in the start and stop level-control points. Float
and stem shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant
steel, and all other parts of the fluid-level- sensing mechanism
below the coverplate shall be bronze, brass, or material of
equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of sewage.
L. Liquid-Level Control: Duplex pump unit shall be furnished with
the electrical and mechanical devices required to provide
automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the
sump rises to a predetermined level. Controls shall
automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump to
the other and shall operate both pumps simultaneously
whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds the capacity of the
operating pump. A means of adjustment such as float-rod
stops shall be provided to allow for variations in the start and
stop level-control points. Float and rod shall be AISI Type 304
or 316 corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts of the fluid-
level sensing mechanism below the cover shall be bronze,
brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive
effects of sewage.
 M. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested units before shipping.
N. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and
exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion
compound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with
screwed-in plugs.

WET-PIT-MOUNTED, VERTICAL SUMP PUMPS

A. Description: Vertical, separately coupled, suspended sump

pump complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for wet- pit-volute sump
pumps.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron inlet strainer.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically
and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap
screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single
suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron;
statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog
design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
6. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: Stainless-steel shaft with bronze
sleeve bearings. Include oil- lubricated, intermediate sleeve
bearings at 1200 mm maximum intervals if basin depth is greater
than 1200 mm, and grease-lubricated, ball-type thrust bearings.
7. Pump and Motor Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing
torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
8. Pump Discharge Piping:GRP pipe.
9. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting
pumps, motors, and controls. Refer to "Sump Pump Basins" Article
for other requirements.
10. Cover Shaft Seal: Stuffing box, with graphite-impregnated braided-
yarn rings and bronze packing gland.
11. Motor: Mounted vertically on cast-iron pedestal.
a) Thermal Overload Protection:Built into pump motors or starters, as
appropriate, according to size.
12. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529, pedestal-mounted float switch; with
floats, float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to
alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to
operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.
13. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in
 basins of depth greater than 1500 mm.
14. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with
electric bell; 230 V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote
alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.

SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS

A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sump pump

complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for submersible sump pumps.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.
2. Casing: Cast iron with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate
pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange
suitable for plain-end pipe connection arranged for vertical
discharge.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically
and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design,
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap
screw.
4. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single
suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
5. Impeller: ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron;
statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog
design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by
locking cap screw.
6. Construction: Stainless steel with stainless-steel or other corrosion-
resistant impeller, stainless- steel inlet strainer, legs that elevate
pump to permit flow into impeller, and discharge companion flange
suitable for plain-end pipe connection arranged for vertical
discharge.
7. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless-steel, with factory-sealed, grease-
lubricated ball bearings.
8. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
9. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in
overload protection; and three- conductor waterproof power cable
of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly
for connection at pump.
10. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm,
and waterproof cable of length required, with cable-sealing
assembly for connection at pump.
11. Pump Discharge Piping:GRP pipe.
12. Basin Cover: Multiple section, steel, and suitable for supporting
controls. Refer to "Sump Pump Basins" Article for other
requirements.
13. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with 3 micropressure switches in IP67 to
IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include
automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
 handle load.
14. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless
wall mounting is indicated; with 3 mercury-float switches in IP67 to
IEC 60529 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include
automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot
handle load.
15. Controls: IP20 to IEC 60529 enclosure, pedestal-mounted float
switch; with floats, float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic
alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles
and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.
16. Float-Guide Pipe: Guide pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in
basins of depth greater than 1500 mm.
17. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with
electric bell; 230 V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote
alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
18. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with
micropressure-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
battery operation is indicated.
19. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with
mercury-float-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 230
V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell, unless
battery operation is indicated.
SUMP PUMP BASINS

A. Description: Factory fabricated with sump, pipe connections,

and separate cover.
B. Basin Sump: Fabricate watertight, with sidewall openings for
pipe connections.
1. Material: Fiberglass, polyethylene, steel with bitumastic coating, or
cast iron.
2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, and
accessories.
3. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with basin sump,
cast in or attached to sump, in location and of size required to
anchor basin in concrete slab.
C. Basin Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and
bushings, for access, pumps, pump shafts, control rods,
discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.
2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of
supporting foot traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.

SUMP PUMP PITS

 A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and
covers. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in Place Concrete."
B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating
of dimension to fit cover.
1. Pattern: Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface.
2. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height
matching cover for recessed mounting that will have installed cover
flush with top of floor slab.
C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and
bushings, for access, pumps, pump shafts, control rods,
discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.
2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of
supporting foot-traffic areas.

PACKAGED DRAINAGE PUMP UNITS

A. Description: Packaged, automatic-operation, pedestal drainage

pump; with aluminum or brass impeller, welded-steel or plastic
basin, and float switch with 1800 mm minimum power cord
and plug.
1. Motor: Mounted vertically on sump with built-in overload
protection.
B. Description: Packaged, automatic-operation, submersible
drainage pump; with cast-iron body and brass impeller, plastic
basin, and motor-mounted float switch with 1800 mm
minimum power cord and plug.
1. Pump Seals: Mechanical type.
2. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in
overload protection and three- conductor waterproof power cable
of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly
for connection at pump.
C. Description: Packaged, automatic-operation, submersible
drainage pump; with plastic body, plastic impeller, plastic
basin, and motor-mounted float switch with 1800 mm
minimum power cord and plug.
1. Pump Seals: Mechanical type.
2. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in
overload protection and three- conductor waterproof power cable
of length required, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly
for connection at pump.
3. Basin: Watertight with inlet pipe connection and gastight cover with
vent and pump discharge connections. Plug vent opening if vent
 piping connection is not required.
4. Controls: Automatic, with mercury-float switches and electrical
power cables.
5. Pump Discharge Piping: Manufacturer's standard steel pipe, copper
tube, or plastic pipe.
6. Valves: Factory- or field-installed check and shutoff valves on each
pump discharge.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate,

ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves. Use valves specified for
domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include features
and devices indicated.

PART - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before pump
installation.
EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2

Section "Earthwork."

CONCRETE

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, for sump pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Concrete for pits and sumps is specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

INSTALLATION
 A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance,
including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and
accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sump Pumps: Suspend pumps from
basin covers. Make direct connections to storm drainage
piping.
E. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump
floor. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.
F. Sump Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to storm
drainage piping. Brace interior of basins according to
manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or
collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten
to basin top flange. Install so top surface of cover is flush with
finished floor.
G. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to storm
drainage piping. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for concrete work. Set basin cover and fasten to top
edge of concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with
finished floor.
H. Packaged Drainage Pump Units: Install and make direct
connections to storm drainage piping.

CONNECTIONS

A. Storm drainage piping installation requirements are specified

in Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The
following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of
pump nozzles, and connect to storm drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each
sump pump discharge. Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever
check valves for piping DN65 and larger.
3. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each
automatic, packaged pump discharge.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
 C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and
connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B

ADJUSTING

A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop,

and alarm operation as required for system application.

COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive

maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of
rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate
pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of trouble is determined
and corrected.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not
exceeding safe motor power is as follows:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain sump pump units. Refer to Division 1 Section.
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.
 SECTION 28
POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
SUMMARY

A. This Section includes potable-water storage tanks and related

specialties and accessories for indoor installations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
dielectric fittings.
2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for field-installed tank
insulation.

1. Type, hot pressed glass rein forced plastic sectional panel factory
not insulated type. Complete with tank supports piping and
accessories as specified below .all internal metal parts to be
constructed from A4/316 grade stainless steel.
2. Tanks should be WRAS certified &both manufacturer& local
distributors should be ISO9001 approved.
3. CONSTRUCTION ;tank to consist to an assembly of rectangular
shaped .pressed GRP convex panels bolted together in an
arrangement of external flanges with a special SEBS rubber sealant
to ensure water light joints .tanks to be provided from factory with
reinforcing struts and roof supports and reinforcing plates and
washers.
4. panels: minimum 10mm thick GRP panels tested to BS 7491 for
bottom & sides panels & 6mm for roof panels to resist pressures of
eight times the working pressure.
5. PANEL COLOUR: Grey, Completely opaque to prevent the growth of
algae and microorganism.
6. PANEL METERIALS characteristics: GRP, 1.8 specific gravity,
30%min.glass content. 1000 kgf/m2 tensile strength,1650 kgf/cm2
flexural strength .52.5kg.cm/m2impact strength.3000 kgf/cm2
compressive strength .960 kgf/cm2 shear strength,2.16x10 deg .c
thermal expansion. 0.15 kcal/m.hr deg .c thermal conductivity.
7. components materials:
- Joints sealant: 50mm synthetic rubber-SEBS type.
- Joints bolts and nuts .stainless steel a4/316 grade
- Reinforcement roof supports: stainless steel a4/316 grade
- Reinforcement internal tie rods: stainless steel a4/316 grade.
- External reinforcing: structural steel hot dipped galvanized.
- Corner angle: structural steel hot dipped galvanized
- Diagonal struts; stainless steel a4/316 grade
8. panels and tanks accessories: to be shipped adequately packed in
wooden crates for site assembly complete with adequate quantities
of bolts. Nuts. Washers. Rubber. Sealant etc.
9. TANKS TOP: TO be provided with 610mm round manhole with
bolted cover and one 100mm diameter UPVC mosquito proof
cowered ventilator.
10. J. Tank: TO BE PROVIDED with all necessary piping connection of
size as shown on the drawings. Pipe connecting panels are to be
specially designed at factory for that purpose and shipped complete
with pipe connections.
11. K. Ladders: one galvanized steel ladder & one PVC ladder shall be
provided outside &inside for each compartment.
12. L. EACH TANK compartment shall be provided with tube type water
level indicator &flanges for inlet. & drainage.
13. M. tank should be provided with steel footing channel beams as
recommended by tank manufacturer for size and shape. Tanks to
be supported on reinforced concrete plinth supports running in one
direction beneath the tank and extending beyond the edge of the
tank on either side.
14. N. tests: after erections .tanks to be filled with water to the level of
overflow and left to stand for 72 hours .during this period no drop
in water level will be allowed. If signs of dampness or traces of
leakages are noticed the contractor shall repair and re-test the tank
to the entire satisfactions of the engineer.
15. O. Guarantee; tanks are to be fully guaranteed against
manufacturing defects and utility of substandard material for a
period 10 years.
 SECTION 29
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

GENERALLY
The contract work shall include fire protection pipe work and equipment as specified
herein and as shown on the drawings, the complete system shall be installed by a
specialist contractor approved by Dubai Civil Defence.

PIPES AND FITTINGS

The piping system should be as straight as possible, necessary changes of direction

should be made with standard bends, spring or long turn fittings, elbow should NOT
be used.
The piping system should be galvanized seamless steel piping sch. 40, screwed and
socketed.

Fittings should be of malleable iron or wrought iron galvanized and of steam quality,
Grooved type fitting (UL listed / FM approved).
THESE MAINS SHOULD BE ELECTRICALLY EARTHED TO AN EARTH ROD INDEPENDENT
OF THE MAIN ELECTRICITY EARTHING SYSTEM.

FIR FIGHTING ACCESSORIES

LANDING VALVES
Hydrant outlets should be of a type acceptable to the public fire brigade and should
comprise a valve 65 mm bore constructed in gun metal, or aluminum bronze flanged
fittings to BS 5041 for attachment to the riser and fitted with a 65 mm instantaneous
female coupling to confirm the BS 336 and a blank cap secured by a suitable length of
chain.
The valve gate should lift clear of the waterway and the valve cover should be
securely fitted to the valve body so that it does not unscrew when operated.
The valve spindle should not be less than 22 mm diameter and fitted with a gun
metal hand wheel about 150 mm in diameter which should be marked with OPEN
and SHUT direction, openings shall be anti-clockwise.

The whole fitting should be of sound construction and shall be suitable for a working
pressure of 20 bar.
The valve must have an in-built integral pressure-reducing device for adjusting the
water outlet pressure, at lower floors to 4.5 bar.
Landing valves should be installed at a height above floor level between 750 mm and
1100 mm.
The hydrant outlet should be installed to give the following clearances: not less than
150 mm on both sides and below the valve and not less than 200 mm clearance
above the hand wheel.

FIRE HOSE
65 mm diameter hose, red colour fire hose with efficient density pvc/rubber lining,
sealed pin holes, reinforced with synthetic nylon jacket as integral part with
minimum working pressure of 14 bar.

Robust alloy coupling should be bound and tested in factory.

Binding should be with corrosion resistance material.

Hose to comply with BS 6391 type or DIN standard.

Nozzle should made to aluminum alloy to BS 1490 and fitted with instantaneous
adaptor as per BS 336 and should have settings as diffuser / jet / spray / on / off.

INLET BREECHING PIECE

The riser shall be fitted with a twin inlet brass or bronze breeching piece for fire
brigade use in addition to the fire pumping station, as required by the local Fire
Authority.

The inlet shall be protected by a non-return (check) valve.

The outlet shall be 100mm to BS 4504.

The breeching shall be rated for 16 bars.

The breeching piece shall comprise 2 inlets consisting of a 65 mm instantaneous male

coupling and a non- return valve and shall be protected by a cap secured by a
suitable length of chain.

The coupling shall comply with BS 336.

A 25mm drain valve should be fitted to the riser in the inlet box.

The valve should be kept strapped and padlocked closed.

INLET BOX
The breeching piece and drain valve shall be housed in an ilet box with a glass
fronted door.
The door should be as follows:

A. glazed with wired glass and conspicuously indicated by the

words: " FIRE BRIDGE – WET MAIN INLET " or " WET RISER
INLET " in block letters on the inner face of the glass, both in
English and Arabic
B. Fastened only by means of a spring lock which can also be
operated from inside without the aid of a key after the glass
has been broken.
C. Made large enough for hose be connected to inlets even if the
door cannot be opened and the only means of access is by
breaking the glass.
The box should be constructed in accordance with BS 3980 with minimum
dimensions 610 mm x 400 mm x 305 mm.

The box shall be built into the structure with a fall of one in 12 from the rear of the
base to the front of the base.

Construction material for the cabinet shall be brushed / polished stainless steel as
required by Architect / Engineer.

FIRE HOSE REELS

Fire hose reel shall be slim type, recess mounted, swinging type to comply BS
5274/EN 671, and shall be housed in cabinets.

The main contractor to Architectural specification shall install installation of doors

and identification marks.

All internal parts used shall be made of material according to BS 1490 LM 16/24.

The hose tubing should be 30 m red rubber 25 mm internal diameter rubber

reinforced with double braiding to comply with BS 3169 type 1 Class B or EN 694.

The hose reel nozzle to comply with EN 671-PN 16/DN 25/6.

The unit shall be complete with lock shield valve and 25 mm pressure reducing valve
to maintain pressure of 65 psi at outlet.
For testing and maintenance drain line with non-return valve to be used.

Brief operating instructions should be clearly displayed on each hose reel.

COMBINED LANDING VALVE, FIRE HOSE AND FIRE FIRE HOSE REEL
CABINET
The back box / cabinet shall be constructed from 16 swg Zinter powder coated finish,
shall have the knockout for pipe entry.
The cabinet shall be divided into 2 sections, top section shall accommodate the 25
mm hose reel and lower cabinet shall house the 65 mm hose, landing valve, nozzle,
fire extinguishers and fire hose rack.

Architrave shall be 20 swg stainless steel (brushed / polished).

Door shall be 18 swg brushed or polished stainless steel.

Door shall be fixed to the cabinet by concealed hinges left or right as required to
facilitate the hose reel pull direction.

Identification of the fire hose reel equipment shall be as the Architect requirement in
compliance to local Civil Defence Authority.

VALVES
OS&Y type, 20 bar working pressure.

ALARM CHECK VALVE

Constructed and equipped to give clear positive audible alarm at water flow equal to
or greater than from single sprinkler, suitable for vertical installation and for variable
pressure water supply, upon actuation of the fire detection system from a fire.

To be flanged, designed for 20 bar working pressure, with cast iron body and clapper
hinge, bronze clapper assembly, pilot valve assembly and other moving parts.

To be complete with retarding chamber, 2" angle main drain valve, upstream and
downstream pressure gauges with gauge cocks, alarm control and test valves,
pressure operated alarm switch to actuate bell, horn or siren or perform other
electrical functions and set to operate at 4 to 7 psi water pressure, with alarm drain
and check valve and all interconnecting galvanized steel piping.
WATER FLOW ALARM DEVICES
Actuated by vane extended inside water pipe so that water flowing in pipe closes
circuit and rings an alarm gong. Unit to be completes with retard or time delay to
prevent false alarms. Alarm gong to be remote type, complete with all necessary
appurtenances to operate with multiple water flow alarm devices.

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS PROTECTION SYSTEM

GENERAL
The design of the sprinkler and wet riser and wet riser system indicate on the
drawings will be fully developed and installed by the contractor strictly in accordance
with the requirements of the local fire officer and the rules for automatic sprinkler
installation to NFPA – 13 & 14.

The fire fighting system shall be fed from the underground storage tank located
inside the building, which shall be constructed in reinforced concrete.

The system shall be complete with automatic fire pumping station and valves, water
motor alarm and gong, pressurized water mains, main distribution pipes, distribution
pipes, range pipes, hangers and supporters, sprinkler heads and main drain system.

The alarm panel in order that the alarm bells in various locations can be actuated.

The water motor alarm and gong should consist with a simple water turbine having
the shaft connected to a rotary ball clapper mounted within a domed gong.
The test valve shall be incorporated on a branch pipe from the alarm valve to allow
operational conditions to be simulated for test purpose.
Auxiliary pressure sensing device shall be incorporated in the feed to the alarm gong
to actuate the main fire alarm panel.

Water from the test valve shall be properly drained to a pit.

The alarm system shall be self winding, adjustable recycling non-thermal type and
equipped with signal retarding device to prevent false alarms due to surge in the
water system.

All isolating valves related to water tank, pump room and main distribution line shall
be OS&Y type and shall be monitored by fire alarm system for open / closed position.

MAIN CONTROL VALVES

The system shall be provided with a set of installation control valves, main stop valve,
alarm valve and test valve. The main stop valve should be strapped and double
padlocked in the open position.
The alarm valve should be closed in the static position with the pressure below and
above the valve, at normal level and no water flow.
In the event of a pressure drop above the valve due to activation of a sprinkler head,
water is admitted to the branch pipe connected to the water motor alarm and the
gong.

SPRINKLER HEADS
The glass bulb sprinkler head should be of the pendant type and rated for 68 C (155
F).

These shall be located such that there is no interference with the discharge pattern
and 75 – 150 mm below ceiling. For other types of sprinkler heads refer description
on the sprinkler layout design drawings.
The sprinklers and lines shall not be spaced too close together, in order to prevent an
operating sprinkler from wetting and thereby operation of adjacent sprinkler.
In location where sprinkler heads are liable to be operated or damaged by accidental
bellows, they should be protected by stout metal guards, care being taken to ensure
that the normal operation of the sprinkler head in the event of fire is not thereby
impeded.

The contractor shall supply adequate quantity of spare sprinkler heads with
necessary tools of the correct temperature rating to the employer for use during an
emergency.

Sprinkler heads shall be installed strictly as per the manufacturer instructions and in
compliance with NFPA standard.

SPECIAL WRENCHES
To be provided from factory for each type of sprinkler installed.

SPARE SPRINKLERS
Provide two sets of spare sprinklers for each type of sprinkler installed. Each set to
contain 6 sprinklers supplied in cabinet with wrench.
COMBINED FIRE PUMPSET
The fire pumpset shall be serving sprinkler system and wet riser system (landing
valves and hose reels).

MAIN FIRE PUMP (ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVEN)

TYPE:
Horizontal, base mounted, split case, centrifugal type directly connected to electric
motor through heavy duty flexible coupling, with pump and motor mounted on
common cast iron base plate with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting
hole.

STANDARD:
Pump is to be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and meet requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association, Pamphlet No. 20 or approved equal
international association.

CAPACITY AND PRESSURE

To be as shown on the Drawings. Pump is to deliver not less than 150% of rated
capacity at pressure not less than 65% of rated pressure. Shut-off pressure is not to
exceed 120% of rated pressure.

UNIT
To be complete with pump, driver, controller and accessories from factory.

CASING:
Cast iron, minimum tensile strength 241 MPa, designed for working pressure of 1720
kPa and hydrostatically tested at factory to not less than 1720 kPa.

CASING:
Bearing housing supports and suction and discharge flanges to be integrally cast with
lower half of casing. Removal of upper half of casing is to allow removal of rotating
element without disconnecting suction and discharge flanges.

CASING WEAR RINGS

To be renewable and locked by dowelling to prevent rotation.

IMPELLER
To be vacuum cast bronze, enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and
held in place with bronze threaded shaft sleeve.

SHAFT SLEEVES:
To extend entire length of seal boxes to protect shaft and key locked and threaded to
tighten with rotation of shaft. Teflon gaskets to be provided between impeller hub
and shaft sleeves to protect pump shaft.

BEARINGS:
Pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty, grease lubricated ball
bearings mounted in machined moisture proof and dust proof cast iron housing and
bolted to pump casing with register fits to ensure permanent alignment. Grease seals
and water slingers to be provided to protect bearings from contamination. Bearing
housings to be designed to flush lubricant through bearing. Easily accessible grease
fittings to be provided for positive bearing lubrication.

SHAFT
To be high strength steel accurately machined to give true running rotating element
and sealed by split packing glands designed for easy removal for inspection and
maintenance.

PACKING:
To consist of interwoven, graphited asbestos, diagonally cut packing rings with
lantern ring connected to pressure side of pump by a cored passage in parting flange
of pump.

ELECTRIC MOTOR:
Drip-proof, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated and sealed ball
bearings. Motor speed is not to exceed 2900 rpm.

PUMP ACCESSORIES:
Pump to be supplied complete with the following:
Lifting lugs

Coupling guard

Tapped holes in suction and discharge flanges for pressure gauge connections

Suction and discharge pressure gauges, with minimum 89 mm dial reading in kg/cm2
and having range equal to twice rated design working pressure of pump and
complete with gauge valves

Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of pump when operating at shut-off,
factory set to open just higher than rated design working pressure of pump and
lower than shut-off discharge pressure
Automatic air release valve on casing vent.

Eccentric reducer at suction inlet, discharge cone waste with sight glass.

Venture type flow meter device.

CONTROLLER:
Wall mounting, watertight construction, marked 'Fire Pump Controller', completely
assembled, wired and tested at factory ready for installation and operation with
simple external electrical connections.

CONTROLLER
To be combined manual and automatic across- the-line type, containing the
following: externally operable disconnect switch, circuit breaker with interrupting
capacity to suit motor, magnetic starter, pressure switch, pilot lamp to indicate
circuit breaker closed and power available, ammeter test link, voltmeter test studs
and two position selector switch marked 'automatic' and 'non- automatic'.

PERFORMANCE TEST:
Pump to be completely tested at factory with positive suction pressure and with a 4.5
m suction lift. Certified performance curves for both conditions to be submitted for
approval prior to shipment.

EMERGENCY FIRE PUMPS

UNIT
To comprise diesel engine driven fire pump supplied complete as a packaged unit
with engine, fuel tank, hand operated diaphragm pump for filling fuel tank, fuel
pipework, automatic starting equipment and electric control panel all mounted on
steel skid type base for permanent mounting with foundation bolt holes and
adequate grout volume.

STANDARDS
Unit is to comply with the requirements of one of the following standards:

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Pamphlet 20 (U.S.A.)

Factory Mutual (U.S.A.)

Underwriters' Laboratories (U.S.A.)

or approved equal International Society.

PUMP:
Horizontal, centrifugal type, split case, and directly connected to engine through
heavy duty flexible coupling. Pump and engine to be perfectly assembled, tested for
performance, aligned at pump manufacturer factory.

PUMP CASING AND COVER:

Close grained cast iron for 1030 kPa operating pressure. Casing to be hydrostatically
tested at factory to 2070 kPa.

IMPELLERS:
Bronze, hand finished, dynamically balanced, keyed and secured to shaft by bronze
impeller nut and washer designed to prevent leakage to shaft. Impellers to be
positioned back to back to eliminate end thrust.

SHAFT:
High tensile steel, sized for maximum stiffness and freedom from vibration.

BEARINGS:
Shaft to be supported on two grease lubricated ball bearings, with screw down
grease cups for positive bearing lubrication.

IMPELLER WEAR RINGS AND SHAFT SLEEVE:

Pump to have lead bronze renewable impeller wear rings and cast bronze shaft
sleeve extending through stuffing box to prevent shaft wear.

STUFFING BOX:
Water sealed, with soft woven graphited packing, bronze lantern ring, gland nut and
moulded rubber water slinger to protect bearings from water contamination. It is to
be adjacent to first stage impeller and subjected to suction pressure only.

PUMP SUPPORT:
Substantial cast iron driving head is to be provided to ensure rigid support for pump
and bearings.

ACCESSORIES:
Pump to have air release valve on casing, drain plugs and continuous by-pass pipe
with orifice from pump discharge nozzle back to suction source to protect pump from
overheating when running with closed discharge.
Main relief valve, factory set to open at pressure slightly greater than rated design
working pressure of pump, with capacity to pass all water discharged by pump
without developing excessive pressure on system.

Eccentric reducer at suction inlet.

Suction and discharge pressure gauges, with minimum 89 mm dial reading in kg/cm2
and having range equal to twice rated design working pressure of pump and
complete with gauge valves

DIESEL ENGINE
To be air cooled, with adequate power to drive pump at rated speed continuously on
full load at site elevation for six hours and with dry type air filter on air intake.
Rating of diesel engine shall be chosen at the prevailing conditions at Dubai, i.e.
ambient temperature of 120 deg F, and a humidity ration of more than 90 %.
The diesel engine for driving the fire pump shall be specifically designed for fire pump
service.

It shall developed sufficient horse power to drive the pump and shall have bare
engine brake horse power not less than 20 % greater than the maximum horsepower
required to drive the pump at its rate RPM.

The engine shall be an open type self contained power unit including the followings
accessories:

A. Stub shaft
B. Fuel pumps and filters.
C. Air cleaner.
D. Adjusting governor capable of regulating engine speed within a
range of 10% between shut-off and maximum load conditions,
the governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at
maximum pump load.
E. Lube oil pump
F. Lube oil filter
G. Over speed shut down device arranged to shut down engine at
a speed approximately 20% above rated engine speed and with
manual reset, the over speed shut down device shall be so
supervised that the automatic engine controller will continue
to show an over speed trouble signal until the device is
manually reset to normal operating positions.
H. Electric starter, generator or alternator and voltage regulator.
I. Duel storage battery units. Each unit shall have capacity to
maintain cranking speed through a 6 minute cycle (15 second
cranking and 15 second rest, in 12 consecutive cycles), provide
certification that the battery unit complies with this
 requirements, batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge
condition, with electrolyte liquid in a separate container,
electrolyte shall be added at the time the engine is put in
service, and the battery is given a conditioning charge.
J. Duel battery chargers, automatically controlled, chargers shall
be specifically designed for fire pump service, the rectifier shall
be a semiconductor type, the charger for lead acid battery shall
be a type which automatically reduces the charging rate to less
than 500 milliamperes when the battery reaches a full charge
condition, the control equipment incorporated in an "off-on"
type of charge for a load acid battery shall start the rectifier
hourly, it shall shut off automatically when the battery has
been fully charged, the battery charger at its rated voltage shall
be capable of so delivering energy into a full discharged battery
in such a manner that it will not damage the battery, it shall
restore to the battery 100% of the battery's ampere hour
rating within 24 hours, an ammeter with an accuracy of five%
of the normal charging rate shall be furnished to indicate the
operation of the charger, the charger shall be designed so that
it will not be damaged or blow fuses during the cranking cycle
of the engine when operated by an automatic or manual
controller, a manual charge switch with indicator light shall be
provided or in lieu thereof the charger shall automatically
charge at the maximum rate whenever required by the state of
charge of the battery, when not connected through a control
panel it shall be arranged to indicate loss of current output on
the load side of the DC over-current protective device, storage
batteries shall be substantially supported, secured against
displacement, and located where they shall be readily
accessible for servicing.
K. Engine mounted radiator cooling system (for high power
engines), cooling water shall be from the discharge of the
pump, taken off prior to the pump discharge, threaded rigid
pipe shall be used for this connection, the pipe shall include a
manual shut-off valve, flushing type strainer, pressure
regulating valve, a bypass line with manual shut-off valves,
strainer, pressure regulator and solenoid valve.
 L. Engine jacket temperature regulating device.
M. Engine jacket water pump.
N. Instrument panel with water temperature gauge, oil pressure
gauge, ammeter, tachometer of the totalizing type or an hour
meter.
O. Exhaust mufflers and flexible connectors, stainless steel non-
sparking.
P. The engine shall be arranged for automatic operation with all
wiring terminating in a junction box suitable for field hook-up.
Q. Exhaust piping from flexible connection at engine to muffler
and from muffler to point of discharge to atmosphere shall be
schedule 40 black seamless steel pipe and fittings.

CONTROL PANEL
The automatic engine control panel shall be specifically designed for fire pump
service.
The panel shall be moisture resistance housing.
The controller shall be the combined manual and automatic type including a "Manual
– Off – Automatic" selector switch.

A. a pressure switch and single phases power failure relay with

local visual indication and auxiliary contact for remote
indication of 220 volt AC power failure shall be provided which
will, upon drop in system pressure or loss of single phase AC
power, cause the controller to open or close all circuits
necessary to automatically start the engine by performing the
following functions:

a) Turn on fuel supply

b) Open the cooling water solenoid valve.
c) Crank the engine in a series of crank-rest cycles automatically
alternating between the dual batteries on each cycle.
d) Disconnect cranking motor upon engine start.
e) Once the engine is started, it shall remain in operation unit shut
down manually, a signal in the synoptic panel shall indicate that the
diesel engine is operating.
f) If the engine should fail to start after several cranking attempts, the
controller shall disconnected all starting circuit and energize an
 audible and visual alarm to indicate "over crank" in the synoptic
panel as well as in the engine control panel.

B. Alarm and signal devices on controller

a) A pilot lamps shall be provided to indicate that the controller is in
the "automatic" position, the lamp shall be accessible for
replacement.
b) Separate pilot lamps and a common bell shall be provided to
indicate trouble caused by:
Low oil pressure in the lubrication system, the controller shall
provide means for testing the position of the pressure switch
contact without causing trouble alarms.
Failure of engine to start automatically. Shutdown from overspeed.
Battery failure, each battery shall be provided with separate lamps
which shall be lighted or extinguished on battery failure on attempt
to start.
High engine jacket water temperature.
C. Water pressure control: a pressure actuated switch having high
and low calibrated adjustments and responsive to water
pressure in the fire system shall be provided in the controller
circuit, suitable provision shall be made for relieving pressure
to the pressure switch to test the operation of the controller
and the pump
D. Enclosure: the structure or panel shall be securely mounted in
an enclosure which will protect the equipment against
mechanical injury and falling drops of water striking the
enclosure from the downward vertical, all switches required to
keep the controller in the "automatic" position shall be within
the locked cabinets have to break glass panels.
E. A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached
to the inside of the enclosure showing exact wiring for the
controller, including a legend of identifying numbers of
individual component, all wiring terminals shall be plainly
marked to correspond with the wiring diagram furnished.
F. Wiring elements: wiring elements of the controller shall be
designed on a continuous-duty basis.
G. Field wiring: all wiring leading from the panel to the engine and
to the batteries shall have adequate carrying capacity, such
wiring shall be protected against mechanical injury, controller
manufacturer's specification for distance and wire size shall be
 followed.
H. Marking: each operating component of the controller shall be
marked to plainly indicate an identifying number referenced to
the wiring diagram, the markings shall be located so as to be
visible after installation.
I. Instructions: complete instruction covering the operation of
the controller shall be provided and conspicuously mounted on
the controller.

ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM:

To include the following:

Residential type silencer

Short length of flexible exhaust pipe for direct fitting to exhaust outlet Necessary
lengths of steel exhaust pipe.

ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM:

The fuel storage tank shall be an integral part of the unit and shall be mounted within
the support base of the unit to include the following:

Fuel tank of capacity for six hours running at full load

Hand operated fuel line valve lockable in the open position
Sediment trap
Fuel level gauge
Cleaning and inspection hole on tank
Hand operated fuel transfer pump for filling tank Fuel filter between fuel tank and
engine fuel pump Air bleeding valve
Interconnecting fuel piping.

ENGINE ACCESSORIES
Engine to be complete with standard tool kit, set of spare parts, installation drawings,
operating and maintenance instructions and circuit diagram.
VIBRATION ISOLATION
Fire pump and diesel engine are to have open type spring isolators with equal
stiffness in horizontal and vertical planes.

The pump base shall be supported on 10 mm thick ribbed neoprene vibropad and
will be colour coded to aid identification.

They will also have level adjustment screws and be rated for 75% more than the
anticipated design load.

The spring shall be located between the housing pad and the concrete base.

The base for each pump will be designed to give a static deflection of 25 mm at rated
design load conditions, and shall be fully independent of any adjacent pad.

JOCKEY PUMP
TYPE:
Close-coupled, regenerative turbine type, with in- line suction and discharge
openings.

CONSTRUCTION:
Casing to be cast iron designed for working pressure of 2070 kPa and hydrostatically
tested at this pressure at factory. Impeller to be bronze, double suction, hydraulically
balanced design, dynamically balanced, keyed and bolted to stainless steel shaft.

CONSTRUCTION:
Pump to have internal sealing water passages, removable chrome-plated cast iron
channel rings, and mechanical seal with carbon washer, Ni-resist face and stainless
steel parts, water slingers to protect bearings and 'O' ring gaskets to prevent leakage.

ELECTRIC MOTOR
To be close-coupled to pump, drip-proof, squirrel cage, induction type, with
permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed is not to exceed 2900
rpm.

STARTER:
Totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct-on- line, with no-volt and overload protection
in each phase and suitable for automatic operation.

PUMP ACCESSORIES:
Pump to have relieve valve set for the proper pressure and a pressure switch for
automatic operation, air release valve on casing, drain plugs and continuous by-pass
pipe with orifice from pump discharge nozzle back to suction source to protect pump
from overheating when running with closed discharge.
Suction and discharge pressure gauges, with minimum 89 mm dial reading in kg/cm2
and having range equal to twice rated design working pressure of pump and
complete with gauge valves

CONTROLLER:
Wall mounting, watertight construction, marked 'Jockey Pump Controller',
completely assembled, wired and tested at factory ready for installation and
operation with simple external electrical connections.

CONTROLLER
To be combined manual and automatic across- the-line type, containing the
following: externally operable disconnect switch, circuit breaker with interrupting
capacity to suit motor, magnetic starter, pressure switch, pilot lamp to indicate
circuit breaker closed and power available, ammeter test link, voltmeter test studs
and two position selector switch marked 'automatic' and 'non- automatic'.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

HANGERS
Universal loop type, with adjustable rods and washer type ceiling plates. Thickness
and width of flat steel and size of hanger rods to be as follows:

Pipe Dimensions of Flat Size of Rod

Size Steel
inches inches inches
 1-2 1/16 x 5/8 3/8
2 1/2 & 3/32 x 3/4 1/2
3
4&5 l/8 x 3/4 5/8
6 1/8 x 1 3/4
SUPPORTS
For vertical pipes to be clamps, bolted around pipe and with legs on both sides
resting on concrete floor.
EXPANSION BOLTS:
To be size to suit size of hanger rod.

WARNING AND INSTRUCTION SIGNS

In Arabic and English to be installed at entrances to and inside protected areas in
accordance with NFPA 12A requirements.

WORKMANSHIP
GENERALLY
REFER TO SECTION 4.1 PLUMBING - GENERAL:
For workmanship common to this and other plumbing installations.

STANDARDS
Install and test system in accordance with National Fire Protection Association of the
U.S.A. standards or approved equal international association.

VALVES
Provide on mains and branches for sectionalizing the system for maintenance and
operation and for flushing, draining and testing the system.

SUPPORT HORIZONTAL PIPES

At intervals not exceeding 3 m.

SUPPORT VERTICAL PIPES

At every floor.
TESTS
Prior to the shipment, all the pumps shall be thoroughly shop-tested as a unit by the
pump manufacture and the contractor must submit the hydraulic calculation prior to
shipment
A characteristic curve showing the pump performance based upon the result of the
shop test shall be submitted to the engineer prior to shipment, and shall include the
performance pump and engine at the set-governors speed.

Absence of these test report, indicating that the complete unit has been tested in the
factory by the driver, will be ample grounds for the equipment rejection.
Each control panels shall be fully assembled and factory tested by the control
manufacturer prior to their shipment, and evidence of this test shall be furnished
with the controller

FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS

The field acceptance test results shall be as good as the manufacturers certificated
shop test characteristic curve for the pump being tested within the accuracy limits of
the test equipment.
Overheating: the pumps shall operate at peak load conditions without objectionable
heating of the bearings or of the prime mover.
The operating pump speed shall be the speed at which the pumping unit would be
expected to operate during a fire.

HYDROSTATICALLY TEST
Pressure test of 15 bar applied for 24 hours.

OPERATIONAL TESTS
Carry out tests of systems as directed and demonstrate proper functioning and
soundness of all components and devices.
 SECTION 30
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING SYSTEM

PART 47 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fire-suppression piping and equipment

for the following building systems:
1. Automatic wet-type, Class I, fire-suppression standpipes and
branches for sprinklers.
2. Automatic wet-type, Class II, fire-suppression standpipes and
branches for sprinklers.
3. Automatic wet-type, Class III, fire-suppression standpipes and
branches for sprinklers.
4. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves,
specialties, and automatic sprinklers.
5. Deluge, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves,
specialties, and automatic sprinklers operated by fire-detection
system.
6. Preaction, fire-suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves,
specialties, and automatic sprinklers operated by fire-detection
system.
B. System Description:
1. System design and manufacturer's products shall be in accordance
with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 14, except as
modified herein.
2. Standpipe system shall be designed by hydraulic calculations.
3. Each system shall be designed for earthquakes and shall include
materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside the
building necessary to provide each system complete and ready for
use.
 4. Devices and equipment shall be UL listed or FM P7825 approved for
fire protection service.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets and
fire extinguishers.
2. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps."
3. Division 13 Section "Diesel-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps."
4. Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps."
5. Division 13 Section "Diesel-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps."
6. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not in this
Section.

DEFINITIONS

A. Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire

hose coupling thread for attaching fire hose.
B. Hose Station: Hose connection, fire hose rack, and fire hose.
C. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations,
and material specifications prepared according to NFPA 13 and
NFPA 14 for obtaining approval from the Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Verify the design of standpipes and sprinklers for compliance

with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and obtain approval from the
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Verify the design of standpipes and obtain approval from the
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include minimum
residual pressures at hydraulically remote outlets according to
the following:
1. DN40 Hose Connections: 450 kPa.
2. DN65 Hose Connections: 690 kPa.
C. Verify the design of sprinklers for conformance with NFPA 13,
and obtain approval from the Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and
pressure.
2. Include losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow
preventers.
3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: As per NFPA 13
requirements.
 4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a) Light-Hazard Occupancy: 6.3 mL/s over 139 sq. m area.
b) Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over 139 sq. m area.
c) Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s over 139 sq. m
area.
d) Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 18.9 mL/s over 232 sq. m area.
e) Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 25.2 mL/s over 232 sq. m area.
5. Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows:
a) Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 9.5 mL/s over entire area.
b) Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 12.6 mL/s over entire area.
c) Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 18.9 mL/s over entire area.
d) Extra-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 25.2 mL/s over entire area.
6. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: As per NFPA 13
requirements.
D. Preaction sprinkler system(s) shall meet the requirements of
NFPA 13 and NFPA 72. The sprinkler system shall be a double
action interlocked system that requires the actuation of a
smoke detector as first interlock and breaking of fusible link on
dry pipe distribution sprinklers line as a second interlocking
method causing a pressure drop in the distribution sprinkler
line resulting in opening the water control valve.
E. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping
systems with 1200 kPa (175-psig) minimum working-pressure
rating, unless otherwise indicated.

SUBMITTALS

A. Hydraulic Calculations: Submit hydraulic calculations to the

Engineer for approval.
B. Product Data for the following:
Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for standpipe piping.
Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Piping seismic restraints.
Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
Air compressors. Include electrical data.
Fire department connections. Include type, number, size, and
arrangement of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet;
escutcheon and marking; and finish.
Hose connections. Include size, type, and finish.
Hose stations. Include size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and
length of fire hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and
finish of nozzles; and finish of rack.
 Excess-pressure pumps. Include electrical data.
Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics,
mounting, finish, and other pertinent data.
C. Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: As specified in "Preparation"
Article.
D. Valve Schedule: Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate,
describing each valve by number, giving locations and service
for which used. One copy of this schedule is to be mounted
under glass in a simple black enamel steel frame and hung in
the mechanical equipment room where directed. The other
copy is to be submitted to the Engineer before completion of
the work.
E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared
according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by the
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. Include hydraulic
calculations.
F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field
Quality Control" and "Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this
Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and
NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
G. Maintenance Data: For each type of standpipe and sprinkler
specialty to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications:
An experienced installer who has designed, installed, and obtained
approvals for fire-suppression piping similar to that indicated for
this Project.
Prior to commencing work, submit data showing that the Contractor has
successfully installed fire extinguishing standpipe systems of the
same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm
contractual agreement with a subcontractor having the required
experience. Include the names and locations of at least two
installations where the Contractor, or the subcontractor referred to
above, has installed such systems. Indicate the type and design of
 each system, and certify that the system has performed
satisfactorily for a period of at least 18 months.
Qualifications of System Technician: Installation drawings, Shop Drawings
and Record (As- Built) Drawings shall be prepared, by or under the
supervision of, an individual who is experienced with the types of
works specified herein. [The Contractor shall submit data for
approval showing the name and certification of all involved
individuals with such qualifications at or prior to submittal of
drawings.]
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans,
calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is
legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined
as those performed for installations of fire-suppression piping
that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties,
and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer
in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other
requirements indicated.
Standpipe and Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label,
or other marking by a testing agency acceptable to the
Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to the Engineer.
NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation,
and testing complying with the following:
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
NFPA 13R, "Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and
Including Four Stories in Height."
NFPA 14, "Standpipe and Hose Systems."
NFPA 231, "General Storage."
NFPA 231C, "Rack Storage of Materials."
Acceptance Testing: Final acceptance testing and demonstration of
the system shall be conducted in the presence of and to the
satisfaction of the DCA fire authorities, as outlined in Part 3 -
 Execution.

EXTRA MATERIALS

Furnish extra materials described below that match products

installed and that are packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with labels describing contents.
Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting steel cabinet and hinged
cover, with space for a minimum of 6 spare sprinklers plus sprinkler
wrench. Include the number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and
wrench for sprinklers. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and
wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project.

PART - PRODUCTS
PIPING MATERIALS

Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe,

tube, fitting, and joining materials.

PIPES

Steel Pipe, DN 150 and Smaller: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A

53, Type S (seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40, factory
galvanized.
Steel Pipe, DN 200 and larger: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A
53, Type S (seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40, factory
galvanized.

PIPE FITTINGS

All fittings shall be factory galvanized.

Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A
47M, malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with
dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved
 according to AWWA C606.
Steel, Press-Seal Fittings: UL 213 and FM-approved, 1200 kPa
pressure rating; with steel housing, butylene O-rings, and pipe
stop; for use with Schedule 5, plain-end, steel pipe. Include UL
45-listed fitting manufacturer's pressure-sealing tools.

JOINING MATERIALS

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods" for pipe-flange gasket materials and welding filler
metals.
Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe
dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing for dry-pipe
service for couplings for dry piping.
Gaskets: shall be Grade "E" EPDM compound (green color coded)
conforming to ASTM D 2000, UL listed classified to ANSI/NSF
61 for water supply systems and flush seal gaskets for dry
service. All gaskets shall be selected as per manufacturer's
recommendation according to service application. Gaskets
must be manufactured by the same source for couplings and
fittings to secure compatibility.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe,

and check valves not required to be UL listed and FM
approved.

FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES

General: Provide valves of types approved for fire service, UL listed

and FM approved, with minimum 1200 kPa nonshock working-
pressure rating. Hose and gate valves shall open by
counterclockwise rotation. Provide isolation and check valves
as required by NFPA 14. Isolation valves shall be OS&Y type.
Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing-check type
 with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 100
mm and larger. Valves for grooved-end piping may be
furnished with grooved ends instead of type of ends specified.
Gate Valves, DN50 and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends;
solid wedge; OS&Y; and rising stem.
Indicating Valves, DN65 and Smaller: UL 1091; butterfly or ball-type,
bronze body with threaded ends; and integral indicating
device.
Gate Valves, DN65 and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted,
taper wedge, OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable,
bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends; and integral
indicating device.
Indicating Device: Electrical 230 V ac, prewired, single-circuit,
supervisory switch.
Swing Check Valves, DN50 and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class
150; bronze body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
Swing Check Valves, DN65 and Larger: Shall be non slam type with
air cushion mechanism, UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap,
with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and
flanged ends.

SPECIALTY VALVES

Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 1200 kPa working pressure; designed

for horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged
inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and
single- hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass,
drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding
chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
Option: Grooved-end connections for use with keyed couplings.
Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, and separate from main
drain piping.
Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
Preactioned Valves and Integrated Release Control Panel: UL 260,
cast-iron body, shall be double interlock electrically-actuated,
differential-pressure type and rated for a working pressure of
1207 kPa. Valve shall be capable of being reset without
 opening the valve. Electrical solenoid valve used to actuate the
water control valve shall be an integral component of the valve
or shall be approved for use by the water control valve
manufacturer. Solenoid valve shall be rated at 24 volts direct
current, and shall be normally closed type that operates when
energized. Solenoid valves shall be rated for a maximum
pressure differential of 1700 kPa. Water control valve shall be
equipped with a means to prevent the valve from returning to
the closed position until being manually reset. Assembly shall
be complete with the valve manufacturer's standard trim
piping, drain and test valves, pressure gauges, built-in
compressed air mechanism, release control panel, diaphragm
by-pass, and other required pneumatics and appurtenances.
Each assembly shall include an emergency release device for
manually tripping the water control valve in the event of a
power or other system failure. Device shall be a standard
accessory component of the valve manufacturer and shall be
labeled as to its function and method of operation. Valves
located in hazardous locations shall be approved for the hazard
classification of the area where located.
Option: Grooved-end connections for use with grooved-end piping.
Deluge Valves: UL 260, cast-iron body, 1200 -kPa working pressure;
hydraulically operated, differential-pressure type. Include
flanged inlet and outlet, bronze seat with O-ring seals, trim sets
for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gages, drip cup assembly piped without valves and separate
from main drain line, fill-line attachment with strainer, and
push- rod chamber supply connection.
Option: Grooved-end connections for use with grooved-end piping.
Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber
pressure, globe valve for manual operation of deluge valve, and
connection for actuation device.
Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 2760 kPa minimum rating,
brass. Include DN40 or DN65 , female NPS inlet and outlet;
adjustable setting feature; and straight or 90 degree angle
pattern design as indicated.
Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20, ball check
 device with threaded ends.
Waterflow Test Connection: Provide test connections approximately
1.83 m above the floor for each standpipe system or portion of
each standpipe system equipped with an alarm device; locate
downstream and adjacent to each alarm actuating device.
Provide test connection piping to a location where the
discharge will be readily visible and where water may be
discharged without property damage. Discharge to janitor sinks
or similar fixtures shall not be permitted. Provide discharge
orifice equivalent to 15 mm sprinkler orifice.
Main Drains: Provide separate drain piping to discharge at safe
points outside each building or to sight cones attached to
drains of adequate size to readily receive the full flow from
each drain under maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains
as required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
Double-check backflow prevention assembly shall comply with ASSE
1015. The assembly shall have a bronze or stainless-steel body
with flanged ends. The assembly shall include pressure gage
test ports and OS&Y shutoff valves on the inlet and outlet, 2-
positive-seating check valve for continuous pressure
application, and four test cocks. Assemblies shall be rated for
working pressure of 1207 kPa. The maximum pressure loss
shall be 40 kPa at a flow rate equal to the sprinkler water
demand, at the location of the assembly. A test port for a
pressure gage shall be provided both upstream and
downstream of the double check backflow prevention
assembly valves.

MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15

pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure
labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating
instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to
prevent accidental opening.
SPRINKLERS

Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with

the following:
UL 199, for applications except residential.
UL 1626, for residential applications.
UL 1767, for early suppression, fast-response applications.
Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 12.7 mm orifice for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating, unless otherwise
indicated or required by application.
Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.
Orifice: 12.7 mm, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
Orifice: 13.5 mm, with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
Sprinklers for preaction systems shall be automatic, fusible solder or
glass bulb type. Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be
used. Sprinklers shall be used in accordance with their listed
coverage limitations. Sprinklers in high heat areas including
attic spaces shall have temperature classification in accordance
with NFPA 13. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used.
Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following:
Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.
Extended-coverage sprinklers.
Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature.
Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
Institution sprinklers, made with small, breakaway projection.
Open sprinklers.
Pendent sprinklers.
Pendent, dry-type sprinklers.
Quick-response sprinklers.
Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
Sidewall sprinklers, including escutcheon.
Sidewall, dry-type sprinklers, including escutcheon.
Upright sprinklers.
Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome-plated, bronze, and painted.
Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the
following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for
concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified
with sprinklers.
Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 1 piece, flat.
Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 2 piece, with 25 mm vertical
adjustment.
Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 1 piece, flat.
Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for
 attaching to sprinkler.

SPECIALTY SPRINKLER FITTINGS

Specialty Fittings: UL listed and FM approved; made of steel, ductile

iron, or other materials compatible with piping.
Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.
Press-Seal Fittings: UL 213, steel housing with butylene O-rings and
pipe stop.
Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with locking-lug ends.
Mechanical-T Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with pressure-
responsive gasket, bolts, and threaded or locking-lug outlet.
Mechanical-Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with
pressure-responsive gaskets, bolts, and threaded or locking-lug
outlets.
Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, with threaded inlet, threaded outlet,
and seals; adjustable.
Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-
iron body; with threaded inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice
and sight glass.
Sprinkler, Branch-Line Test Fittings: UL-listed, brass body; with
threaded inlet and capped drain outlet and threaded outlet for
sprinkler.
Sprinkler, Inspector's Test Fittings: UL-listed, cast- or ductile-iron
housing; with threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass.

HOSE CONNECTIONS

Description: UL 668, 2070 kPa minimum pressure rating, brass, hose

valve for connecting fire hose. Include 90-degree angle pattern
design; female NPS inlet and male hose outlet; and lugged cap,
gasket, and chain. Include DN40 or DN65 as indicated, and
hose valve threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local
fire department threads.
Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
HOSE STATIONS

Provide mounted cabinets where indicated. Cabinets shall be prime

grade, stainless-steel 316. On each jamb, provide at least two
anchors or reinforcements spaced approximately 610 mm
apart for building in or attaching the cabinets to adjacent
construction. Doors shall be flush hollow metal type with full
glazed opening. Provide door with continuous concealed hinge,
latch and pull. Hinge door for 180 degree opening. Glass shall
conform to ASTM C 1036 and shall be tempered, Quality q 8
(glazing quality), diamond or square wire mesh, 6.35 mm thick.
Fabricate cabinet with sufficient interior space to store one fire
extinguisher.
Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass
chrome plated, rack nipple; hose rack; and the following
features:
Valves: UL 668, 2070 kPa minimum pressure rating, 90- degree angle
pattern hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless
otherwise indicated.
Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
Flow-Restricting Devices: DN40 brass, adjustable for DN40 fire hose inlet.
Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets,
and nozzle. Include the following fire hose materials:

Jacket: Synthetic thread.

Lining: Plastic compound.
Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of compounds.
Cover: Optional.
Nozzles: UL 401.
Drain Valves: UL 1726.
Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding units.
Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
DN65 by DN40 Hose Stations: DN65 hose valve; DN65 by DN40
reducer adapter; hose rack with water-retention device and
pins for folded, DN40 lined hose; DN40 lined hose with swivel
inlet coupling and nozzle; and reducer adapter spanner
wrench.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
 straight stream.
DN40 Hose Stations: DN40 hose valve; hose rack with water-
retention device and pins for folded, DN40 lined hose; and
DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.
DN65 and DN40 Hose Stations: DN65 hose valve with male threaded
outlet, cap, and chain and DN40 hose valve; hose rack with
water-retention device and pins for folded, DN40 lined hose;
and DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.
DN40 Hose-Reel Hose Stations: DN40 hose valve; hose reel with
water-retention device and pins for DN40 lined hose; and
DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.
Spare Parts: Provide 1 percent of the nozzles as spare parts.

ROOF HOSE CABINETS

Description: FM-approved, low-profile-type, hose station for roof

mounting. Include the following:
Housing: Stainless steel construction with reinforcement and modified to
hold not less than length of fire hose indicated.
Shutoff Valve: DN40 gate valve with extended stem.
Hose Connection: DN40 valve.
Fittings: Brass, chrome plated.
Hose: DN40, lined and suitable for exterior service. Include two 23 m
lengths coupled together.
Nozzle: DN40 brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray
or straight stream.
Drain Valve: DN15 gate valve with extended stem.
Roof Curb: Matching housing dimensions.
Mounting Materials: Structural steel and wood blocking as
 recommended in writing by manufacturer.

MONITORS

Description: UL-listed, stationary, single-waterway type for 47.3 L/s

water stream. Include the following features:
Waterway: DN65 minimum, brass tube.
Operation: Lever handle.
Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device.
Vertical Rotation: 80 degree elevation and 60 degree depression with
locking device.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.

WALL FIRE HYDRANTS

Description: Cast-brass body with brass, wall, escutcheon plates;

brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass,
lugged swivel connections. Include outlets with threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
sizes and threads, inlet with pipe threads, extension pipe
nipple, and valve control.
Type: Flush mounting.
Type: Exposed, projecting mounting.
Escutcheon Plates: Round.
Escutcheon Plates: Square or rectangular.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
Finish: Polished brass.
Hydrant, Escutcheon-Plate Marking: "HYDRANT."
Hydrant, Valve Control: Wall-mounting assembly with extension rod for
manual control of valve inside building.
Hydrant, Valve Escutcheon Plate Marking: "HYDRANT VALVE CONTROL."

FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with

brass, wall, escutcheon plate; brass, lugged caps with gaskets
and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include
inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local
fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads,
extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
 escutcheon plate with marking "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
Fire department connections shall be suitable for use by [Dubai
Airport Fire Brigade].
Type: Flush mounting.
Type: Exposed, projecting mounting.
Escutcheon Plate: Round.
Escutcheon Plate: Square.
Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
Finish: Polished brass.
Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-
brass body, inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and
matching local fire department sizes and threads, and bottom
outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets,
and brass chains; brass, lugged swivel connection and drop
clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 450-mm high brass
sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking
"AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." Fire department connections shall
be suitable for use by [Dubai Airport Fire Brigade].
Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated.
Finish Including Sleeve: Rough chrome-plated.
Finish Including Sleeve: Polished brass.

ALARM DEVICES

General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.

Water-Motor-Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical-operation type
with pelton-wheel operator with shaft length, bearings, and
sleeve to suit wall construction and 250 mm diameter, cast-
aluminum alarm gong with red enamel factory finish. Include
DN20 inlet and DN25 drain connections.
Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type
water-flow detector; with 1725 kPa pressure rating; and
designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include 2 single-
pole, double- throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and
auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125 V ac and 0.25 A, 24 V dc; complete
with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent
false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if
 removed.
Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow
switch with retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw,
normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising
pressure and signals water-flow.
Valve Supervisory Switches: Provide valve supervisory switch(es) to
monitor the open position of valve(s) controlling water supply
to the standpipe system, UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double
throw; with normally closed contacts. Include design that
signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
Switch contacts shall transfer from the normal (valve open)
position to the off-normal (valve closed) position during the
first 2 revolutions of the hand wheel or when the stem of the
valve has moved not more than one-fifth of the distance from
its normal position. Switch shall be tamper resistant. Removal
of the cover shall cause switch to operate into the off-normal
position.
Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole,
double throw; with normally closed contacts. Include design
that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully
open position.

PRESSURE GAGES

Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90 to 115 mm diameter dial with dial range

of 0 to 1725 kPa.

PART - EXECUTION
GENERAL

Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication,

assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall
be in accordance with the NFPA standards referenced herein.
The system piping shall be protected against damage from
earthquakes. Seismic protection shall include flexible and rigid
 couplings, sway bracing, seismic separation assemblies where
piping crosses building seismic separation joints, and other
features as required by NFPA 13 for protection of piping
against damage from earthquakes.
Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all
connections Make changes in piping sizes through standard
reducing pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut pipe accurately
and work into place without springing or forcing.
Ream pipe ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with
solvent to remove all varnish and cutting oil prior to assembly.
Make screw joints with PTFE tape applied to male thread only.
Exposed piping shall be installed so as not to diminish exit access
widths, corridors, or equipment access. Exposed horizontal
piping, including drain piping, shall be installed to provide
maximum headroom.
In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with
concealed spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed
above ceilings. Piping shall be inspected, tested, and approved
before being concealed. Risers and similar vertical runs of
piping in finished areas shall be concealed. Install piping
straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports.
Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible.

PREPARATION

Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291.

Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality
Assurance" Article in Part 1 of this Section.
Report test results promptly and in writing.

EARTHWORK

Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching,

and backfilling.

EXAMINATION
 Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify
actual locations of piping connections before installation.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-
rated construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and
other conditions where hose connections and stations are to
be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.

PIPING APPLICATIONS

Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.

Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure
ratings the same as or higher than system's pressure rating
may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise
indicated.
Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use
galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends;
cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use
galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved
joints.
Underground Service-Entrance Piping: RTRP (GRE) pipe and fittings.
Refer to Division 15, Section “Water Distribution Piping” for
pipes underground and upstream of backflow preventer.
Standpipes: Use the following:
DN100 and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
DN100 and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
DN125 and DN150: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
DN200 and Larger: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
Wet-Pipe Sprinklers: Use the following:
DN40 and Smaller:Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
 ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
DN50: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-
or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
DN50: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with plain ends; locking-lug
fittings; and twist- locked joints.
DN50: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
DN65 to DN90: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
ends; cast- or malleable- iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
DN65 to DN90: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
DN100: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-
or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
DN100: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
DN125 and DN150: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
Dry-Pipe Sprinklers: Use the following:
Sprinkler-Piping Option: Mechanical-T bolted-branch-outlet fittings, DN50
and smaller, may be used downstream from sprinkler zone valves.
DN40 and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with
threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
DN40 and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with plain
ends; locking-lug fittings; and twist-locked joints.
DN50 : Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-
or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
DN50 : Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with plain ends; locking-lug
fittings; and twist- locked joints.
DN50 : Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
DN65 to DN100 : Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded
ends; cast- or malleable- iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
DN65 to DN100 : Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.

VALVE APPLICATIONS

Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types

are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FM approved for applications
where required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods" for basic piping joint construction.
Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut
and roll-grooved ends. Assemble joints with couplings, gaskets,
lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's
written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry-pipe service for
dry piping.
Press-Seal-Fitting Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure and
follow fitting manufacturer's written instructions. Include use
of specific equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.
Locking-Lug-Fitting, Twist-Locked Joints: Follow fitting
manufacturer's written instructions.

SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

Connect standpipe and sprinkler piping to water-service piping of

size and in location indicated for service entrance to building.
Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior
piping.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and
other accessories indicated at connection to water-service
piping. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for
backflow preventers.

WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION

Connect standpipe and sprinkler piping to building interior water

distribution piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Water
Distribution Piping" for interior piping.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and
other accessories indicated at connection to water distribution
piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
backflow preventers.
PIPING INSTALLATION

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods" for basic piping installation.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and
diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping.
Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written
approval from the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File
written approval with the Engineer before deviating from approved
working plans.
Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24
and with restrained joints.
Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs
from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 and smaller.
Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping
installations using grooved joints.
Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having DN65 and larger connections.
Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete
with shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers
adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to
standpipes.
Install drain valves on standpipes.
Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department
connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside
building.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
Install according to NFPA 13 for sprinkler piping and to NFPA
14 for standpipes.
Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to
protect from earthquake damage.
Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Construct rigid piping joints, unless
otherwise indicated.
 Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test
connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure
gages with connection not less than DN8 and with soft metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage
and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where
they will not be subject to freezing.

VALVE INSTALLATION

Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installing general-duty

valves. Install fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
Gate Valves: Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open,
located to control sources of water supply except from fire
department connections. Provide permanent identification
signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
Valves for Wall Fire Hydrants: Install gate valve with nonrising stem
in supply pipe.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow
preventers instead of check valves in potable-water supply
sources.
Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper
direction of flow, including bypass check valve and retard
chamber drain-line connection.
Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow,
in main supply to deluge system.

SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications:

Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
Rooms without Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
Rooms without Ceilings: Upright and pendent sprinklers, as indicated.
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers.
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Flush sprinklers.
 Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and
concealed sprinklers, as indicated.
Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright; pendent, dry-type; and sidewall, dry-
type sprinklers.
Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright and pendent, open sprinklers.
Special Applications: Use extended-coverage, flow-control, and quick-
response sprinklers where indicated.
Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes:
Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome-plated in finished
spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not
exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or
other corrosive fumes.
Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover
plate.
Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.

SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

Install sprinklers in patterns indicated.

Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels
and tiles.
Pendent Sprinklers: Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist
of minimum 25 mm pipe with a reducing coupling into which
the sprinkler shall be threaded. Hangers shall be provided on
arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent sprinklers when
the arm-over exceeds 300 mm. Where sprinklers are installed
below suspended or dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be cut
such that sprinkler ceiling plates or escutcheons are of a
uniform depth throughout the finished space. The outlet of the
reducing coupling shall not extend more than 25 mm below
the underside of the ceiling. On pendent sprinklers installed
below suspended or dropped ceilings, the distance from the
sprinkler deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not
exceed 100 mm. Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be installed
such that the distance from the sprinkler deflector to the
underside of the ceiling shall not exceed the manufacturer's
listed range and shall be of uniform depth throughout the
 finished area.
Upright Sprinklers: Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers
shall contain no fittings between the branch line tee and the
reducing coupling at the sprinkler. Riser nipples exceeding 750
mm in length shall be individually supported.

HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION

Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise

indicated.
Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum
passage restriction.
Install DN40 hose-connection valves with flow restricting device,
unless otherwise indicated.
Install DN65 hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 to DN40
reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include
pipe escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet
where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Division 10
Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets.

HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION

Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage

restriction.
Install DN40 hose-station valves with flow-restricting device, unless
otherwise indicated.
Install DN65 hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 by DN40
reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached
to standpipe or substrate.
Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include
pipe escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet
where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
 angle required for connection of fire hose. Cabinets are
specified in Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection Specialties."
Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket attached to
substrate.

ROOF HOSE CABINET INSTALLATION

Install cabinets according to manufacturer's written instructions.

CONNECTIONS

Connect water-supply piping and standpipes and sprinklers to fire

pumps. Include backflow preventers.
Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department
connection. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire
department connections, and accessories.
Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
Connect excess-pressure pumps to the following piping and wiring:
Sprinkler system, hydraulically.
Pressure gages and controls, hydraulically.
Electrical power system.
Alarm device accessories for pump.
Fire alarm system.

LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according

to requirements in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and in Division 15
Section "Mechanical Identification."

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13,

"System Acceptance" Chapter.
Flush, test, and inspect standpipes according to NFPA 14, "Tests and
Inspection" Chapter.
 Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures
and retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction.

CLEANING

Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory
finish.
PROTECTION

Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.

COMMISSIONING

Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories

are installed and operate correctly.
Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating
not specified are replaced with new, correct type.
Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and
temperature ratings, and have guards as required for each
application.
Verify that potable-water supplies have correct types of backflow
preventers.
Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have
threads compatible with local fire department equipment.
Fill wet-pipe sprinkler piping with water.
Fill standpipes with water.
Verify that hose connections are correct type and size.
Verify that hose stations are correct type and size.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
Start and run air compressors.
 Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

PRELIMINARY TESTS

The system, including the underground water mains, and the

aboveground piping and system components, shall be tested to
assure that equipment and components function as intended.
The underground and aboveground interior piping systems and
attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure
shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and NFPA
24.
Upon completion of specified tests, the Contractor shall complete
certificates as specified in paragraph SUBMITTALS.
Underground Piping:
Flushing: Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA
24. This includes the requirement to flush the lead-in connection to
the fire protection system at a flow rate not less that the calculated
maximum water demand rate of the system.
Hydrostatic Testing: New underground piping shall be hydrostatically
tested in accordance with NFPA 24. The allowable leakage shall be
measured at the specified test pressure by pumping from a
calibrated container. The amount of leakage at the joints shall not
exceed 1.89 liters per hour per 100 gaskets or joints, regardless of
pipe diameter.
Aboveground Piping
Hydrostatic Testing: Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in
accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 at not less than 1400 kPa
350 kPa in excess of maximum system operating pressure and shall
maintain that pressure without loss for 2 hours. There shall be no
drop in gage pressure or visible leakage when the system is
subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall be read
from a gage located at the low elevation point of the system or
portion being tested.
Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test: Each backflow
prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand,
including all applicable hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13 and
NFPA 14. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and
instruments necessary to conduct a complete forward flow test,
including 65 mm diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, calibrated
pressure gages, and pitot tube gage. The Contractor shall provide all
necessary supports to safely secure hoses and nozzles during the
test. At the system demand flow, the pressure readings and
 pressure drop (friction) across the assembly shall be recorded. A
metal placard shall be provided on the backflow prevention
assembly that lists the pressure readings both upstream and
downstream of the assembly, total pressure drop, and the system
test flow rate. The pressure drop shall be compared to the
manufacturer's data.
Testing of Alarm Devices: Each alarm switch shall be tested by
flowing water through the inspector's test connection. Each
water-operated alarm devices shall be tested to verify proper
operation.
Main Drain Flow Test: Following flushing of the underground piping,
a main drain test shall be made to verify the adequacy of the
water supply. In addition, a main drain test shall be conducted
each time after a main control valve is shut and opened.

FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST

Final Acceptance Test shall begin only when the Preliminary Test
Report has been approved. The Fire Protection Specialist shall
conduct the Final Acceptance Test and shall provide a
complete demonstration of the operation of the system in the
presence and to the satisfaction of the authorities having
jurisdiction. This shall include operation of control valves and
flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of
associated waterflow alarm switches. After operation of
control valves has been completed, the main drain test shall be
repeated to assure that control valves are in the open position.
In addition, the representative shall have available copies of as-
built drawings and certificates of tests previously conducted.
The installation shall not be considered accepted until
identified discrepancies have been corrected and test
documentation is properly completed and received and
accepted by the authorities having jurisdiction.

DEMONSTRATION

Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain fire-suppression piping and equipment. Refer to
Division 1 Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout
Procedures]."

SECTION 31
ELECTRIC-DRIVE, HORIZONTAL FIRE PUMPS
PART- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes electric-drive, horizontal fire pumps for

building fire-suppression systems and the following:
Split-case fire pumps.
Pressure-maintenance pumps.
Fire-pump controllers.
Automatic transfer switches.
Pressure-maintenance-pump controllers.
Fire-pump specialties and accessories.
Pressure-maintenance-pump specialties and accessories.
Alarm panels.
Flow-measuring systems.
Related Sections include the following:
Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for feed-main, fire-
suppression piping at fire pumps.
Division 13 Section "Standpipes and Hoses" for feed-main, fire-
suppression piping at fire pumps.
Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for connection to alarm panel.
Division 16 Sections for power and connections to fire-pump and
pressure-maintenance-pump controllers.

DEFINITIONS

Fire Pump: Horizontal-type fire pump used to supply water at rated

capacity and total head required for fire-suppression service.
Fire-Pump Unit: Assembly with fire pump, driver, controller, and
related accessories.
Pressure-Maintenance Pump: Electric-drive pump used to maintain
water pressure in fire-suppression piping system.
Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Unit: Assembly with pressure-
maintenance pump, driver, controller, and related accessories.
Split-Case Fire Pump: Axially split-case, horizontal fire pump with its
housing split parallel to shaft.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Fire-Pump Systems: Fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump

units that comply with performance requirements specified
and are compatible with building fire-suppression systems.
Pump, Equipment, Accessory, and Piping Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa
minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher rating is
indicated.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Include rated capacities; certified pump performance

curves with each selection point indicated; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories
for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump unit and
flow-measuring system.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of
field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump unit.
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Shop Drawings may be incorporated into other Division 13 fire-
suppression piping system Shop Drawings.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of fire pumps and
fire-pump controllers certifying that products furnished comply
with requirements.
Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in
Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
Maintenance Data: For each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump unit to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose fire pumps, pressure-

maintenance pumps, drivers, controllers, and accessories are
listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire
Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection
Approval Guide" and that comply with requirements indicated.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump units through one source with responsibility and
accountability to respond to and resolve problems regarding
compatibility, installation, performance, and acceptance of
units.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and
dimensional requirements of fire- pump and pressure-
maintenance-pump units and are based on specific models
selected. Other manufacturers' pump units with equal
performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on
equipment made to specified standards.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to the Engineer.
Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining
to materials, hose threads, and installation.
Comply with NFPA 20, "Centrifugal Fire Pumps," for fire pumps,
drivers, controllers, accessories, and installation.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Preparation for Shipping: After assembling and testing fire pumps

and pressure-maintenance pumps, protect flanges and
exposed machined metal surfaces, pipe openings, and nozzles.
Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings
during storage.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or
other foreign matter.
PART - PRODUCTS
PART - STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such
products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily
completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less
than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations.

SPLIT-CASE FIRE PUMPS

Single-Stage, Horizontally Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448,

factory-assembled and -tested, electric-drive, double-suction,
horizontal type. Include pump and driver mounted on same
base and connected with coupling.
Single-Stage, Vertically Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448,
factory-assembled and -tested, electric-drive, double-suction,
horizontal type. Include pump mounted on baseplate and
connected to driver with coupling.
Multistage, Horizontally Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448,
factory-assembled and -tested, electric-drive, two-stage,
single-suction, horizontal type. Include pump and driver
mounted on same base and connected with coupling.
Characteristics: Capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated
capacity at not less than 65 percent of total rated head. Shutoff
head is limited to 140 percent of total rated head.
Casing: Axially split cast iron with suction and discharge flanges machined
 to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions, unless Class 250 flanges are
indicated.
Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically and
dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.
Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of 4 rings of graphite-impregnated
braided yarn and bronze packing gland.
Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment. Include metal coupling guard.
Driver: Electric motor.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
Nameplate: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other pertinent
data.

PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, electric-drive pumps

with cast-iron or stainless-steel casing and bronze or stainless-
steel impellers and mechanical seals. Include flanged suction
and discharge flanges machined to ASME B16.1, Class 125
dimensions, unless Class 250 flanges are indicated and except
that connections may be threaded in sizes where flanges are
not available.
Multistage, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps: Multiple-impeller type
complying with HI 1.1-1.5 requirements for multistage centrifugal
pumps. Include base.
Regenerative-Turbine, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps:Close-coupled type
complying with HI 1.1-1.5 requirements for regenerative-turbine
centrifugal pumps. Include base.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, and other pertinent
data.

PUMP DRIVERS

Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B standards. .open-dripproof,

squirrel-cage, induction motor. Include construction complying
with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70, and include wiring compatible with
controller used. Motor wattage (horsepower) shall be of
 sufficient size so that the nameplate wattage (horsepower)
rating will not be exceeded throughout the entire published
pump characteristic curve. The motor and fire pump controller
shall be fully compatible.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
Nameplate: Complete with motor horsepower, characteristics, and other
pertinent data.

PUMP CONTROLLERS, GENERAL

Description: Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation;

factory assembled and wired; factory tested for capacities and
electrical characteristics; and with the following features:
Enclosure: UL 50, Type 2, dripproof, indoor, unless special-purpose
enclosure is indicated.
Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as
required for drivers and controller types used, and specific items
listed for each controller type.
Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and
listings, and other pertinent data.
Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to NFPA 20
with nonferrous- metal sensing piping, DN15, with globe valves for
testing controller mechanism from system to pump controller as
indicated. Include bronze check valve with 2.4 mm orifice in clapper
or ground-face union with noncorrosive diaphragm having 2.4 mm
orifice.
Interface Panel: Factory supplied interface panel to communicate and
transmit data between the pump controller and BMS. All required
data as from pumps as specified to be transmitted to BMS.
Interface panel to be capable for communication with the specified
BMS system.

FIRE-PUMP CONTROLLERS

Description: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for electric-drive, fire-pump

service and service entrance.
Type Starting: Across the line.
Type Starting: Primary-resistance, closed transition.
Type Starting: Part-winding, closed transition.
Type Starting: Wye-delta, closed transition.
Type Starting: Wye-delta, open transition.
Type Starting: Autotransformer, closed transition.
Type Starting: Solid-state, closed transition.
 Rate controllers for scheduled horsepower. Include short-circuit
withstand rating at least equal to short- circuit current
available at controller location. Take into account cable size
and distance from substation or supply transformers.
Automatic Transfer Switches: UL 218 and UL 1008 and requirements
for and attached to fire-pump controllers. Include enclosure
complying with UL 50, Type 2, with automatic transfer switch
with rating at least equal to fire-pump driver-motor
horsepower. Include ampere rating not less than 115 percent
of motor full-load current and suitable for switching motor-
locked rotor current.
Controllers: As follows:
Isolating means and circuit breaker.
"Power on" pilot lamp.
Fire alarm system connections for indicating motor running condition,
loss-of-line power, and line-power phase reversal.
Automatic and manual operation, and minimum run-time relay to
prevent short cycling.
Water-pressure-actuated switch with independent high and low
calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-
suppression system.
Automatic and manual shutdown.
System pressure recorder, electric ac driven with spring backup.
Mounting: Wall type for field electrical connections.
Mounting: Floor-stand type for field electrical connections.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested unit before shipping.

PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE-PUMP CONTROLLERS

Description: UL 508; factory-assembled, -wired, and -tested across-

the-line type for combined automatic and nonautomatic
operation.
Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2, wall-mounting type for field
electrical wiring.
Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the
following:
Fusible disconnect switch.
Pressure switch.
Hand-off-auto selector switch.
Pilot light.
Running period timer.
 Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested unit before shipping.

FIRE-PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES

Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-

pump capacity rating. Include the following:
Automatic air-release valve.
Circulation relief valve.
Suction and discharge pressure gages.
Eccentric-tapered reducer at suction inlet.
Concentric-tapered reducer at discharge outlet.
Test-Header Manifold: Ferrous for hose valves. Manufacturer's standard
finish. Include bronze or cast-iron, exposed-type valve header with
nozzle outlets; and round, brass escutcheon plate with lettering
equivalent to "PUMP TEST CONNECTION."
Hose Valves: UL 668, straightway pattern, bronze with cap and chain.
Include NFPA 1963 hose thread that complies with local fire
department standards and finish same as for test-header- manifold
escutcheon plate.
Ball Drip Valve: UL 1726.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint, unless brass or
other finish is specified.
Pressure Sensing Line:
A completely separate pressure sensing line shall be provided for each
fire pump and for the jockey pump. The sensing line shall be
arranged in accordance with Figure A-7-5.2.1. of NFPA 20. The
sensing line shall be 15 mm H58 brass tubing complying with ASTM
B 135M.
The sensing line shall be equipped with 2 restrictive orifice unions each.
Restricted orifice unions shall be ground-face unions with brass
restricted diaphragms drilled for a 2.4 mm. Restricted orifice unions
shall be mounted in the horizontal position, not less than 1.5 m
apart on the sensing line.
2 test connections shall be provided for each sensing line. Test
connections shall consist of 2 brass 15 mm globe valves and 8 mm
gage connection tee arranged per NFPA 20. One of the test
connections shall be equipped with a 0 to 1380 kPa water oil-filled
gage.
Sensing line shall be connected to the pump discharge piping between
the discharge piping control valve and the check valve.

PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE-PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES

Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and discharge ratings as

required for pump capacity rating. Include the following:
 Circulation relief valve.
Suction and discharge pressure gages.

ALARM PANELS

Description: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying

with UL 508 and requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and
visible alarms matching controller type.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested unit before shipping.
Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the
following:
Motor-operating condition.
Loss-of-line power.
Phase reversal.
Low-water alarm.

FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS

Description: FM-approved, fire-pump, flow-measuring systems that

indicate flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated
capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing, flow
meter, and fittings.
Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa minimum.
Sensor: Venturi, annular probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise
indicated.
Flow Meter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 115 mm
in diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
Permanently Mounted: Flow meter suitable for wall mounting with
copper tubing to connect to flow sensor.
Include complete operating instructions.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Factory Tests: Hydrostatically test and test run fire pumps before
shipping. Test at 150 percent of shutoff head plus suction head,
but not less than 1725 kPa. Produce certified test curves
showing head capacity and brake horsepower of each pump.
GROUT

Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and
exterior applications.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-
cement grout.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength.

PART- EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with the

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting fire-pump
performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Examine roughing-in of fire-suppression piping systems. Verify
actual locations of piping connections before pump
installation.

CONCRETE BASES

Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, for fire pumps, pressure- maintenance pumps, and
controllers. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."

INSTALLATION

Comply with fire-pump, pressure-maintenance-pump, and

controller manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions, and with NFPA 20.
Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic
 maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
Set base-mounting-type pumps on concrete bases. Disconnect
coupling halves before setting. Do not reconnect couplings
until alignment operations have been completed.
Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on
metal wedges having small taper, at points near foundation bolts to
provide 19 to 38 mm gap between pump base and foundation for
grouting.
Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level.
Check coupling faces and pump suction and discharge flanges to
verify that they are level and plumb.
Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than
diameter of fire-pump nozzles.
Install valves that are the same size as piping connecting fire pumps,
bypasses, test headers, and other piping systems.
Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge at
pressure-gage tappings.
Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not
rest on pumps.
Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves,
meters and gages, and equipment supports.
Install flow meters and sensors where indicated. Install flow-
measuring-system components and make connections
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment
manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram Submittals to
the electrical Installer.
Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturers'
submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
Proceed with equipment startup only after wiring installation is
satisfactory.

ALIGNMENT

Align fire-pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been
leveled on foundation, grout has set, and foundation bolts
have been tightened.
 After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not
too firmly. Fill baseplate completely with grout, with metal
blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten foundation bolts
after grout has hardened. Check alignment and make required
corrections.
Make piping connections, check alignment, and make required
corrections.
Adjust alignment of pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel
alignment by one method in HI 1.1-1.5, Section 1.4, "Installation,
Operation and Maintenance."
Alignment Tolerances: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Align vertically mounted, split-case pump and driver shafts after
complete unit has been made plumb on foundation, grout has
set, and foundation bolts have been tightened. Follow pump
manufacturer's written instructions.

CONNECTIONS

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 13

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and
specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
Install piping adjacent to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps to allow
service and maintenance.
Connect water supply to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps.
Connect fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump discharge piping to
building fire- suppression piping.
Connect relief-valve discharge to point of disposal.
Connect flow-measuring-system meters and sensors according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Connect fire-pump controllers to building fire alarm system. Refer
to Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
Connect controllers to pumps.
Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16
Sections.
Ground equipment.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values
are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field- assembled components and
equipment installation, including fire-pump and pressure-
maintenance- pump units, piping, and electrical connections.
Report results in writing.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
Check suction line connections for tightness so no air gets into pumps.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm
drain or other acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test
water. Fire hoses are for field-acceptance tests only and are not
property of Employer.
Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following preventive-
maintenance operations and checks:
Lubricate oil-lubrication-type bearings.
Remove grease-lubrication-type bearing covers, flush bearings with
kerosene, and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation.
Rotation shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or if it drags
even slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined
and corrected.
Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare
pump for operation.
Open sealing liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
Start motor.
Open discharge valve slowly.
Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for
proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland
immediately but let packing run in before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes.
Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
Perform field tests for each fire-pump unit and system piping when
installation is complete. Comply with operating instructions
and procedures in NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning
equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace
equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or that does
not perform as indicated, then retest to demonstrate
 compliance. Verify that each fire-pump unit performs as
indicated. Report test results in writing.

DEMONSTRATION

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain fire pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section
"[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."
Schedule at least 8 hours of training. Copyright 1997, The American
Institute of Architects (AIA)

SECTION 32
DIESEL-DRIVE, HORIZONTAL FIRE PUMPS

PART 54 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes diesel-drive, horizontal fire pumps for building

fire-suppression systems and the following:
Split-case fire pumps.
Pressure-maintenance pumps.
Fire-pump controllers.
Pressure-maintenance-pump controllers.
Fire-pump specialties and accessories.
Pressure-maintenance-pump specialties and accessories.
Alarm panels.
Flow-measuring systems.
Related Sections include the following:
Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for connection to alarm panel.
Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for feed-main, fire-
 suppression piping at fire pumps.
Division 13 Section "Standpipes and Hoses" for feed-main, fire-
suppression piping at fire pumps.
Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulating fire-pump, diesel-
engine-driver exhaust systems.
Division 16 Sections for power and connections to fire-pump and
pressure-maintenance-pump controllers.
DEFINITIONS

Fire Pump: Horizontal-type fire pump used to supply water at rated

capacity and total head required for fire-suppression service.
Fire-Pump Unit: Assembly with fire pump, driver, controller, and
related accessories.
Pressure-Maintenance Pump: Electric-drive pump used to maintain
water pressure in fire-suppression piping system.
Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Unit: Assembly with pressure-
maintenance pump, driver, controller, and related accessories.
Split-Case Fire Pump: Axially split-case, horizontal fire pump with its
housing split parallel to shaft.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Fire-Pump Systems: Fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump

units that comply with performance requirements specified
and are compatible with building fire-suppression systems.
Pump, Equipment, Accessory, and Piping Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa
minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher rating is
indicated.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Include rated capacities; certified pump performance

curves with each selection point indicated; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories
for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump unit and
flow-measuring system.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of
 field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection for each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump unit.
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Shop Drawings may be incorporated into other Division 13 fire-
suppression piping system Shop Drawings.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of fire pumps and
fire-pump controllers certifying that products furnished comply
with requirements.
Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in
Part 3 of this Section, Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
Maintenance Data: For each fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump unit to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose fire pumps, pressure-

maintenance pumps, drivers, controllers, and accessories are
listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's "Fire
Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection
Approval Guide" and that comply with requirements indicated.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-
pump units through one source with responsibility and
accountability to respond to and resolve problems regarding
compatibility, installation, performance, and acceptance of
units.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and
dimensional requirements of fire- pump and pressure-
maintenance-pump units and are based on specific models
selected. Other manufacturers' pump units with equal
performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on
equipment made to specified standards.
 Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to the Engineer.
Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining
to materials, hose threads, and installation.
Comply with NFPA 20, "Centrifugal Fire Pumps," for fire pumps,
drivers, controllers, accessories, and installation.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Preparation for Shipping: After assembling and testing fire pumps

and pressure-maintenance pumps, protect flanges and
exposed machined metal surfaces, pipe openings, and nozzles.
Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings
during storage.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or
other foreign matter.

PART - PRODUCTS
STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such
products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily
completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less
than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System
components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations.
SPLIT-CASE FIRE PUMPS

Single-Stage, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448, factory-assembled and -

tested, diesel-drive, horizontally mounted, double-suction,
horizontal type. Include pump and driver mounted on same
base and connected with coupling.
Multistage, Split-Case Fire Pumps: UL 448, factory-assembled and -
tested, diesel-drive, horizontally mounted, two-stage, single-
suction, horizontal type. Include pump and driver mounted on
same base and connected with coupling.
Characteristics: Capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated
capacity at not less than 65 percent of total rated head. Shutoff
head is limited to 140 percent of total rated head.
Casing: Axially split cast iron with suction and discharge flanges machined
to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions, unless Class 250 flanges are
indicated.
Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically and
dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.
Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.
Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of 4 rings of graphite-impregnated
braided yarn and bronze packing gland.
Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment. Include metal coupling guard.
Driver: Diesel engine.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested units before shipping.
Nameplates: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other
pertinent data.

PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, electric-drive pumps

with cast-iron or stainless-steel casing and bronze or stainless-
steel impellers and mechanical seals. Include flanged suction
and discharge flanges machined to ASME B16.1, Class 125
dimensions, unless Class 250 flanges are indicated and except
that connections may be threaded in sizes where flanges are
not available.
Multistage, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps: Multiple-impeller type
complying with HI 1.1-1.5 requirements for multistage centrifugal
 pumps. Include base.
Regenerative-Turbine, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps: Close-coupled type
complying with HI 1.1-1.5 requirements for regenerative-turbine
centrifugal pumps. Include base.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, and other pertinent
data.
PUMP DRIVERS

Fire-Pump Drivers: UL 1247, horizontal-shaft, open-type diesel

engine. Include the following:
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
Nameplate: Complete with engine horsepower, characteristics, and other
pertinent data.
Emergency Manual Operator: Factory wired for standby engine starting
and operation in case of main controller or wiring malfunction.
Engine Cooling System: Factory-installed water piping, valves, strainer,
pressure regulator, heat exchanger, coolant pump, bypass piping,
and fittings. Include ASTM B 88M, Type B , copper water tube;
ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; AWS
A5.8, BCuP Series brazing filler metal; and brazed joints.
Exhaust Connector: Flexible type.
Exhaust Silencer: Residential type.
Engine-Jacket Water Heater: Factory-installed electric elements.
Dual Batteries: Lead-acid-storage type, with 100 percent standby reserve
capacity.
Fuel System: According to NFPA 20.
Fuel Storage Tank: Size indicated, but not less than required by NFPA 20.
Include floor legs, direct-reading level gage, and secondary
containment tank with capacity at least equal to fuel storage tank.
Exhaust System: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Schedule 40, black steel pipe;
ASME B16.9, weld- type pipe fittings; ASME B16.5, steel flanges;
and ASME B16.21, nonmetallic gaskets. Fabricate double-wall,
ventilated thimble from steel pipe.
Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Drivers: NEMA MG 1, open-dripproof,
squirrel-cage, induction motor. Include construction complying
with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70, and include wiring compatible with
controller used.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
Nameplate: Complete with motor horsepower, characteristics, and other
pertinent data.
PUMP CONTROLLERS, GENERAL

Description: Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation;

 factory assembled and wired; factory tested for capacities and
electrical characteristics; and with the following features:
Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as
required for drivers and controller types used, and specific items
listed for each controller type.
Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and
listings, and other pertinent data.
Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to NFPA 20
with nonferrous- metal sensing piping, DN15, with globe valves for
testing controller mechanism from system to pump controller as
indicated. Include bronze check valve with 2.4-mm orifice in clapper
or ground-face union with noncorrosive diaphragm having 2.4-mm
orifice.
Interface Panel: Factory supplied interface panel to communicate and
transmit data between the pump controller and BMS. All required
data as from pumps as specified to be transmitted to BMS.
Interface panel to be capable for communication with the specified
BMS system.

FIRE-PUMP CONTROLLERS

Description: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for diesel-drive, fire-pump

service. Include the following:
Enclosure: UL 50, Type 2, dripproof, indoor, unless special-purpose
enclosure is indicated.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested unit before shipping.
Mounting: Wall type for field electrical connections.
Mounting: Floor-stand type for field electrical connections.
Built-in dual-battery charger.
Time clock for weekly automatic test.
System pressure recorder, electric ac driven with spring backup.
Timing relay for automatic stop.
Power failure start, with time delay to prevent start at momentary loss of
power.
Low-fuel-level alarm.
Alarm contacts for remote alarm of "Engine Run," "Switch Off," and
"Engine Failure."
Pump room alarms, including both audible and visible signals.

PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE-PUMP CONTROLLERS

Description: UL 508; factory-assembled, -wired, and -tested; across-

the-line type for combined automatic and nonautomatic
operation.
 Enclosure: UL 508 and UL 50, Type 2, wall-mounting type for field
electrical wiring. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and
include the following:
Fusible disconnect switch.
Pressure switch.
Hand-off-auto selector switch.
Pilot light.
Running period timer.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested unit before shipping.

FIRE-PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES

Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-

pump capacity rating. Include the following:
Automatic air-release valve.
Circulation relief valve.
Suction and discharge pressure gages.
Eccentric-tapered reducer at suction inlet.
Concentric-tapered reducer at discharge outlet.
Test-Header Manifold: Ferrous for hose valves. Manufacturer's standard
finish. Include bronze or cast-iron, exposed-type valve header with
nozzle outlets; and round, brass escutcheon plate with lettering
equivalent to "PUMP TEST CONNECTION."
Hose Valves: UL 668, straightway pattern, bronze with cap and chain.
Include NFPA 1963 hose thread that complies with local fire
department standards and finish same as for test-header- manifold
escutcheon plate.
Ball Drip Valve: UL 1726.
Main Relief Valve: UL 1478, pilot operated.
Main Relief Valve: UL 1478, spring loaded.
Discharge Cone: Closed.
Discharge Cone: Open.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint, unless brass
or other finish is specified.
Pressure Sensing Line:
A completely separate pressure sensing line shall be provided for each
fire pump and for the jockey pump. The sensing line shall be
arranged in accordance with Figure A-7-5.2.1. of NFPA 20. The
sensing line shall be 15 mm H58 brass tubing complying with ASTM
B 135M.
The sensing line shall be equipped with 2 restrictive orifice unions each.
Restricted orifice unions shall be ground-face unions with brass
restricted diaphragms drilled for a 2.4 mm. Restricted orifice unions
shall be mounted in the horizontal position, not less than 1.5 m
apart on the sensing line.
2 test connections shall be provided for each sensing line. Test
 connections shall consist of 2 brass 15 mm globe valves and 8 mm
gage connection tee arranged per NFPA 20. One of the test
connections shall be equipped with a 0 to 1380 kPa water oil-filled
gage.
Sensing line shall be connected to the pump discharge piping between
the discharge piping control valve and the check valve.

PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE-PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES

Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and discharge ratings as

required for pump capacity rating. Include the following:
Circulation relief valve.
Suction and discharge pressure gages.

ALARM PANELS

Description: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying

with UL 508 and requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and
visible alarms matching controller type.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type.
Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-
assembled and -tested unit before shipping.
Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the
following:
Engine running.
Main switch off or in manual position.
Engine trouble.
Low-water alarm.
Low fuel.

FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS

Description: FM-approved, fire-pump, flow-measuring systems that

indicate flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated
capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing, flow
meter, and fittings.
Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa minimum.
Sensor: Venturi, annular probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise
indicated.
Flow Meter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 115 mm
in diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
Permanently Mounted: Flow meter suitable for wall mounting with
copper tubing to connect to flow sensor.
 Include complete operating instructions.

BATTERIES:

Batteries for diesel engine driver shall be sealed lead calcium

batteries. Batteries shall be mounted in a steel rack with non-
corrosive, non-conductive base, not less than 300 mm above
the floor.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Factory Tests: Hydrostatically test and test run fire pumps before
shipping. Test at 150 percent of shutoff head plus suction head,
but not less than 1725 kPa. Produce certified test curves
showing head capacity and brake horsepower of each pump.
GROUT

Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged,

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and
exterior applications.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-
cement grout.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28 day compressive strength.

PART - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION

Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with the

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting fire-pump
performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
Examine roughing-in of fire-suppression piping systems. Verify
actual locations of piping connections before pump
installation.
CONCRETE BASES

Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise

required, for fire pumps, pressure- maintenance pumps, and
controllers. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."

INSTALLATION

Comply with fire-pump, pressure-maintenance-pump, and

controller manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions, and with NFPA 20.
Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic
maintenance, including removal of drivers, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
Set base-mounting-type pumps on concrete bases. Disconnect
coupling halves before setting. Do not reconnect couplings
until alignment operations have been completed.
Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on
metal wedges having small taper, at points near foundation bolts to
provide 19 to 38 mm gap between pump base and foundation for
grouting.
Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level.
Check coupling faces and pump suction and discharge flanges to
verify that they are level and plumb.
Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than
diameter of fire-pump nozzles.
Install valves that are the same size as piping connecting fire pumps,
bypasses, test headers, and other piping systems.
Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge at
pressure-gage tappings.
Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not
rest on pumps.
Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves,
meters and gages, and equipment supports.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for basic piping installation and joint construction.
 Install water supply and drain piping for diesel-engine heat
exchangers. Extend drain piping from heat exchangers to point
of disposition.
Install exhaust system piping for diesel engines. Extend to point of
termination outside structure. Install pipe and fittings with
welded joints, and components having flanged connections
with gasketed joints.
Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system.
Extend drain piping from low points of exhaust system to
condensate traps and to point of disposition.
Install flow meters and sensors where indicated. Install flow-
measuring system components and make connections
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment
manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram Submittals to
the electrical Installer.
Verify that electrical wiring is installed according to manufacturers'
submittal and installation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
Proceed with equipment startup only after wiring installation is
satisfactory.

ALIGNMENT

Align fire-pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been
leveled on foundation, grout has set, and foundation bolts
have been tightened.
After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not
too firmly. Fill baseplate completely with grout, with metal
blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten foundation bolts
after grout has hardened. Check alignment and make required
corrections.
Make piping connections, check alignment, and make required
corrections.
Adjust alignment of pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel
alignment by one method in HI 1.1-1.5, Section 1.4, "Installation,
Operation and Maintenance."
Alignment Tolerances: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
CONNECTIONS

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 13

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and
specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
Install piping adjacent to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps to allow
service and maintenance.
Connect water supply to fire and pressure-maintenance pumps.
Connect fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump discharge piping to
building fire- suppression piping.
Connect relief-valve discharge to point of disposal.
Connect cooling-system water supply and drain piping to diesel-engine
heat exchangers.
Connect exhaust system piping to diesel engines.
Connect flow-measuring-system meters and sensors according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Connect fire-pump controllers to building fire alarm system. Refer
to Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
Connect controllers to pumps.
Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16
Sections.
Ground equipment.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values
are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field- assembled components and
equipment installation, including fire-pump and pressure-
maintenance- pump units, piping, and electrical connections.
Report results in writing.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
Check suction line connections for tightness so no air gets into pump.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm
 drain or other acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test
water. Fire hoses are for field-acceptance tests only and are not
property of the Employer.
Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following preventive-
maintenance operations and checks:
Lubricate oil-lubrication-type bearings.
Remove grease-lubrication-type bearing covers, flush bearings with
kerosene, and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Disconnect coupling and check diesel engine for proper rotation. Rotation
shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or if it drags
even slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined
and corrected.
Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
Install coolant in cooling system. Fill closed-loop cooling system with
potable water and add rust inhibitor.
Install coolant in cooling system. Fill closed-loop cooling system with
solution of 50 percent potable water and 50 percent ethylene glycol
permanent antifreeze. Add rust inhibitor if not in antifreeze.
Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare
pump for operation.
Open sealing liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
Start engine.
Open discharge valve slowly.
Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for
proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland
immediately but let packing run in before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes.
Check general mechanical operation of pump and driver.
Perform field tests for each fire-pump unit and system piping when
installation is complete. Comply with operating instructions
and procedures in NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning
equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace
equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or that does
not perform as indicated, then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Verify that each fire-pump unit performs as
indicated. Report test results in writing.

DEMONSTRATION

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain fire pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section
"[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."
Schedule at least 8 hours of training.

SECTION 33
STANDPIPES AND HOSES
PART - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

This Section includes piping and equipment for the following

building systems:
Automatic wet-type, Class I standpipes.
Automatic wet-type, Class II standpipes.
Automatic wet-type, Class III standpipes.
Manual wet-type, Class I standpipes.
Related Sections include the following:
Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets and fire
extinguishers.
Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not in this Section.
Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps."
Division 13 Section "Diesel-Drive, Horizontal Fire Pumps."
Division 13 Section "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps."
Division 13 Section "Diesel-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps."

DEFINITIONS

Hose Connection: Valve with threaded outlet matching fire hose

coupling thread for attaching fire hose.
Hose Station: Hose connection, fire hose rack, and fire hose.
Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and
material specifications prepared according to NFPA 14 for
obtaining approval from the Engineer and authorities having
jurisdiction.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Verify the design of standpipes for compliance with NFPA, and

obtain approval from the Engineer and authorities having
 jurisdiction. Include minimum residual pressures at
hydraulically remote outlets according to the following:
DN40 Hose Connections: 450 kPa.
DN65 Hose Connections: 690 kPa.
Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems
with 1200 kPa minimum working- pressure rating, unless
otherwise indicated.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For the following:

Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for standpipe piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Piping seismic restraints.
Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices.
Alarm devices. Include electrical data.
Air compressors. Include electrical data.
Fire department connections. Include type; number, size, and
arrangement of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet;
escutcheon and marking; and finish.
Hose connections. Include size, type, and finish.
Hose stations. Include size, type, and finish of hose connections; type and
length of fire hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and
finish of nozzles; and finish of rack.
Fire-Hydrant Flow Test Report: As specified in "Preparation" Article
in Part 3 of this Section.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: As specified in "Field Quality
Control" and "Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for
Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
Maintenance Data: For each type of standpipe specialty to include
in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed,

installed, and obtained approvals for fire-suppression piping
similar to that indicated for this Project.
 Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans,
calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is
legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined
as those performed for installations of fire-suppression piping
that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material,
design, and extent.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties,
and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer
in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire
Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other
requirements indicated.
Standpipe Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other
marking by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing
agency acceptable to the Engineer.
NFPA Standard: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and
testing complying with NFPA 14, "Standpipe and Hose
Systems."
Acceptance Testing: Final acceptance testing and demonstration of
the system shall be conducted in the presence of and to the
satisfaction of the DCA fire authorities, as outlined in Part 3 -
Execution.

PART - PRODUCTS
PIPING MATERIALS

Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe,

tube, fitting, and joining materials.
PIPES

Steel Pipe, DN 150 and Smaller: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A

53, Type S (seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40, factory
galvanized.
Steel Pipe, DN 200 and Larger: Standard-Weight Steel Pipe ASTM A
53, Type S (seamless), Grade A, Schedule 40, factory
galvanized.

PIPE FITTINGS

All fittings shall be factory galvanized.

Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A
47, malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with
dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved
according to AWWA C606.
Steel, Press-Seal Fittings: UL 213 and FM-approved, 1200 kPa
pressure rating; with steel housing, butylene O-rings, and pipe
stop; for use with Schedule 5, plain-end, steel pipe. Include UL
45-listed fitting manufacturer's pressure-sealing tools.

JOINING MATERIALS

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods" for pipe-flange gasket materials and welding filler
metals.
Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for steel-pipe
dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile-iron housing, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing for dry-pipe
service for couplings for dry piping.

POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A 674 or

 AWWA C105, film, 0.20-mm minimum thickness, tube or sheet.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, ball, butterfly, globe,

and check valves not required to be UL listed and FM
approved.

FIRE-PROTECTION-SERVICE VALVES

General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200 kPa

nonshock working-pressure rating. Valves for grooved-end
piping may be furnished with grooved ends instead of type of
ends specified.
Gate Valves, DN50 and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends;
solid wedge; OS&Y; and rising stem.
Gate Valves, DN65 and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted,
taper wedge, OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable,
bronze, wedge facing rings, and flanged ends.
Swing Check Valves, DN50 and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class
150; bronze body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
Swing Check Valves, DN65 and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and
bolted cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc
ring and flanged ends.
Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron
body with rubber seal, bronze- alloy discs, and stainless-steel
spring and hinge pin.

SPECIALTY VALVES

Deluge Valves: UL 260, cast-iron body, 1200 kPa working pressure;

hydraulically operated, differential-pressure type. Include
flanged inlet and outlet, bronze seat with O-ring seals, trim sets
for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gages, drip cup assembly piped without valves and separate
from main drain line, fill-line attachment with strainer, and
 push-rod chamber supply connection.
Option: Grooved-end connections for use with grooved-end piping.
Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber
pressure, globe valve for manual operation of deluge valve, and
connection for actuation device.
Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, 2760 kPa minimum rating,
brass. Include DN40 or DN65, female NPS inlet and outlet;
adjustable setting feature; and straight or 90 degree angle
pattern design as indicated.
Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, DN20, ball check
device with threaded ends.

MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15

pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure
labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating
instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to
prevent accidental opening.

HOSE CONNECTIONS

Description: UL 668, 2070 kPa minimum pressure rating, brass,

chrome plated hose valve for connection of fire hose. Include
90 degree angle pattern design; female NPS inlet and male
hose outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include DN40
or DN65 as indicated, and hose valve threads according to
NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.

Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.

Finish: Rough brass.
Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
HOSE STATIONS

Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass,

chrome plated rack nipple; hose rack; Stainless Steel 316
cabinet with 5 mm thick wire glass door, and complete with
the following features:
 Valves: UL 668, 2070 kPa minimum pressure rating, 90 degree angle
pattern hose valve with female NPS inlet and outlet, unless
otherwise indicated.
Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
Flow-Restricting Devices: DN40 brass, chrome plated adjustable for DN40
fire hose inlet.
Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings, gaskets,
and nozzle. Include the following fire hose materials:
Jacket: Synthetic thread.
Lining: Plastic compound.
Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of compounds.
Cover: Optional.
Nozzles: UL 401.
Drain Valves: UL 1726.
Mountings: Pipe clamp or wall bracket for freestanding units.
Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
DN65 by DN40 Hose Stations: DN65 hose valve; DN65 by DN40
reducer adapter; hose rack with water-retention device and
pins for folded, DN40 lined hose; DN40 lined hose with swivel
inlet coupling and nozzle; and reducer adapter spanner
wrench.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.
DN40 Hose Stations: DN40 hose valve; hose rack with water-
retention device and pins for folded, DN40 lined hose; and
DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.
DN65 and DN40 Hose Stations: DN65 hose valve with male
threaded outlet, cap, and chain and DN40 hose valve; hose
rack with water-retention device and pins for folded, DN40
lined hose; and DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and
nozzle.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight
 stream.
DN40 Hose-Reel Hose Stations: DN40 hose valve; hose reel with
water-retention device and pins for DN40 lined hose; and
DN40 lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
Hose-Rack Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass, chrome plated.
Fire Hose: Lined, 30 m length.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.

ROOF HOSE CABINETS

Description: FM-approved, low-profile-type, hose station for roof

mounting. Include the following:
Housing: Stainless Steel 316 construction with reinforcement and
modified to hold not less than length of fire hose indicated.
Shutoff Valve: DN40 gate valve with extended stem.
Hose Connection: DN40 valve.
Fittings: Brass, chrome plated.
Hose: DN40, lined and suitable for exterior service. Include two 23 m
lengths coupled together.
Nozzle: DN40 brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray
or straight stream.
Nozzle: Brass, adjustable-fog type.
Drain Valve: DN15 gate valve with extended stem.
Finish: Polished stainless steel.
Roof Curb: Matching housing dimensions.
Mounting Materials: Structural steel and wood blocking as
recommended in writing by manufacturer.

MONITORS

Description: UL-listed, stationary, single-waterway type for 47.3-L/s

water stream. Include the following features:
Waterway: DN65 minimum, brass tube.
Operation: Lever handle.
Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device.
Vertical Rotation: 80-degree elevation and 60-degree depression with
locking device.
Nozzle: Brass, chrome plated adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or
straight stream.
WALL FIRE HYDRANTS

Description: Cast-brass body with brass wall escutcheon plates;

brass, lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains; and brass,
lugged swivel connections. Include outlets with threads
according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
sizes and threads, inlet with pipe threads, extension pipe
nipple, and valve control.
Type: Flush mounting.
Type: Exposed, projecting mounting.
Escutcheon Plates: Round.
Escutcheon Plates: Square or rectangular.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Hydrant, Escutcheon-Plate Marking: "HYDRANT."
Hydrant, Valve Control: Wall-mounting assembly with extension rod for
manual control of valve inside building.
Hydrant, Valve Escutcheon Plate Marking: "HYDRANT VALVE CONTROL."

FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

Wall, Fire Department Connections: UL 405; cast-brass body with

brass, wall, escutcheon plate; brass, lugged caps with gaskets
and brass chains; and brass, lugged swivel connections. Include
inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local
fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads,
extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and
escutcheon plate with marking "STANDPIPE." Fire department
connections shall be suitable for use by [Dubai Airport Fire-
brigade].
Type: Flush mounting.
Type: Exposed, projecting mounting.
Escutcheon Plate: Round.
Escutcheon Plate: Square.
Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-
brass body, inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and
matching local fire department sizes and threads, and bottom
outlet with pipe threads. Include brass, lugged caps, gaskets,
and brass chains; brass, lugged swivel connection and drop
clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 460-mm- high brass
 sleeve; and round, floor, brass, escutcheon plate with marking
"STANDPIPE." Fire department connections shall be suitable
for use by [Dubai Airport Fire-brigade].
Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome-plated.

ALARM DEVICES

General: Types matching piping and equipment connections.

Water-Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical-supervision, vane-type
water-flow detector; with 1725 kPa pressure rating; and
designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two
single-pole, double- throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm
and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125 V ac and 0.25 A, 24 V dc;
complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to
prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if
removed.
Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow
switch with retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw,
normally closed contacts and design that operate on rising
pressure and signals water flow
Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double
throw; with normally closed contacts. Include design that
signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole,
double throw; with normally closed contacts. Include design
that signals controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully
open position.

PRESSURE GAGES

Pressure Gages: UL 393, 90 to 115 mm diameter dial with dial range

of 0 to 1725 kPa.

CONTROL PANELS

Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type

as indicated. Control panel includes NEMA ICS 6, Type 1
 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for
operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply;
battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip;
electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire alarm
bell; lamp test facility; single- pole, double-throw auxiliary
alarm contacts; and rectifier.
Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and
Class A detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 230 V
ac, 50 Hz, with 24 V dc rechargeable batteries.
Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled
"MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a
cover held closed by breakable strut.
Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, DN15 pipe
nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled
"MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a
cover held closed by breakable strut.

PART - EXECUTION
PREPARATION

Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 291. Use results

for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance"
Article in Part 1 of this Section.
Report test results promptly and in writing.

EARTHWORK

Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching,

and backfilling.

EXAMINATION

Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify

actual locations of piping connections before installation.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-
rated construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and
other conditions where hose connections and stations are to
be installed.
 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.

PIPING APPLICATIONS

Do not use welded joints with galvanized steel pipe.

Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure
ratings the same as or higher than system's pressure rating
may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise
indicated.
Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use
galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends;
cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Use
galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends;
steel, grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved
joints.
Underground Service-Entrance Piping: RTRP (GRE) pipe and fittings.
Refer to Division 15, Section “Water Distribution Piping” for
pipes underground and upstream of backflow preventer
Standpipes: Use the following: DN100
and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with
threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and
threaded joints.
DN100 and Smaller: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
DN125 and DN150 : Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.
DN200 and Larger: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved
ends; steel, grooved- end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and
grooved joints.

VALVE APPLICATIONS

Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types

are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
Fire-Protection-Service Valves: UL listed and FM approved for applications
 where required by NFPA 14.
Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves.
General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FM-
approved valves are not required by NFPA 14.
Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.

JOINT CONSTRUCTION

Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and

Methods" for basic piping joint construction.
Steel-Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe. Assemble
joints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed
for dry-pipe service for dry piping.

SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

Connect standpipe piping to water-service piping of size and in

location indicated for service entrance to building. Refer to
Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for exterior piping.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and
other accessories indicated at connection to water-service
piping. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for
backflow preventers.

WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION

Connect standpipe piping to building interior water distribution

piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping"
for interior piping.
Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and
other accessories indicated at connection to water distribution
piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for
backflow preventers.

PIPING INSTALLATION
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for basic piping installation.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and
diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping.
Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written
approval from the Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. File
written approval with the Engineer before deviating from approved
working plans.
Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24
and with restrained joints.
Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs
from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.
Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN50 and smaller.
Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping
installations using grooved joints.
Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having DN65 and larger connections.
Install drain valves on standpipes.
Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department
connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside
building.
Install alarm devices in piping systems.
Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
Install according to NFPA 14.
Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to
protect from earthquake damage.
Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Construct rigid piping joints, unless
otherwise indicated.
Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test
connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure
gages with connection not less than DN8 and with soft metal
seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage
and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where
they will not be subject to freezing.
VALVE INSTALLATION

Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for installing general-duty

valves. Install fire-protection specialty valves, trim, fittings,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14,
manufacturer's written instructions, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
Gate Valves: Install fire-protection-service valves supervised-open,
located to control sources of water supply except from fire
department connections. Provide permanent identification
signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
Valves for Wall Fire Hydrants: Install gate valve with nonrising stem
in supply pipe.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow
preventers instead of check valves in potable-water supply
sources.
Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow,
in main supply to deluge system.

HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION

Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise

indicated.
Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum
passage restriction.
Install DN40 hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device,
unless otherwise indicated.
Install DN65 hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 to DN40
reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets. Include
pipe escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet
where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
angle required for connection of fire hose. Refer to Division 10
Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets.
HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION

Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage

restriction.
Install DN40 hose-station valves with flow-restricting device, unless
otherwise indicated.
Install DN65 hose connections with quick-disconnect DN65 by DN40
reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless otherwise
indicated.
Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached
to standpipe or substrate.
Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include
pipe escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet
where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at
angle required for connection of fire hose. Cabinets are
specified in Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection Specialties."
Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket attached to
substrate.

ROOF HOSE CABINET INSTALLATION

Install cabinets according to manufacturer's written instructions.

CONNECTIONS

Connect water-supply piping and standpipes to fire pumps. Include

backflow preventers.
Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department
connection. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire
department connections, and accessories.
Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe valve.
Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
Pressure gages and controls.
Electrical power system.
Fire alarm system devices, including low-pressure alarm.
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according

to requirements in NFPA 14 and in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Flush, test, and inspect standpipes according to NFPA 14, "Tests and
Inspection" Chapter.
Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures
and retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Report test results promptly and in writing to the Engineer and
authorities having jurisdiction.

COMMISSIONING

Verify that specialty valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories

are installed and operate correctly.
Verify that air compressors and their accessories are installed and
operate correctly.
Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
Verify that potable-water supplies have correct types of backflow
preventers.
Verify that hose connections and fire department connections have
threads compatible with local fire department equipment.
Drain dry-type standpipe piping.
Pressurize and check dry-pipe valve air-pressure maintenance
devices and air compressors.
Fill wet-pipe standpipe piping with water.
Verify that hose connections are correct type and size.
Verify that hose stations are correct type and size.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
Start and run air compressors.
Adjust operating controls and pressure settings.
 Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

DEMONSTRATION

Demonstrate equipment, specialties and accessories, and train the

Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain standpipes and hoses. Refer to Division 1 Section
"[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."